Rock Lee doesn’t want to be Hokage

“How come I, the last disciple of Kobayashi-ryu, ended up wearing this perverted tights with a kappa head!” Modern martial arts boy Lin Xiaoye opened his eyes and found that he had become Rock Lee in Naruto who couldn’t do ninjutsu.

When Sasuke showed off his skills with a huge fireball, he counterattacked with a set of Konoha whirlwinds; when Orochimaru attacked him, he said: “Villains, please have some martial ethics! I’ve only practiced the third gate!”

At the Chunin Exam, watching Neji trap Naruto with Kaiten, Lin Xiaoye, who was covered in bandages, suddenly curled his lips and said, “Genius of the Hyuga family, have you ever heard of blasting the laws of physics with a mortal body?” Blood-colored steam exploded, and the boy turned into a red meteor. Amid the screams of “Newton’s coffin is flying!” in the audience, he kicked out a shocking kick that made Six Paths Madara exclaim “This taijutsu is unscientific” – it turns out that shouting “Night Kai” when the eight gates are fully opened is not as exciting as shouting “Kameha”!

From then on, a new legend spread in the ninja world: the god of physical skills who broke the shackles of fate!

Rock Lee doesn’t want to be Hokage
Chapter 1: Traveling Through Rock Lee
“Hyuuga Neji, Tenten, Rock Lee, the three of you form a team.” The teacher’s command echoed throughout the classroom, followed by a burst of excited cheers. Tomorrow morning, the jonin instructor would lead them, which made many students, including Rock Lee, extremely excited.
“Now, I finally have the opportunity to study the Eight Gates. I really want to know what kind of power it can exert when combined with my Golden Bell Cover.” Rock Lee muttered to himself, with anticipation flashing in his eyes.
Rock Lee, a young man who was once a disciple of Shaolin in the 21st century, traveled to the world of Naruto, bringing with him his martial arts training and unique insights. He has always felt sorry for Kai’s failure, knowing that although the Eight Gates of Dunjia is powerful, it is extremely stressful on the body.
As soon as he got home, Rock Lee threw himself into a rigorous training session, quickly completing 500 push-ups, so fast that he only slowed down a bit until the last 100.
Next came a thousand kicks with each leg. The yard was filled with sandbags, and he targeted each one, setting them in motion. Facing hundreds of swaying sandbags, he had to simultaneously launch attacks and dodge counterattacks, a difficult task. Often, before he could even launch a strike, he was swayed by the impact of the bags.
Rock Lee, acutely aware of his own shortcomings, chose heavy sandbags filled with iron sand for rigorous training, honing his evasion and striking power. He understood his lack of talent in ninjutsu and genjutsu, so he dedicated all his energy to honing his taijutsu skills. Upon arriving in this world, he resolved not to pursue flashy techniques, but to cultivate his taijutsu skills to the pinnacle, believing this was his path to invincibility.
During training, the sandbags seemed to come alive, attacking from all directions. Rock Lee nimbly dodged the attack from the left, but was unable to avoid the heavy blow from behind.
“Huff, huff”—that was his heavy breathing, recording that he had completed 950 strikes, with only 50 left to reach his goal.
Taking a deep breath, Rock Lee charged once more at the sandbags. His left leg swiftly extended, and with a resounding thud, the bags swung violently. He bent sideways, deftly avoiding the impact of the other bags. Then, his right leg followed suit, thrusting out with a powerful thrust, causing the bags to sway even more violently. With a violent collision, Rock Lee was sent flying, the sounds of crashing and kicking echoing in unison.
“998,” “999,” “1000”—with the final count, Rock Lee finally relaxed. This kind of training was familiar to him; it was almost routine. His previous life training with the Shaolin Temple’s Golden Bell Guard had accustomed him to such intense challenges. Therefore, even a thousand strikes was no insurmountable obstacle for him.
Rock Lee endured the physical strain, resolutely sitting cross-legged at the perfect moment of practice, devoting himself to the cultivation of the Golden Bell Cover. This secret technique consists of twelve levels, and legend has it that only Bodhidharma achieved the pinnacle, achieving true indestructibility. In a world where gods and demons coexist and chakra is a magical power, Rock Lee firmly believed that he too could cultivate the Golden Bell Cover to perfection, combining it with the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu to become unstoppable.
As he silently chanted the incantation, a unique energy began to surge within him. Unlike other forms of true qi, this energy was specifically designed to nourish the body, gradually strengthening him. After completing a period of training, to replenish his energy, he headed for the dense forests behind the mountain in search of supplies. The forests here retained their pristine beauty, boasting a diverse array of animal life and abundant food resources. Rock Lee casually surveyed the area and spotted a young bison, roughly his own height.
The young bison was leisurely enjoying the grass when Rock Lee, seizing the perfect moment, launched a shuriken at the young bison’s weak spot. With a painful and angry roar, a flash of blood red flashed in the young bison’s eyes.
Rock Lee deftly dodged the buffalo’s charge and, harnessing the power of his chakra, delivered a powerful kick to its vitals. With a thud, the massive beast collapsed to the ground. He dragged his prize to the fourth training ground. As the sun set, he expertly prepared the buffalo, lighting a fire and roasting its hindquarters, preparing for a hearty dinner.
As time passed, the roasted beef leg took on an alluring golden color, the skin crispy, and Rock Lee sprinkled it with a secret seasoning, which was fragrant and mellow without being greasy. As he was enjoying his meal, a young man in yellow clothes and a three-pointed mustache – Uzumaki Naruto – approached curiously.
“What is that? It looks delicious.” Naruto couldn’t help but ask.
Rock Lee generously invited: “This is a roasted bison leg that I hunted myself. Would you like to try it?”
Naruto was a little surprised and excited: “Is it really possible?”
“Don’t be shy, let’s eat together. There’s still a lot of beef left, and I guarantee you’ll be full.” Rock Lee said enthusiastically.
Naruto was extremely grateful, “Thank you so much! You’re the first outsider to treat me to a meal. My name is Uzumaki Naruto, and I’m graduating from the Ninja Academy next year.”
“Nice to meet you, Uzumaki Naruto. My name is Rock Lee. I just graduated this year. Starting tomorrow we will have a teacher to guide us.” Rock Lee responded, and the two of them formed an indissoluble bond from then on.
“You have become an outstanding ninja, which is very admirable. But I firmly believe that I can also become a great ninja, even Hokage, and win the respect of the entire village.” Naruto declared confidently.
“Don’t forget, Naruto, you won’t gain the respect of the whole village until you become Hokage. You need to gain everyone’s recognition first, and then the position of Hokage will come naturally. You have lofty ambitions, you have to keep working hard.” Rock Lee reminded him seriously.
“Xiao Li, this barbecue tastes amazing, almost comparable to Ichiraku Ramen. It’s really delicious.”
Rock Lee laughed dumbly. This guy obviously didn’t listen to his words and turned to look at the almost eaten hind leg of the cow.
He then took out another hind leg of beef and several thick steaks and began to grill them carefully.
After this round, the meat that was originally enough to last for several days seemed to be gone by tomorrow. However, there were plenty of prey in the forest, so it was not worth worrying too much.
“Oh, Xiao Li, this barbecue is so tempting that I accidentally ate it all.”
Rock Lee shook his head secretly. This guy’s reaction was really slow.
“It’s okay. I promise to let you eat enough today. There’s still a lot of meat, so eat as much as you want. If you want to eat barbecue in the future, you’re welcome to do so as long as I’m in the village.” Rock Lee said generously.
“Great, Xiao Li, you are such a nice person! You mentioned that you have to do a lot of training every day. Can you tell me what kind of training it is?” Naruto asked curiously.
“Although I lack the talent for ninjutsu and genjutsu, I will achieve greatness through the path of taijutsu,” Rock Lee declared passionately. “Naruto, just watch! The name Rock Lee will illuminate the entire ninja world.”
“I also believe that the name Uzumaki Naruto will also be famous in the ninja world.”
“Then let’s work hard on our training.”
“Yeah, come on!”
After enjoying a hearty meal of barbecue, the two cleaned up the trash and went home.
“Hey, Neji, Tenten, you’re here.”
“Xiao Li, who do you think our new team leader will be? I can’t wait to find out.” Tiantian said with anticipation.
“It is said that the team is led by a Jonin himself, so he shouldn’t let us down.” Neji responded calmly.
Suddenly, a figure in green clothes, with a bowl-cut hair, thick eyebrows and big eyes appeared on the scene.
“I am Konoha’s blue beast, Might Guy! I will be your jonin leader sensei. Please introduce yourself.”
“My name is Tenten. I like sesame balls. My dream is to become a female ninja like Tsunade-sama.”
“Teacher, I’m Rock Lee. Everyone calls me Little Lee or Lee. Although I’m not good at ninjutsu and genjutsu, I firmly believe that through unremitting training in taijutsu, I will become an outstanding taijutsu ninja.”
“Lee, you said it well! This is what youth looks like. Let us work hard for our dreams. As your teacher, I will definitely help you achieve the great path of becoming a physical ninja.” Might Guy encouraged enthusiastically.
“Destiny cannot be changed. It was decided the moment you were born. All your efforts will be in vain, and you cannot escape the fate of being the last one in the class.” Neji stated calmly. Rock Lee caught a trace of sadness and indomitable spirit in his cold eyes.
“Then let us witness it together. Don’t always let fate be an excuse. Belief is more reliable than fate. I will prove to you that even the last-place person can turn things around,” Rock Lee retorted.
“you”
“Enough, stop arguing. We are companions, Neji, it’s your turn to introduce yourself.” Tenten put his arm around Neji and Rock Lee’s shoulders affectionately, easing the tense atmosphere.
“I am Hyuga Neji. I have no preferences and am hostile to everyone in the main family. I have no mentor left.”
Teacher Kai looked at the three students. Xiao Li’s enthusiasm and tenacity reminded him of himself, a seedling that could be cultivated.
Although Ningji is a member of the branch family, and because he lost his father at a young age, he holds a grudge and is hostile to the main family, he is talented and graduated as the top scholar.
Tiantian’s optimism became a reconciliation between them, effectively easing their conflicts.
“Today’s first class is survival training. I want to test your abilities. If you are not qualified, I may send you back to the Ninja School and force you to repeat a year before you can challenge graduation again,” Teacher Kai announced solemnly.
“I absolutely don’t want to go back to school. I’ll definitely be laughed at by everyone.” Tiantian expressed her anxiety loudly.
Neji remained silent, his confidence hidden deep within, but Rock Lee knew in his heart that the true test of a ninja lies in teamwork and unwavering will.
“Start attacking. If you don’t give it your all, you won’t be recognized by me, which means you’ll have to return to the Ninja School.” Teacher Kai instructed seriously.
At the command, the three men immediately dispersed. Rock Lee, relying on his hard-trained Golden Bell Guard, greatly increased his strength and hurled his shuriken with such speed that it seemed to cut through the air.
Teacher Gai saw the shuriken approaching quickly and dodged it with a flick of his wrist. As he turned sideways, Tenten took advantage of the situation and pulled out several kunai from his pocket, aiming and throwing them at Teacher Gai.
Gai deftly blocked the incoming kunai, and Neji quietly circled behind him, his hands condensing blue chakra, ready to attack Gai’s defense. But Gai flashed in front of Neji with incredible speed and counterattacked.
Neji quickly raised his arm to block the blow, while using his other hand to press against Gai’s vital points, employing the Hyuga family’s soft fist technique to try to cut off the flow of chakra. A hit could cause internal damage.
However, Sensei Gai grabbed Neji’s attacking hand and threw him without hesitation.
In the fierce battle, Rock Lee continuously launched shurikens at Kai, his movements agile and his figure as fast as the wind. He quickly changed positions after each attack, leaving no opportunity for the opponent to take advantage. Tenten followed closely behind like a shadow, throwing her kunai from hidden angles, forming a series of offensives.
This time, however, Gai had accurately spotted Tenten’s hiding spot and was poised to strike first. Seeing this, Rock Lee immediately abandoned his harassment tactics and confronted the enemy head-on. He charged at Gai, unleashing a swift whip kick that pierced the air. Gai easily blocked it with one hand, but Rock Lee, instead of retreating, advanced, following up with a flurry of whirlwind kicks.
“Attack!”
Following Rock Lee’s shout, Tenten immediately retreated, continuing to exploit her ranged advantage, while Neji picked himself up from the ground. Although a little dizzy, his injuries were not serious. He gathered his spirits and rushed to the battlefield again, forming a pincer attack with Rock Lee.
Neji activated his Byakugan and unleashed a soft fist from behind, striking Gai’s various acupuncture points with precision. Rock Lee engaged Gai in a fierce battle in front of him, while Tenten intervened from a distance.
Although Rock Lee clearly felt that Gai’s strength far exceeded his own, the tacit cooperation between him, Neji, and Tenten enabled them to temporarily withstand Gai’s attack. In this duel, Rock Lee used the whip kick he had practiced for a long time, and the speed was so fast that Gai had to take it seriously and stretched out his hand to block it.
Feilu novels, Feilu will make you look good!
Automatically subscribe to the latest chapter
APP audiobook (free)
Premium audio, popular voice actors, offline listening
ActivityRegister as a Filo member and receive 200 points![Register Now]Chapter 2 Training Begins (Old Version)
Rock Lee gathered the unconscious Neji and Tenten together and gently sprayed their faces with a water bottle.
“Ah, you’re awake now,” he said with a smile, and sure enough, the two of them slowly regained consciousness.
“What happened?” Neji asked dazedly, rubbing his temple.
“Teacher Kai accidentally let you take a break. Wake up! He said he would treat us to barbecue.” Rock Lee explained excitedly.
“Xiao Li, why is there so much water on my face? Did I fall into the river?” Tiantian touched his face in confusion.
“Don’t worry about these trivial matters. Let’s go. The teacher is treating us. We can’t miss it.” Rock Lee urged.
“Yes, now that you’re awake, to celebrate the establishment of our group and our youth, I’ll treat you to a barbecue!” Teacher Kai announced passionately.
The three of them smiled at each other helplessly. Teacher Kai was always so enthusiastic, which made them both moved and embarrassed.
In Konoha’s famous barbecue restaurant, the other three had already eaten and drunk their fill, but Rock Lee was the only one who was still feasting. The pile of plates testified to his appetite. After all, the barbecue here was more delicious and cut more delicately than the one he grilled himself.
After the meal, Teacher Kai reminded: “Go back and rest first. You will have tasks starting tomorrow. Remember, I will personally guide your training. Work hard, young men.”
As soon as he got home, Rock Lee immediately started warm-up training and completed 500 push-ups with ease. He even felt that it was time to increase the difficulty of the training.
What followed was the training of a thousand kicks. Rock Lee was like a tiger descending from the mountain, shuttling between the sandbags, swinging his feet rapidly, and hitting out bursts of powerful “bang bang” sounds.
Occasionally, when he was not paying attention, the recoil of the sandbag left him covered in bruises, while Naruto was standing quietly at the door of the training room, witnessing these hard-working scenes, and was deeply moved.
Rock Lee caught a glimpse of Naruto and, after a brief greeting, he returned to his training. After completing a thousand kicks, he sat in meditation, regulating his breathing, feeling the energy from the Golden Bell Guard training coursing through his body, significantly increasing his strength, endurance, and stamina.
“Naruto, you’re here at the right time. You haven’t had dinner yet, right? Let’s go to the back mountain together and hunt a wild beast to fill our stomachs.” Rock Lee said as he wiped the sweat from his forehead.
“Do you exercise like this every day?” Naruto asked curiously.
“That’s right. I don’t have extraordinary talent and can only rely on unremitting efforts. I believe that diligence can make up for lack of talent. Putting in ten or a hundred times more effort than ordinary people will eventually make me stronger.” Rock Lee answered firmly.
“I firmly believe, Xiao Li, if you work so hard, you will become an outstanding ninja in the future.” Naruto encouraged with a firm look in his eyes.
In the Hokage’s office, the Third Hokage gazed fondly at the image in the crystal ball, his heart filled with emotion: “This group of students is really good. Diligence can make up for lack of talent. It’s very well said. I hope you can become the pillars of Konoha Village.”
“Let’s go. We tried the barbecue made by our team leader, the Jonin teacher, at noon today. I got some inspiration from it. I believe we can make even better food tonight.” Rock Lee expressed his thoughts firmly.
“That sounds amazing, I can’t wait to try it.” Naruto’s eyes sparkled with anticipation.
They arrived at the back mountain and soon found a huge wild boar, two meters tall. “We decided it was this one.”
“It’s okay for the two of us to deal with it, right?” Naruto asked nervously.
“Do you know why humans are called humans and not like other beasts?” Rock Lee asked back.
“Why?”
Rock Lee tapped his head. “Because humans know how to use wisdom to do the most with the least effort. But beasts only know brute force. We will set a trap first, and then I will lure it in.”
“Understood!”
The two men moved quickly, using the power of chakra to quickly dig a four-meter square trap, the bottom of which was covered with sharp branches and spears. They carefully covered the top with a layer of branches and sprinkled soil, and the trap was complete.
“Naruto, you will be in charge of observing from a distance while I go and lure out the wild boar.”
“Be careful.” Naruto warned.
Rock Lee quickly found his target, aimed at the wild boar’s tail, and fired a shuriken. “Swoosh!” The wild boar was instantly enraged, turned around and glared at Rock Lee, rushing towards him frantically.
Rock Lee watched Naruto leave, offering words of encouragement: “My child, you will meet many friends you can trust with your life and death. Don’t be overly concerned with what others see. Be yourself and strive tirelessly towards your dreams.” With that, he turned and devoted himself to his chakra training. In this world of Naruto, chakra is the source of power. Although his chakra supply is limited and difficult to control, he persisted in refining it.
Murmuring the Golden Bell Cover’s mental method, Rock Lee felt a weak surge of energy slowly surge through his body as he ran. Although this energy was not as strong as that from meditation, it still brought a little nourishment to the body.
Under the influence of this energy, his muscles and bones gradually grew denser and stronger. Heavy breathing echoed in the silence. Although the energy of the Golden Bell was nourishing his body, fatigue was unavoidable. He gritted his teeth, determined to hold on to his belief—to reach the pinnacle of the ninja world, rather than become an unknown passerby.
After completing his five-lap run, Rock Lee returned home and immediately sat down to practice his Golden Bell Guard. This martial art consists of twelve levels, and he had already mastered the first and was about to break through to the second. He calmly sensed the energy within his body, carefully directing and controlling it. As the Golden Bell Guard’s energy continued to accumulate, his body underwent significant changes.
After the impurities in his body were purified, the practitioner stood up with a series of explosive noises, signaling his successful breakthrough to the second level of the Golden Bell, taking another solid step toward peak power. The Golden Bell consists of twelve levels, with each three levels forming a major stage. Initial training focused primarily on the skin, flesh, tendons, and bones. Now that he had reached the second level, he was one step closer to the invincible realm.
After a quick meal of leftover wild boar meat from the previous night, he headed to the second training ground, where he’d agreed to meet up with his companions, Tenten, Neji, and Gai. Soon, the three of them arrived. Gai decided to start by teaching them the most basic ninja skills: tree climbing.
Standing before a towering tree, Gai nimbly climbed up the trunk and landed firmly on a handstand between the branches. Tenten’s eyes widened, clearly witnessing such a scene for the first time; Neji, on the other hand, seemed accustomed to it, perhaps this kind of training was commonplace in his large family. As for Rock Lee, thanks to his experience watching television in his previous life, he wasn’t surprised.
“Gather the chakra at the soles of your feet. Don’t use excessive force. Just walk as you normally would and ascend slowly. This is not only tree climbing, but also an exercise in chakra control,” Kai explained to them.
Neji climbed the tree with ease, his movements smooth and steady. Rock Lee thought, as a genius from a distinguished family, he must have already mastered this basic skill.
“Teacher, I have mastered the technique of climbing trees. Can we move on to the next training?” Neji asked expressionlessly.
Rock Lee’s eyes were fixed on Neji, secretly wishing to compete with him with his feet. However, he found it quite difficult to concentrate the chakra under his feet, as the naughty chakra was always difficult to tame.
While trying to climb the tree trunk, Rock Lee fell down awkwardly after taking the second step, but he kept trying again.
Compared to his struggle, Tiantian seemed to be at ease. After a few attempts, she could walk easily among the treetops. The woman’s delicate control was obviously better.
“Li, there are bound to be setbacks on the road of youth. Keep working hard, young man. I will take Neji and Tenten to carry out the mission now.” After leaving some words of encouragement, Teacher Kai led the other two away.
The morning passed in a flash, accompanied by the sound of “bang bang bang” again and again, that was Rock Lee’s figure falling deliberately.
Following the principle of “breaking before building”, he always had to endure a blow before practicing the Golden Bell Cover, climb a tree for an hour, and then focus on practicing the Golden Bell Cover. Although his tree-climbing skills did not improve significantly, the progress of the Golden Bell Cover was obvious.
At noon, when Neji and Tenten returned, they found that Rock Lee was still struggling with the tree. He would fall down with a loud “bang” every time he took less than five steps.
Looking at this scene, Neji and Tenten looked helpless, especially Neji, whose face was full of contempt.
“Ningji, don’t look at me like that. Don’t think you’re great just because you can climb a tree. One day I will surpass you.” Rock Lee shouted unyieldingly.
“Hmph, the last one.”
“Then let’s witness the strength of the ‘tail end’ today. Do you dare to accept the challenge? Teacher, please be the referee.” Rock Lee challenged.
“Youth is burning passion. Looking back, we grew together in the contest between Kakashi and I, which made me the strength I have today. In some aspects, I even surpassed Kakashi.” There was a passion glint in Kai’s eyes.
“Come on, Rock Lee, let me see your strength.”
“Fighting and killing are so boring. If we want to compete, let’s have a barbecue and see who enjoys it more. The loser will treat us.” Rock Lee suggested.
After hearing this, Ningji’s face darkened and he turned away angrily, leaving behind words “How shameless”.
Rock Lee laughed heartily, as if he had defeated a powerful enemy.
Tiantian shook his head helplessly, while Kai looked a little embarrassed, with the corners of his mouth twitching slightly.
“You guys should go back first, don’t forget to gather tomorrow.”
“Teacher, I want to continue training here, you guys should go back first.”
“Then be careful, Rock Lee.” Tenten’s tone revealed concern.
“It’s okay, Tiantian. I’ve been learning hard work since I was a kid. This little injury is nothing. Youth is about striving, otherwise it will all be wasted.” Rock Lee answered firmly.
“Yes, this is youth! Xiao Li, I plan to run around the village five times while standing upside down. Join me!” Kai’s enthusiasm infected every molecule in the air.
Rock Lee and Tenten widened their eyes in shock. “Teacher, I still have to practice climbing trees today. Maybe next time.”
“Okay, then I’ll start first.” As soon as he finished speaking, Kai left upside down at an astonishing speed, leaving Rock Lee and Tenten standing there watching his back.
“Tiantian, you should go back first. I want to strengthen my training here alone.”
“Okay, then be careful.”
Rock Lee once again devoted himself to his solitary tree-climbing training. Frequent falls failed to shake his resolve. He gritted his teeth each time, stood up, and continued climbing. The pain in his body was accompanied by the rapid progress of his Golden Bell Guard, and his progress was more significant than ever before.
Occasionally, he would fantasize that in the future he might need to jump off a higher cliff in order to pursue faster progress, but the thought of this made his heart tremble involuntarily.
As night fell, Rock Lee returned home and found Naruto was not there. He guessed that Naruto might have been invited by Teacher Iruka to enjoy ramen. Rock Lee did not have too many expectations for Naruto, but just hoped that this friend who had an unfortunate childhood could live a better life.
When they returned to their residence, Tenten greeted them warmly, but Neji, still brooding over what happened before, ignored him. Soon, Teacher Gai appeared and led them in new training.
“Today’s training is treading water. As a ninja, it is crucial to master the skills of fighting on the water. What you need to learn is how to stand on the water.” Teacher Kai announced.
The four of them came to the stream. Teacher Gai demonstrated by walking on the water, and Rock Lee threw a stone to test it. The water rippled, but Teacher Gai walked on flat ground. Rock Lee was amazed at the wonders of the ninjutsu in this world.
Three things to do when reading: read, collect, and reward!
Chapter 3: Lotus Flower (Old Version)
Rock Lee chose a towering tree near a stream and practiced climbing techniques there day and night, while also tirelessly practicing the Golden Bell Cover.
The constant banging noises around them annoyed Neji and Tenten until the afternoon of the next day, when Rock Lee finally let out a cheer.
“Teacher Kai, I have successfully mastered the tree climbing skills!” Rock Lee excitedly ran towards the three people who were busy weeding and reported to Kai.
“Very good, you have completed the basic training. Next is treading water practice. You can do it alone. I will take the two of them to carry out the mission.” Teacher Kai instructed.
The reason why it took three days was not only because of his lack of talent, but more importantly, it was due to his persistence in the Golden Bell Cover. Now that he had a preliminary understanding of the control of chakra, he firmly believed that in the near future he would be able to walk on the water with ease.
He walked to the stream, concentrated his chakra on the soles of his feet, and slowly stepped onto the water, feeling the flow of the water and remembering the response of the chakra.
The second step he took stepped steadily onto the water. He closed his eyes and concentrated on the subtle changes under his feet. He went with the flow and gradually felt like he was walking on flat ground.
Suddenly, Neji dropped a pebble into the water, shattering the stillness. Rock Lee, eyes still closed, stood steady on the surface, adjusting his chakra as the waves shifted. He realized, with surprise, that his chakra control had reached a new level.
Rock Lee opened his eyes and saw the figures of his companions.
“Great, Xiao Li, the speed at which you mastered treading water is really unexpected, and your progress is amazing.” Tiantian congratulated him sincerely.
“Now, you are finally no longer the weak link among us.” Neji also gave his approval.
“Very good, Xiao Li, you finally caught up. Once you find the essence of the technique, these small skills are actually interconnected. Starting tomorrow, we will enter formal training.” Teacher Kai announced.
“As a jonin renowned for my taijutsu, my signature skills are the Iron Fist and the Eight Gates Ninjutsu. I also possess some knowledge of summoning techniques. First, let me briefly explain the Eight Gates Ninjutsu. The human body contains eight gates that restrict the release of power. Opening each gate multiplies power.
However, the Eight Gates of Dunjia places great strain on the body, especially the last few, and even the slightest mistake can lead to disability or even death. Therefore, a strong physique is a prerequisite for practicing the Eight Gates of Dunjia.
“From now on, we will conduct comprehensive physical training, with the goal of building an indestructible body. Come on, my dear disciples, let our passion burn!” Teacher Kai said, showing his thumbs up, and his shining smile made the three young ninjas shudder.
“First, do 500 push-ups to warm up. Let’s start.” Teacher Kai ordered.
“Teacher, I’m a girl and I don’t want to become a muscular woman. One hundred push-ups should be enough for me, right? Besides, I specialize in hidden weapons and I’m really not interested in the Eight Gates.” Tiantian tried to discuss with softness to overcome hardness.
“Oh, I made a mistake. I actually overlooked the female students in the team. Well, Rock Lee and Neji, you two should start doing 500 push-ups as a warm-up. Tenten, you just need to do 100.” Teacher Kai instructed.
Tiantian felt extremely helpless. As the only girl in the team, she began to worry about her future training career.
Rock Lee followed the order and moved. For him, 500 push-ups were just a piece of cake, so easy that he hardly felt tired. Neji, although he also completed it successfully, looked a little tired.
Soon, the two completed their mission. Rock Lee remained calm, while Neji was panting heavily. Rock Lee gave Neji a scornful look, as if mocking him: “So-called genius, that’s all.” This made Neji even more breathless.
“As for the Gentle Fist,” Gai continued, “I’m not very familiar with it, but I understand the importance of Taijutsu: physical strength and combat experience. Neji, I’ll prepare a humanoid target for you to sharpen your combat skills. You can then spar with your teammates.”
Tiantian, you are quite talented in using hidden weapons. You can try to learn psychic arts and seal a large number of hidden weapons in psychic scrolls.
As for Rock Lee, you will learn the Iron Fist and the Eight Gates from me. First, I’ll teach you the principles. You must also maintain your daily training and constantly strengthen your body, as it’s the foundation of the Eight Gates. “You don’t need to hit a human target. Start now, with me, kick left and right a thousand times, and punch left and right a thousand times.”
Rock Lee’s eyes were as sharp as a knife. He locked onto the slender wooden stake, swung his right leg like an iron rod, and with a powerful whip kick, he directly broke the stake into two pieces.
He turned to Teacher Kai and shrugged jokingly, saying, “Teacher, it seems I can only attack the big tree. The wooden stake can’t withstand my strength.”
There was a glint of surprise in Teacher Gai’s eyes. He didn’t expect Rock Lee to be so powerful. When Neji saw this, he secretly made up his mind that he must not slack off in his training.
Ningji intensified his practice, and his Baguazhang repeatedly hit the human-shaped target, making a loud noise. At the same time, Tiantian was also studying the techniques of using various hidden weapons.
Rock Lee stood in front of a sturdy tree, his legs turning into a torrential rain, swinging repeatedly, each time like a hammer hitting a drum, with a huge momentum, his perseverance seemed endless.
With his hands bandaged, he punched like rain. Although the pain spread to every nerve, he persisted, keeping in mind: without hard work, there will be no fruitful results.
Rock Lee knew very well that he could never be content with being ordinary in this life. He kept challenging his physical limits, and every breath he took seemed heavy and powerful.
While practicing and sweating profusely, he silently recited the Golden Bell Cover mantra, and a new strength gradually surged in his body. This strength nourished his limbs and relieved the pain, especially the hands that kept punching. Every blow relieved the pain, and his belief became stronger.
Rock Lee devoted himself to the practice of the Golden Bell Guard day after day, without distraction. He punched a thousand times daily, feeling the power gathering within him with his whole being. Month after month, his progress was astonishing. Not only did he successfully unlock the first gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, the Opening Gate, but he also mastered numerous taijutsu techniques.
Under the strict guidance of Teacher Kai, they faced their first true test: an eradication of a bandit group a hundred miles away. “Today’s battle is a test of your combat prowess,” Teacher Kai declared solemnly. “Bandits are ruthless and merciless. To show mercy to the enemy is to be cruel to yourself. Our target is those bandits a hundred miles away. Move!” With that, Teacher Kai led the charge, followed closely by Rock Lee and the rest of the team, darting through the forest like arrows.
After a month of diligent training, a hundred-mile dash was a piece of cake for them. Rock Lee had even integrated training into every aspect of his life, significantly improving his Golden Bell Guard’s second level and not far from the third.
After a three-hour forced march, they reached the barren mountain where the bandits were hiding. The mountain looked unremarkable, suggesting the bandits’ strength must be limited. Rock Lee prepared to unleash his diligently practiced Golden Bell Defense to its full potential in this actual battle.
“It’s time to prove your strength. Young people should be full of passion on the battlefield and charge forward! I’m here to cheer for you.” Teacher Kai showed his conspicuous big teeth and raised his thumb.
“Tenten, you are responsible for the secret support. Neji and I will face the enemy head-on. Let’s go!” As soon as the words fell, the figures of the three people disappeared on the spot like phantoms, and only a few quickly jumping black shadows were seen heading towards the top of the mountain.
After reaching the top of the mountain, Rock Lee tightly grasped the two kunai in his hands. They were soon discovered among the surrounding buildings. It seemed that there were only more than twenty enemies.
“Who are you? How dare you trespass into our territory? Do you know who we are?” a bandit asked loudly.
As he shouted, the bandits rushed out.
“action!”
Rock Lee rushed towards the enemy without hesitation, but Tenten was faster. With a flick of his wrist, the hidden weapons in the scroll flew towards the enemy like a rainstorm. Then he shook the scroll again, and the number of bandits was reduced by half.
At this time, Neji had just begun to act. Rock Lee used kunai to accurately attack the vital points, and occasionally added powerful whip kicks. All the bandits who were hit were either killed or injured.
Neji ended the battle with just one move of Bagua Kong Zhang. Rock Lee gently shook off the blood on the kunai and put it back to his waist.
The three of them thoroughly checked all the rooms to make sure that no bandits were missed, and then went down the mountain.
“Are there any masters among these bandits?” asked Teacher Kai.
“Teacher, my hidden weapon skills are amazing. I took care of half of the enemies in one go. It took the two of them combined to tie with me.” Tiantian answered proudly.
“Tiantian, you are indeed our pride.” Teacher Kai praised and raised his thumbs up.
“After completing this mission, I will give you two days of free time, but remember, you can’t fall behind in training.”
“I understand, teacher.”
Rock Lee’s top priority is to break through the Golden Bell to the third level and successfully open the Rest Gate and the Life Gate.
After returning to Konoha, Teacher Gai went to submit the mission report, while Rock Lee, Neji, and Tenten returned home. That night, Rock Lee took Naruto to their favorite Ichiraku Ramen, and he paid the bill.
Every morning, he would undergo rigorous physical training: punching a sandbag, sprinting around Konoha Village, jumping rope, and squatting, each for 2,000 times. Only then would he begin practicing the Golden Bell Cover.
He continued with regular training in the afternoon, and in the evening he would decide whether to do extra training depending on the situation. He knew that as his strength improved, his opponents would become stronger and stronger, and only by going all out now could he achieve something in the future.
He hasn’t set any ambitious goals at the moment, he just hopes to defeat Gaara in the Chunin Exam a year from now.
Neji and Tenten were always worried that Rock Lee would overwork himself, but not only did nothing happen to him, he became increasingly powerful.
In the blink of an eye, six months had passed. Rock Lee had already mastered the Golden Bell Guard to the third level and the fifth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu. He only needed one more gate to master one of Mr. Gai’s ultimate moves—Peacock.
“Today, I will teach you a new skill – Lotus Flower. This is a forbidden technique of Konoha, which has extremely high physical requirements. Everyone, please watch carefully.” Teacher Kai said seriously.
“Ready, set, go!”
“Next, I will show you the secret of Li Lianhua. This move requires the opening of at least three gates – Kaimen, Xiumen, and Shengmen, none of which can be missing. Among the three of you, only Xiao Li has the potential to practice this technique. But remember, Li Lianhua puts a huge strain on the body, so don’t use it lightly unless necessary.” Teacher Kai explained seriously.
“Look, this is the opening of the door to life!” As soon as the words fell, blue chakra flow emerged from Teacher Kai’s body, and the powerful aura made people feel awe.
With a swish, his figure vanished like a phantom, and with a bang, the wooden stake was launched into the air. He vanished again, reappearing atop the stake, and with another kick, he knocked it down. Despite this continuous barrage, the stake never touched the ground, ultimately scattering under the repeated blows.
The three students were dumbfounded, especially Rock Lee, who felt that the real demonstration was far more shocking than the depiction in the comics.
Due to the physical limitations of Neji and Tenten, they are unable to practice the Eight Gates, so only Rock Lee can learn the techniques of Renge under the personal guidance of Teacher Gai.
While Neji and Tenten were sparring with each other, Teacher Gai meticulously taught Rock Lee every detail and connection point of Li Lianhua.
“Teacher, I plan to invite everyone to my house for a barbecue tonight. I plan to go to the back mountain to capture a bison to celebrate our rapid progress in the past six months.” Rock Lee suggested.
“Xiao Li, the road of a ninja is long and arduous, and you must never be proud or complacent. You must remember that there is always someone better than you.” Teacher Kai warned.
“Teacher, let’s consider this as a celebration of our youth. Please agree to my request.” Rock Lee insisted.
Chapter 4 Sound Ninja (Old Version)
Rock Lee handled a bison with great skill. His movements were smooth and concise. He drained the blood, peeled off the skin, removed the internal organs, and removed the head. In a short while, the bison was cleaned up.
“Everyone, follow me, I will show you my barbecue skills.” Rock Lee said confidently, carrying the bison on his shoulders.
They sat together, enjoying the delicious food grilled by Rock Lee and chatting about all sorts of things while eating.
“Teacher Gai, are the advanced moves in the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu difficult to master?” Rock Lee humbly asked Teacher Gai for advice.
“The techniques of the Eight Gates of Dunjia are not complicated to learn. The real difficulty lies in how to improve the body’s functions, unlock the ‘gates’ that bind the body, and release the body’s potential.”
“The most crucial thing is your physical strength. If you’re not strong enough, forcing the ‘door’ open can lead to serious consequences, or even death. As for the technique, it’s relatively simple. Once you open a certain number of ‘doors’, you’ll naturally master it.”
Teacher Gai pulled a scroll from his chest and handed it to Rock Lee. “This scroll contains every technique in the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, including the Eighth Gate, which I have never opened. I hope you never have to use it, because opening the Eighth Gate often means a life-or-death battle, practically tantamount to total destruction, with little chance of survival. Unless it’s a matter of life and death, don’t attempt it lightly.”
Rock Lee unfolded the scroll, which contained detailed descriptions of moves such as Morning Peacock, Daytime Tiger, Evening Elephant, and Night Kai. He memorized them carefully. Although the moves looked simple, in order to unleash their power, he had to first reach a certain level of opening the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, otherwise these moves would be nothing but castles in the air.
“Teacher Kai, should we also try to take part in the Chunin Exam?” Tenten asked the question first.
“That’s right, you already have the strength of a Chunin, but you still need to improve your intelligence gathering, team organization and leadership abilities. Chunin means being able to serve as a team leader, and you must strengthen yourself in all aspects.” Teacher Kai gave a definite answer.
Rock Lee knew in his heart that Orochimaru was hiding in the Sound Village, but he thought that this mission was only to deliver information, and with Teacher Gai by his side, Orochimaru was nothing to be afraid of.
The four of them continued to practice along the way and moved forward steadily. After all, there was still half a year before the Chunin Exam.
Crossing the border between the Land of Rice and the Land of Fire, they arrived at the Valley of the End, where stood giant statues of the First Hokage and Uchiha Madara, causing them to stop.
“Teacher, who is the other person in this statue?” Tiantian asked curiously.
“That’s Uchiha Madara. He’s the only strong man who can fight alongside the First Hokage. He once made other villages feel tremendous pressure.” Teacher Kai explained.
Rock Lee knew in his heart that Uchiha Madara would be resurrected in the future, but he also believed that the future was unpredictable, and his heart was filled with passion.
“How about we rest here for a day and continue our journey tomorrow?” Rock Lee suggested.
Teacher Kai observed the weather and finally agreed with his suggestion.
“Coach, I’m going for a swim.” Before he could finish his words, Rock Lee leaped from the edge of the cliff, diving directly into the bottomless abyss. With a loud bang, he felt as if every organ in his body had been impacted, and a burning pain spread across his skin.
Rock Lee swam hard to shore, immediately sat down to meditate, and began to practice the Golden Bell Cover technique. He had chosen this location precisely to achieve a breakthrough to the fourth level of the Golden Bell Cover. The first three levels formed the foundation, while the fourth level marked the threshold to the middle stage of the Golden Bell Cover. The middle stage consisted of levels four to six, the late stage comprised levels seven to nine, and levels ten to twelfth represented the pinnacle of the Golden Bell Cover, a realm said to even surpass that of Bodhidharma.
He intended to use the terrain here to advance his Golden Bell Guard. The pain from the water attack was indeed transformed into energy, strengthening his muscles, bones, skin, and flesh, and even beginning to penetrate into his internal organs.
Neji and Tenten, standing above, looked stunned. Tenten couldn’t help but ask loudly, “Rock Lee, are you okay? Are you okay?” Rock Lee replied calmly, “Don’t worry, I feel great! I’ll be right back up.” He leaped lightly from the rocks at the edge of the cliff and was back in front of them in a flash.
“The water down there is really cool. Do you want to join us for a bath?” Rock Lee invited enthusiastically. Tenten backed off, saying, “Forget it. I don’t dare jump.” Neji, however, seemed completely uninterested and ignored him.
Rock Lee bravely leaped down once more, his back hitting the ground with a muffled thud that left him speechless for a moment. He hurried back to shore and activated his Golden Bell Cover once more. The more he practiced this Golden Bell Cover, the more unassuming it became, making it difficult to discern its hidden power. To others, Rock Lee might have been just an ordinary Genin, at best a master of physical skills.
But Rock Lee knew in his heart that the power and potential stored within him was astonishing. He continued to perform painful leaps until Gai and his companions began to look at him with strange eyes, as if he were a mad cultivator. However, he was reckless, because he felt the limit of the third realm and only needed an opportunity to break through.
He leaped down again, closing his eyes and focusing on the sixth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu—the Jingmen. Instantly, a storm of blue chakra erupted within him. As the Golden Bell Cover operated, energy surged, transforming his constitution. This energy penetrated deeply into his internal organs, toughening his skin and strengthening and tightening his bones and muscles.
Finally, the Golden Bell and Eight Gates of Ninjutsu broke through simultaneously. Rock Lee then withdrew the power of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, and the chakra storm on his body slowly dissipated. After opening the sixth gate, he did not feel the slightest bit of fatigue.
He calmly walked towards Teacher Kai and reported his breakthrough: “Teacher, I have opened the sixth door. I feel good.”
“Xiao Li, as my disciple, you should be fearless of youth and move forward bravely. But every time you use the Eight Gates, remember to act with caution.” Teacher Kai warned affectionately.
“Understood.”
The scale of Sound Village is small and the population is limited. It is actually a secret base for Orochimaru to conduct various experiments. After arriving at Sound Village, they soon encountered patrolling guards.
“What brings you here?”
“We are from Konoha and have come to deliver a letter to the leader of Otogakure.” Teacher Kai replied.
“Wait here, I will go inform the leader.” The Sound Ninja said briefly and left quickly.
“Teacher Kai, how much do you know about the Sound Ninja’s fighting style?” Rock Lee asked curiously.
“The Sound Village was established not long ago, and I haven’t fought against its ninjas yet, but I heard that they are good at using sound waves to defeat the enemy, and this fighting method is hard to defend against. You must be careful when you meet them in the future, especially you, Rock Lee. Neji has the Byakugan that can see through sound waves, and Tenten is good at long-range attacks. As a close combat ninja, you are more vulnerable.”
“I’ll be careful.”
Soon, the Sound-nin returned and informed them that their leader was busy and unable to receive them personally. “Please give me the scroll, and I’ll deliver it. Orochimaru may be plotting against the Fourth Kazekage and may already be taking action in the Land of Wind. Teacher Gai, please rest assured that I will pass on this invitation to the Chunin Exams to the leader.” Teacher Gai then handed the scroll to the Sound-nin and added, “Konoha will hold the Chunin Exams in six months. The specific date is marked on the scroll. I look forward to your attendance.”
“Let’s set off and head to the rainy village – Amegakure.” The group first headed towards the Land of Fire, and then turned to the Land of Rain surrounded by the three major countries.
No one knows for sure whether the Rain Village has now fallen into Pain’s control, and Hanzo’s life and death is also a mystery.
This country is trapped in continuous wars. The villagers are exhausted by the constant conflicts and there are orphans everywhere. Some people say that the incessant rain is the tears of sorrow for this country.
When they approached the Rain Village, they were stopped by a group of ninjas. “Everyone from Konoha, what is the purpose of visiting this place?”
“We will be holding the Chunin Exams in six months, and I hope to personally deliver the invitation to your village leader.”
“The leader is busy, just leave it to me and I will pass it on.” Kai handed the invitation letter to the other party helplessly.
After walking for a while, Tenten grumbled in dissatisfaction: “Are the leaders of these small villages really so busy? They won’t even see us. I think Hokage-sama has more free time than them.”
Otogakure was founded by Orochimaru, whose whereabouts are unpredictable, so naturally he would not receive them. As for Amegakure, if Hanzo still exists, it is likely that its fate is hanging by a thread.
Mission accomplished, they leisurely set out on their journey home, enjoying the tranquility of the journey.
“Teacher, after passing the Chunin Exam, do we have to form independent teams to carry out missions?” Rock Lee asked curiously.
“Indeed, before long, you will no longer be newbies, and you may even be promoted to Chunin, leading a task force independently. This is growth, and it is always accompanied by separation.” Teacher Kai told the students affectionately.
“Ningji, let’s have a contest to test the results of your training over the past six months?” Rock Lee challenged.
“That’s exactly what I want. I also want to see what changes your hard training day and night has brought.” Neji responded confidently.
Rock Lee stared at Neji with a firm gaze, knowing that the essence of the soft fist lies in acupressure and attacking the meridians. His internal organs and meridians are much tougher than those of ordinary people, enough to withstand Neji’s attack.
Rock Lee unleashed his “Konoha Great Cyclone” technique, launching a fierce kick at Neji at such incredible speed that the force of the wind blew against him before the attack even reached him. Neji immediately activated his Byakugan, tensing his muscles as he attempted to tap the meridians in Rock Lee’s leg. However, Rock Lee flipped over, switching tactics in an instant, forcing Neji to retreat rapidly.
Neji’s expression became serious. He didn’t expect that the former poor student had grown to this point.
“You are worthy of the reputation as the best of this session,” Rock Lee’s speed increased again. He was like a Hot Wheels, using the “Konoha Tornado” and “Konoha Great Tornado” in succession, not giving Neji any chance to perform his soft fist. He kept changing his moves during the attack, flexibly and freely.
In a fierce duel, Neji was steadily losing ground against Rock Lee’s offensive. Even using his signature move, Turn the Tide, he was unable to reverse the disadvantage. Rock Lee, with his unwavering willpower and diligent training, finally defeated Neji with a powerful, devastating Whip Kick. He emphasized that fate is not an insurmountable chasm; with tremendous effort, even a genius can be surpassed. Sensei Gai also encouraged Neji to strive even harder. Neji began to reflect deeply, realizing that in just six months, Rock Lee had surpassed him without even exerting his full strength.
The rewritten novel is as follows:
A sudden Konoha whirlwind suddenly transformed into Shadow Dance Leaf, making Neji embarrassed and feeling pressured.
Although Neji defended himself repeatedly, he was still unable to resist. Even when he used the ultimate move, Rock Lee remained calm and patiently dealt with him. As the rounds went on, Neji was already sweating profusely.
Rock Lee suddenly accelerated and sent Neji flying with a powerful whip kick.
“You lost this battle. Remember, nothing is set in stone. Like me, I’m not good at ninjutsu or genjutsu, so I can only rely on unremitting physical training. When I put in more effort than ordinary people, I will not be inferior to anyone else.
“Genius may be innate, but it can also be achieved through hard work. You are naturally gifted, but I can only approach your level through diligent training day and night. Don’t trust fate. With passion and perseverance, success will eventually come.” Rock Lee said to Neji with a firm gaze.
“Youth is synonymous with passion. Lee is right. If you want to surpass others, you must work harder. Neji, it’s time for you to work harder.” Teacher Gai encouraged enthusiastically.
Neji fell into deep thought. That once insignificant boy had surpassed him in just six months. He knew Rock Lee wasn’t giving it his all, and hadn’t even activated the Eight Gates. Through this duel, Rock Lee had proved to Neji a truth: destiny can be changed, and every drop of sweat and effort will not be in vain.
The group entered Konoha Village in the Land of Fire. As night fell, they finally arrived at their destination. Looking at the familiar streets and iconic Hokage Rock, they found it had become particularly eye-catching—it was covered in graffiti. Rock Lee had already concluded that this must be Naruto’s masterpiece.
As they entered the village, they saw Iruka-sensei busy searching for Naruto. “Naruto, stop running! Go clean up the graffiti on the Hokage Rock!” Iruka-sensei shouted.
“I don’t want to. If you have the ability, come and catch me!” Naruto shouted as he ran away.
“If you go and clean up, I’ll treat you to all-you-can-eat ramen at Ichiraku,” Teacher Iruka offered.
This trick really worked, and Naruto immediately stopped in his tracks. “Really?” he asked.
“Clear the graffiti and the ramen will be yours,” Iruka-sensei insisted.
“Okay then.” Naruto agreed reluctantly.
Rock Lee, who was standing by, found this scene quite funny, because the Hokage Rock had been graffitied on many times, and Teacher Iruka always thought of Naruto first.
They continued to march towards the village when Teacher Gai suddenly disappeared from sight like the wind. Rock Lee looked in the direction he was heading and, sure enough, Kakashi was right in front of him. Every time he saw Kakashi, Teacher Gai was always excited.
“Kakashi, my eternal friend and rival, let’s have a contest! Whoever reaches the Hokage Rock first wins, and the loser must run around Konoha one hundred times while standing upside down,” Sensei Gai challenged.
“Kai, your students seem to be very good. However, you have to complete your mission first,” Kakashi reminded.
Chapter 5: Forest of Death (Old Version)
Rock Lee knew that to surpass himself, he had to push his limits. His old weight-bearing equipment was no longer sufficient, so he decided to go to a blacksmith to order heavier leggings and armbands. The leggings he ordered weighed 400 kilograms each, and the armbands 300 kilograms each—a quantum leap forward.
While waiting for his custom-made equipment, Rock Lee didn’t relax. Day after day, he spent the forest pounding massive trees, practicing his powerful Lilianhua technique. Each punch and kick carried the force of a shattering blow, the thumping sound echoing like the sound of his will. His companions, Neji and Tenten, were astounded by Rock Lee’s immense strength during their practice sessions.
Finally, after a strenuous training session that made even the trees tremble, Rock Lee concluded his training by scattering the eighth wooden stake with a single kick. Each of his attacks was like unlocking a door to greater power. The might of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu was fully demonstrated in the air.
After the training, Rock Lee sat down quietly and began to practice the Golden Bell Guard. Energy surged through his body like a tide, nourishing not only his muscles, bones, and skin, but also his internal organs, strengthening his entire body.
Rock Lee realized that to break through, he must pursue even heavier weights. At the blacksmith’s shop, he custom-made heavy leggings weighing 400 kilograms each and arm braces weighing 300 kilograms each, eagerly anticipating the new challenges the equipment would bring. While he waited, his training never stopped, the monotonous, powerful sound of his blows becoming the rhythm of the forest. During their sparring, Neji and Tenten could not help but be in awe of Rock Lee’s strength.
As the wooden stakes were kicked apart one by one, Rock Lee displayed his astonishing strength. Each use of “Urairie” was a breakthrough to his own limits. When the eighth stake was shattered, he calmed his breath and closed the Eight Gates. His companions could only marvel at his unimaginable strength.
Rock Lee then calmly sat down and began to practice the Golden Bell Guard. The energy within him nourished him like spring rain, empowering him in all directions, nourishing him deeply from the outside in.
Tenten and Neji were already familiar with Rock Lee’s unique training methods. After each training session, Rock Lee would sit quietly, fully aware of every change in his body. This method was very helpful in mastering the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, and it also improved his exquisite control of chakra.
Meanwhile, Rock Lee’s internal organs grew stronger under the training of the Golden Bell, and his heartbeat, though slow, was unusually powerful, as if a war drum were beating within his chest. The energy contained within the Golden Bell not only strengthened his body but also invigorated his cells, steadily evolving towards greater strength and longer life.
After a day of hard training, Rock Lee had just returned home when he ran into Naruto. After the two exchanged greetings about their training, Naruto eagerly suggested a friendly sparring match.
“Xiao Li, I haven’t seen you for several days. How has your training been going recently?” Naruto suddenly asked.
“Not bad. I believe that as long as I persevere, I will always become stronger. What about you? I think you haven’t gotten into trouble again?” Rock Lee responded with a smile.
“Of course not! I’ve been training hard and I feel like my strength has improved a lot recently. How about we have a sparring match?” Naruto suggested excitedly, and the atmosphere suddenly became heated.
“You are not strong enough now, and you don’t have a mentor to guide your training. Wait until you graduate from school, and then we will compete again.” Rock Lee said seriously.
“Well, I was going to show you my newly created ninjutsu,” Naruto said with some disappointment.
Rock Lee knew that it was probably another one of his seduction techniques, so it would be better not to watch.
“I recently completed a mission and have some spare money. I’ll treat you to some ramen. I always eat barbecue, so let’s try something different this time.” Rock Lee suggested.
“Really? Ichiraku Ramen is my favorite food, you will definitely love it!” Naruto responded excitedly.
They walked into the small Ichiraku Ramen shop, and Naruto ordered one as he knew the place well: “Boss, give me a big bowl of chashu miso ramen!”
“Naruto, you’re here again,” the boss responded kindly.
Rock Lee followed suit and ordered a large bowl of seafood ramen. Naruto already started devouring it, each bite filled with a sense of bliss. Rock Lee also found that the noodles and broth were a perfect combination, the delicious taste of the seafood permeating every bite.
Soon, both of their bowls were empty. “Naruto, are you satisfied? If not, would you like a few more bowls?” Rock Lee asked politely.
“Thank you, Rock Lee! Boss, I want five more bowls of chashu ramen!” Naruto shouted without hesitation.
Rock Lee sighed inwardly, what a rude guy he is.
The two left the ramen shop, Naruto holding his bulging belly with both hands, looking very satisfied but a little exhausted.
“Naruto, we have some food at my house. How about we go get some more?”
“Xiao Li, are you full now? Do you need two more bowls?”
“No, Naruto, my daily exercise is very intense. Eating ramen alone can fill my stomach, but it does not provide enough nutrition for my body.” Rock Lee explained.
“Huh? I don’t quite understand this, Xiao Li.” Naruto asked confusedly.
This is common knowledge in the 21st century: exercising without adequate nutrition is harmful to the body. However, explaining this to Naruto in the Naruto world is a bit difficult.
“Let me put it this way, Naruto. Because of my heavy training, I need high-energy food, like meat, to replenish my strength.” Rock Lee said patiently.
“You always mention high-intensity training. What kind of training method is it? I don’t have class tomorrow. Can I go and watch you train, Xiao Li?” Naruto asked curiously.
“Of course. After breakfast tomorrow, come find me at the second training ground. I usually practice there.”
“Okay, I’ll definitely go.”
The next day, Naruto arrived at the second training ground as promised, “Xiao Li, let’s get started. I want to practice shuriken, and my goal is to surpass that guy Sasuke.”
“Well, come on, Naruto. I’ll start my training too.”
Rock Lee began his daily warm-up, kicking his legs like flywheels two thousand times each, and swinging his fists the same number of times. His legs pounded the tree in front of him, creating a series of heart-shaking sounds.
Naruto stared at the scene in amazement, wondering to himself: Is this what real training is? What about my kunai throwing practice?
Deeply shocked, Naruto couldn’t help but ask, “Xiao Li, do you train like this every day?”
“This is just a warm-up. The real training is still to come.” Rock Lee answered casually.
As Rock Lee intensified his attack, the tree gradually twisted and deformed. Each powerful kick caused the tree to shake violently, and leaves fell one after another. But Rock Lee’s kicks remained fierce and relentless.
Naruto watched as he also tried to walk to another tree and kick it hard, but he couldn’t help but cry out in pain.
“That hurts, Xiao Li, doesn’t it hurt when you kick these?”
“When I was very young, they told me that I had no talent for learning ninjutsu and genjutsu. From then on, I knew that my only way out was taijutsu. So I kept training myself.
“I have set my sights on becoming a top-tier martial arts expert, and I strive for this goal every day with all my might. “You must believe in yourself, because only when you believe in yourself first will others begin to believe in you and recognize you,” Rock Lee said firmly.
Naruto asked curiously, “If I practice as hard as you, will it be effective?”
“Let me show you some basic ninja techniques.” Rock Lee said as he walked to a thick tree, and his body lightly climbed vertically along the trunk until he reached a fork in the branches. He walked upside down effortlessly, as if he was walking on flat ground.
“Lee, this is amazing! Teach me how to do this.” Naruto exclaimed.
“The key is to gather the chakra at the soles of your feet and carefully control its flow. This requires patient practice. It took me three days to master this technique.” Rock Lee explained patiently.
Inspired, Naruto immediately walked over to a nearby tree and tried it out. Watching Rock Lee progress from basic punches and kicks to the complex Lilianhua technique, Naruto was astonished by his speed and strength.
“Lee, are all Genin as powerful as you? We will graduate in half a year, and I don’t think I stand out much compared to everyone else.” Naruto asked doubtfully.
“I am now the strongest in my class, and I have graduated for more than half a year. During this period, I have made such great progress thanks to the careful guidance of Teacher Kai.
You may not know this, but at school, everyone called me a ‘hot-blooded drag,’ and my grades were always the worst, so I had to constantly hone my taijutsu skills,” Rock Lee said frankly.
“That’s what they call me, ‘the last one’s left’, but I will work harder and one day I will surpass Sasuke.” Naruto responded firmly.
The two companions spent the day practicing and communicating, and time flew by. As night fell, Xiao Li successfully hunted a bison in the back mountains, and they grilled the beef at home.
“This time, our mission is to capture ferocious beasts and poisonous insects, release them into the Forest of Death, and prepare the examination room for the Chunin Exams in six months.” Teacher Kai said when assigning the task.
“Teacher, will this reveal the secrets of the exam?” Rock Lee asked curiously.
“No, this is not a leak. After all, Konoha’s Chunin Exams are often held in the Forest of Death. This is no unknown secret. In addition, there are some rivers that need to be cleared. Let’s get started now.” Teacher Kai disappeared quickly after he finished speaking.
“I’ll go to the back mountain to check it out.” Rock Lee volunteered.
He knew the environment in the back mountain very well. He easily found a large nest of centipedes and carefully kicked a few of them unconscious, fearing that he would use too much force and kill them.
Rock Lee brought these centipedes to the Forest of Death and released them easily.
Meanwhile, Tenten and Neji were tasked with capturing the beasts. Neji’s acupressure skills weren’t very effective against insects, and Tenten had a natural fear of them, making their task somewhat difficult.
Rock Lee ran nimbly in the mountains. Once he found a large creature, he would kick it unconscious and then throw it into the Death Forest effortlessly. Sometimes it was a giant snake, sometimes it was a huge wild boar.
As night fell, the team could hardly find any larger poisonous insects or ferocious beasts around Konoha Village. In the place called the Death Forest, ferocious beasts roamed everywhere, and poisonous insects were everywhere. Every step was full of unknown dangers. It was truly a land of death.
Upon returning to his residence, Rock Lee first went to the blacksmith shop to receive his new weight-bearing equipment. This was a complete set of weights weighing 1,400 kilograms, a thousand kilograms heavier than his previous load. He could clearly feel the changes in his body, and his movements were not as fast as before.
In the yard, he began practicing on the sandbag, and each punch seemed more strenuous than before.
Soon after they entered the Death Forest, several ferocious wild boars attacked them.
Neji faced the challenge and repelled them all with one Kaiten skill, but he didn’t go far before he was attacked by a group of giant snakes.
Whenever this happened, Rock Lee would look at Neji with a provocative look, as if to say, “It’s your turn.” Neji had to use his Kaiten skill again to respond.
In this way, every step they took forward would lead to attacks from giant creatures. Neji gradually became exhausted, while Rock Lee continued to provoke him with pleasure.
“It seems that you completed your task very well yesterday. The passion of youth is really inspiring.” Teacher Kai praised.
In the Death Forest, two wide rivers and a small stream were blocked by huge rocks and could not pass. Only by breaking the rocks could they move forward.
Rock Lee locked eyes with Neji, but the latter seemed oblivious. Unable to gain his attention, Rock Lee simply walked to the riverbank alone and, without hesitation, opened the third of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, the “Gate of Life.” He delivered a powerful punch against the massive rock, and spiderweb-like cracks instantly covered its surface. Then, he leaped onto the boulder and stomped down with a powerful foot. The rock crumbled, its fragments dispersing with the water.
They then set about cleaning up the creek that was clogged with garbage and dead branches and leaves. They made nets and fished out the garbage one by one. The work was not finished until nightfall.
“That’s all for today. Take a day off tomorrow.” With the order, Rock Lee donned his new weights and challenged the fourth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, the “Wound Gate.” He felt a surge of strength, unleashing his inner lotus effortlessly, each strike more devastating than before. He understood this was the effect of the weights; the extra weight of his limbs imbued each blow with greater weight, the wooden stakes disintegrating easily under his blows.
Realizing the importance of balancing strength and speed, Rock Lee decided to increase the weight during the Chunin Exams, hoping to defeat Gaara quickly with absolute strength. With this goal in mind, his training became more diligent and dedicated.
Chapter 6 Rain Ninja (Old Version)
At dawn, Rock Lee began his usual morning exercises in Konoha Village. His presence was no stranger to the villagers. Under the influence of Might Guy, his training became a common sight for them.
This young man, Rock Lee, has long been known for his perseverance and persistence. Years of early morning exercise have made it a habit for him.
As an authentic descendant of Shaolin, Rock Lee has endured hardships far beyond the imagination of ordinary people. This kind of morning exercise is just a piece of cake for him.
After breakfast, he walked to the second training ground, which had become the gathering place for their group.
Hyuga Neji and Tenten had arrived first, Tenten’s voice full of energy while Neji maintained his composure, listening as always.
Neji’s expression is always calm, as if all the troubles in the world can be reduced to peace when he comes to him.
The three of them exchanged greetings, and soon Teacher Kai arrived with his usual enthusiasm and a cloud of dust.
“Ah, my students, you are already here. Youth means running non-stop!” Teacher Kai’s voice was full of encouragement. “The Hokage has summoned us. He may have an important mission for us.”
“Teacher, can we know what the task is in advance?” Tiantian asked curiously.
“I don’t know the details of the mission, so let’s just go to the Hokage’s office,” Mr. Gai replied.
The four ninjas quickly arrived at the Hokage’s office, only to see the Third Hokage sitting there, puffing on a cigarette while reviewing a pile of documents.
“Hokage-sama, the team led by Might Guy is ready to receive instructions.” Teacher Gai said solemnly.
“Okay, this time the task assigned to you is a difficult and dangerous one.” The third generation said in a serious tone.
“Please tell me the details of the task.” Teacher Kai asked respectfully.
“In recent years, Rain Village has been in frequent contact with mercenary ninjas from many countries. There are also reports that the Rain Country is caught in a fierce civil war, and the battle for power is imminent.
Hanzo’s long absence is worrying. The purpose of your trip is to delve into the Rain Village and investigate the current situation. You must ensure your own safety.” The Hokage’s orders were clear and concise.
“Please rest assured, Hokage-sama, we will definitely live up to our mission.” Teacher Kai promised firmly.
The four of them then left the Hokage Building and went home to prepare the necessary ninja tools, agreeing to meet at the village entrance in twenty minutes.
After experiencing the Ninja World War, the Land of Rain was devastated and sparsely populated, with people’s eyes revealing a deep numbness.
“Teacher Gai, should we disguise ourselves a little and dress up as ordinary people? This will make it easier to sneak into the Rain Village.” Rock Lee suggested.
“That’s right. In order to avoid exposing our identity as Konoha ninjas, it is wise to dress up as civilians.” Teacher Kai replied in agreement.
The four dressed up as villagers and set out on the road to Rain Village. At the entrance of the village, a group of guards came towards them and stopped them.
“What are you doing in Rain Village?” a guard stepped out of the queue and asked.
“Dear ninja, we are from a village in the southern part of the Rain Country. The village has recently been robbed by bandits and it is difficult for us to make a living. Therefore, we hope to find a job as a carpenter in the Rain Village to make a living.” Rock Lee stepped forward, wiped the mud off his face, and said with a forced smile.
The guard looked them over, and since the ragged four didn’t arouse any suspicion, he waved them in.
They went deep into the Rain Village, and everywhere they looked were the devastation of war, with collapsed houses. It was obvious that a battle had taken place not long ago.
Although the Rain Village is currently led by Hanzo, Pain’s movements are disturbing and conflict seems to be imminent.
They walked into a restaurant, intending to gather intelligence while enjoying a long-awaited sumptuous meal.
After eating dry food for several days in a row, one really longs for a hot meal.
As they ate, they paid attention to the conversation around them.
“When will this civil war end? Hanzo-sama has been missing for a long time, and the people are uneasy.”
“I heard that Akatsuki is recruiting ninjas recently and the treatment is generous. Why don’t we join them? After all, they advocate peace.”
“Indeed, if Akatsuki took control of Amegakure, they might be able to govern it better than Hanzo did.”
It is obvious that Hanzo has gradually lost the support of the villagers, and it will not be long before the leader of Rain Village may be replaced.
The four of them snooped around in the Rain Village and got similar information: the Rain Country was indeed in civil strife, and Hanzo had not appeared for a long time.
Rock Lee knew in his heart that Hanzo might be powerless to save the situation. Ever since he saw Nagato’s Rinnegan, he began to hide from place to place, trying to avoid being hunted down by the Akatsuki organization.
In order to avoid danger, the four decided to evacuate Rain Village. At this moment, Hanzo was like a trapped beast, searching for spies of Akatsuki throughout the village.
They found a hidden cave nearby and planned to take shelter there for a day and return to Konoha tomorrow.
They sat around the fire and chatted casually.
Neji was in charge of keeping watch, and every once in a while he would open his Byakugan and look around.
“Teacher, someone is approaching.” Neji suddenly reported.
Rock Lee saw two people wearing black clothes with red clouds approaching. One of them had a shark-like face. They were Uchiha Itachi and Hoshigaki Kisame. Neither of them was easy to deal with.
Teacher Kai’s eyes fixed, he recognized Itachi, and quickly gestured to Neji and Tenten, signaling them to be on high alert.
“We must resolve this battle quickly. They intend to ask for help from Konoha Village.” Itachi warned seriously, “The ninja from Konoha is very powerful. Everyone must be careful.”
“The guy who can make You, Itachi, give him such an evaluation must be no easy opponent.” Kisame also became serious, with a solemn expression.
“Remember, the one who betrayed Konoha was Uchiha Itachi. Don’t look directly into his eyes. He is very good at illusion techniques. Predict his movements by observing his footsteps and shoulders.” Teacher Kai instructed.
Rock Lee quickly threw off the burden on his body and said resolutely to Tenten and Neji, “We will work with Teacher Gai to create an opportunity. The two of you will seize the opportunity and evacuate immediately and send a distress signal.”
“Little guy, don’t be so arrogant. You think you can help your teammates escape with just a few of you?”
“Jingmen, open!” Rock Lee activated the six gates without hesitation. At this critical moment of life and death, any slackness could lead to catastrophic consequences.
As the energy surged, a blue storm surrounded Rock Lee. Itachi couldn’t help but squint his eyes, surprised at the growth of the new generation of Konoha, and at the same time curious about Sasuke’s current situation.
Rock Lee swung his fists like a violent storm and launched the “Peacock Attack”. Every attack brought up a spark and formed an explosion. This was a display of pure strength and speed, not a chakra technique.
Teacher Gai also went all out, opened the Jingmen, and fought side by side with Rock Lee, “Towards the Peacock”, and launched two powerful moves simultaneously to attack Itachi and Kisame.
Uchiha Itachi’s eyes turned, his Mangekyō Sharingan shone, and he instantly summoned Susanoo. The solid defensive wall blocked Rock Lee and Gai’s moves towards Peacock.
At the same time, Kisame quickly formed hand seals and released the water escape technique – “Exploding Water Wave”!
Inside the cave, the water surged, forming a deep abyss that swallowed everyone. Rock Lee took the opportunity to trigger the Peacock Attack. Explosions rang out one after another, and the cave began to collapse.
“Hurry, escape from above!” Rock Lee roared, and Neji and Tenten followed closely behind him, stepping on the crumbling stones and successfully escaping from the cave.
“Teacher Kai, let’s fight and retreat at the same time. I have sent a signal for help, and the reinforcements should arrive soon.” Rock Lee said deliberately, intending to confuse the enemy.
The two fought and retreated all the way, and finally escaped from the top exit of the cave. Kisame chased after him, formed a seal again, and used the “Big Samedan Jutsu”.
A giant shark burst out of the water and charged towards them. Undeterred, Rock Lee gathered all his strength and unleashed the Konoha Great Cyclone, sending a powerful kick that crushed the shark.
This kick contained Rock Lee’s Six Gates power, without any chakra support, but still incredibly powerful. Itachi and Kisame also chased out of the cave and surrounded the four of them.
“Huh, it’s really surprising that Konoha actually has a little genius like you. Itachi, you see, during the time you were away, Konoha has produced many talented people. But unfortunately, it seems that your end is coming here.” Kisame said sarcastically and jokingly.
“You are dressed like an ordinary person. Could you please tell me your name?” Li Luoke asked.
“The rebel of the Land of Water is Hoshigaki Kisame.”
“Are you the one of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen of the Hidden Mist, Hoshigaki Kisame who wields the large sword Samehada?” Rock Lee confirmed.
“It seems that you are not completely ignorant of the affairs of the ninja world. It is an honor for you to die under Samehada.” Kisame drew out the big sword behind him and waved it at Rock Lee.
Elsewhere, Gai was already engaged in battle with Uchiha Itachi, with Tenten and Neji supporting him. Rock Lee knew that Uchiha Itachi would not easily kill his fellow Konoha members, so he focused all his energy on dealing with Hoshigaki Kisame.
The secret of Samehada’s Great Sword is to absorb the opponent’s chakra, thereby strengthening Kisame himself. However, Rock Lee is known for his scarce chakra, relying more on his physical strength enhanced by the Golden Bell.
Facing Kisame’s sharp blade, Rock Lee quickly drew the double shuriken at his waist to block it. He could feel his chakra being sucked away by Samehada, but for him, the effect was minimal.
During the fierce fight between the two, Kisame couldn’t help but frown. “Aren’t you curious why I absorbed so little of your chakra?” Rock Lee asked.
“Kid, what on earth are you playing?” Kisame questioned.
“Let the King of Hell see the power of this peacock!”
Rock Lee’s fists flew like meteors across the night sky, sparks flying, and pointed directly at Hoshigaki Kisame.
“Water escape technique, Rain of Four Sharks!”
Four sharks rushed out in the rain, but they turned into shattered shadows under the fierce attack on Peacock, and the small group of sharks collided violently with them.
The speed of his punches increased, sparks poured down like a rainstorm, penetrating the little shark’s defense and catching up with Hoshigaki Kisame.
“Water escape, water prison, shark dance!” A huge water ball swallowed the two together, forming a closed battlefield.
“Thousand Sharks!” The small sharks in the water ball swarmed in, but Rock Lee used the toughness of the fourth level of the Golden Bell Cover to kick out countless leg shadows, dispersing the attacks from all directions.
There were continuous collisions. Although a shark had bitten his skin, Rock Lee, with his body strengthened by the Golden Bell, was able to stay on the front line despite minor injuries and continued to hone his skills in battle.
Kisame, half man, half shark, shuttled across the battlefield. Whenever he approached, Rock Lee would use the Konoha Great Tornado to keep his distance from him.
Kai, who was watching the battle from the sidelines, thought to himself when the time was right: “The Gate of Shock, open now!”
Amidst the fierce clash, a powerful force erupted, even Uchiha Itachi could not help but be moved. Kai charged forward, launching a fierce attack on Itachi and Hoshigaki Kisame behind him. With a furious roar, “Day Tiger,” a massive white tiger-shaped shockwave lashed out at Itachi’s Susanoo, forcing him backward. Kisame, behind him, was affected, his water ball instantly collapsing, and blood gushed from his mouth.
Rock Lee seized the opportunity, gathering the power of his Golden Bell. Taking advantage of Kisame’s injuries, he unleashed the “Konoha Gourami Whirlwind,” launching a powerful kick that sent Kisame flying into the air. His movements were so swift that even Gai struggled to fully grasp them. Ignoring the accumulating fatigue, Rock Lee continued his aerial assault, giving Kisame no chance to breathe.
Kisame, bleeding profusely from the relentless onslaught, finally unleashed a secret technique, transforming his form into a stream of water and fleeing the battlefield. Rock Lee, observing this, immediately withdrew and returned to Teacher Gai, breathing rapidly. Tenten and Neji also quickly approached, staring across at the empty space opposite where their former formidable enemy had once stood, each with their own thoughts.
Turn on lazy reading mode
Chapter 7 Roots (Old Version)
In the Tsukuyomi illusion, Rock Lee endured the pain of Uchiha Itachi’s blade, yet found the joy of perseverance within this pain. He gazed at Itachi with determination, revealing his inner journey: “The pain inflicted by the blade is not even one-tenth of the pain I endure daily. Your powerful Tsukuyomi is but a millstone for me to sharpen my will. I was born without the talent for ninjutsu and genjutsu, relying solely on relentless taijutsu training, even though my chakra is scarce and difficult to control.”
His voice was firm and resonant, as if declaring his determination: “I once worked tirelessly for three days and three nights to learn how to climb a tree. The hardships I went through are beyond the reach of your knife skills.”
Itachi Uchiha’s face remained sullen, but a flicker of emotion flashed in his eyes as he continued to attack Rock Lee. Rock Lee, on the other hand, rejoiced in the pain, feeling his body rapidly growing stronger. He even wished that the time of Tsukuyomi could continue, allowing him to directly reach the twelfth level of the Golden Bell Cover and become invincible.
Three days passed in a flash, and Rock Lee returned to reality from his illusion, feeling that his body had reached the fifth level of the Golden Bell. Itachi, standing opposite him, covered his tired eyes with his hands. The continuous use of powerful ninjutsu had clearly put a great strain on his eyes.
“Itachi, your Tsukuyomi makes me feel an unprecedented vitality. Although it is powerful, it strengthens my determination to overcome everything.” Rock Lee said firmly.
Uchiha Itachi looked at him deeply, and then the two of them used the instant body technique tacitly and disappeared on the spot.
“Itachi, did you really cast Tsukuyomi on that boy?”
“Indeed, his spiritual power is amazing. Konoha Village can actually cultivate such a strong man. In time, he will probably become a force that can shake the ninja world.” Itachi answered calmly.
“Aren’t you overestimating him?” Kisame expressed doubt.
“He endured 72 hours of continuous stabbings in my Tsukuyomi illusion, but he remained calm, as if the pain was like a cloud to him. I have never met such a tenacious person who can overcome the limits of the flesh with will alone.” Itachi explained.
“Konoha is indeed full of talented people, and geniuses are constantly emerging.” Kisame sighed and thought of the Hidden Mist Village again. The cruelty and killing there formed a sharp contrast with the vitality of Konoha.
After a short rest, Rock Lee and his crew continued on the road to Konoha, and on the way they met Kakashi and Asuma who came to help.
“Kai, who did you encounter?” Kakashi asked.
“Oh, it’s my undefeated opponent Kakashi. I’m so sorry to let you see me like this.” Teacher Kai said jokingly.
“It was Uchiha Itachi and Hoshigaki Kisame. We fought. It was intense, but it ended in a draw and they retreated,” Rock Lee reported.
“Then go back quickly.”
Kakashi didn’t ask in detail and decided to wait until they returned to the Hokage’s office to discuss everything.
～～～～～～～～～
In the Hokage’s office in Konoha,
“What? Uchiha Itachi and Hoshigaki Kisame have joined forces?” Consultant Koharu asked in shock.
“Judging from their attire, they clearly belong to a certain group,” Rock Lee analyzed. “The Rain Village is currently engulfed in war. They might be hired warriors.”
“Hanzo’s control over the Rain Village seems to have weakened.” Men Yan sighed.
“Rock Lee, you have done a great job and have become a role model for the new generation of Konoha. You, Tenten, and Neji were able to survive and successfully repel two S-rank rebel ninjas. This mission was rated A-rank. You can have a good rest for three days.” The Third Hokage praised.
“Thank you, Hokage-sama.”
“Kai, you have trained an excellent disciple.” The Third Hokage admired secretly.
Rock Lee immediately went to the blacksmith shop to rebuild the lost weight-bearing equipment. He was already very familiar with the blacksmith shop owner.
“Boss, please help me make another set of weight-bearing equipment, the same as the previous one.”
“Hey, Xiao Li, didn’t you just make one?”
“I accidentally lost it while on a mission. Sorry for the inconvenience, boss. Also, please make me an adjustable weight vest.”
“Okay, pick it up in three days.”
The days without the burden made him feel extremely relaxed, as if he could soar into the sky at any time.
He was walking on the street and happened to look up and noticed four people acting strangely.
Shikamaru, Choji, Kiba, Naruto, and Rock Lee following closely behind, seemed to be preparing to do something.
After a while, they arrived at the second practice field.
Naruto proudly showed it to everyone: “I just learned a move, let me open your eyes.”
After saying this, he walked up to the big tree next to him easily, as if he was walking on flat ground.
Choji and Kiba exclaimed at this, while Shikamaru simply rolled his eyes in disdain.
“Naruto, how come you have time to come to the training ground today?” Rock Lee asked.
“Rocky Lee, you’re back! These are my friends, Choji, Shikamaru, Kiba, and this is Rock Lee, he’s a grade higher than us and is still a Genin.” Naruto introduced excitedly.
“How’s training been lately, Naruto?”
“I’m almost going to surpass that arrogant Sasuke.” Naruto said with a confident smile on his face.
“I believe you, Naruto. It’s a rare occasion for us all to get together today, so I’ll treat everyone to a barbecue. I’ll go catch some more wild animals so that everyone can enjoy a good meal.” Rock Lee suggested.
“That’s great!” Choji responded excitedly.
They went to the back mountains of Konoha, and soon Rock Lee captured a bison, a wild boar, a giant snake and a silly roe deer.
Bringing the prey back to Rock Lee’s home, he cut it into strips and prepared a feast that rivaled any at a barbecue restaurant.
Naruto lit the fire, chose a wide stone slab, poured fat, and arranged slices of meat on it. Soon, an enticing sizzling sound was heard on the stone slab, and the aroma of meat wafted in the wind.
He sprinkled various condiments on it and announced, “Let’s eat!”
Shikamaru moved quickly and grabbed the first piece of meat.
“Don’t worry, there’s plenty of meat today, take your time.” Rock Lee picked up a piece of snake meat and tasted it. The aroma filled his mouth and the snake meat was very chewy. “Try this snake meat, the taste and aroma are very special.”
Each of the four groups tasted a bite, their faces lit with excitement, but they soon declared themselves full. Rock Lee had been through a fierce battle, exhausted, and only after devouring several pounds of meat did he feel satisfied.
His Golden Bell Cover training made his digestion extremely fast and his stomach’s digestive ability was extremely strong.
“I never thought that the meat you grilled, Xiao Li, was so delicious.” Ya exclaimed, and Akamaru echoed him.
Shikamaru asked curiously, “Xiao Li, after becoming a Genin, are there many tasks? Are they difficult?”
Xiao Li replied, “When I first started as a Genin, the missions were not complicated. We mainly helped weed and search for lost pets. The leading Jonin would teach us a lot of skills. When carrying out a mission, the most important thing is teamwork.”
In this world, individual power is ultimately limited. Only a united team can overcome all difficulties and obstacles. Trust your partners; they are your most precious treasure. Rock Lee advised with a sense of responsibility.
“Being a ninja is so tedious, carrying out missions day after day.” Shikamaru seemed a little impatient.
“I can’t wait to graduate. I want everyone to recognize my strength. When I become Hokage, I will never let anyone underestimate me.” Naruto’s eyes flashed with determination.
“Hokage? When I become Hokage, I will turn the whole village into a paradise for dogs.” Ya smiled, as if he had already seen that scene.
Rock Lee could only shake his head. Although he knew that Naruto would become Hokage in the future, he still looked a little immature now.
“Work hard, young ninjas. The calmness of the ninja world is only superficial, and there are undercurrents. Don’t wait until it’s too late to regret your powerlessness.” His words were mainly for Shikamaru to hear. Only when tragedy strikes will he truly understand how important strength is.
As night fell, Rock Lee watched the four of them leave, closed the door, and faced the silent night alone: “Show yourself, I don’t want to fight meaninglessly, it will not benefit anyone.”
“Konoha’s elite, Rock Lee, is indeed worthy of his reputation. Lord Danzo invites you to gather at the Root.” A figure appeared in the yard and extended an invitation to Rock Lee.
“All matters can be reported to Lord Hokage tomorrow. I am Rock Lee, Might Guy’s disciple. If you have any questions, you can directly ask my mentor. No need to be polite. I will say goodbye now.” Facing the recruitment of Root, Rock Lee was determined and prepared for the possible situation.
In this world where all the major families and roots abide by agreements, he is just a commoner ninja with no power or influence, so naturally he has no scruples.
“Rock Lee, don’t underestimate the power of Lord Danzo. Think carefully before you act. Refusing is not a wise choice.” The Root member tried to intimidate.
“Even the Hokage’s authority must follow formal channels. As long as the Hokage agrees, I will obey unconditionally.”
“How dare you…”
“If you want to take action, first weigh your own weight.” Rock Lee retorted without fear.
“You will regret this, Rock Lee.” Before he finished speaking, the man disappeared into the darkness.
Rock Lee snorted in his heart. The people of the Root are just rats underground. It’s time to let them see what’s in their power.
In the Hokage’s office.
“Hokage-sama, Lee was approached by members of the Root last night, but he firmly rejected them,” Gai reported sternly.
The Third Hokage took a deep puff of cigarette, thought for a moment, and responded: “I understand, you can leave.”
“Call the two advisors and Danzo,” the Third Hokage ordered.
Soon, Xiaochun and Menyan hurried over, while Danzo walked in slowly with a cane.
“Sarutobi, what is this emergency summon?”
“Danzo, what exactly was your intention in contacting Rock Lee at night?” the Third Hokage asked directly.
“Talents like this are exactly what the Root needs. With a little polishing, they can become perfect combat tools. You already have Might Guy, so leave Rock Lee to me.” Danzo made no secret of his intentions.
“Absolutely impossible. Don’t forget, the Root no longer exists. Konoha’s new power has just sprouted, and you want to bring it into darkness? You are destroying their nature. The era of the Root is over.” The Sandaime flatly refused.
“Sarutobi, your kindness will eventually destroy Konoha.” Danzo left after leaving these words.
“We must find an opportunity to get rid of Rock Lee, no matter what means. If he can’t be used by me, then there is no value in keeping him.” In the dark Root Chamber, Danzo ordered the people around him.
“Yes, sir.”
“Can Orochimaru be found? It would be best if he did it himself.”
“Orochimaru has been acting strangely lately. We will do our best to find him.”
“Go ahead.”
“yes.”
At the same time, Orochimaru wandered around the edge of the Wind Country, surveying the terrain and looking for the best place to ambush the Fourth Kazekage in order to prepare for his plan to destroy Konoha, while also avoiding Akatsuki’s pursuit.
“I really want to see the old guy’s astonished expression right away, hahaha.” Orochimaru laughed in a low voice.
“Sasuke, wait, you will eventually belong to me.” He whispered to the air, full of morbid persistence.
Rock Lee was unaware that Danzo was plotting his death. Even if he knew, he would probably just sneer.
After all, if you want to take his life, it will be futile unless you have Teacher Kai’s unique skill to open the seven gates of strength.
Rock Lee maintained a frantic training pace, occasionally getting together with Naruto and other friends to enjoy barbecue, and the vacation passed quickly.
Early in the morning, at the second training ground, they received a mission: “It is reported that someone has spotted Orochimaru’s traces at the border between the Kingdom of Rivers and the Kingdom of Fire. Your team of three must go there to investigate. If necessary, you can go deep into the Kingdom of Winds. Anbu members will also participate in this operation, so be sure to remain vigilant.”
Orochimaru, a ninja known in the Naruto world for his scientific research, both impressed and cautioned Rock Lee. His ability to escape death was truly remarkable, and he was often thought dead, only to be unexpectedly resurrected.
Rock Lee didn’t hold out much hope for a successful kill. Even if there was a chance, he would have to be caught off guard to inflict a serious blow. If Orochimaru were determined to escape, no one would be able to capture him.
They set out on their journey to the Land of Rivers and soon reached the border between the Land of Fire and the Land of Rivers. Here, forests and mountains bordered each other, with a clear boundary.
The country of Kawano has a dangerous terrain and rich resources, but because it is located between major powers, it often becomes a tragedy on the battlefield.
Chapter 8: Golden Bell Cover (Old Version)
Rock Lee, feeling the urgency of time, devoted himself to honing his martial arts day and night. At first light, he began training in Iron Sand Palm, and when the sun reached its climax, he turned to the nunchaku and Golden Bell Guard. Only in his spare moments and at nightfall would he perform basic training.
After days of arduous practice, his palms became incredibly strong, yet with few traces of calluses. This was entirely due to the mysterious healing power of the Golden Bell, not the external potion. The potion was merely a cover to conceal his true cultivation method. Without the Golden Bell’s support, others who blindly imitated him would only suffer the consequences.
With a gust of lightning-fast speed, the three of them passed through the dense forest and embarked on a journey to the Water Country of Kirigakure. This long-isolated village was their destination – to gather intelligence.
This mission was relatively easy, without the shadow of combat, and more like a pleasant hike.
“Do you know? The blood mist policy implemented by Kirigakure a few years ago has now calmed down. At that time, graduates of the ninja school had to stain their hands with the blood of their companions in order to graduate, and rebellion and killing took place every day. Many people with bloodline limits died because of this, which was simply destroying their own foundation. In recent years, Kirigakure has been peaceful, and almost no news can be heard from the outside world. This time we are going there just to take a look and understand the situation.” Rock Lee explained.
Neji added gravely, “Turning ninjas into mere killing machines is a dehumanizing act. A true ninja can only reach their full potential through the strength of a team and the deep bonds between them.”
“Xiao Li, Ningji, remember Hoshigaki Kisame whom we met before? He is from the Hidden Mist Village. He is so powerful that no one in the village should be able to defeat him. Why do you think he chose to betray?” Tiantian asked with confusion.
“He’s nothing but a lost soul, without faith in his heart, his hands stained with the blood of his comrades. To him, the so-called nation is nothing but an empty concept,” Rock Lee replied gravely. He understood that Kisame had been misled by Madara’s words and had strayed into the pursuit of the so-called real world. Rock Lee couldn’t help but feel a tinge of pity for Kisame.
They moved quickly and soon reached the coast, boarding a small boat and sailing towards the Land of Water. Over the azure sea, a few seagulls flew across the sky. Rock Lee took out his fishing rod, enjoying a moment of tranquility and soaking in this rare moment of relaxation.
However, both Rock Lee and Neji struggled with rowing, and after several attempts, their boat even started to drift backwards. Desperate, they hired a fisherman for help, successfully reaching the war-torn Land of Water. Although the civil war had sparsely populated the land, the people were beginning to smile happily. As they headed towards the Hidden Mist Village, every face they encountered seemed peaceful, devoid of any fear of impending doom.
The Hidden Mist Village seems to have bid farewell to its dark history filled with blood and mist, and the news of Mei Terumi’s promotion to Mizukage has come true.
Neji and Tenten observed that the people here were not in dire straits.
“The policy of the Hidden Mist Village seems to have changed, and the tragedy of fratricide is no longer happening.” Neji commented.
They climbed to the top of the mountain and looked down at the village surrounded by thick fog. It was quiet and peaceful, like a pure land in the world, suitable for living out one’s life.
After disguising themselves, they quietly entered the village and found that the defense was not as strict as they had imagined.
“We’re exposed.” Neji warned in a low voice.
Xiao Li and Tiantian immediately became alert and noticed that the chakra fluctuations around them were becoming more intense.
It seemed that Qing had seen through their disguise. With his special ability of seeing through their eyes, he easily saw through their true identities. This encounter was a misfortune within a misfortune.
Rock Lee immediately dropped his disguise and announced to the guards of the Hidden Mist Village who were watching him from the shadows, “I am Rock Lee, a ninja from Konoha. I have come to deliver an invitation to your village to participate in the Chunin Selection Exam in six months.”
This was the mission assigned to him by the Third Hokage. Once his whereabouts were exposed, he would use the invitation letter as evidence to avoid unnecessary misunderstandings between the two countries.
A figure appeared at lightning speed. It was Qing. Under the black eye mask he wore was a successfully transplanted white eye.
In this Naruto world, organ transplant technology has reached an amazing level. The Hidden Mist Village would do anything to obtain the Byakugan, and Ao was able to overcome the strong rejection reaction and successfully undergo the transplant. He must be said to be a lucky man.
Qing took the invitation letter, examined it and confirmed its authenticity.
“You can stay in the Hidden Mist Village for a few days. I will report the situation to Lord Mizukage. Whether it is necessary to send someone to accompany you will be decided by Lord Mizukage. You can leave first.” After Qing finished speaking, his figure disappeared in the mist.
The men then removed their disguises and wandered freely through the mist-shrouded village. Surrounded by mountains and the vast ocean beyond, it was a natural fortress, easily defended and difficult to attack.
While touring, they did not forget to collect intelligence and learned that Mizukage Mei Terumi was not only outstanding in appearance, but also that the peace policy she implemented after taking office was deeply popular, giving the Water Kingdom a precious opportunity to rest and recuperate.
The Hidden Mist Village had just emerged from the ravages of war and needed to recuperate, so they probably couldn’t send anyone to participate in Konoha’s Chunin Exams. “Please tell the Hokage that we hope the two countries can live in harmony in the future.”
“It’s indeed a pity. We will definitely convey Lord Mizukage’s wish. We won’t bother you any longer. We will set off now and return to complete our mission.” Rock Lee replied.
“Bon Voyage.”
They bid farewell to the Hidden Mist Village, rushed to the port of the Water Country, and hired a ship to take them towards the Fire Country.
In the Hokage’s office, Rock Lee reported respectfully, “Hokage-sama, in our country’s Water Region, the conflict in the Hidden Mist Village has ended. Under the leadership of the Fifth Mizukage, Mei Terumi, the villagers live and work in peace and contentment, and their open and peaceful policy has won the hearts of the people.”
The Third Hokage nodded in approval: “Peace is always the desire of the people. Although only the Wind Country and several small countries will participate in this Chunin Exam, Xiao Li, as a Genin, you must seize this opportunity and demonstrate your strength.”
“Yes, Lord Hokage.” Rock Lee took the order and left.
As soon as he left the office, he ran into Inuzuka Kiba and Akamaru. Rock Lee called out, “Kana, are you bringing Akamaru? Come on, I’ll treat you to barbecue.”
“Xiao Li, what a coincidence, I’m hungry.” Ya agreed with a smile, and Akamaru shouted happily twice.
At the barbecue restaurant, the two chatted while enjoying the food.
“Ya, has your family’s ninja dog been raised since it was a puppy?” Rock Lee asked curiously.
Kiba proudly replied, “Of course, Akamaru is like a brother to me. We will face every battle together.”
The topic turned to ninja dogs and summoned beasts, and Kiba was particularly enthusiastic: “We will share everything, even food. Do you know about summoned beasts? What’s the difference between them and our ninja dogs?”
“Spiritual beasts inhabit a different spiritual world than our own, and their lives differ from ours. Typically, a contract with a creature from the spiritual world is an agreement reached with the entire tribe.
Although I don’t know the details, I know that creatures from the psychic world are not the only ones who can become contract partners and perform summoning.”
Rock Lee thought about it, for example, Itachi’s crow was originally Uchiha Shisui’s pet, and later became Itachi’s partner. And Kakashi’s ninja dog was a traditional domestic pet of the Hatake family.
Perhaps I can also train some pets as psychic animals. As for whether I can sign a contract with the creatures in the psychic world, it depends on fate.
The two said goodbye at the door of the barbecue restaurant. Ya was very grateful for Xiao Li’s hospitality. After a few brief greetings, they went home.
Rock Lee thought back to the various summoning beasts that had appeared in the Naruto world and realized that almost all the powerful ones already had masters. It seemed that finding the right summoning beast was not something to be rushed, but rather something to be left to nature.
～～～～～～～～～～
In a hidden cave somewhere in the Rain Country.
“Our operation this time failed and we failed to wipe out the ninjas of Konoha.” Kisame reported to Pain.
“What’s the reason?”
“An outstanding ninja named Rock Lee has appeared in Konoha. Although he has just graduated from the Ninja Academy, he has already mastered the Sixth Gate of the Eight Gates, and possesses the strength of a Jonin. The other two ninjas, Hyuga Neji and Tenten, have also demonstrated impressive strength, and their cooperation is seamless.”
“Might Guy’s strength is truly formidable. Once all eight gates are activated, he can unleash a force beyond the level of a Kage. Now, he’s already opened the seventh gate, making even Kisame and I difficult to match. That Rock Lee withstood my Tsukuyomi without a scratch. His determination and potential are limitless; he’s truly a threat,” Itachi calmly analyzed.
“Rock Lee, this young man’s growth rate is worthy of our vigilance. We must find an opportunity to get rid of him. At present, the true intentions of the Rain Village have not been discovered. At most, they will only think that we are an ordinary mercenary.” Pain ordered coldly.
“Speed up the intelligence gathering on the Jinchūriki. Our plan will be put into action soon. At the same time, we must also speed up the search for strong reinforcements to enhance the strength of our organization.” Pain continued to deploy.
“Konan, keep a close eye on Hanzo’s every move. He’s lived long enough, it’s time to put an end to him.”
“Itachi, Kisame, you continue to monitor the periphery of Konoha, especially the Nine-Tails Jinchuriki. Once the time is right, do not hesitate and act immediately.”
As the order was given, everyone left. In the secluded corner of the cave, inside a pitcher plant, Hei Bai Jue was whispering.
“I didn’t expect that Konoha has given birth to another genius. Even Itachi and Kisame failed to subdue him. I’m afraid we need to pay more attention to the developments in Konoha.” White Zetsu expressed his opinion.
“Well, let’s go report our findings.”
After three months of hard training, Rock Lee successfully opened the third gate – the Gate of Life, and his nunchaku Golden Bell Cover has begun to show results.
After three months of arduous training, Rock Lee finally mastered his new move, the Golden Bell Defense, to perfection. His nunchaku flew through the air, swiftly transforming into a phantom, before condensing into a massive, metallic energy bell around him. To verify his defensive capabilities, he invited Tenten and Neji to witness the attack, having Tenten fire a hidden weapon at full power.
His arms flashed like lightning, and his nunchakus danced in front of Rock Lee, quickly blending into the surroundings and transforming into a hazy bell, which gradually materialized as time passed.
Golden light flowed on the surface of the bell, and Rock Lee signaled Tenten and Neji to get ready.
“Tiantian, I’m going to use the Golden Bell Cover later. Try to throw hidden weapons at me with all your strength. I want to test the defensive effectiveness of this move.”
“Xiao Li, you finally mastered a new move. That’s great! Let’s open our eyes.” Tiantian urged excitedly. After all, Xiao Li had been practicing nunchakus day and night in Zhongli for the past three months, which had already attracted the attention of the villagers.
Neji was also curious and wanted to see with his own eyes what this move, which was said to be comparable to Kaiten, was like.
Rock Lee then opened the third gate, his nunchaku flying in his hands, and quickly built an indestructible energy bell.
The two men witnessed this scene and couldn’t help but admire it. They didn’t expect that the rapid swing of the nunchaku could condense such a golden bell.
“I’m about to start, Xiao Li, are you ready?”
As Tiantian spoke, he unfolded the scroll, aimed at Rock Lee, and quickly released it. Dozens of hidden weapons flew out of the scroll and hit Rock Lee directly.
Rock Lee quickly responded with his nunchakus. The hidden weapons hit the golden bell, making a crisp sound of metal clashing, and were all bounced away.
Rock Lee was secretly delighted at the significant effect, but he still had doubts about how this move would perform during rotation.
Rock Lee twisted his body skillfully, and the nunchaku gradually accelerated as he spun, eventually transforming into a golden phantom bell, spinning rapidly in the air.
His figure was like an arrow shot from a bow, rushing towards the thick tree trunk. With a loud “bang”, the tree trunk broke, leaving a deep pit on the ground in the flying dust.
Rock Lee dusted off his clothes and dust fell from him.
Tenten and Neji on the side were stunned. They had never thought that Rock Lee could create such a skill. His defense was as solid as a rock, no less than Kaiten, and his attack power had the style of the Inuzuka family.
Thinking of Rock Lee who used to be at the bottom of the Ninja School, and seeing him now independently creating such a powerful Ninjutsu, they couldn’t help but sigh in their hearts that life is like a dream, full of changes.
Rock Lee said modestly, “This move is not perfect yet. The continuity of the attack needs to be improved. I need more practice.”
Tiantian responded approvingly, “It’s amazing that you were able to create such a new technique in just three months. If Teacher Kai were here, he would definitely be proud of you.”
An exciting proposal followed, and Rock Lee invited, “Let’s go out and celebrate tonight. I’ll treat you all, and everyone can eat to your heart’s content!”
Soon, the three of them found a barbecue restaurant and sat down inside.
Tiantian raised his glass and said to Rock Lee with a smile on his face, “Little Lee, congratulations on the successful development of your new technique. Come on, cheers!”
Chapter 9 New Techniques (Old Version)
The seven ninjas quickly retreated, their hands forming mysterious hand seals. “Fire escape technique, hard work!” “Wind escape technique, breakthrough!” Their combined ninjutsu was like a violent storm, engulfed in flames, turning the giant trees on both sides into a sea of fire.
Rock Lee, using his speed to his advantage, quickly retreated with Neji and Tenten, even as his ninjutsu shadowed him. He suddenly stopped and commanded, “Ningji, Tenten, get behind me! Neji, protect Tenten!” He activated his Golden Bell, a solid shield that resisted the raging flames while repairing his damage. Neji, in the background, repeatedly cast Kaiten to ensure Tenten’s safety.
The ninjutsu attack came to an end, and Rock Lee seized the opportunity, using the smoke as cover to launch an offensive, rushing towards the enemy Root members like a gust of wind. His “Konoha Speed Tornado” was so fast that it was difficult to keep up, and he was in front of the enemy in an instant.
However, the leading ninja reacted quickly, conjuring a seal to summon “Earth Release, Dirt Road Return.” A massive stone slab rose from the ground, abruptly blocking Rock Lee’s attack. Three more ninjas then stepped forward, unleashing “Earth Release, Earth Flow Wall.” The ground suddenly became a mass of rock, a barrier to Rock Lee’s advance. Although Rock Lee managed to shatter the first layer of rock with his kick, he felt a significant drain on his strength.
In desperation, he could only retreat back to Neji and Tenten.
“Our opponents this time are not easy to deal with. They are all elite members of the Root and work together seamlessly. My strength alone is too weak, so we must fight together.” Rock Lee explained his tactical arrangements to his companions.
Neji leaped up in response, Rock Lee following closely behind, binding him tightly with bandages, “Ten-Ten, it’s up to you!”
Tiantian pulled the scroll, and countless hidden weapons poured down on the Root members like a rainstorm. The opponent’s ninjas hurriedly used shurikens to shoot down the flying hidden weapons.
Under this cover, Rock Lee took Neji and spun quickly in the air, performing the “External Lotus”.
Then, the power of “Tianhui” joined in, and the speed and power of the two combined were astonishing. The Root members tried to defend themselves with earth escape, but they collapsed instantly. The two quickly closed in, and with a loud bang, five Root members fell on the spot, while the other two, being at a distance, managed to escape.
Rock Lee originally wanted to catch them all in one fell swoop, but he didn’t expect that they would still slip away.
After the battle, he breathed a sigh of relief and untied the restraints of the Eight Gates.
“I never thought you could cooperate so perfectly.” Tiantian exclaimed. She was greatly shocked by the combination ninjutsu just now. She never thought that “Kaiten” and “Biao Lianhua” could be combined so perfectly.
Ningji also fell into deep thought. He had never expected that the two completely different boxing styles, soft fist and steel fist, could be combined together.
“It’s indeed unexpected. Maybe we should explore more possibilities and develop new combination ninjutsu.” Rock Lee responded with a smile.
He also realized his shortcomings. Although the sixth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu was powerful, it still had its limitations. This made him start to think about the future development direction.
Facing a weaker opponent, like Chao Kongque, a fight could be easily resolved. However, facing a stronger foe, as they had today, even a ninjutsu team with tacit coordination was powerless. Recalling his past life at Shaolin Temple, Rock Lee secretly resolved to forge a pair of nunchakus tailored to his needs upon returning to the village.
“I will repay Danzo’s debt.”
On the way back to Konoha, Rock Lee pondered his future. He resolved to master the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu to the seventh level. With the power of the Day Tiger, he would be able to defeat numerous powerful enemies. When the Golden Bell Guard reached the seventh level, he would be able to form an indestructible bell-shaped shield outside his body. Combined with his nunchaku, he would be invulnerable both offensively and defensively.
Realizing that existing ninjutsu was insufficient against certain types of ninja, Rock Lee knew he had to keep innovating to avoid being on the defensive in future battles.
After arriving in Konoha, they went directly to the Hokage’s office to report their mission.
“Third-sama, we didn’t find any trace of Orochimaru. We only found some snake skins. We guessed that he had been gone for some time. On the way back, we encountered an ambush by someone suspected to be Team Root.” Rock Lee reported.
“Root Organization, are you sure?”
“We’ve brought the body back, Tenten.”
Tiantian unfolded the scroll, and as the smoke dissipated, seven corpses appeared on the ground.
“There were nine people in total. We killed seven and two escaped.” Tiantian added.
The Third Hokage confirmed at a glance that these corpses belonged to members of the Root organization. Their attire even seemed familiar to the Third Hokage. Obviously, he had known some of them before.
The Sandaime’s expression was as cold as ice, and his tone revealed his disbelief at Danzo’s behavior. “I never thought Danzo’s indulgence had reached such an outrageous level.”
“You guys leave first. This matter must be kept secret and not mentioned to anyone except Akai.” After giving the order, Sandai asked them to leave.
“Go and get Danzo and the two advisors.”
Moments later, Men Yan and Xiaochun arrived at the scene and immediately noticed the remains of the Root members on the ground.
“Sarutobi, what on earth is going on? These dead people are all members of the Root. Who did it?” Koharu couldn’t help but be curious.
“I’ll explain when Danzo arrives.”
“No need to wait, I’ve arrived.” Danzo’s voice suddenly sounded.
“Danzo, why did you order the Root members to rob and kill Rock Lee? How do you explain the deaths of these people?” The Third Hokage asked directly.
“Danzo, if this behavior targeting ninjas on missions in the village is exposed, the consequences will be disastrous. Have you considered this?” Men Yan asked sternly.
“I suspect Rock Lee has ulterior motives. It is necessary to eliminate the potential threat in advance to prevent future troubles.” Danzo’s tone was cold.
“Having ulterior motives? Do you think every outstanding ninja has ulterior motives? You are abusing your power for personal vendetta, Danzo. Years of working together have shown me through you. Your actions will destroy Konoha.
I will not allow this situation to continue. From this moment on, you will no longer hold any position and will only retain the title of advisor.” Sandai’s tone was firm, leaving no room for compromise.
Men Yan and Xiaochun nodded and agreed that Danzo must be taught a lesson. After all, his behavior this time was too much. He actually killed the ninjas in the village so carelessly.
The group left the Hokage’s office. The Third Hokage felt that he was willing but unable to do anything. After all, time was not forgiving and the responsibilities he shouldered were too heavy.
Perhaps he should summon Jiraiya or Tsunade back to take his place. Thinking of this, the Third Hokage couldn’t help but think of his three disciples, and his longing for Orochimaru came to his mind again.
Rock Lee went to the blacksmith shop and customized two high-quality nunchakus. He discussed the details with the owner of the blacksmith shop, paid a deposit, and agreed to pick them up in three days.
At this time, Neji and Tenten were enjoying delicious food at a street food stall.
“Are you done with your work, Xiao Li?” Tiantian asked curiously.
“Yes, I asked the blacksmith to make two new weapons. I feel that my attack method is too monotonous, so I plan to practice using nunchakus next.”
“Teacher Kai is also an expert with nunchakus, you could ask him for advice,” Neji suggested.
“That’s right.”
Rock Lee once saw the amazing skills of the nunchaku and dreamed of combining it with his own Golden Bell Cover, perhaps to create a whole new way of fighting.
He bought a big bell and planned to start practicing after the nunchakus were made. He is currently training with all his strength, hoping to break through the seventh gate of shock as soon as possible and achieve all-round combat in long-range and short-range combat.
In the center of the second training ground, Rock Lee and Neji were diligently cultivating a masterful fusion of their respective ninjutsu. They launched coordinated attacks from all directions, their rapport growing stronger. Tenten, observing all this from the side, felt a genuine joy at their collaborative innovation, a far more meaningful outcome than mere futile arguments. Rock Lee noticed that Neji had become more optimistic than ever before, his former gloom and fatalism seemingly dissipating amidst the trials and tribulations of training and missions.
At this moment, Naruto suddenly appeared and showed great interest in the combined ninjutsu performed by the two. Rock Lee explained to him in detail the secrets of the combined ninjutsu and how only ninjas with perfect tacit understanding can unleash their true power in times of crisis.
The three quickly arrived at the second training ground. Rock Lee and Neji began to practice their combined ninjutsu from various angles. Whether darting from underground to the clouds or swooping down from the sky, they practiced every possible attack path, their coordination becoming increasingly refined. Tenten watched intently, pleased with their collaborative efforts to create a ninjutsu.
Rock Lee noticed a change in Neji. The once gloomy Neji, convinced that fate was unchangeable, began to become more open-minded and optimistic over time, through intensive training and missions. His worldview gradually broadened, and he continued to improve as a person.
“Hey, Xiao Li, what kind of ninjutsu did you just use? It looks so powerful!” Naruto was standing at the edge of the second training ground without knowing when.
“This is me and my partner Hyuuga Neji, and Tenten. We are trying out a new combination jutsu that combines my jutsu with Neji’s to make it more powerful,” Rock Lee replied with a proud smile.
“Can ninjutsu be combined like this?” Naruto asked in surprise.
“Yes, when two ninjas work together perfectly, they can combine their different ninjutsu in a critical moment and very likely create a combined ninjutsu. Alternatively, a ninja and his clone can simultaneously perform ninjutsu of different attributes. This, while complex, can be very effective.”
“You need to comprehend the mystery of the mutual generation and restraint of the five elements on your own. It requires understanding and proficiency. If you form your own ninja team in the future and cooperate with your teammates tacitly, you may be able to create a unique combination of ninjutsu.” Rock Lee instructed.
He recalled the amazing fusion technique of Naruto and Sasuke during the Fourth Shinobi World War.
“Naruto doesn’t seem to be in class today.”
“Yes, school is on break today and I felt bored, so I came here to practice. I’ll start now, Xiao Li.” Naruto answered firmly.
Watching Naruto practice throwing a kunai, his progress was obvious, clearly a result of long hours of hard training.
At the same time, Neji and Tenten also engaged in mutual sparring, while Rock Lee alone tried to integrate the moves from his previous life’s anime and martial arts and fairy tale TV series, hoping to establish a unique system of physical skills.
In this world, he was unable to absorb natural energy, so practicing hard Qigong became his choice, so the first thing he considered was the Iron Sand Palm.
In that Dharma-Ending Age, the Iron Sand Palm was also very famous. Those who mastered it could even break stones and split monuments. But in this world, he had the Golden Bell Cover to protect his body. With the help of chakra and advanced medical ninjutsu, Rock Lee decided to give it a try.
Having made up his mind, he took action immediately, found a large wooden barrel, and bought a large amount of iron sand from the shop.
He started practicing Iron Sand Palm at home. The iron sand was rough and hard. Rock Lee stretched out his hands and thrust them into the cold iron sand in the bucket.
Rock Lee endured unspeakable pain, silently reciting the Golden Bell Cover technique, and persevered in practicing until he reached the fourth level. His hands were a bloody mess, and his nails had all fallen off, but he knew that only through hardship could he achieve extraordinary success.
Rock Lee persevered through hardships, believing that hard work pays off. Although he had already mastered the Golden Bell Defense to the fourth level, he still felt that the defense was not up to his expectations.
Day after day, from dawn to noon, his nails fell and grew again, repeating the cycle. While cultivating the Golden Bell Cover, he also developed his own unique Iron Sand Palm, striving to concentrate all his strength in his palms so that a single strike could shatter an opponent’s bones and tendons.
Seeing this, his companion Tiantian couldn’t help but ask with concern, “Li, doesn’t it hurt to do this?” Rock Lee replied calmly, “This is the practice of Iron Sand Palm, a path I discovered on my own. Although it’s difficult, with perseverance, my palms will eventually become as strong as rocks, and I can block open blades with my bare hands.”
Neji also tried it, and the pain nearly made him cry out. Looking at Rock Lee, who remained calm, a surge of strength surged in his heart, realizing that others only saw his aura of genius, but didn’t know the hard work behind it.
Inspired by this spirit, Tenten and Neji also became more diligent, and the friendship and strength of the three continued to sublimate in their joint efforts. Their mentor, Kai, had not carried out a mission with them for a long time.
As a top elite jonin, my schedule has become more flexible because my apprentices have each acquired the ability to work on their own and there is no need for me to lead them on missions day after day.
The three of them focused on completing the mission and were also practicing hard, especially Rock Lee, who had already finished making his nunchaku.
In order not to disturb the peace of the villagers, Rock Lee hung a large bell in the second training ground. He waved his nunchaku inside the bell, and his movements were so fast that they were almost invisible, like a phantom.
As the bells rang, Rock Lee always felt that his speed was not enough and he always wanted to go further.
Activating the third gate of the Eight Gates of Dunjia, the “Life Gate,” his speed soared, and the clang clang of the bells became more rapid. Occasionally, a mistake would cause the nunchaku to hit him, leaving purple bruises.
Tenten and Neji have long been accustomed to Rock Lee’s eccentricity.
One day, Mr. Kai came to the second practice field and saw Rock Lee training. He asked curiously, “Little Lee, what are you doing? You even put a clock here.”
“Teacher, I am trying to create a ninjutsu called Golden Bell Cover. My idea is to form a bell-shaped shield composed of chakra and qi on the surface of the body to achieve all-round defense. If a rotating action is added, it can become a mobile version of Kaiten, combining offense and defense in one. When I successfully develop it, I will definitely show it to you,” Rock Lee explained.
After hearing this, Mr. Kai showed his signature shining smile: “As my disciple, you are brave enough to innovate and develop your own ninjutsu. This embodies the true meaning of youth: dare to challenge and dare to try.”
Chapter 10: Hidan (Old Version)
On the training grounds, Rock Lee, nunchaku in hand, prepared to demonstrate his special skills. With a series of rapid swings, he began to accelerate, the shadows of the nunchakus dizzying, and an illusory golden bell shield appeared before him, spinning at an astonishing speed.
“Open the fourth gate – the gate of injury!” As soon as Rock Lee finished speaking, the golden bell’s rotating force became stronger, as if it was made of real gold, and the surrounding air was agitated because of its power.
The Third Hokage watched this unfold with a silent admiration. This was pure taijutsu, Rock Lee creating the illusion of a golden bell with the swift movement of his nunchaku.
After observing for a while, the Third Hokage decided to test Rock Lee’s defense himself, “Little Lee, I’m going to attack.”
With that, he threw a dart and quickly performed the “Dart Shadow Clone Technique.” The darts instantly replicated, rapidly increasing in number and raining down on Rock Lee like a torrential rain. He had used this technique before in his battle with Orochimaru.
However, facing the attack of darts, Rock Lee remained unmoved. His golden bell defense was indestructible and bounced off the darts one by one.
“Well done! Ordinary hidden weapons are indeed difficult to penetrate your defense.” The Third Hokage nodded in praise, then his face became serious. “Next, I will use ninjutsu. Be careful.”
“Earth Escape·Earth Dragon Bomb!” On the ground, a giant dragon made of mud broke out of the ground, lifelike. It opened its mouth wide and shot out earth bombs.
Immediately afterwards, the Third Hokage formed hand seals again, “Fire Style: Fire Dragon Bullet!” A fire dragon roared out, launching a more severe challenge to Rock Lee.
A huge fire dragon broke out of the ground, spewing out scorching flames, tightly wrapping the mud bombs to shape a unique fire and earth fusion shell, showing the exquisite combination of fire and earth escape.
This kind of fusion can only be mastered by strong people like the third generation who have experienced countless battles.
“Open the Dumen!”
Following Rock Lee’s command, the fifth gate opened. His hands were so fast that they could not be seen clearly. The speed of rotation increased further, stirring up a gust of wind. The shape of the golden bell became more solid and the protection range became wider.
The fire and earth combined shells suddenly hit the golden bell, causing a deafening roar and dust flying.
But when the dust settled, the Golden Bell was found intact and standing proudly.
Rock Lee slowed down his rotation, put away his Golden Bell Cover, and closed the Eight Gates.
“Hokage-sama, what do you think?”
“Very good. Your Taijutsu is very creative. This technique would probably be difficult for an average ninja to master.”
“The principle of this technique is actually very simple. It relies on extremely fast swinging of the nunchaku and high-speed rotation, which requires extremely strong physical fitness and speed.
To perform this move, the Eight Gates must be opened to at least the third gate, otherwise the Golden Bell cannot be formed. The main purpose of the rotation is to disperse the force, similar to the Kaiten technique, using rotation to avoid the opponent’s concentrated attack.
Rock Lee expounded on the secrets of his newly created technique, its power growing with each level of the Eight Gates, to the point where he had now steadily mastered the fifth. The Third Hokage’s eyes flickered with admiration. This outspoken young man, sharing the details of his newly created technique, perhaps it was this openness that fueled his rapid growth.
He was open-minded and diligent in his training, and he would surely become a pillar of Konoha in the future, the Third Hokage thought to himself. In contrast, Orochimaru, though brilliant, was dark and full of secrets. Lee, on the other hand, was upright and open, his every improvement evident and inspiring.
“Hokage-sama, would you like to experience the power of his attack yourself?” a voice suggested. “This technique combines the essence of the Hyuga and Inuzuka families, but it is more unique.”
That unique spinning attack immediately came to mind in the Hokage’s mind.
“Indeed, it has shadows of both Hyuga and Inuzuka, but it is completely different. This is a pure physical technique, very different from the secret techniques of the two families. This technique may seem simple, but it is actually not easy. It requires extremely high physical fitness and can only be mastered through rigorous training. And the physical fitness often requires unremitting efforts from childhood.” The Third Hokage commented with a smile.
“This skill will be awarded the honor of A-level ninjutsu. Xiao Li, keep up the good work. In the future, this world will belong to you, the new generation.” The Third Hokage slowly left with an encouraging smile.
Rock Lee was filled with joy. His technique was on par with the Rasengan, and its true essence lay in the Eight Gates.
Apart from the Eight Gates, all other skills seemed secondary. His mind once again reflected on his training plan for the Iron Sand Palm.
Teacher Kai is able to open the Eight Gates and use Night Kai by relying on the strength of his legs; and he will hone his skills in Iron Sand Palm, and when he masters it to perfection, many of his techniques will be improved, and Night Kai and Xi Xiang will also be transformed into palm attacks.
At present, he is strengthening the defense of his palms by inserting iron sand, and in the future he will advance to slapping the iron sand to improve the impact resistance of his palms.
When the hardness of his palm reaches a certain level, he will switch to using small pieces of broken iron, and keep hitting them until the iron turns into iron sand. He will then gradually use larger pieces of broken iron until he has cultivated the Iron Sand Palm to its peak.
By then, his palm power will be able to cut through gold and jade, and be fatal with ease. With one blow, the enemy will either die or be injured.
The Land of Rivers, nestled between the Land of Fire and the Land of Wind, is a war-torn region, the focal point of the Ninja War. It is home to numerous gold and silver exchanges and a throng of mercenary ninjas.
This mission was commissioned by a wealthy man from the Land of Rivers. A cultist, dressed in black with red clouds, was spreading his evil beliefs there, killing several hired ninjas. Therefore, the wealthy man, willing to pay a large sum of money, sought the assistance of ninjas from the Hidden Leaf Village.
The Third Hokage classified this operation as a B-rank mission. Although they were only Genin at the moment, Rock Lee in particular had a combat capability close to that of a Jonin.
When Rock Lee heard the content of the mission, he guessed that the cult member might be Hidan. He might have already joined the Akatsuki organization, and this action might be his personal behavior. As to whether Kakuzu was accompanying him, it is still unknown.
Although Hidan’s ninjutsu is not difficult to crack, the key lies in mastering its secrets; and Kakuzu’s compound ninjutsu is extremely lethal because it is supported by five hearts.
They were wary as they entered Yugakure Village in the Land of the Rivers, a peaceful but underpowered village where Hidan had rebelled.
His obsession with blood sacrifice to the evil god leads to cruel acts that run counter to the village’s peaceful ideals.
After committing countless murders in Yugakure Village and becoming a renegade ninja, Hidan joined the Akatsuki organization and partnered with Kakuzu. One possessed an immortal body, and the other had five hearts, and they worked together seamlessly.
Rock Lee quickly reviewed all the information about Hidan in his mind.
Afterward, they went to meet their client, a wealthy businessman. Hidan’s recent campaign of spreading a cult along major thoroughfares and indiscriminately killing people had already cost several of his guards their lives and severely damaged his business. If this continued, his wealth would be wiped out, so he sought help from Konoha Village.
“We need to find out if Hidan is alone,” Rock Lee pondered, hoping Kakuzu wouldn’t show up. “Are there any other companions nearby?”
“He was alone, and found no sign of any other person,” replied his companion.
This was a perfect time for them to act, Rock Lee thought, they could take the opportunity to weaken the power of Akatsuki and delay their progress in collecting the tailed beasts.
The three of them quickly went deep into the Kingdom of Rivers. This place was very different from the dry scenery of the Kingdom of Winds, and was covered with dense forests everywhere.
Neji activated his Byakugan and soon spotted Hidan, with his silver-haired slicked back hair, sitting at the edge of the woods, holding the famous Three Moons Scythe.
Hidan seemed to have noticed them as well. He stood up and said with a smile, “Oh, Konoha’s ninjas, do you want to join the Evil God Cult? Kill a few more people and you’ll get extra rewards.”
He looked ordinary, without any trace of brutality, but Rock Lee knew that this was just an appearance.
“Be careful!” he suddenly warned, as Hidan’s three-moon sickle flew rapidly towards the three of them. Hidan, who had been so pleasant just a moment ago, suddenly revealed murderous intent. “You will become tribute to the evil god.”
Tenten reacted quickly, unfolding the scroll, and countless hidden weapons rained down on Hidan. Although Hidan blocked some of them with his sickle, many still hit him.
“We succeeded! He’s not as strong as we thought.” Tiantian shouted excitedly.
“Don’t let your guard down,” Rock Lee said sternly, “His immortality won’t be so easy to deal with.”
“It hurts me so much, but in the name of the evil god, I will make you pay!” Feiduan roared, and quickly approached the crowd with a sickle in his hand.
They all gave way and advanced cautiously.
“This guy is immortal. Ordinary damage has no effect on him.” Rock Lee warned his teammates.
“How could such a monster exist in the world?” Neji said in a heavy tone.
Feiduan suddenly swung out the March sickle tied with silk thread, and the trajectory of the sickle under his control was unpredictable.
Faced with the swift attack of Feiduan’s immortal body, everyone realized that the situation was difficult.
Rock Lee swung his nunchaku to counter the scythe’s attack, his eyes fixed on the blade that was flashing with cold light.
“Fifth Gate, Open!”
He activated his potential without hesitation, knowing that he could not afford to lose when fighting against such a powerful enemy. His body was like a whirlwind, and the big bell technique was condensed in an instant.
When Hidan turned to attack Neji, Neji skillfully deflected the sickle with the Kaiten technique, but Tenten seized the opportunity and fired a series of hidden weapons, each one piercing the flesh.
Blood gushed out of Feiduan’s mouth and he was in great pain.
“You bastards, I will cut you into pieces and present you before the throne of the evil god!” He roared, and the blood under his feet drew a pentagram pattern.
“Die!”
He hurled his giant sickle again, aiming directly at Tiantian.
“Deal with this little character first.”
Neji stepped forward and used Kaiten again to bounce back the flying deadly sickle.
Rock Lee’s eyes flashed with determination. Seizing the momentum, he leaped to his feet, shouting, “Feel my new ultimate move—Diamond Drill!” A golden light, swirling as he did so, transformed into a sharp drill, aimed directly at Hidan. Hidan frantically swung his sickle, attempting to block the onslaught. Sparks flew from the clash of metal, but Hidan held out for only a few seconds before Rock Lee’s Diamond Drill sent the sickle flying from his grasp, the violent impact inflicting severe damage to his body.
Hidan let out a heart-wrenching scream, his body flung backward like a kite with its string cut. Half his body was covered in blood, and blood gushed out like a fountain. He roared angrily, “I’m going to kill you!” Despite this, he still stood up tenaciously, and the wounds on his body healed at a speed visible to the naked eye.
Seeing this, Neji quickly took action and used 128 Baguazhang palms. His hands were like phantoms, continuously hitting Feidan’s wounds, making his recovery speed far unable to keep up with the accumulated damage.
Hidan gnashed his teeth in pain, retreating repeatedly and retracting his scythe. Rock Lee knew that only by severing Hidan’s head could this battle be completely ended. He reached for two kunai from Tenten, gripped them tightly, and made his decision.
Rock Lee sheathed his nunchakus and, gripping a kunai in each hand, gently waved them to test the feel. Then, he called out, “Kagemon, activate!” Instantly, a blue storm surged through him, and in a flash, he appeared behind Hidan. Hidan reacted quickly, roaring and swinging his scythe, slashing wildly at Rock Lee behind him.
Rock Lee’s figure was as swift as a whirlwind, repeatedly appearing beside Hidan. Each attack inflicted several more horrific wounds on Hidan’s body. His speed was so fast that he seemed to merge with his shadow, leaving Hidan unable to keep up.
“If Asuma were here, he would have killed him with one blow.” Rock Lee thought regretfully.
He ignored Feiduan’s strange ability, was too confident, and was not fully prepared. He thought that the other party should have died countless times, but his immortal body was too troublesome.
“Die!” Feiduan, ignoring the pain in his body, swung his scythe and slashed wildly at Rock Lee. Rock Lee was quick-witted and swift-handed, grabbing the deadly weapon amidst the blood. Feiduan showed his madness, licking the blood from his lips and laughing wildly.
“Sacrifice you to the great evil god!” he declared madly.
At this moment, Neji arrived in time and hit Feidan’s weapon-holding arm hard with continuous Baguazhang. Rock Lee took the opportunity to exert force and snatch the sickle.
“Ningji, get out of the way!” With Rock Lee’s shout, Neji quickly fell to the ground, and Rock Lee raised his sword and slashed it. The sharp sickle cut across Hidan’s neck, bringing up a cloud of blood, and his head fell off.
“Seal him!” Following the order, Tenten acted swiftly, sealing Hidan, who was left with only his head. Despite this, Hidan continued to curse madly, but ultimately could not escape the fate of being completely bound.
Chapter 11: Lightning Body Refining (Old Version)
Neji looked at Rock Lee with deep eyes, feeling sincere admiration for the broad-mindedness he displayed, and realizing that he seemed a little cramped in comparison.
After successfully completing their mission, the three embarked on their journey back to Konoha. As night fell, the game Lee had personally hunted became a fragrant barbecue. The three sat together, sharing their thoughts. These were the last peaceful years in the ninja world, but the flames of war would rage in the years ahead.
“Ningji, you have a dream, right?” Rock Lee pressed. “No one is without a dream.”
Neji lay on his back under the night sky, his eyes piercing the stars. “When I was little, I longed to become an outstanding ninja under my father’s guidance. But since my father passed away, those dreams have dissipated. Now, I only hope to protect my companions, whether it is you now or everyone who will join us in the future.”
Rock Lee knew very well that although Neji looked cold on the outside, he was actually passionate on the inside. He did not make promises easily because he valued emotions more than life.
“Tiantian, what about you?” He turned to another companion.
“My dream is to become a powerful kunoichi like Tsunade-sama,” Tenten answered firmly.
“What about you, Xiao Li, what is your dream?”
“My dream is to prove that even if one only relies on physical skills, one can become a truly strong person. I believe that everyone comes to this world with a unique mission, and my mission is to prove that even if one is not good at ninjutsu and genjutsu, one can still stand among the strong.” Xiao Li’s tone was full of firmness and determination.
The three of them lay together on the lush green grass, gazing at the boundless starry sky and sharing their aspirations and dreams. At that moment, Rock Lee felt deeply that perhaps this kind of time was what happiness was all about, even if it was as fleeting as a shooting star.
The next day, they ended their journey and returned to Konoha Village. In the afternoon, they went directly to the Hokage’s office to submit their mission report.
“Hokage, we discovered that the cult organization in River Country is actually composed of one member. He wears clothes similar to Itachi. I guess they may belong to the same organization. This guy has immortality. We tried our best to successfully seal him. This is his head.” Rock Lee reported as he unfolded the scroll. The seal was lifted and Hidan’s head appeared.
Even though Feidan was left with only his head, he remained as arrogant as ever: “If you dare to harm me, the evil god will punish you.”
Rock Lee responded nonchalantly: “If you dare to be so presumptuous again, I will throw you into the toilet and let you taste the taste of the cesspool.” This sentence put an abrupt end to Feidan’s threat.
The Third Hokage was also amazed at this scene. After all, it was rare for a life form to survive with its head and body separated. “It’s truly rare! I’ve witnessed many ninjas’ extraordinary abilities, but this is the first time I’ve seen one that can survive with its head and body separated,” he exclaimed.
Tenten then handed the scroll that sealed Hidan’s body to the Sandaime. “You’ve worked hard, go and rest. I’ll give you three days off. As for this person, I’ll let Haiyi investigate in depth,” the Hokage ordered.
“Yes!” The three of them retreated.
That day, I inadvertently saved Asma from a crisis. Although he didn’t realize it, he couldn’t escape the banquet.
In the Hokage’s office, the Third Hokage was having a secret conversation with Yamanaka Inoichi.
“This immortal man is still alive. Take him back and thoroughly investigate the intentions of the organization he belongs to.” The Hokage instructed Haiyi seriously.
“Hey, old man, can you help me connect my head and body back together? It’s really tiring to talk like this.” Feidan couldn’t help but complain, feeling extremely annoyed by the fact that no part of his body could move.
Haiyi’s eyes flashed with interest, “As you wish, Hokage-sama.”
“Hurry up and restore my body, otherwise you will be punished by the evil god!” Feiduan was a little angry.
Haiyi re-arrested Feidan and brought him back to the intelligence department. He was full of curiosity about this phenomenon of immortality.
At the same time, in a secret cave somewhere in Rain Country, members of Akatsuki were discussing.
“Kakuzu, where is Hidan? Why hasn’t he shown up?”
“He said he was going to find a sacrifice for his evil god. Didn’t he receive our summons?”
“Has he been dealt with, or sealed by someone?” Scorpion guessed with an ominous tone.
“I’ve always felt that his behavior is annoying. He has no ability but likes to put on airs. I would like to let him see my art.” Deidara interrupted.
“Zetu, go check on Hidan.”
After a long time, Jue returned.
“The signs of a battlefield and those symbols are obvious, but Hidan and his gang are nowhere to be seen. The strength of those who came should not be underestimated, and they use the soft fist technique with ease. This is most likely an elite team sent by Konoha.” Jue observed carefully.
“I guess it’s Rock Lee, Neji Hyuga and Tenten’s trio, and there might even be Might Guy involved.” Itachi analyzed calmly.
“That man’s behavior is indeed outrageous. He spreads evil cults in broad daylight and commits crimes openly. He always moves around in a few fixed locations, which is likely the result of villagers asking Konoha for help.” Kakuzu interjected.
“Were we looking for him in the first place because of his bounty? That guy has a rigid mindset and his propaganda about his evil cult never changes location.”
“Everyone, continue to gather information on the tailed beasts. Once we are fully prepared, we will take action. Now, disperse.”
Afterwards, Rock Lee and the other two left the Hokage’s office building and strolled through the bustling streets of Konoha.
Tenten was holding a few strings of fragrant sesame balls in her hand, tasting them as she walked; Ningji shared the grilled herring he bought, which was a rare delicacy in this world.
Rock Lee took a bite and found the flavor unique. The fresh herring had a delicious texture, very different from what he had known on Earth. Perhaps this was a flavor unique to the Naruto world, as each world had its own unique flavor.
In this Naruto world full of ninjutsu and adventure, the three friends strolled through the market, tasting all kinds of delicious food along the way and enjoying the good times of their youth. In Konoha Village, graduating from the Ninja Academy at the age of twelve is the age to explore the world and train oneself.
After they strolled around and made plans for training tomorrow with full stomachs, Rock Lee walked towards home alone.
“Xiao Li, wait a moment.”
“Teacher Kai, you’re back! Did the mission go well?” Rock Lee asked excitedly. He hadn’t seen this respected teacher for a long time.
“I’ve heard about your recent performance. You’ve made great progress. This is the power of youth. You must move forward courageously. Also, you don’t need to worry about Danzo anymore. He has been dismissed by the Third Hokage.”
“Well, the A-rank ninjutsu ‘Golden Bell Cover’ that I developed has also been recognized by the Third-Hero.”
“This is all thanks to your own efforts. My guidance is just supplementary. You have proven yourself and are no longer the kid who always lags behind.”
The two chatted as they walked to Rock Lee’s house. Mr. Gai noticed the iron sand used for training.
“The iron sand palm technique you practice is very dangerous. The iron sand may contain toxins. If you are not careful, it may cause unexpected damage. Practicing it for a long time will also cause considerable harm to your opponent.”
“Teacher, my body has a unique recovery ability, and ordinary injuries can heal quickly. This is why I can persist in such rigorous training.” Rock Lee answered confidently.
Instructor Kai nodded in praise. He had long been aware of Rock Lee’s extraordinary talent in physical skills. Although he seemed mediocre in ninjutsu and illusion, he was very talented in physical skills.
This is the wonder of life: when one door closes, another opens. After three months of rigorous Iron Sand Palm training, supplemented by the internal gong of the Golden Bell Cover, Rock Lee is ready to take on the challenge of hitting the iron sand bag.
The sandbag was filled with heavy iron sand. Rock Lee kept hitting it with his palms, while using the power of the Golden Bell Cover to increase his striking power.
Although his palm quickly became red and swollen, after a night of rest, the injury was almost healed and he returned to daytime training.
The day of gathering arrived, and Rock Lee received a lower-level C-rank mission. In peacetime, this was a rare mission that did not involve fierce fighting.
Unlike the previous missions where he had fierce battles with ninjas, this time he needed to escort a grain merchant from the Land of Lightning and was responsible for safely transporting dozens of carts of grain back to the capital of the Land of Lightning.
As one of the five major ninja villages, the strongest fighting force in the Land of Lightning is none other than the AB brothers, namely the Raikage and the eight Jinchūriki.
The mission route starts from the capital of the Fire Kingdom, passes through the Soup Kingdom and the Moon Kingdom, and finally arrives at the Thunder Kingdom. The journey is long and most of the accompanying personnel are ordinary people, so the journey is quite slow.
Rock Lee, along with his companions, headed towards the capital of the Fire Nation with his employer.
The residents of the Land of Lightning have dark and rough skin. Swordsmanship and physical skills are particularly popular there, and many people in the Hidden Cloud Village are masters of swordsmanship.
Rock Lee’s heart was filled with yearning for the thunder and lightning of the Land of Lightning. He imagined himself on the high mountain where thunder roared all year round, using the power of thunder and lightning to improve his unique skill of the Golden Bell Cover.
After arriving at the capital of the Fire Nation, they met Osamo, a merchant from the Lightning Nation. His caravan was loaded with mountains of food and was preparing to sail directly to the Lightning Nation by sea, avoiding the borders of small countries along the way.
In the Land of Fire, the convoy arrived at the dock without incident. Osama paid the drivers and let them go. The fleet was already waiting.
On the watchtower, Neji looked vigilantly into the distance at the rippling blue sea and the gentle breeze.
“Attention, pirates are approaching from the southeast.” Neji’s voice spread throughout the fleet.
Rock Lee quickly jumped onto the watchtower and looked out. Sure enough, five or six pirate ships were slowly approaching them. In this Naruto world, pirates were not taken seriously. They were usually made up of some wandering samurai and ninjas who lacked systematic training and guidance.
Soon, the pirate ship approached.
“You are surrounded. Stop the ship and surrender immediately, and you may be able to save your life.” The pirates shouted.
Rock Lee stood at the bow and shouted in a deep voice, “Jingmen, start!”
Then came a voice: “To the Peacock!”
He swung his fists rapidly, sparks flying with every blow, and the wind from his fists, carrying flames, rushed straight towards the approaching pirate ship.
Rock Lee’s punches were as fast as lightning, and the sparks produced during the fierce battle with pirates were as dense as a rainstorm. Every drop of spark that fell on the deck left a deep mark.
The pirates were forced to flee in all directions by his attack, and soon the surrounding pirate ships hoisted white flags to indicate surrender.
The fleet that successfully repelled the pirates arrived safely in the Land of Thunder. After completing their mission, they began to investigate within the country.
As ninjas, they not only carry out missions but also need to gather intelligence. Their purpose in coming to the Land of Lightning is to gain a deeper understanding of the local customs and culture, as well as any possible unrest.
“Ningji, Tenten, let’s split up and meet at the dock in three days,” Rock Lee suggested.
“Good idea. We can collect more intelligence by acting separately.” The two agreed.
Rock Lee went alone to a nearby high mountain, which was famous for its constant thunder and lightning, forming the characteristics of the Land of Lightning.
He passed through the steep mountain road, the roar of thunder and lightning echoed in the valley. He followed the thunder and came to a valley surrounded by mountains.
Here, Rock Lee takes out his full metal nunchaku and raises it above his head, trying to attract lightning.
He was shocked at his own crazy idea, however, when the lightning struck the ground, leaving a charred area and sparking blue sparks, Rock Lee’s heart was filled with shock and awe.
Even the strongest person will inevitably feel insignificant in the face of the mighty power of nature.
Deep in the valley, Rock Lee was running fast with his nunchaku in hand. Suddenly, there was a loud thunderclap and a bolt of lightning struck down, hitting his weapon.
At that moment, Rock Lee felt as if he were being roasted, his body charred black. He immediately discarded his nunchaku, sat cross-legged on the spot, and began to gather his Golden Bell Cover.
Thunder continued to roar above his head and occasionally fell around him, but Rock Lee’s heart was as calm as water, all distractions gone, and he devoted himself to the operation of the Golden Bell Cover.
As the Golden Bell Cover was activated, a vital energy emerged, nourishing every inch of his skin.
The cells destroyed by lightning are quickly expelled, new cells quickly divide and fill the gap, and the body begins to repair itself.
Rock Lee felt the life force contained in the Golden Bell Cover. It was a unique life force that strengthened his internal organs and pushed the Golden Bell Cover to a higher level.
When the lightning energy was exhausted, Rock Lee gripped the nunchaku again, ready to face the next challenge.
Sure enough, thunder rumbled again in the sky, and a thicker bolt of lightning struck his nunchaku.
This time, Rock Lee was knocked down by a powerful force, his whole body was charred as charcoal, and it was almost unrecognizable if you didn’t look closely.
Chapter 12: The Powerful Me (Old Version)
At the port of the Land of Thunder, the three partners gathered as planned to exchange the information they had obtained.
After Rock Lee’s diligent training, he had broken through to the fifth level of his Golden Bell Guard. Not only had his skin become indestructible, but his internal organs seemed to have been reborn with vitality. After returning from their mission, they agreed to train together the next day before going their separate ways.
Upon returning home, Locke threw himself into the practice of Iron Sand Palm. His palms, now incredibly powerful thanks to his Golden Bell Guard training, cracked sandbags with a single blow. He then purchased several sturdy cowhide bags to accommodate his growing palm power. He encountered Naruto on the street, and the two exchanged banter. Locke cleverly used the cowhide bags as a metaphor for boasting, causing Naruto to pause, then burst into laughter.
Three days later, they gathered again at the familiar dock to update each other on the intelligence they had obtained.
Rock Lee’s Golden Bell Cover has been practiced to perfection. His body is stronger than before, and his internal organs appear more vibrant as if they have experienced the baptism of thunder and lightning.
After reporting to Konoha Village that the mission was complete, the three agreed on a training plan for tomorrow and then left.
Back home, Rock Lee continued his Iron Sand Palm training. His palm power was now so great that a single blow could shatter a sandbag. To achieve this, he purchased several durable cowhide bags.
“Xiao Li, what are you going to use these for?” Naruto, who happened to pass by, asked curiously.
“I need a stronger sandbag for my Iron Sand Palm. How’s your training been going lately?”
“I’m making rapid progress. Do you want to compete with me? Be careful not to be defeated by me.”
“I’ll give you this cowhide bag, try blowing it first.” Locke said jokingly.
“Why are you blowing that? I mean we should compete.” Naruto replied in confusion.
“Haha, bragging is free.” Locke joked.
Naruto was stunned for a moment, then he understood Locke’s double meaning and couldn’t help laughing.
“Xiao Li, are you doubting my strength? Well, let’s test our skills on the training ground today and see how much I’ve grown.”
Soon, the two arrived at the second training ground. Xiao Li took the classic Xiao Li style starting stance in the Naruto world, with one arm hanging down at his side and the other arm extended forward.
Naruto quickly took out several shurikens and threw them at Rock Lee, but Rock Lee used only a kunai to easily knock down all the incoming shurikens.
Naruto followed suit and charged forward with a kunai in hand, but in Lee’s eyes, those seemingly fast attacks were as slow as a snail.
Facing Naruto’s thrust, Rock Lee grabbed his wrist and blocked a barrage of kicks with one hand. Naruto used the momentum to twist his body and kick out with both legs, but Rock Lee blocked each one with just one hand, then gave Naruto a slight push, causing him to lose his balance.
“You’ve done very well and have made significant progress.”
“You didn’t even fight seriously and I was defeated. I really don’t know when I can catch up with your level.” Naruto said disappointedly.
“Once you officially graduate and are exposed to more ninjutsu, your progress will be rapid. The current ninja school is mainly to help you lay the foundation, so be patient.”
Naruto quickly regained his spirits and began to imagine himself making rapid progress after graduation and becoming a powerful figure. He laughed out loud, leaving Lee in a state of confusion.
“Come on, I’ll take you to eat ramen and let you eat as much as you want.”
Soon, they were sitting in Ichiraku Ramen.
“Boss, give me six large bowls of tonkotsu ramen with extra toppings!” Naruto shouted to the boss generously.
“I’ll have seafood ramen.”
After filling their stomachs, the two walked out of the ramen shop filled with fragrant aroma.
“Li, I will do my best. Don’t be surprised if the day comes when I surpass you.”
“I’m looking forward to that moment too.”
After returning home, Rock Lee put the iron sand into a tough cowhide bag, which was more durable this time.
His palms hit the iron sand violently, and the crisp sound echoed in the air. While practicing the iron sand palm, Rock Lee also kept hitting the sandbag.
In a secret basement in Sound Village.
“Lord Orochimaru, Kimimaro’s condition has worsened again. He seems unable to be your vessel.” Kabuto Yakushi, wearing a pair of glasses and with an unnatural smile on his face, reported softly.
This seemingly kind man hides cunning beneath his smile.
“It doesn’t matter. I’m about to get Sasuke, and he is my perfect host. As for the plan to subvert Konoha, Kabuto, how is the progress?” Orochimaru asked in a hoarse and terrifying voice.
“Everything is ready. We just need to wait for the Kazekage to leave for Konoha. Then we will successfully ambush him and use the One-Tail Jinchuriki to disrupt the competition to ensure the smooth implementation of our plan.”
“Very good, then I will personally play the role of Kazekage, commanding the Sand Village to work together with the Sound Ninja to destroy Konoha in one fell swoop.
“Konoha is already a rotten tree, especially that old guy, it’s time for him to die. Let me see him off in person, hahaha!” Orochimaru laughed crazily, like a madman.
“I wish Lord Orochimaru every success.” Kabuto took the opportunity to flatter him.
Rock Lee knew in his heart that the war was about to spread. Although the upcoming battle was not grand, it was the first real war he faced.
He thought to himself that if he could defeat Gaara in the second round of the preliminaries and prevent him from advancing to the finals, then Orochimaru’s invasion plan might be delayed accordingly.
This idea made Rock Lee have an idea. If he could defeat Gaara, then in the final he would face his dream opponent – Uchiha Sasuke.
He hoped that through his efforts, he could alleviate some of the losses for Konoha Village. After all, after Orochimaru’s conspiracy, Konoha was no longer as strong as it used to be, becoming strong on the surface but empty on the inside.
In order to achieve this goal, Rock Lee came to the training ground, concentrated his strength on one finger, and suddenly inserted it into the tree trunk. With a “swish”, four knuckles were embedded in the tree.
The resistance he felt was minimal, and the power of the Iron Sand Palm had reached its peak, all thanks to the assistance of the Golden Bell Cover.
With the help of the Golden Bell Cover, his Iron Sand Palm became extremely powerful and almost reached its peak.
Then, Rock Lee used both hands to strike the tree trunk repeatedly. After two “swish” sounds, he tore it with both hands, and a large piece of bark and sawdust fell down.
Satisfied with his performance, he took out a kunai and stabbed it into his palm, leaving only a red dot on his palm that disappeared in an instant, proving that his defense was almost perfect.
Tempered by the toughness of the Golden Bell, Xiao Li’s physical resilience has been significantly enhanced, making him a miniature, tenacious life form. Unless struck by a fatal blow, ordinary penetrating damage would not easily kill him. Deep in the dense forest, Xiao Li sweated profusely, his iron palms slamming into the tree trunks, leaving deep marks and a thunderous sound. As he continued to practice, the surrounding trees were covered with his palm prints.
He then changed his hand gestures, his sharp claws piercing the air, leaving a complex web of scratches on the surrounding tree trunks. Xiao Li’s figure loomed in the woods, and every move he made left a deep mark.
“Xiao Li, your Iron Sand Palm has been mastered.” Tiantian asked excitedly.
“I’m still far from it, but I’m getting there,” he replied modestly. “The flow between the moves isn’t smooth enough yet.”
“This power is truly astonishing. Compared to Iwagakure’s hardening technique, your Iron Sand Palm is like a permanent strengthening possession.” Neji commented appreciatively.
Lee encouraged, “Ningji, you have to believe that destiny can be changed. As long as you work hard, anything is possible. Don’t let your inner constraints limit your potential.”
Neji pondered for a long time, deeply moved by Lee’s growth. From an ordinary ninja upon graduating from the academy to now, through unremitting efforts, he had achieved amazing achievements in just one year. Lee’s story deeply touched him.
Although a praised genius in the Hyuga clan, Neji is often trapped by self-pity.
Under Rock Lee’s straightforward words and long-term influence, all the accumulated emotions finally burst out.
“I need some time alone,” Neji announced, lowering his head and starting to walk away. “I won’t be training with you guys anytime soon.”
“Xiao Li, you shouldn’t have provoked him like that,” Tiantian said, not without complaint. “He’s already changed a lot. We can slowly guide him to change his mindset.”
“He needs this kind of stimulation,” Rock Lee insisted. “Only by untangling the knots within can one promote growth. Wavering between the struggles of one’s own destiny and the cultivation of one’s own will will not lead to true strength.”
Only with a resolute will can one reach the summit. This is merely a minor setback in life’s journey; once you see it through, it’s nothing more than that. There are many in the world less fortunate than him, and there are many who never give up their dreams until death. Neji’s life should not be confined by the mere shackles of a ‘caged bird’.
Only by breaking down the barriers he has built in his heart can he achieve true freedom. What has bound him is never the ‘bird in a cage’, but the walls he has built in his heart.
Tenten was stunned, looking at Rock Lee, as if he had come to some understanding: “Maybe, you are right.”
With Neji’s departure, the two lost the will to continue their training. Rock Lee also began to ponder, his memories of his past life as Hokage becoming increasingly hazy, and he realized that he had already spent many years in this world.
The memory of the Chunin Exams left a deep scar on Rock Lee’s heart—the sacrifice of the Third Hokage, the heavy losses suffered by Konoha Village, and even Jiraiya’s timely assistance failing to fully reverse the losses. He resolved to do his utmost to improve his own strength in the next few months to minimize future losses in Konoha.
With this resolve, Rock Lee threw himself into rigorous self-training. Basic physical exercises like push-ups, sandbag punches, and wooden stake drills proved ineffective in improving his strength. His custom-made weighted vest, with adjustable weights, eliminated the need for frequent changes. The current 2,000-jin load should support him for a while.
To further strengthen his Golden Bell Guard, Rock Lee went to a blacksmith’s shop and ordered a pure steel stake. Having reached the fifth level of his Golden Bell Guard, ordinary fatigue-induced energy was no longer sufficient; he needed to give it his all.
However, this wasn’t enough. Rock Lee envisioned an even more extreme training method: building a metal electric house to stimulate his body with high-voltage currents, hoping to achieve a breakthrough in his Golden Bell Guard. However, to do this, he needed the Hokage’s permission to increase the voltage in his home.
Arriving at the door of the Hokage’s office, Rock Lee knocked on the door.
“Please come in, oh, it’s Xiao Li. What can I do for you?” asked the Third Hokage.
“Hokage-sama, I wish to increase the voltage in my home.” Rock Lee made a direct request.
“Increase the voltage? This is a rare request. Is the voltage at home unstable?” The Third Hokage was a little surprised. This was the first time he had encountered such a request during his tenure as Hokage.
The village has ample electricity supply, and he doesn’t even need special permission to adjust the voltage.
“I plan to build an all-metal cabin and use electric currents for training to stimulate the body and strengthen it.”
“This training method is quite novel, and is quite similar to the Raikage’s Lightning Armor training method.
The lightning armor of the Hidden Cloud Village uses lightning to train the body, but few people can succeed. Only the successive Raikages can master it.
This is an attempt, how do you plan to proceed?”
“I plan to run a special high-voltage line connected to a voltage regulator that can go from 240 volts to 100,000 volts.”
“One hundred thousand volts, that’s the power of heavenly thunder. Are you sure you can withstand it?”
“I plan to start with 240 volts and work my way up. Once I get used to it, I’ll increase the voltage.”
“Since you have made up your mind, I agree, but you must act with caution and not be reckless.”
“As you command, Hokage-sama.”
Rock Lee found a professional construction team to build an all-metal cabin.
He also invited an electrician from Konoha, and with the approval of the Third Generation, he installed high-voltage lines and a voltage-adjusting device outside the house. By simply pressing a button inside the house, the entire metal house could be filled with electricity.
Rock Lee endured the heart-wrenching pain, his limbs dancing like a phantom, repeatedly launching fierce attacks on the metal piles, while activating the defense of the Golden Bell.
With each attack, his sweat and blood mixed together, staining the ground a horrifying red. However, he seemed to be unaware of the pain and continued this cruel training.
He knew very well that only through going through hardships could one achieve great things; there is no free gift in the world, and the more you give, the more you gain.
In the Hokage’s office, the Third Hokage witnessed all this through the crystal ball and was shocked by Rock Lee’s tenacity.
“It’s this kind of indomitable will that allows people to overcome huge obstacles and move forward. This child’s perseverance is truly amazing.”
Recalling Rock Lee’s past, the Third Hokage knew that he was once an unknown civilian in Konoha Village. He could only be an ordinary ninja at best, or even just an unknown soldier on the battlefield.
If he hadn’t become a ninja, he might have lived an ordinary life, working day after day to make ends meet.
I used to think that his achievements were due to his talent and the guidance of Teacher Kai, but now it seems that what really pushed him forward was his extraordinary efforts.
The effort Rock Lee puts in is a hundred times more than that of a genius, which makes the Third Generation very proud. Such perseverance is rare in Konoha Village.
After an hour of intense training, Rock Lee’s hands and feet were exposed to the bones. This scene was horrifying, but it also witnessed his indomitable will.
Chapter 13 Conception (Old Version)
Rock Lee’s body healed and then opened again under the shock of the electric current. With unwavering will, he activated his Golden Bell, enduring the pain that felt like a thousand ants biting and a millstone crushing him. At the height of the pain, he couldn’t help but scream, a release from the pressure, a sympathetic expression of his resilience. However, the life force concentrated within the Golden Bell finally withstood the onslaught of pain. The wounds no longer opened due to the current, and the pain gradually subsided. Only then did Rock Lee take a deep breath, relaxing his tense body, thinking to himself that even the pain of Itachi’s Tsukuyomi might be no more than this.
The scheduled training time had arrived. Rock Lee had planned to practice with Tenten, but he hadn’t anticipated being unable to attend due to excessive training. Tenten arrived, standing before the bloodstained metal stake, the marks of fists and kicks vividly visible. Tears welled up in her eyes as she watched. She understood that these were evidence of Rock Lee’s excessive self-improvement, the reason he hadn’t been able to attend as scheduled.
Rock Lee felt a significant improvement in the fifth level of his Golden Bell Guard and was secretly delighted. This training method was indeed effective. However, when he turned off the power, fatigue instantly overwhelmed him. He realized that such training was extremely taxing on his body and could not be repeated frequently. He decided to adjust the frequency of his training according to his recovery.
When he walked out of the metal training room, he saw Tiantian’s eyes blurred with tears.
“Tiantian, who makes you so sad?” he asked anxiously.
“It’s you, Rock Lee. You’re too hard on yourself. No one’s putting pressure on you, so why are you so eager to succeed and disregard your own safety?”
“Don’t cry, Tiantian. I do this so I won’t regret it in the future. I don’t want to see my companions suffer misfortune because I’m unable to protect them. Now is the time when I’m most determined. I can’t let my guard down.”
“I understand your determination, but you must also take care of your health. We are partners in adversity. I understand you and will work harder to avoid regrets. Rock Lee, could you give me some advice on my hidden weapon techniques? Your methods are so diverse, even surpassing those of Master Kai.”
Rewritten statement:
Rock Lee sensed a qualitative leap in his Golden Bell’s fifth level, and he couldn’t help but rejoice. This training method was indeed effective. However, after turning off the power, he felt overly exhausted and realized that he had to carefully arrange his training cycles according to his body’s recovery.
As he stepped out of the training room, he witnessed Tiantian crying like rain.
“What happened, Tiantian? Tell me, who made you so sad.”
“You’re the one who breaks my heart, Rock Lee. Why are you so cruel to yourself? No one is forcing you, so why are you so anxious and even disregarding your own safety?”
“Don’t cry. I’m fighting so hard because I don’t want to have any regrets in the future. I don’t want to watch my companions get hurt because of me, and I can’t do anything about it. Now that I have this determination, I must seize it.”
“I understand your persistence and will support you. As a partner fighting alongside you, I will work even harder to avoid regrets in the future. Rock Lee, could you offer some advice on my hidden weapon techniques? Your methods are so numerous and ingenious that even Master Kai would be ashamed of them.”
Rock Lee recalled the Chunin Exams, when Tenten was powerless against Temari’s fan attack, her hidden weapon blown away like a toy. While Tenten was much stronger now, she still lacked Temari’s power. To avoid being restrained again, she needed to increase her strength, making her hidden weapon heavier or more powerful.
In addition, close combat is also key, using short weapons to limit Temari’s fan. Rock Lee bluntly reminded Tenten: “Your hidden weapon is too light and not powerful enough. It will be very difficult to face the wind-style ninja.”
Tenten confessed that he was practicing using chakra lines to control hidden weapons. In response, Rock Lee raised a higher requirement: “Can you make hidden weapons pass through hurricanes? When you can do this, your hidden weapon skills will be truly mature and no one will be able to restrain you.”
“Have you heard of the hidden weapon that never misses its target?” he continued. “Speed is key. From now on, you must practice how to exert force and change the shape of the hidden weapon, making it thinner and lighter to overcome air resistance.”
In daily training and duels, Rock Lee always emphasized the importance of cherishing the use of scrolls. He advocated: “Scrolls are not capital that can be used up at the beginning. Real combat requires continuous endurance and wisdom.” He encouraged the production of exquisite and lightweight hidden weapons, and required that every hidden weapon be devoted to ensure accuracy and power.
“Exercise is the foundation. Sticking to push-ups and weight training every day is the key to increasing speed and strength.” Rock Lee knew that only when the speed of the hidden weapon was perfectly combined with his own strength could he gain an advantage in the contest with Temari. “If the hidden weapon can penetrate her wind shield, the balance of victory will tilt towards us.”
As Tiantian leaves to forge his own deadly weapon, only time will tell what the outcome will be.
After a tough training session, Rock Lee went deep into the forest to hunt buffalo to replenish his strength, but found that buffalo wasn’t very nutritious. So, he came up with a bold plan: to contract a mountain and raise cattle nourished with herbs to improve the quality of the beef.
“This experience made me realize I need a more efficient way to recover my strength.” He plans to plant plants on the mountain that replenish qi and blood and feed the cattle on them. In the long run, the quality of the beef will be improved. “Although it will take at least a year to see the results, I have decided to take the first step and contract that piece of mountain.”
Rock Lee stepped into the Hokage’s office again.
“Xiao Li, what do you want to discuss?”
“Hokage-sama, I wish to obtain the contract rights for the hills or forests surrounding the village.”
“Well, what’s your purpose? Do you have some new and unusual training plan? Tell me about it. After all, for an old man like me, it’s fun to hear new ideas from young people.”
“This time it’s not for training, but to improve our lives. Hokage, have you ever thought about why, besides dying on the battlefield, there are so many premature deaths among us ninjas?”
“Why is that?”
The Third Hokage couldn’t help but feel curious. Indeed, many ninjas died in their forties, an age when their abilities and experience should have reached their peak, yet they passed away so early. Could Lee know the secret?
“If a person has an unbalanced diet for a long time, or even goes hungry, malnutrition will naturally occur. Hokage-sama should agree with this.”
“Indeed, I agree with you that long-term hunger will naturally lead to malnutrition.”
“Similarly, due to the huge amount of exercise a ninja does, if they can’t get enough energy from their diet, their body functions will naturally be affected over time.
Therefore, I plan to raise cattle and sheep on that land and grow medicinal herbs so that they can eat them and the meat they grow will be richer in nutrients.”
“This plan makes a lot of sense. I’ll allocate a mountain range south of Hokage Rock to you. Come on, Lee. The future of Konoha depends on the wisdom and strength of young people like you.”
After completing his duties at the Hokage’s office, Rock Lee immediately took on several D-rank missions, including procuring and planting medicinal herb seeds and handling livestock-related matters. After completing these missions, he chose not to spend much, opting instead to return home and continue his training. Over the past year, he had accumulated considerable funds through completing these missions, but aside from purchasing training equipment and entertaining friends a few times, he had rarely used these savings, believing that in a world where strength reigned supreme, power was paramount.
When the small team of three gathered again, Rock Lee noticed that Neji seemed to have changed. His eyes were no longer so cold, and he seemed to be starting to untie the shackles in his heart and live more like himself.
As the Chunin Exam approaches, they notice that there seems to be some unusual movement in the Sand Village, and the three are ordered to conduct an in-depth investigation. They gradually realize that the Sand Village may have long harbored the intention of attacking Konoha, and that their cooperation with Orochimaru is just a matter of mutual benefit – for Orochimaru, Sasuke is obviously more important than the Sound Village or even Konoha.
With this in mind, they decided to report Gaara’s identity as the One-Tail Jinchuriki to Konoha so that the village could prepare in advance.
For safety’s sake, they avoided the perilous Rain Kingdom and chose to rest temporarily in the River Kingdom, renowned for its lush forests, rolling mountains, and deep canyons. After a day’s rest there, they continued their journey to the Wind Kingdom. However, infiltrating the Wind Kingdom would undoubtedly prove challenging.
To avoid detection, the three figures cleverly donned the attire of Wind Country residents, wrapping their heads in clean white cloth. Neji donned a wide-brimmed conical hat to conceal his unusual Byakugan, and Tenten’s right face was also carefully covered with a white cloth. Disguised as ordinary vendors, they casually selected and purchased some local specialties, then, pushing their loaded carts, set off on the road to the Sand Village.
Arriving at the two towering terraced mountains before Sand Village, they carefully pretended to be ordinary people, slowly pushing their carts through the canyon. The entrance to Sand Village was bustling with people, with vendors from all over the place gathering. The three of them blended in with the crowd, trying to enter the village unnoticed.
But the Anbu of Sunagakure were heavily guarded, and they were eventually stopped and questioned by the guards.
“What are you doing here?”
Rock Lee pretended to be timid and walked forward bravely.
“Sir, we are just here to sell some of our local specialties for a little money.”
The guard briefly checked their cart, confirmed the cargo, and let it go without any suspicion.
The houses of the Sand Village are uniquely designed, mostly circular, to protect against wind and sand. Despite the harsh environment, the residents live a peaceful and happy life, filled with laughter. The three of them were in no rush to sell their goods, but instead asked Tenten to watch over the vehicles while Rock Lee and Neji, under the guise of buying local specialties, roamed the village, secretly gathering the necessary intelligence.
“Hey, old man, everyone says that your Sand Village is peaceful. I come from a small town in the east, but deaths happen frequently there and people live in fear.” Rock Lee said, shaking his head.
The old man next to him seemed to feel the same way. After looking around, he whispered, “In fact, the Sand Village is not peaceful either. There is a man named Gaara in the village who is regarded as a monster. He seems to have a monster inside him, which often leads to killings. The Kazekage has sent ninjas to assassinate him many times, but they all failed.”
Rock Lee pretended to be surprised. “There are such monsters? It seems that it is difficult to find a safe place in this world. I was planning to save enough money to move here, but now it seems that I have given up.”
They continued to exchange information about Gaara, mentioning that he was actually the descendant of the Fourth Kazekage, and the rumors of the monster inside his body were even more frightening.
The three of them gathered together later, hurriedly sold the local specialties in their hands, and then left the Sand Village with their gains.
Neji asked suspiciously, “Little Lee, do you believe the rumor that the son of the Kazekage is a monster? Could it be that people are spreading rumors and deliberately misleading us?”
Rock Lee thought for a moment and replied, “There’s no smoke without fire. This Gaara is most likely the One-Tail Jinchuriki, the secret weapon of the Sunagakure. The One-Tail’s power is violent and hard to tame. It’s not easy for a child to control it, so it’s inevitable that it will cause some bloodshed.”
“The Fourth Kazekage’s actions are truly unacceptable,” Rock Lee said in a heavy tone. “He used ruthless tactics, even ordering the assassination of his own flesh and blood. Regardless of his purpose, such methods are unacceptable. A child growing up in such an environment, experiencing no love, only indifference, murder, and the temptation of a one-tailed monster, I wouldn’t be surprised at what kind of personality he ultimately develops.”
Upon hearing this, Neji and Tenten nodded silently in understanding.
Neji thought back to Gaara’s misfortunes and felt that the difficulties he had experienced were nothing in comparison.
In the Land of Wind, the ground is covered with yellow sand, and every time the wind blows, a sandstorm rages. The environment is extremely harsh. It is no wonder that the Sand Village has always been eager to capture Konoha to gain a piece of fertile land.
Here, there are no towering trees to lend support, and the mission has no deadline, so the three can only march forward in the desert with heavy steps.
After arriving in the Land of Rivers, the environment improved significantly and their speed increased. Once they entered the Land of Fire, they were able to relax a bit because it was relatively safe there.
“Xiao Li, let’s find a chance to have a sparring match. I want to show you the results of my recent training. Don’t lose to me then.” Neji said confidently.
“Then after we complete the mission, let’s go to the training ground and compete with each other.”
The three of them quickened their pace and continued forward.
“Tiantian, how’s your hidden weapon making going? How’s your practice been lately?”
“I’ve already prepared it, but I’m still a little confused about how to condense the spirit into the hidden weapon. I’m still researching it in depth.”
Chapter 14: Rock Ninja (Old Version)
“Hokage-sama, this is the latest information I have obtained.” Rock Lee gave a detailed report to the Third Hokage.
“Well done, news about the One-Tailed Jinchuriki Gaara,” the Third Hokage pondered, his eyes falling on the list of participants for the Chunin Exam submitted by the Sand Village.
He noticed Gaara’s name and his heart tightened: the Sand Village’s intention of sending the Jinchuriki to Konoha was puzzling. Could it be that they had betrayed him?
The Third Hokage’s expression changed slightly, knowing full well that if the Jinchūriki released the tailed beasts in the village, the consequences would be disastrous.
The invitation to the Chunin Exam has been sent and cannot be changed at this time. The only option is to recall Jiraiya in advance and closely monitor the movements of Sunagakure.
“Locke Lee, the information this time is extremely critical. You should go and rest first.”
“Yes, Hokage-sama.”
“Rock Lee, come with us to the training grounds. Today you will have a serious duel with Hyuga Neji.”
It was obvious that Neji was eager to demonstrate his new move, confident in its power.
“OK.”
The three of them quickly arrived at the second practice field.
Neji and Rock Lee stood face to face, with Rock Lee maintaining a traditional fighting stance, one hand behind his back and the other extended forward.
Neji assumed the starting stance for the Gentle Fist.
“Be careful!”
Before he finished speaking, Rock Lee quickly kicked out, and the whip kick was like a hard steel whip, sweeping towards Neji with incredible speed. Neji hurriedly raised his arm to block it.
With a dull thud, Neji was kicked back several steps by the powerful force, and marveled in his heart: Rock Lee’s legs were like made of fine steel. He didn’t expect that he had improved so much without realizing it.
In a tense and thrilling battle, Rock Lee locked onto Neji, launching wave after wave of attacks. Neji then activated his “Kaiten” technique, radiating chakra from all sides and transforming into a swirling shield. Rock Lee dodged nimbly, and Neji seized the opportunity to pursue him, unleashing his “Baguazhang 128 Palms.” His hands, nearly unpredictable and lightning-fast, struck Rock Lee’s vital points with pinpoint accuracy.
Despite the pain, Rock Lee remained determined and delivered a powerful punch, sending Neji flying. His speed increased even further, and with his “Shadow Dance Leaf” technique, he launched Neji high into the air. However, Neji, displaying a newly discovered skill, gathered his chakra into a pair of wings behind him, instantly increasing his speed. In the blink of an eye, he appeared before Rock Lee and struck him in the left shoulder with a palm strike.
Rock Lee landed safely after a mid-air roll. He quickly grasped the secrets of Neji’s new technique—using acupuncture points to release chakra, allowing him to spin defensively and condense his wings for speed. Neji provocatively urged Rock Lee to use his Eight Gates to keep up with his speed.
Rock Lee pursued him relentlessly, his kicks flaring. Neji countered with a “Kaiten” (Kaiten), swirling chakra around his body, transforming into a swirling wall. Rock Lee tapped the ground lightly and retreated swiftly. Neji followed closely behind, his hands as swift as a phantom, unleashing a series of “Baguazhang 128” strikes, striking Rock Lee’s vital points.
Rock Lee, ignoring the pain, delivered a powerful punch, sending Neji flying. The pain only fueled his fighting spirit. Accelerating, he used the “Shadow Dance Leaf” technique to kick Neji skyward. But Neji showed no weakness. Chakra gathered behind him, forming wings, and his speed skyrocketed. He instantly moved in front of Rock Lee and struck him in the left shoulder.
Rock Lee adjusted his form mid-air, and upon landing, he immediately grasped the principle behind Neji’s new technique—releasing chakra through acupuncture points to achieve either spin defense or wing-condensing acceleration. Neci challenged, “Little Lee, you see through everything, don’t you? Use the Eight Gates, or you’ll never catch up to me!” “Open, open!” Rock Lee responded, ready to go all out.
Neji’s movement was lightning-fast, and Rock Lee’s 128 Baguazhang strikes were so swift and powerful that he could only hastily defend himself and was instantly struck. Even after activating his Chakra Wings, Neji’s speed remained elusive. Knowing that the power of the First Gate alone was insufficient, Rock Lee resolutely opened the Third Gate, instantly increasing his speed and charging at Neji with punches like thunder.
Neji, however, dodged with a phantom-like wing dance, simultaneously launching a counterattack from Rock Lee’s flank. The two intertwined in the air, forming a fierce battle scene, with afterimages and massive momentum, from the ground to the sky, and then plummeting from that height to the earth.
Ultimately, Neji, exhausted from chakra, retracted his wings, and Rock Lee concluded his Eight Gates. Neji admitted exhaustion, stating that even if Lee hadn’t exerted his full strength, opening only three gates, he would have been unable to continue. Rock Lee expressed respect for Neji’s newly created technique, believing it needed improvement but had great potential. He looked forward to seeing Neji achieve even greater speed and power in the future.
Tiantian is well versed in the secrets of Chakra Wings. Although it is similar to the Kaiten technique, it requires a higher level of control. He is familiar with the acupuncture points on the back and has reached the extreme use of chakra.
“Tiantian, it’s your turn. Show us your hidden weapon skills. We are curious about your recent breakthroughs.”
“no problem.”
She confidently showed off a small, streamlined kunai that was as light as a wing. With a focused gaze, she waved her hand, and with a “swish”, the hidden weapon instantly disappeared from her sight.
As fast as lightning, the small kunai seemed to travel through space and appeared in front of Xiao Li in an instant. He dodged it nimbly.
The speed was astonishing, and Neji was secretly amazed.
Rock Lee swung his nunchaku to fight, “Come on, Tenten.”
She moved around Rock Lee quickly, shooting out hidden weapons continuously at an astonishing speed. But Rock Lee’s nunchaku danced impenetrably, and he shot down each flying hidden weapon with precision.
He changed his position every day and fired continuously, but he was still unable to break through Rock Lee’s defense.
“Let’s not fight for now. I’ve only been practicing for two days. Give me a few months and I’ll definitely come up with new tricks. Then we can compete again.”
Tiantian was anxious. She felt pressured by her teammates’ rapid progress and continuous innovation. She was also thinking hard and gradually had some inspiration.
In the afternoon, Rock Lee and Neji continued their skills exchange, communicating while practicing, and jointly seeking the path to evolve their moves.
“Ningji, perhaps you could increase your speed by adding a pair of chakra wings,” Rock Lee suggested enthusiastically. “Give it a try. If the effect is significant, you can even explore more wing combinations and perhaps create a whole new special move.”
“Your idea is good. I’ll give it a try, Rock Lee.” Neji responded, his eyes gleaming with curiosity and anticipation. “Think about it, if I can add another pair of wings to my existing ones, maybe I can become Konoha’s ‘Six-Winged Angel’, or even a ‘Twelve-Winged Angel’. That’s really exciting.”
As night fell, Neji invited his two friends to share a barbecue feast to celebrate the successful demonstration of his new skills. The three of them enjoyed the meal to their heart’s content.
“Let’s drink to Neji’s new jutsu, and to Tenten’s soon-to-be-born new technique!”
“cheers!”
Three figures shuttled through the treetops. The purpose of this mission was to pick up the Anbu team returning from the Land of Earth after a mission to kill the rebel ninja. Although Rock Lee was puzzled as to why they would take on such a mission, he believed it was a training for them by the Third Hokage.
After successfully killing the renegade ninja Yamamoto Shinichi, the ANBU team was ambushed by the Iwagakure ninja, sending out an urgent call for help. Three teams participated in the rescue operation, two of which were elite ANBU, and the other consisted of Rock Lee and his three companions. While the purpose of this A-rank mission was to rescue the ninja, the attack was likely premeditated, with the Iwagakure ninja potentially intending to invade Konoha Village while it was empty. This conflict might just be the beginning.
Six elite ANBU spearheaded the movement, crossing the Land of Waterfalls, Taki no Kuni, and heading towards the Land of Earth. Taki no Kuni is renowned for its magnificent waterfalls, and Takigakure, hidden behind them, escaped the devastation of the Great Ninja War. That village was Kakuzu’s home, and after a mission failed, he enragedly stole the Earth Grudge and launched a bloody purge of the upper echelons.
After a short rest in Taki no Kuni, the three continued their journey. Unexpectedly, shortly after entering the Land of Earth, they encountered a fierce battle between Konoha and Iwagakure. Facing the numerical superiority of the Iwagakure, the Konoha warriors were at a disadvantage and were forced to fight and retreat.
“Open the Jingmen!” After arriving at the battlefield, Rock Lee immediately activated the sixth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu.
“Earth Style: Earth Dragon Bomb!” The enemy’s Rock Ninjas fired Earth Dragon Bombs together, forming a lifelike earth dragon that rose from the ground and sprayed dense earth bombs at them.
“Towards the peacock!” Rock Lee quickly waved his arms, creating a series of sparks, and headed towards the earth bomb in the air.
“Earth Style: Earth Spear!” Countless earth-made spears shot out from the ground. Neji rushed forward and used the “Kaiten” technique to prepare to resist the attack.
In the fierce clash, Neji struggled to hold back, only to see his unstoppable force diminish. Rock Lee, for the first time, unleashed the power of the Six Gates, wielding his nunchaku and unleashing the Golden Bell. A massive golden bell coalesced around him, swirling like a storm with spiraling blue energy, hurtling towards the thirty or so Iwagakure ninjas. Horrified, the twenty ninjas quickly united, summoning the “Earth Release” technique, “Earth Flow Wall,” to resist.
Neji, exhausted, discussed the decision to retreat with his teammates, but one ANBU member firmly disagreed. At this moment, Rock Lee, with his immense strength, broke through the defensive wall. Rather than continue charging, he leaped onto the wall and, with incredible speed, launched a desperate charge at the Iwagakure.
Neji resisted with a resolute will, and the speed of the kaiten gradually slowed down. At this moment, Rock Lee opened the sixth gate for the first time, and his nunchaku danced like a flying arrow.
He used the Golden Bell Cover for the first time in the Six Gates State, and a huge golden bell appeared around him. As he spun rapidly, blue energy followed him like a shadow.
In an instant, a tornado formed, and Rock Lee controlled this force, sweeping towards more than thirty Rock Ninjas.
The opponents watched in amazement at this scene, this seemingly young ninja possessing such strength. Twenty Iwagakure reacted quickly, unleashing a combined Earth Release, Earth Flow Wall. A massive wall rose from the ground, forming a barrier between them and Rock Lee.
“You guys retreat first, I’ll be here later.”
“We cannot abandon our companions, even if it means dying in battle.” An Anbu member said firmly.
“Let’s retreat. Rock Lee will find a way. We will only be a burden to him if we stay here.” Neji said resolutely.
Everyone retreated as instructed.
Rock Lee rushed towards the city wall with the tornado. After a deafening roar, the Rock Ninjas were forced to retreat again.
The city walls rose again, and the defense of “earth escape and earth flow city wall” continued.
But Rock Lee did not insist on the collision. He stopped spinning, jumped onto the city wall, and launched a final sprint towards the enemy at full speed.
Xiao Li, who currently has the six gates open, moves with incredible speed, puts the nunchakus on his waist, and launches a fierce attack on the nearest Rock Ninja.
“Earth escape, return on the dirt road!”
A huge rock rose up in response, and Xiao Li swung his palm, and the Iron Sand Palm showed its edge on the battlefield for the first time.
“Bang!”
The rock instantly crumbled under his palm, scattering fragments everywhere. The surrounding rock ninjas threw hidden weapons in an attempt to stop his attack.
But Xiao Li tapped his toes lightly, flipped backwards continuously, and his speed kept increasing, and he disappeared in the blink of an eye.
The next moment, he appeared behind an Iwagakure ninja and struck him in the waist with his full strength iron sand palm. “Bang!” The Iwagakure ninja flew out like a kite with a broken string, blood spurting out, and he was dead when he landed on the ground.
“Ono!” Several Rock Ninjas cried out in grief, but it was too late. Under the power of the Iron Sand Palm, their spines and kidneys were shattered. Unless they had the power of an immortal, there was no way to save them.
“Earth Escape, Huangquan Marsh!”
Xiao Li suddenly felt the ground beneath his feet soften, and his body sank involuntarily. In the blink of an eye, several kunai with detonating tags on them were launched at him.
“Boom boom boom!” Explosions rang out one after another, dirt flew everywhere, and smoke and dust filled the air. When the smoke and dust cleared, Xiao Li was completely enveloped by a mysterious golden bell.
“What kind of secret technique is this?” the Rock Ninjas shouted in shock.
Rock Lee stopped swinging the nunchaku in his hand and his figure disappeared in an instant. When he reappeared, he was standing behind an Iwagakure ninja.
“Earth escape, hardening technique!”
The Iwa Ninja’s back immediately became as hard as steel, but this change could not escape Rock Lee’s perception.
The moment the Hardening Technique was completed, the Iwagakure ninja tried to retreat, throwing a kunai at him. Rock Lee casually waved his hand, knocking the kunai away, and then took a step forward, appearing in front of the Iwagakure ninja.
Fear, despair, and pleading intertwined in the eyes of the Rock Ninja. Rock Lee calmly struck out with a palm. With a “bang”, the Rock Ninja’s head exploded instantly, and he died on the spot.
“Earth escape, rock coffin!”
The surrounding rocks seemed to come alive and pressed towards Rock Lee rapidly.
“Towards the peacock!”
Rock Lee danced his hands rapidly, creating sparks that shattered the rocks and allowed him to leap out.
Seeing the remaining Rock Ninjas fleeing in all directions, Rock Lee did not pursue them. After all, the core of this operation was rescue, not killing the enemy.
On his way back to Konoha, Rock Lee soon encountered several ANBU members and his companions Neji and Tenten.
“Xiao Li, it’s great that you returned safely. We are discussing how to rescue you.” Tiantian said happily.
“The Rock Ninja have lost two, and the rest have retreated.”
“Anbu Second Squad, Third Squad, thank you for your help.”
An ANBU member stepped forward and expressed his sincere gratitude to Rock Lee and his team, as well as the other two teams.
Chapter 15: Garrison (Old Version)
“I am old and my term of office is coming to an end. I look forward to the emergence of several leaders in this generation who will serve as capable assistants to the next Hokage, and Rock Lee is the one I have high hopes for.” The third generation Hokage stated.
At this time, the 12-member team led by Rock Lee was quickly crossing back to Konoha Village. Their figures, accompanied by the sound of breaking wind, formed a unique landscape.
Back in the village, they split up, the three Anbu teams vanishing directly into the shadows, while Rock Lee and his companions headed towards the Hokage’s office.
In the Hokage’s office, Rock Lee reported the battle in detail to the Third Hokage.
“You completed your mission very well this time and effectively intimidated the Iwagakure Village. They are obviously not ready for war. This provocation, you killed two of them, which is enough to teach them a lesson.” The Third Hokage commented.
“You all should go down and rest. I’ll give you five days off. Relax and enjoy yourself. Go ahead.”
The Third Hokage knew that these young men would not really rest, and they would definitely use this time to train even harder. In their generation, the progress of others had been far behind them.
Although many of the graduating students this year come from prominent families and are highly anticipated, in the eyes of the Third Hokage, only a few can achieve Rock Lee’s achievements.
A truly strong person must go beyond the secret techniques passed down in his family and create more powerful martial arts. When his strength reaches a certain level, the family secret techniques may become a limitation.
On the streets of Konoha, Gai stood in front of Kakashi excitedly, while Kakashi was leisurely flipping through “Intimate Paradise”.
“My strongest rival Kakashi, let’s have our fiftieth youth contest!” Kai challenged passionately.
Kakashi slowly raised his head with a hint of doubt and asked doubtfully, “Are you greeting me?”
“Haha, you really are worthy of being my strongest rival, Kakashi.”
At this moment, Xiao Li and the other three happened to see this scene. They all laughed secretly in their hearts, but remained calm on their faces.
“Hello, Mr. Kai, Kakashi-senpai is here too.”
“Oh, my excellent students, how are you guys doing with your mission? You’ve been working so hard lately.”
Kakashi’s eyes flickered with interest, he had heard about the growth of these three people, and their ability to complete tasks independently was impressive.
“It’s amazing! Less than a year after graduation, you’re already taking on tasks independently. It seems like you’ve really accepted some remarkable disciples, Akai.”
“Teacher Kai, we are getting ready to enjoy some delicious food. You two should join us. Rock Lee is treating us today.” Tiantian invited excitedly.
The group of five then sat down at the barbecue restaurant and feasted on the food.
“Senior Kakashi, a new batch of students is about to graduate. Will you be their team leader this time?” Rock Lee asked curiously.
Kakashi was slightly taken aback. He had never given this question much thought. Thinking back to his past students, all of whom had to return to ninja school, he couldn’t help but feel a little envious of Kai. These three disciples had grown so rapidly, especially Rock Lee, who had already become quite powerful.
“It depends on their performance.”
“Teacher Gai, Neji has invented a brand new secret technique. It’s so powerful that Rock Lee would have to open his third gate to rival it,” Tenten boasted proudly, as if the achievement belonged to her.
Kakashi couldn’t help but show surprise. The Hyuga family’s soft fist skills have been passed down from generation to generation, and the related secret techniques are little known. He had never heard of such a secret technique.
“Ningji, you are worthy of being the child who inherited the spirit of this old man, Might Guy. Young people should dare to explore and innovate.” Akai said with some pride.
Kakashi felt a little helpless. Shouldn’t he be curious about his disciple’s new discoveries at a time like this?
But Kai didn’t seem eager to let Neji show it, and he was too embarrassed to ask.
“Master, I have been stuck at the sixth gate for several months. My body seems to be strong enough now. Theoretically, I should be able to open the seventh gate.” Rock Lee asked with a hint of unwillingness.
“You are only thirteen years old, your body is not yet fully developed, and the potential of the seventh gate has not yet been fully awakened. I suggest you wait at least half a year before trying again. Opening the seventh gate puts a huge strain on your body, far more than the sixth gate. It is not advisable to try it rashly unless it is a critical moment.” Kai instructed seriously.
After hearing this, Rock Lee felt relieved. It turned out that what was holding him back was not his talent, but the accumulation of years.
The five-day holiday passed like a fleeting stream, irretrievable. During this time, Lee and his companions devoted themselves to training, each making their own progress. Neji focused on further research into Chakra Wings, exploring how to increase his control over chakra.
Every day she immersed herself in her innovative sword-wielding training, skillfully using chakra threads to allow hidden weapons to soar freely in the air.
Rock Lee persevered in training the Golden Bell Cover, raising the voltage inside the specially constructed metal house to 500 volts, and he made rapid progress in his training on the fifth level.
In Konoha Village, there are few missions recently, and they have only received one D-level cat-catching mission.
Xiao Li quickly solved the problem, as if this cat existed only to train Konoha’s Genin.
Neji opened his Byakugan, looked around, and accurately located his target: “The cat is just ahead.”
As soon as he finished speaking, Xiao Li moved instantly and captured the cat in the blink of an eye.
After their mission was completed, the Hokage ordered them to rest.
Although they usually complain about not having enough time to practice, they also feel a little bored when they have free time.
After an afternoon of hard training, the next day, they received a C-level mission to escort a caravan to the capital of the Fire Nation.
The leader of the caravan was named Yamashiro Jiro. When Rock Lee heard this name, he thought of the Japanese naming convention, but he didn’t say much.
In the escort mission, Rock Lee served as the vanguard, Tenten was responsible for central support, and Neji was the rearguard, his Byakugan constantly monitoring the surrounding movements.
They moved slowly within the Land of Fire. The iron ingots transported by Yamashiro Jiro would supply his large weapon shop in the capital, where he sold all kinds of weapons and provided customization services.
The Yamashita family, as a prestigious and wealthy family in the capital, has been committed to providing high-quality ninjas and weapons and equipment for generations.
“Attention, there’s movement!” Neji shouted vigilantly.
Soon, a group of bandits surrounded the transport team.
“Leave the goods behind and get out of here immediately! Otherwise, don’t blame us for being ruthless.” The bandits threatened while waving their long swords.
“You petty thieves dare to target the goods being escorted by Konoha ninjas? You’re really courting death!” A hint of excitement flashed in Tiantian’s eyes. She had the opportunity to show off her scroll skills again.
Hearing the word “Konoha”, the bandits looked at the forehead protectors on their heads and involuntarily took a few steps back.
“Boss, let’s take care of these little devils without anyone noticing.”
The bandit leader hesitated for a moment and gave the order: “Don’t leave any alive!”
The members of the caravan were pale, and some were even scared to tears.
Tenten calmly took out the two scrolls and stood firmly.
“Shenglong!”
As she shouted, the scrolls flew, Tiantian jumped up, and countless hidden weapons poured down like a rainstorm. In an instant, the bandits around them fell down one after another, and no one survived.
On the other side, at the Konoha Ninja School, today is the graduation day for a new batch of ninjas, and the students are nervously preparing for the exams.
Although Naruto has greatly increased his strength after several months of hard training, his performance in the upcoming clone technique exam is still unsatisfactory.
Currently, Rock Lee and his three-man team were heading towards the border of the Land of Fire, patrolling the border between Konoha and the Land of Waterfall, while also combating the occasional Iwagakure ninja who crossed the border. If they encountered any large enemy forces, they must report immediately.
After three months of arduous training, Rock Lee’s physique had significantly improved. Although he knew no ninjutsu, he firmly believed in the famous saying: “No martial art is invincible except speed.” When the body is pushed beyond its limits, incredible power can be unleashed. After they arrived at the border, they chose a secluded location to set up camp.
They planned to remain here for two weeks, at which point other personnel would arrive to relieve them. During this time, they would maintain a clear division of labor: one person would monitor, while the other two would devote themselves to training. Hyuga Neji was currently focused on researching chakra wings, striving to realize his dream of free flight. He had already managed to condense a second pair of small wings. Though they were immature, their control was somewhat rusty, and they consumed a significant amount of chakra, they were enough to serve as a hidden trump card.
“Once you’ve fully mastered the Four Wings state, your speed should rival my ability to open the Five Gates. Neji, when you truly master the Four Wings, your standing in Konoha will be profoundly different. People will no longer view you as a Genin, and your standing within the Hyuga Clan will rise dramatically,” Rock Lee said with foresight. He knew that Hiashi Hyuga felt guilty towards Neji, and that sooner or later, Neji would contribute his Chakra Wings to the Clan. As a member of the branch Clan, he was bound to obey unconditionally, but this would also be a way for him to earn credit for the Clan.
Although the current Hyuga family is respected as the most powerful family in Konoha, its actual combat power is still lacking. In the later stages of the war, they mainly undertake reconnaissance work.
However, with the blessing of Chakra Wings, the Hyuga clan’s combat effectiveness has achieved a leap. The combination of soft fists and extreme speed makes them seem at ease on both offense and defense, which also shocked Rock Lee.
“I hope the Hyuga family isn’t full of talented people.” He thought to himself.
“There are enemies approaching, six in total, and their stealth skills are quite impressive.” Neji said alertly.
Clearly, the Iwagakure hadn’t given up on testing Konoha’s strength. Rock Lee and his companions quickly set up several simple explosive traps using hand gestures.
In the year since they graduated from Ninja Academy, they have fought countless battles and grown into experienced warriors.
The six Iwagakure ninjas were moving forward cautiously. Suddenly, the leading Iwagakure ninja made a gesture and all of them immediately stopped moving.
They are the Iwagakure reconnaissance team. When they learned that Sunagakure might make a move, they wanted to take the opportunity to explore Konoha’s weaknesses. If they could profit from it, or weaken Konoha with the help of Sunagakure, it would be a good thing for the Iwagakure.
Rock Lee took off the 2,500-jin weight on his body and felt as light as the wind.
The Rock Ninjas were cautiously exploring their surroundings when they suddenly noticed an almost invisible thread.
When they wanted to retreat, Tiantian shot out his hidden weapon accurately and cut off the thread of the detonating talisman.
In an instant, “boom boom” explosions rang out one after another.
Based on the original work, the following is a rewrite of the novel’s sentences:
“Earth Style: Earthquake Core!” As the Rock Ninja controlled the earth element, the ground they were on suddenly sank, cleverly avoiding the fatal blow of the explosion.
Neji quickly condensed chakra wings, holding a kunai, and his body turned into an elusive afterimage, shuttling across the battlefield and rushing straight towards the Rock Ninja.
In this narrow earthquake core, Neji’s speed became his greatest weapon, allowing him to handle close combat with ease.
At the same time, Rock Lee was not willing to fall behind. His figure flashed and he disappeared from the spot. In an instant, he appeared in front of an Iwagakure ninja. With a palm strike of iron sand, with a “bang”, the Iwagakure ninja turned into a piece of rotten wood.
Neji had also been shuttling between several opponents, relying on his invisible and traceless body movements, and the kunai in his hand flashed repeatedly.
The two of them were like ghosts on the battlefield. Rock Lee’s iron sand palm attacked continuously, and each palm had the power to destroy thousands of enemies.
In a quick move, Rock Lee passed by an Iwagakure ninja, hooked his palm lightly, and easily severed the opponent’s trachea.
In the blink of an eye, five Rock Ninjas were killed, and only the leading Rock Ninja Jonin was still resisting stubbornly. This was obviously a strange combination of a Jonin leading five Chunins.
Although Rock Lee did not understand the purpose of this combination, he saw that Neji was fighting with the Iwagakure jonin. The jonin used slowness to defeat speed, putting Neji at a disadvantage.
Rock Lee instantly flashed to the flank of the Iwagakure jonin, and swung out his left leg like a whip, striking fiercely.
In that instant, Rock Lee’s powerful kick sent the Iwagakure leader flying like a kite with its string cut. Neji, despite his swift agility, lacked Rock Lee’s explosive power, a weakness. His opponent’s twisted and deformed arm, the cold sweat dripping from the excruciating pain, was a silent testament to Rock Lee’s strength.
“Konoha’s Rock Lee truly lives up to his reputation.” The young Iwagakure leader squeezed out these words with difficulty.
Rock Lee ignored him and ended the fight cleanly and neatly. With one palm strike, the flesh and blood were blurred.
Neji was breathing heavily. It was obvious that this was his first time using the Chakra Wings in actual combat and he had not yet fully mastered it.
“Tiantian, I’ll leave the rest to you,” Rock Lee instructed.
“I understand.” Tiantian responded and unfolded the sealing scroll, sealing the enemy’s body and leaving possible clues for the intelligence department.
“Xiao Li, stop using the iron sand palm to damage your brain. It’s not only unhygienic, but also destroys intelligence.” Tiantian said with some complaints.
“Well, I’ll pay attention next time.” Xiao Li replied.
Meanwhile, elsewhere in Konoha, Naruto sat alone on a swing, looking at his classmates wearing forehead protectors, while he himself had only a pair of goggles for company. Although his strength had improved after a period of hard training, his poor grasp of the clone technique had led to his failure in the exam.
“Naruto, Iruka-sensei has high hopes for you. He knows how hard you’ve worked. This test is just him wanting to confirm your growth.” The comfort of his companions echoed in his ears.
Chapter 16: Reinforcements Arrive (Old Version)
Guided by the bright starlight, the three of them carefully made their way to the edge of Takigakure. In the darkness, they noticed a patrol of Iwagakure.
“It seems that the Iwagakure ninja is planning to take advantage of the chaos in the Sand Village and wait for an opportunity to strike.” Neji said as he analyzed.
“Ningji, can you estimate their number?”
Neji used his Byakugan, chakra surged in his eyes, and veins bulged on his face.
“There are about two hundred people. This should be the vanguard. If chaos really breaks out in the Sand Village, I’m afraid there will be more troops heading towards Konoha.”
“The ninja world has been peaceful for more than ten years. Is it going to be plunged into war again?” Tiantian asked worriedly.
However, Rock Lee believed that a large-scale war was unlikely to break out, and at most there would be some small-scale conflicts.
Ever since the legendary Hashirama Senju and Madara Uchiha passed away, peace in the ninja world has been a luxury.
“Let’s retreat first. As long as we guard the border and prevent the Rock Ninja from infiltrating, we will have completed our mission. As for the direction of the Rain Country, other ninjas will be responsible for it. We only need to focus on the Waterfall Country.” Rock Lee suggested.
By the time the three returned to camp, daybreak had already arrived. Tenten unfurled the Sealing Scroll, releasing Konoha’s hawk, wrote the information he had gathered on it, and released the hawk back to the village to report.
Rock Lee knew very well that although he had never seen a detailed description of the Iwagakure in his previous life, anything could happen in this real world.
Ōnoki, the leader of the Iwagakure, is a man of deep scheming. He suffered heavy losses during the Third War of Konoha at the hands of the Fourth Hokage, Minato Namikaze’s Flying Thunder God Technique, forcing him to retreat. Now, seeing Konoha’s village at a disadvantage, he harbors thoughts of aggression. Meanwhile, Konoha’s intelligence team receives urgent intelligence and quickly reports it to the Third Hokage.
The Third Hokage pondered for a moment, realizing the urgency of the situation, and immediately ordered an emergency meeting of the top leaders. Meanwhile, Kakashi had just finished a survival drill with his disciples and was about to celebrate when he was interrupted by the sudden emergency assembly order.
Inside the Hokage’s office, the senior officials gathered in a heavy atmosphere. The Third Hokage spoke first: “According to the intelligence brought back by Xiao Li and his team, the Iwagakure ninja have assembled at the border. The vanguard force consists of 200 ninja, but their details are unknown. They have already killed six Iwagakure ninja who attempted to gather intelligence.”
“For this Chunin Exam, the Sand Village sent ninjas with the power of the tailed beasts. It is obvious that they intend to create chaos during the exam and take the opportunity to attack Konoha.” The Hokage’s words made everyone present feel the impending crisis.
Everyone was shocked, and the clouds of war seemed to gather again. This time, Konoha Village faced the double threat from the Wind Kingdom and the Earth Kingdom.
“Have they joined forces?” Men Yan seemed a little uneasy.
“It’s not clear at the moment, but the Iwagakure ninja may have some information, knowing that the Sand Village is about to take action, and intends to take advantage of the opportunity to profit.” The third generation analyzed calmly.
“That’s certainly in line with Ōnoki’s style,” Koharu added.
“I have decided to send 200 ninjas to the border to strengthen defenses and prevent sudden invasions by the Iwagakure. The Chunin Exam will proceed as planned. All departments must be vigilant, especially the Sealing and Barrier Divisions. They must be prepared to fight the One-Tail.”
“Yes!” everyone responded.
Watching Gai’s disciples throw themselves into war missions, Kakashi felt both emotional and worried, wondering when his students would grow into reliable warriors.
“Look, someone’s approaching,” Neji reported. “This time it’s three Iwagakure ninjas, probably here to conduct reconnaissance.”
They must not be allowed to leave easily, Rock Lee thought. He had to let them see the strength of Konoha’s defense. He secretly hoped that the Third Hokage would send reinforcements. After all, if the Rock Ninja went deep into the interior of the Land of Fire, the consequences would be unbearable.
Rock Lee quietly went around behind the three Iwagakure ninjas who were scouting, preparing for a beautiful encirclement and suppression, leaving the enemy with no way to escape, while also demonstrating Konoha’s ability to respond.
Neji and Tenten lurked in seclusion, their nets set to trap their prey. Meanwhile, the enemy Iwagakure murmured, “Konoha Village is declining. Once the leader of the Five Great Nations, it now has no defenses on its borders. If Sunagakure can inflict a heavy blow, it will be the time for us Iwagakure to rise.” Before they could finish their words, a warning was heard: “Be careful, there’s a trap!”
Rock Lee struck with the force of the wind, his iron sand palm piercing the air, sending sparks flying. Neji then unleashed the Four Wings Technique, seemingly traversing space, attacking Rock Lee from the front and back. Two streaks of blood instantly bloomed in the air. The three Iwagakure scouts were gone in a flash, without a moment’s respite.
At this moment, Rock Lee and Neji acted decisively, without a trace of hesitation. Their style resembled that of professional assassins: ruthless strikes, few words. Rock Lee kept in mind the wise saying, “The villain dies because of too much talk.” On this ever-changing battlefield, actions speak louder than words.
Gazing at her two companions every day, she knew she still had work to do to catch up with their growing rapport, and she resolved to work even harder.
As night fell, the team led by Ino-Shika-cho successfully reached the border. Nara Shikaku quickly deployed defenses, and various departments of Konoha also entered a state of combat readiness.
“We have seen your efforts, especially the information you brought back last time, which is of vital importance to us.” Yamanaka Inichi highly praised the contributions of these three young ninjas.
Nara Shikaku continued, “Your mission has been successfully completed. You can leave for the village tomorrow. During the Chunin Exams, we must let the people of Sunagakure experience the power of Konoha and let them know that we have many talented people here.”
After reporting on the Iwagakure’s movements, Rock Lee went to rest.
However, the other three did not return to Konoha immediately, but chose to stay and continue to observe the movements of the Iwagakure. They speculated that the Iwagakure might have noticed the arrival of Konoha’s reinforcements, and therefore had not made any moves in the near future.
“We will guard here, the Iwagakure will not attack rashly. They are probably observing the actions of the Sunagakure. If the Sunagakure succeeds, it may not be just these two hundred Iwagakure ninjas that will arrive, but the powerful forces of the entire Iwagakure.” Shikaku made a precise analysis of the situation.
After the mission was completed, Rock Lee and his companions returned to Konoha to report the mission to the Third Hokage. When they opened the door, they found Kakashi, Naruto and others were also present.
“Teacher Kakashi, I never thought that Naruto would be able to join your team as soon as he graduated.” Rock Lee looked at Naruto who kept muttering that the mission was too simple, and laughed secretly in his heart, guessing that perhaps the mission to the Land of Waves was about to start.
“Xiao Li, your operation this time was excellent.”
“Hokage-sama, this is our detailed report on this mission. The Iwagakure Village sent two groups of people to try to infiltrate our country, but we successfully repelled them both.” Rock Lee reported seriously.
“Well, your performance on the battlefield demonstrated your resolve and served as a warning to the enemy. Go down and prepare. I will not assign you any new missions this time.”
“Teacher Kakashi, Naruto, we’re leaving first. After the mission is completed, I’ll treat you to ramen.” Rock Lee said to Naruto.
“Okay, Xiao Li, I’ll wait.”
“Hokage-sama, are Rock Lee and the others also going to take part in the upcoming Chunin Exam?” Kakashi asked.
“Haha, I understand your concern, but they are still just Genin at the moment. Kakashi, you have to work harder.” The Third Hokage said with a smile.
“Old man, you have to give me a truly challenging task this time!” Naruto demanded loudly.
“Haha, don’t complain this time. Mr. Dazna, please come in.” The Third Hokage shouted towards the door.
After the three of them left the Hokage Building, they began discussing the upcoming Chunin Exams.
“This time, the first round of the exam should be a theoretical knowledge test, and the second round will probably be the Death Forest Challenge we face.”
“I’m really looking forward to seeing the expressions of those candidates when they step into the Forest of Death. It will definitely be an interesting scene.” Rock Lee teased mischievously.
Neji and Tenten recalled their previous missions of capturing poisonous insects and ferocious beasts, and couldn’t help but laugh along, feeling a bit of mischievous pleasure in their hearts.
“The third match will most likely be the finals. I’ve studied the procedures of previous Chunin Exams, and they’re basically the same. We must not embarrass ourselves and get eliminated this time.” Rock Lee said half-jokingly.
Neji is full of confidence. He is very powerful and will not be easily defeated. If he faces Naruto again, the outcome is unpredictable, considering the limitations of Naruto’s current strength.
The one who makes people most worried is Tiantian. Her hidden weapon attacks are unstable and no one can predict what kind of strength she will be able to show at that time.
“Okay, go home and adjust your condition to prepare for the Chunin Exam.” The three of them said goodbye.
In a blink of an eye, it was the day of the Chunin Exams. The Konoha Village was bustling with people, and ninjas from various villages filled the streets and alleys.
Rock Lee and the other two met on the way and went to the Ninja School together. Suddenly, Rock Lee ran into a man of ambiguous gender with an indescribable smile on his face.
Rock Lee deliberately rushed towards this man. He secretly suspected that this man was Orochimaru in disguise, so he used all his strength.
However, the opponent easily avoided his attack.
“Sorry, I slipped just now.” Rock Lee apologized quickly.
“It’s okay.” The female ninja hurried away, leaving Rock Lee standing there a little embarrassed.
Rock Lee was already certain in his heart that the man was undoubtedly Orochimaru. He had indeed sneaked into the crowd quietly. Looking at the familiar back, Rock Lee fell into deep thought.
“Are you okay, Rock Lee?” Tiantian noticed Rock Lee’s absent-minded look and couldn’t help but ask worriedly.
“It’s okay, let’s keep going.”
In classroom 301, there was a lot of noise and Kabuto was talking with Naruto and the others.
“I haven’t been able to achieve what I wanted in seven consecutive exams.” Dou’s tone revealed a hint of disappointment.
“Nevertheless, I have almost grasped the information about each Genin. If you want to know about someone’s situation, I can help you check.” As he said this, Kabuto took out his ninja card collection.
“I’m quite curious about Rock Lee’s strength.” Naruto said excitedly.
“We are also very curious. He has been training so hard, his strength must be extraordinary.” Kiba said as he walked over, and Shikamaru and Choji nodded in agreement.
“I want to know about Gaara from the Sand Village.” Sasuke also wanted to know information about this opponent with whom he had once met.
“Okay, wait a moment.” Kabuto pulled out a card, spun it a few times in his hand, and then showed it to everyone.
“Rock Lee, his mentor is Might Guy. Although he doesn’t know any ninjutsu or genjutsu, he has extraordinary talent in physical skills. He actually completed two A-level missions, ten B-level missions, and thirty C-level and D-level missions.” Everyone was shocked after hearing this. They didn’t expect Rock Lee to have such an amazing record of completing two A-level missions.
The village’s A-level missions either involve gathering intelligence deep into enemy territory or are directly related to war.
“The execution team is composed of Hyuga Neji and Tenten. The rest of the information is highly confidential and difficult for the outside world to find out. But it is said that they have already gained a great reputation in the ninja world, and some even regard them as the strongest Genin.” Kabuto browsed the information and couldn’t help but feel shocked. He didn’t expect that there were such masters hidden in the village. Obviously, the village had high hopes for them.
Naruto and the others were shocked when they saw Rock Lee’s strength. At this moment, Rock Lee’s previous oath echoed in Naruto’s mind.
“I don’t have extraordinary talent, so for every effort others put in, I have to put in ten or a hundred times the effort.” This used to sound ordinary, but now it seems that Xiao Li’s persistence is admirable.
Sasuke was deeply touched when he heard Kabuto’s evaluation. He could achieve such an achievement with physical skills alone. In comparison, the embarrassment they suffered when they encountered Zabuza was just a B-level mission.
Kabuto picked up another card with Gaara’s name on it.
“Gaara of the Sand Village has carried out one B-rank mission and eight C-rank missions, and it is said that he has never been injured while on a mission.”
Everyone was calm after hearing Gaara’s mission record. After all, Xiao Li’s achievements were too dazzling.
At this moment, Rock Lee, Tenten, and Neji pushed the door open and walked in. All eyes naturally focused on them.
Everyone had heard what Kabuto had said before; it was these three people who had accomplished these awe-inspiring tasks.
Chapter 17 Orochimaru (old version)
After the test papers were distributed, the exam rules were explained. The core of this test was to test the ninja’s intelligence gathering skills. Rock Lee glanced at the test questions and thought to himself that these questions would be a piece of cake for Tenten and Neji, so naturally, there was no intention of cheating.
Rock Lee quickly finished all the questions, closed his eyes, and mentally rehearsed how he would respond if Orochimaru suddenly appeared. Orochimaru’s various special moves flashed through his mind, from earth escape techniques to techniques with snake elements, he reviewed them one by one.
Forty-five minutes into the exam, Ibiki announced the final question, a difficult one that caused many students to give up. But in the end, all those who persevered were told they had passed the test.
Stepping into the Forest of Death, Rock Lee met two other companions and went deeper into the forest together. Occasionally, they could hear screams in the distance, which made them laugh out loud.
“I never thought that the poisonous insects and ferocious beasts we casually caught at that time would cause so many candidates to suffer. These people are so fragile.” Li Luoke recalled.
“Yeah, thinking back to when we just graduated, these tasks weren’t too difficult for us, except that some of the bugs looked pretty disgusting.” Tiantian responded cynically.
They carried the Scroll of Heaven and were tasked with finding the Scroll of Earth. Rock Lee walked in front, easily defeating any ferocious beast that appeared with his Iron Sand Palm, a move truly terrifying in its power.
Soon, they encountered several Kusagakure ninjas who were being chased by two brutal beasts.
“Bang, bang!” With two crisp applause, Rock Lee quickly ended the battle.
“Thank you very much. We are from Kusagakure Village and sincerely appreciate your assistance.” A red-haired girl expressed her gratitude to them.
Rock Lee’s eyes were fixed on her. This was the future Uzumaki Karin, the girl who would become Sasuke’s guardian and possessed a unique physique from the Land of Whirlpools.
“Hand over your scrolls.” Rock Lee ordered coldly.
Xiang Lin’s expression froze instantly. She had thought that Rock Lee, who had saved her, was a good man, but she had not expected that he was so ruthless.
Anyway, she will surrender to Orochimaru sooner or later, so there is no need to be polite to her.
Rock Lee took over the Scroll of Earth from Kusagakure Village and the mission was accomplished.
“There’s still plenty of time, and we still have a chance to seize more scrolls. Let’s go.” Rock Lee and his teammates set off without hesitation.
There was no need for mercy towards the ninjas from other villages. This time, he had saved their lives, and in exchange for a scroll, that was more than enough. With the strength of the three Kusagakure ninjas, even if they hadn’t encountered them, the scroll might have been taken away by others.
The three of them shuttled through the forest, clearing the way every day, and once they were attacked, they would fight back with hidden weapons.
Suddenly, a deafening roar echoed in the Death Forest.
“Should we go in that direction and find out what’s going on?” Tiantian suggested.
“Walk!”
The three of them ran towards the direction of the explosion, wondering in their hearts, has Orochimaru already started taking action against Sasuke?
In the midst of a fierce battle, Naruto clashed fiercely with the traitorous ninja Orochimaru. Rock Lee, swift as the wind, unleashed his “Konoha Gourami Whirlwind” and instantly appeared before Orochimaru, sending him flying with a powerful blow. Orochimaru’s body pierced through three massive trees before crashing into a fourth.
“Naruto, are you all okay?” Rock Lee asked anxiously.
At this moment, Naruto, who had activated the Nine-Tails Chakra, had become ferocious, with a beast-like appearance that was terrifying. But the moment he saw Rock Lee coming to support him, his tense nerves finally relaxed, and he immediately passed out.
“Sakura, Naruto is now in your care. Sasuke, you two should step back first. This enemy is not to be trifled with. He is the disciple of our Hokage, the renegade ninja Orochimaru.”
“Tenten, send a distress signal! Neji, we are about to face a fierce battle today. This is the time to test our strength.”
Although Sasuke was unwilling, he also knew that he was no longer able to fight. With his chakra exhausted, he could only retreat to the side temporarily.
“You little brats have ruined my plan. I will tear you into pieces one by one. Sasuke, wait until I have dealt with them, then I will come back to you.” Orochimaru’s hoarse voice was full of threats.
“Orochimaru, your time has passed. Others may still be afraid of you, but today the three of us will see for ourselves whether the so-called Three Ninjas are truly worthy of their reputation,” Rock Lee answered firmly.
“Young people nowadays are so arrogant and ignorant.” Orochimaru sneered.
Then, he quickly performed “Wind Escape, Big Breakthrough”.
A raging storm raged, Orochimaru’s aura transforming into a tornado, carving deep scars into the ground wherever it passed. Instantly, Rock Lee and Neji transformed into twin bolts of lightning, charging towards Orochimaru with the force of a “Konoha Speed Tornado.” Rock Lee’s speed surpassed all limits, and he was within reach in a flash, yet Orochimaru dodged with ease.
Rock Lee suddenly attacked with a “Shadow Snake Hand”. Just as he regained his footing, he saw Neji blocking him like a shield and activating the “Kaiten” defense. Rock Lee then activated the “Kagemon”, and the energy storm surrounding him forced Orochimaru to take it seriously.
Neji unfurled chakra wings behind him, and with a gentle flap, the two of them vanished hand in hand, leaving Orochimaru as a mere cluster of Tsuchikage. “Earth Clone” was Orochimaru’s signature move. Neji activated his Byakugan, revealing everything around him. Orochimaru attacked Rock Lee’s flank, but Lee swung his sword, destroying the snake’s heads.
Neji stepped lightly, disappearing once more as Orochimaru drew two kunai, nervously responding. Rock Lee followed him like a shadow, attacking from both sides, leaving Orochimaru overwhelmed. Finally, a powerful kick from Rock Lee sent Orochimaru flying, demonstrating their seamless combat coordination.
Rock Lee’s figure was like a phantom, and he activated the “Inner Lotus” skill, leaving a series of rapid hitting sounds in the air.
Orochimaru’s figure suddenly dispersed like mud, and reassembled in the distance in an instant. He bit his fingertips and slammed the ground with his palm.
Five huge snake shadows appeared and rushed towards Rock Lee and others.
“Konoha is indeed a place full of talented people. In just a few years, so many geniuses have emerged. Coupled with Sasuke and the Nine-Tails Jinchuriki, it seems that Konoha’s prosperity is just around the corner. But I will eliminate you one by one, hahaha.” Orochimaru laughed arrogantly, with madness flashing in his eyes.
Tiantian quickly took out a scroll from her bag, which contained countless hidden weapons with explosive talismans attached. This was her deadly trick.
She threw the scroll into the sky, then leaped up, and countless hidden weapons shot towards the giant snake like a rainstorm.
The continuous explosions were deafening, the billowing smoke covered the sky and blurred the vision.
Rock Lee knew something was wrong. Orochimaru kept his eyes on Sasuke, so he ran as fast as he could, hoping to be in time to rescue him.
Finally, at the critical moment, Rock Lee arrived at Sasuke’s hiding place, and Orochimaru’s attack was close at hand.
“Six Gates and Eight Gates Ninjutsu – Konoha’s Extreme Speed and Powerful Whirlwind!” Rock Lee kicked out with extreme speed.
A hint of eager excitement flashed in Orochimaru’s eyes. He seemed to have touched the edge of obtaining Sasuke’s Sharingan. He thought to himself that the pain he had suffered from Itachi would eventually be repaid by these eyes.
Orochimaru’s evil thoughts were interrupted by a powerful kick from Rock Lee, and he was bleeding in the air.
“It’s you. I will definitely kill you.” As soon as Orochimaru finished speaking, a huge snake-like creature covered in mucus jumped out of his body.
“Just a mere skin-shedding technique, Orochimaru. It seems that all the improvement in your strength over the years has been wasted on these unorthodox methods.” Rock Lee said sarcastically.
“Little devil, you seem to have some understanding of my abilities. Then I will let you witness my true power with your own eyes.”
Orochimaru quickly formed hand seals and activated the Impure World Reincarnation technique. The ground cracked, and a coffin appeared. Rock Lee, familiar with the original novel, vaguely remembered that the summoned Third Kazekage had engaged in a fierce duel with Deidara and Sasori in the book. He was hailed as the strongest Kazekage in history, possessing powerful skills such as the creation of iron sand and combining both offensive and defensive capabilities.
At this time, Ningji and Tenten also arrived at the battlefield.
“What’s going on, Rock Lee? Why would the people from the Sand Village join forces with Orochimaru?” Neji asked in confusion.
“This is Impure World Reincarnation, a forbidden technique that summons the souls of the deceased from the underworld to fight for the caster. The one before us is the legendary Third Kazekage. I’m afraid this battle will be difficult.”
Neji and Tenten both had serious expressions on their faces. They had never imagined that there would be such a terrifying ninjutsu in the world.
Orochimaru skillfully implanted a control spell into the head of the Third Kazekage. As the heat rose, the deceased figure slowly revived and regained vitality.
Fortunately, Orochimaru’s Impure World Reincarnation Technique was still in its incomplete stage and could not match the body of White Zetsu, so the power of the Third Kazekage could not be fully released.
With the command “Magnetic Release: Iron Sand and Stone Rain,” iron sand rained down on Rock Lee like a torrential downpour. Rock Lee quickly drew his nunchaku and swung it at breakneck speed, instantly summoning a spinning golden bell. The Third Kazekage’s iron sand attack collided violently with it, the sound of metal clashing echoing all around.
The iron sand was broken down after the impact and was then swallowed by the rotating golden bell, forming a tornado of iron sand.
“Wonderful taijutsu, just enjoy this fight.” Orochimaru attacked Sasuke again.
Neji spread his wings and flew towards Orochimaru, who quickly formed hand seals and performed the “Ten Thousand Snakes Formation”, and countless poisonous snakes pounced and bit Neji and Tenten.
Neji retracted his chakra wings, as such consumption was too extravagant to deal with these poisonous snakes.
The “Kaiten” technique was activated, and Neji spun rapidly, deflecting the approaching venomous snakes one by one. At the same time, Tenten skillfully manipulated multiple hidden weapons, weaving in and out of the snakes, killing them.
Just as Neji was catching his breath, he was met with another wave of fierce attacks from poisonous snakes. He used 128 soft fists, his hands like phantoms, to attack continuously and defeat the poisonous snakes one by one.
“The Hyuga clan has produced another genius, Sasuke, you don’t need to resist. Just let me bite you gently, and you will gain powerful strength that can be on par with them.” Orochimaru tempted Sasuke.
I understand that your eyes are burning with resentment and cold anger.” Orochimaru’s words stirred ripples in Sasuke’s heart.
At this moment, Orochimaru’s neck extended at an astonishing speed and bit Sasuke’s neck fiercely.
Seeing this, Rock Lee immediately realized that the curse seal had been implanted. He jumped up suddenly, controlling the tornado wrapped in sand and iron, and launched a fierce attack on the Third Kazekage.
However, facing the defense of “Magnetic Release: Sand and Iron Barrier”, the iron sand receded like a tide, forming an indestructible wall in front of the Third Kazekage.
A harsh friction sound was heard, which was the sound of Rock Lee’s iron wall colliding violently with the defense of the Third Kazekage.
When Orochimaru saw this scene, he couldn’t help but admire that Konoha Village had produced such an outstanding physical genius.
He quickly formed hand seals and released the Impure World Reincarnation Technique, and the figure of the Third Kazekage disappeared and hid in the coffin.
“Haha, Sasuke, one day you will come to find me on your own initiative, because only I can help you reach the peak of power.” Orochimaru laughed confidently, dived into the ground, and disappeared without a trace.
During this encounter, Rock Lee felt Orochimaru’s difficulty, especially the power of the Impure World Reincarnation Technique. Fortunately, Orochimaru seemed to want to surprise the Third Kazekage and did not summon the First and Second Hokage.
Sasuke fainted from the pain, and Sakura rushed forward to support him.
“Xiao Li, come and take a look, what is this?” Sakura asked anxiously, pointing at the mark on Sasuke’s neck.
“This is Orochimaru’s curse seal. Although it can make Sasuke stronger, it also contains Orochimaru’s will. At the moment, it shouldn’t have much of an impact on him.”
Faced with this difficult curse seal, we decided to seek help from Mr. Kakashi, who is quite knowledgeable about Konoha’s sealing techniques and may be able to solve this problem.”
Soon, Konoha’s Anbu quickly arrived at the scene, and several elite ninjas appeared.
“What happened here? Do you need our assistance?” an Anbu member stepped forward and asked.
“Orochimaru has just appeared. He has mastered the Impure World Reincarnation technique of the Second Hokage and has summoned the Third Kazekage.”
“He has left. Please be sure to inform Hokage-sama that Orochimaru has the ability to summon the Third Kazekage and may even be able to awaken the First Hokage.”
Upon hearing this, the ANBU members’ expressions changed. The First Hokage’s power was enough to intimidate the tailed beasts. If they were truly controlled by Orochimaru, the consequences would be disastrous. They quickly evacuated and urgently reported this emergency.
During this time, Rock Lee and his companions guarded Sakura to prevent others from coveting the scroll she possessed. Their immense power deterred everyone.
“Thank you, Rock Lee. If you weren’t here to guard us, we might be in danger.” Sakura expressed her gratitude to them.
“You’re welcome, Naruto is my good friend, and as Konoha’s ninjas, we should support each other.” Rock Lee replied.
Soon after, Naruto regained consciousness, and it seemed Sasuke was about to regain consciousness. The three said goodbye to Sakura and continued to move towards the central tower.
Chapter 18: Duel with Gaara (Old Version)
Tenten left the ring with his signature dashing backflip, his eyes fixed sharply on his opponent, deducing from Lee’s hint that he was skilled in wind escape and realizing this would be a tricky battle.
He took out a unique kunai, which made Temari laugh out loud. She calmly pulled out a fan from behind her and confidently threatened: “It’s not too late for you to admit defeat now. Don’t blame me for going all out later and letting you experience the three-star power of my fan.” After that, Temari gently opened the fan.
Tenten’s figure flashed, and the kunai in his hand disappeared instantly, and then flashed in Temari’s sight again, which made her secretly shocked: What a fast speed!
Temari hurriedly waved her fan, successfully blowing away the kunai, but before she could catch her breath, the blown kunai and another one shot towards her at the same time. Tenten circled behind Temari and launched a two-pronged attack.
One kunai was remotely controlled via the chakra line, and the other was launched directly. Temari jumped up, fully activated the fan to three-star mode, and swung out a strong whirlwind.
The entire arena was filled with strong winds. No one had expected that Tenten could force Temari into such a situation with just two kunai.
Kankuro observed with a serious expression. He originally thought that among Konoha’s Genin, only Uchiha Sasuke was worthy of attention, but he did not expect that Tenten would also show such amazing strength.
Tenten raced around Temari like a whirlwind, her specially crafted kunai flying out of her hands one after another. Temari could only wave her fan repeatedly, knocking the hidden weapons away one by one. Suddenly, Tenten stopped and said to Temari with a firm look, “You still have time to surrender now, otherwise you will be hurt.” But Temari responded firmly, “No need to say anything more, show your true strength.”
Tenten sighed softly, then flicked her ten fingers deftly, and the scattered kunai seemed to come to life, rising into the air and surrounding Temari. Like dragons, the ten kunai weaved through the air, constantly changing their trajectory and launching a continuous attack on Temari.
Temari was forced to swing her fan in all directions, trying her best to blow away the kunai, but the kunai she controlled was like a thorn in her flesh. Every time Temari blew away one, a new attack would immediately follow. As the battle continued, Temari’s movements gradually became slower, and blood marks from the kunai began to appear on her body.
As the ten kunai converged into a single force, hurling themselves at her from different directions, Temari, using the wind from her fan, leaped into the air and unleashed a powerful ninjutsu: “Wind Release, Great Breakthrough.” But Tenten’s response was more ingenious. She instantly scattered the kunai, then quickly closed in, trapping Temari. Any slight movement could trigger a kunai attack, leaving Temari with no escape.
“You’ve already lost,” Tiantian declared confidently. The referee then announced the result, and enthusiastic applause erupted from all around.
“Gai, your disciple is really good at chakra control.” Kakashi said to Gai with appreciation.
“This is the charm of youth!” Kai responded passionately.
Immediately afterwards, Sakura and Ino fought to a draw and had to retire together, while Shino cleverly used the insect tactics to defeat a ninja from the Sound Village, causing serious damage to the opponent’s arm.
Next is the duel between Hyuga Neji and Hinata.
Neji jumped into the arena and said confidently, “Miss Hinata, you are no match for me. Just admit defeat.”
Hinata wordlessly launched an attack, but her speed was far inferior to Neci’s. Neci easily dodged, occasionally blocking with his hands. He knew his own strength very well, and if he launched an attack, Hinata would definitely suffer heavy damage.
“Brother Neji, please give it your all.” Hinata mustered up the courage to ask.
“Once I attack, you will have no power to fight back.” Neji warned. As soon as he finished speaking, he instantly appeared behind Hinata and knocked her out with one blow.
“Hyuga Neji wins!”
The audience was shocked by Neji’s powerful strength, and the long-awaited Byakugan showdown ended in an instant.
Kankuro defeated his opponent with the help of puppetry, while Shikamaru used his wits and shadow imitation to successfully defeat the female ninja of Sound Village.
In the final match, Rock Lee and Gaara are about to face off.
Rock Lee flashed and quickly appeared on the field, while Gaara turned into a gust of wind and sand and appeared mysteriously opposite him.
“Your dark circles are really obvious. Didn’t you sleep well last night? You’d better just give in and go back to get some sleep. After all, lack of sleep is very bad for your health.” Rock Lee commented to Gaara with a hint of sarcasm.
“Shut up, you’re looking for death!” Gaara roared angrily.
“Oh, it looks like someone is about to explode. That kid from Konoha should be careful, lest he end up in a miserable situation.” Kankuro said jokingly.
Today, Rock Lee is lightly equipped and facing an opponent who may release the power of the tailed beast at any time. This is not an easy battle.
Gaara’s sand failed to form a defense in time. Rock Lee instantly passed through the sand curtain, and used all his strength to strike Gaara’s chest with his Iron Sand Palm. The sand failed to completely block the fierce blow.
In an instant, Rock Lee’s palm changed and pulled down rapidly along Gaara’s chest, leaving five horrifying finger marks, as if torn by sharp claws, and the power of the Iron Sand Palm was fully revealed.
Then, Rock Lee stepped back lightly, avoiding Gaara Sand’s next attack.
A trace of shock flashed in Gaara’s eyes after he was severely injured. He didn’t expect that he would be injured in the first round. “I must kill you!” He roared, controlling the sand to rush towards Rock Lee frantically, as if intending to kill him with one blow.
“The battle has just begun!”
Rock Lee instantly accelerated, transforming into a flash of lightning as he closed in on Gaara. With a single “Shadow Dance Leaf” kick, he sent his opponent flying into the sky. Then, skillfully using his bandages, he engulfed Gaara in a whirlwind and slammed him to the ground. With a roar, the earth trembled and dust flew up.
“The lotus of Konoha is in full bloom.” Teacher Kai couldn’t help but admire after witnessing all this.
Rock Lee landed, his eyes fixed on Gaara calmly. He had anticipated that the blow wouldn’t severely injure Gaara, as the sand had formed a buffer beneath the ground. Gaara quickly climbed to his feet, his sand armor shattered, but he wasn’t seriously injured.
“You’d better admit defeat, otherwise you can’t defeat me.” Rock Lee advised calmly.
Kankuro and Temari witnessed this scene and were shocked by the powerful strength of Konoha’s Genin, realizing that this mission would be full of challenges.
Gaara manipulated the sand frantically, launching attacks one after another, roaring, “I’m going to kill you!”
Faced with Gaara’s relentless defiance, Rock Lee decisively opened the third gate, further increasing his speed to the point where only the top jonin and the Hokage could track him. Like a shadow, he darted through the dust, his iron sand palms piercing the sand. Gaara’s defenses were steadily crumbling under this ghostly onslaught.
In the tense and exciting competition, Gaara’s body was constantly splattered with blood, and soon he was covered in blood, but he became more violent and kept roaring.
“Kai, is this the legendary Iron Sand Palm? His palms are as hard as iron and yet they are so powerful, even though the path of training is extremely difficult.” Kakashi couldn’t help but ask.
“Yes, he has mastered this technique. His hands are indestructible and can break metal and shatter stone. Their power is beyond imagination.” Kai answered seriously, which was rare.
The spectators around were shocked by the possibility of training their hands into sharp weapons, while the people of Sand Village were worried that Gaara would lose control of his emotions and transform into a tailed beast, causing chaos.
The original plan was to use Gaara’s characteristics to destroy Konoha Village in the finals, but now it is unknown whether he can participate in the finals.
“Blood…blood…blood…” Gaara’s mental state was obviously abnormal. The sand suddenly shrank and completely wrapped him into a ball.
Seeing this, Maki quickly jumped off the ring and shouted anxiously, “We, the Sand Village, admit defeat. Gaara, stop!”
After some time, Gaara finally calmed down, the sand dispersed, and Maki helped him down from the ring.
“Rock Lee wins.”
The last match was between Choji and Sound Ninja. In the end, Choji was defeated and the rematch came to an end.
“I look forward to your even more exciting performances in next month’s finals. Come on, young people!”
During that fateful month, the companions made rapid progress in their respective fields: Sasuke mastered the Chidori, while Naruto mastered a powerful summoning technique. Meanwhile, Neji, Tenten, and Rock Lee each worked diligently to improve their own abilities. Neji focused on the Four Wings technique, Tenten on increasing the precision and power of her hidden weapon manipulation, and Rock Lee on improving his strength and speed.
In order to achieve his goal, Rock Lee increased the weight to 3,000 kilograms. He started his warm-up by running 20 laps around Konoha Village every day, and then carried out a series of rigorous training: hammering iron stakes, enduring electric shocks to practice the Golden Bell Cover, and basic whip kick and straight punch exercises.
Elsewhere, Neji unleashed his chakra wings and executed a series of challenging maneuvers, while Tenten continuously fired hidden weapons at him for combat training. Although Rock Lee couldn’t yet rival Sasuke, he understood the weight of his responsibility. Faced with the potential for a major Ninja World War, he diligently prevented inter-village slaughter to maintain Konoha’s fighting power.
Considering the potential crisis, Xiao Li longed to open the Seventh Gate within a month and use the power of the Day Tiger to fight all threats. Therefore, he increased the voltage of his training to 1500 volts, firmly thinking: no matter what, he must do his part for peace in the ninja world.
During that crucial month, our companions experienced rapid growth. Sasuke mastered the powerful Chidori, Naruto mastered summoning techniques, and Neji, Tenten, and Rock Lee made significant strides in their respective fields. Neji focused on improving his four-wing technique, Tenten pursued higher levels of hidden weapon manipulation, and Rock Lee continuously pushed himself to new heights in his dual cultivation of strength and speed.
To enhance his strength, Lee increased his load to 3,000 kilograms and underwent rigorous daily training, ranging from running 20 laps of Konoha to hammering iron stakes and practicing electric shocks. Neji, aided by his chakra wings, performed various difficult maneuvers while a barrage of hidden weapons was fired at him daily, practicing combat drills.
Although Lee knew he was no match for Sasuke, he worked hard to prevent the war from spreading and protect Konoha’s strength in the tense situation of the Ninja World War. In order to open the Seventh Gate within a month, he even increased the training voltage to 1500 volts, eager to protect the peace of the Ninja World with the power of the Day Tiger.
While Konoha Village currently appears peaceful on the surface, undercurrents are turbulent. He recalled that the invigilator responsible for the preliminaries had recently died under mysterious circumstances, the exact cause of death gradually fading from people’s memory. Similarly, that Oto-nin was terminated by Gaara, who also regrettably failed to advance beyond the tournament.
With Gaara eliminated, Orochimaru’s plan to use the One-Tail to cause chaos was obviously no longer feasible.
In a secret place, Orochimaru and Kabuto Yakushi were discussing countermeasures for this.
“Those idiots from Sunagakure actually prevented the One-Tailed Jinchuriki from reaching the finals. That Rock Lee is no simple person. He once prevented me from engraving the curse seal on Sasuke in the Forest of Death, and almost made me fail. His strength should not be underestimated. It is not easy to get rid of him quietly. We can only wait for the right opportunity.” Orochimaru analyzed to Kabuto Yakushi.
“Then Lord Orochimaru, what should we do now? Without enough stimulation, Gaara cannot transform into the power of the tailed beast.” Kabuto asked.
“It’s okay. It seems we can only wait patiently. Sasuke’s heart is shrouded in darkness. His desire for revenge will drive him to pursue power. He is destined to join my army.” Orochimaru answered in his unique hoarse voice.
At the same time, in the Hokage’s conference room, Konoha’s elite jonin and two advisors gathered.
“It is almost certain that Orochimaru has joined forces with the Sand Village this time, and according to the latest intelligence, Orochimaru has mastered the Impure World Reincarnation technique created by the Second Hokage and has successfully summoned the Third Kazekage.” The Third Hokage reported seriously.
“We must be prepared for a possible confrontation with any deceased powerful ninja, even the First and Second Hokages,” the Sandaime warned in a heavy tone.
“clear.”
A month had passed in a flash, and today was the day of the duel. Notable families from the Fire Nation, as well as important figures from other nations, had arrived.
Neji faces a huge challenge, because once Naruto releases his power, he is almost unbeatable, coupled with his gifted physique and the support of the Nine-Tails.
“Naruto, I never thought that you and I would become rivals. Come on, let me see your true strength. I will show no mercy.” Neji said calmly.
“I don’t need you to let me win. The outcome is still undecided!” Naruto shouted without showing any weakness, then rushed towards Neji and threw a heavy punch.
Neji did not use chakra in this palm strike, but it was enough to show the difference in strength between them.
“Just now I just wanted you to understand the distance between us. Now I will use chakra and perform acupressure techniques. Be careful.” Neji opened his Byakugan and prepared to go all out.
Naruto restrained his arrogance and did not dare to take Neci lightly. He used the “Shadow Clone Technique” to split into ten figures and surrounded Neci.
Neji quickly turned around, chakra burst out from his whole body, and used the “Kaiten” skill. With one blow, all of Naruto’s shadow clones instantly dissipated.
Chapter 19 Chaos (Old Version)
In the stands during that tense match, Hyuga Hiashi watched Neji’s outstanding performance intently, with guilt and regret for the talented player surging in his heart.
Naruto stood up with difficulty, his voice firm and powerful: “Ningji, you are indeed strong, but I am not so easily defeated.”
“I’ve sealed 64 of your vital points with my acupressure points. Chakra can’t flow. You’d better admit defeat, or I will use my true power.”
The audience was shocked by Neji’s words, and Hiashi was also surprised, realizing how little he knew about the genius of the branch family.
Although Naruto tried in vain to mobilize his own chakra, he began to channel the Kyuubi’s chakra, red energy rising around him like flames as he felt his strength return and charged at Neji.
Faced with Naruto’s sudden increase in speed, Neji remained calm, dodging the attack with a light dodge, and then used the “Soft Fist, Bagua 128 Palm”. His hands were as fast as lightning, hitting Naruto with loud and continuous sounds.
Naruto took the heavy blow, spitting blood, and his body was thrown far away. Hiashi stood up in shock, not expecting Neji to have created such a powerful 128 palms, with power and speed far beyond the norm.
Neji once again tried to persuade Naruto to surrender, his tone revealing respect for his opponent: “You are seriously injured. If you don’t admit defeat, the next attack may be fatal. There is no deep hatred between us, so you’d better give up.”
This… is absolutely impossible! I will become the Hokage in the future. How can I admit defeat here? With an unyielding will, Naruto stood up again. The red chakra on his body became more and more dazzling, and his eyes flashed with determination.
He rushed towards Neji like a tiger descending a mountain, his speed much faster than before, and the chakra around him seemed to begin to condense into a protective coat. Facing this unyielding attack, Neji felt quite difficult. Naruto was like a cockroach that would never fall.
“Kaiten!” Neji shouted, his body spinning rapidly, stirring up a gust of wind. Naruto fearlessly met the force head-on, engaging in a fierce confrontation with Kaiten. As Kaiten’s speed slowed, Neji felt unprecedented pressure. He increased his chakra output, determined not to lose this battle.
Once, his heart was filled with the fire of revenge against the Zong family, but now, he only thinks about how to surpass Rock Lee through unremitting efforts. Every day ends with extreme training, just to avoid collapsing in such an occasion.
With a deafening crash, Neji landed steadily on the ground, breathing heavily. He had never thought Naruto could push him to this point. This was just a test, and Neji had never intended to hurt anyone in this competition, especially with a fellow villager.
Suddenly, the ground shook, and Naruto burst out from beneath the ground. Neji reacted quickly, his chakra surging into a pair of shimmering chakra wings. With a gentle flap, they quickly carried him away from the battlefield.
In Naruto’s arena, Naruto’s attack failed and his eyes fell on the shocking pair of “chakra wings” on Neji’s back. He accused loudly in confusion: “Are you cheating? How could you have wings!” His voice was full of unwillingness and confusion.
Neji, however, calmly explained, “This is a new jutsu I created, called Chakra Wings. It’s based on the Kaiten principle, allowing chakra to be released from points on the back and condensed into the form of wings.”
There was a burst of exclamations from the audience. They couldn’t believe that the young man in front of them was able to create his own ninjutsu.
Hiashi thought to himself: Neji, you have grown to this point. Not only have you mastered the moves passed down by the main family, but you can also innovate. If Hiashi can inherit the main family, the Hyuga family will surely become more glorious.
Naruto’s heart was filled with envy and anxiety. He secretly wondered when he would be able to create his own ninjutsu. At this moment, Neji moved at an astonishing speed, almost impossible to catch with the naked eye, and a heavy blow landed on Naruto’s chest.
Shikamaru exclaimed, “It’s so fast that even my eyes can’t keep up. It seems that Naruto is really going to lose this time.”
Finally, the referee announced the result of the match, with Neji as the winner. Lee quickly rushed off the field, helped Naruto up, and took him aside to rest. Naruto’s strong physique would soon recover.
The battle excited the audience. They witnessed the birth of a genius, cheered for Neji, and looked forward to his future glory.
Soon after, the second match was announced. Due to Sasuke’s absence, the order of the matches was forced to change, and it eventually became a duel between Aburame Shino and Kankuro. In this final, Kankuro became the only hope for Sunagakure, while the other seven contestants were all from Konoha.
Struggling with the decision to withdraw from the competition, Kankuro knew his every move represented not only his personal honor, but also the dignity and war funds of Sunagakure and even the Wind Country. If he chose to withdraw, Sunagakure’s achievements in this assessment would be for naught. He recalled Maki’s teachings: maintain strength and wait for the opportunity to strike.
Finally, in front of everyone, he announced in a deep voice: “I give up.” The eyes of the other contestants were all focused on him. Although Kankuro was thick-skinned, he couldn’t help feeling ashamed at this moment. As the last man in Sunagakure, he chose to give in at the critical moment.
In the stands, a sneer appeared on the Hokage’s lips: “Lord Kazekage, it seems that the finals have become a civil war in our Konoha. You are too polite.” The Third Hokage took the opportunity to mock, but the fake Kazekage – Orochimaru, was indifferent and showed no shame.
Then, referee Genma Shiranui announced, “Next, Tenten versus Nara Shikamaru.” Tenten leaped into the ring with a dashing move, while Shikamaru was torn between whether to follow Kankuro in forfeiting. Just then, Rock Lee suddenly appeared and gave Shikamaru an encouraging kick.
Xuanjian looked at Shikamaru and signaled that the game could begin.
In the tense duel, Tenten launched a relentless attack, hurling kunai at Shikamaru. Based on Lee’s intelligence, she knew Shikamaru was exceptionally resourceful, so she unleashed her full strength without hesitation. “Lee has already revealed to me that your IQ is well over 200. I need no further explanation; I must give it my all.” With that, her attacks rained down on Shikamaru like a torrential downpour.
Forced to be at a disadvantage, Shikamaru kept dodging in the sunlight. Tenten skillfully controlled her kunai, chasing him relentlessly, not giving him any chance to breathe. Shikamaru couldn’t help but cast a resentful look at Lee while dodging, but Lee just responded with a nonchalant wave of his hand, as if to say, “You’re welcome.”
Shikamaru felt frustrated, but could only flee in embarrassment. Tenten’s offensive left him no time to mobilize his chakra, and she always kept her distance, making it impossible for Shikamaru’s shadow imitation technique to reach her. He silently cursed Xiao Li for being cunning, believing he must have thoroughly analyzed his tactics.
In a desperate attempt, Shikamaru stripped off his coat and tied it to his kunai, using it as a parachute, attempting to cast a shadow in a blind spot and escape Tenten’s sight. However, Tenten had already seen his movements and, upon seeing the coat transform into a parachute, immediately shot it down with her kunai. “Shikamaru, do you think you can cast a shadow with this parachute? I saw that coming!” Tenten’s prediction left Shikamaru feeling extremely frustrated, and he couldn’t help but wonder, if even such a small trick had been discovered, how could the battle continue?
“I choose to surrender.” Shikamaru had to admit that due to the current geographical disadvantage and Tenten’s thorough understanding of him, if he were in other complex terrains, he might still be able to fight her, but at this moment he had no choice but to admit defeat.
“Tenten’s strength should not be underestimated as he was able to put Shikamaru in such a situation,” Asuma commented. Of all people, he understood Shikamaru the best.
The following match filled the audience with anticipation, especially the battle with Uchiha Sasuke. Most people at the scene came for him.
“Next is the match between Uchiha Sasuke and Rock Lee.” Shiranui Genma announced the upcoming match.
Rock Lee appeared in the arena in an instant, while Sasuke and Kakashi were slow to arrive and were a few minutes late.
Orochimaru looked at Rock Lee with a gloomy look, his heart full of resentment – it was this kid who almost ruined his plan. His old plan had come to nothing, and it was still unknown whether the new plan would succeed.
Rock Lee’s feelings towards Sasuke are quite complicated, neither hating nor liking him. He betrayed Konoha for revenge, but eventually returned. He is a contradictory character, with good and evil intertwined, perhaps due to his childhood experiences.
“Sasuke, you’re finally back! I thought I’d be promoted straight away,” Rock Lee said with a smile. Sasuke might have gone to study Chidori, but he didn’t know that Rock Lee’s resistance to lightning was no longer what it used to be.
Sasuke remained silent, his eyes deep. He knew from observing the confrontation between Rock Lee and Orochimaru that this battle would be a difficult challenge for him.
He suddenly sprinted towards Rock Lee. His speed showed his hard training in the past month, but facing Rock Lee, this speed still seemed not enough.
Rock Lee easily swung his body and arrived in front of Sasuke in an instant. He punched Sasuke and knocked him away, but he deliberately did not use the deadly Iron Sand Palm to avoid accidentally hurting Sasuke.
Sasuke covered his abdomen in pain, his coughs filled with resentment and unwillingness, not only because of his own shortcomings, but also because of Rock Lee’s strength.
Sasuke launched another offensive and attacked Rock Lee with the Konoha Great Tornado skill, but Rock Lee smiled contemptuously, obviously thinking that he could not defeat him by just copying the Sharingan.
“Sasuke is incredibly talented, but the physical disparity between him and Lee cannot be ignored,” Gai commented to Kakashi.
“The outcome depends on whether Sasuke can unleash his ultimate move,” Kakashi said with a sharp gaze, having a clear understanding of Rock Lee’s strength.
As the two men fought with the same moves, Sasuke felt as if his leg had kicked into a hard steel plate, and the severe pain forced him to retreat quickly.
In a breathtaking duel, Sasuke concentrated his chakra, formed hand seals, and called out, “Fire Style: Great Fireball Jutsu.” Instantly, a fiery fireball erupted, like a blazing blaze, hurtling towards Rock Lee. Facing this onslaught of flames, Rock Lee remained undaunted. Steadfastly planted in a horse stance, he concentrated all his strength into his right palm and unleashed his signature technique, “Iron Sand Palm,” striking the fireball head-on with a resounding impact that stunned the audience. This direct physical confrontation with ninjutsu seemed to overturn their understanding of the world of ninjutsu.
When the smoke and dust from the fireball’s explosion cleared, Rock Lee stood intact, his body in place, as exclamations echoed from all around. Kakashi, witnessing the scene, marveled, “The power of this Iron Sand Palm is truly astonishing, capable of easily breaking C-rank ninjutsu. While the training method is simple, reaching this level is impossible without a taijutsu prodigy like Rock Lee.”
Sasuke’s eyes flashed with shock. Unwilling to give up, he immediately leaped onto the wall and quickly formed hand seals. A violent burst of lightning gathered in his palms. It was the legendary Chidori, a deadly technique invented early by Kakashi that had served him well in countless battles. Rock Lee responded calmly. When their attacks collided, a flash of lightning ignited, but the Chidori failed to penetrate Rock Lee’s iron sand palm. Only a few drops of blood fell quietly, witnessing the peak showdown between the two in taijutsu and ninjutsu.
In the audience, many people jumped up in astonishment. Kakashi’s famous Chidori was actually intercepted by someone’s hand. Even the Third Hokage was stunned by this scene and felt unbelievable about Rock Lee’s strength.
“What a pity! As a ninja who specializes in physical skills, your future seems limited. Although you may surpass Sasuke in the early stage through hard training, when Sasuke grows further, you will probably only become his stepping stone.” Orochimaru whispered with contempt.
However, Orochimaru had never witnessed Might Guy’s full power, otherwise he would have re-evaluated Rock Lee.
Sasuke looked at Rock Lee with a serious look as he attacked him. There were only a few drops of blood and no scars at all, which made him wonder if Rock Lee had become so powerful.
Rock Lee grabbed Sasuke’s wrist and threw him out with force.
“The action begins!”
As feathers fell from the sky, the audience fell into a deep sleep. Suddenly, a masked ANBU member rushed towards Sasuke, seemingly intending to rescue him.
Rock Lee immediately recognized it as Kabuto Yakushi, who was trying to kidnap Sasuke. “Konoha Gourami!” Rock Lee charged at Kabuto without hesitation, kicking him back.
Elsewhere, Orochimaru, disguised as the Fourth Kazekage, had already abducted the Third Hokage and leaped onto the rooftop. Taking advantage of the chaos, the four ninjas quickly set up the Four Purple Flame Formation.
Chapter 20: Impure World Reincarnation (Old Version)
During the fierce battle, Gaara transformed into a half-human, half-beast state, with the right half of his body completely covered by the power of the tailed beast, and his tail was huge and conspicuous.
“I will prove my worth with your death!” He roared, and with a swing of his right hand, countless gravels condensed into deadly shuriken, flying towards Rock Lee. However, these attacks were nothing but child’s play for Rock Lee. His five layers of defense were impenetrable, and the sand hitting him was like a breeze.
Rock Lee flashed, instantly passing through the attack and appearing at Gaara’s flank. His iron sand palm struck Gaara’s sanded right arm with a deafening crack, sending dust and dust flying everywhere. Immediately afterwards, his left palm swung out, striking Gaara in the side. Even with the protection of the sand armor, Gaara was still severely injured by the blow, coughing up blood, and his body was thrown far away.
Temari and Kankuro arrived in time and took the seriously injured Gaara away from the battlefield. Rock Lee did not pursue him, as he knew Gaara still had a mission to complete, otherwise the palm strike he had just struck would have been fatal.
At the same time, Konoha Village was suffering from the destruction of Orochi. Although the villagers evacuated to a safe area in an orderly manner, the joint attack of Sand Village and Sound Ninja still caused serious casualties to the Konoha ninjas.
In the fierce competition, Kakashi quickly instructed Sakura: “Go wake up Naruto and Shikamaru, the five of you team up to chase the injured Gaara. Xiao Li has already seriously injured him, so be careful.”
“Understood!” Sakura took the order and left.
Meanwhile, Rock Lee stood alone on the rooftop where Orochimaru was hiding, facing the barrier set by the Sound Four, and he felt the urge to test it out. Orochimaru was busy implanting talismans into the heads of the First and Second Hokage.
Rock Lee pulled out his nunchaku and swung it skillfully. In an instant, a golden bell appeared, turning into a whirlwind and stirring up a violent airflow.
“What are you going to do?” an Anbu member asked loudly, his voice revealing his concern for Rock Lee.
“I want to verify the strength of this barrier. Everyone, stand back.” Rock Lee answered firmly.
“How funny, another guy seeking death. Come on, let’s see if you can withstand our Four Purple Flame Needles.” One of the Four Sound Ninjas laughed.
Rock Lee said nothing, but simply spun faster, forming a spectacular tornado. The roof tiles were swept up into the clouds by the force.
Finally, he leaped with all his might and hit the barrier with astonishing momentum. After a deafening noise, the barrier began to shake. The four Sound Ninjas vomited blood and had to increase their chakra output to stabilize the barrier.
At the center of the barrier, a golden bell spun rapidly, ablaze with purple flames. Rock Lee’s nunchaku, also stained with purple flames, accelerated its rotation, and instantly felt a sense of lightness as he passed through the barrier.
The Otona quartet vomited blood again, and Orochimaru was shocked that Rock Lee was able to break through the formation. This four purple flame formation was extremely powerful, and anything it touched would be devoured by the purple flames.
“Hokage-sama, I’m here.” Rock Lee said calmly.
The third generation Hokage nodded and sighed in his heart that Rock Lee’s strength was extraordinary and could share a lot of combat pressure with him.
“It just so happens that I was just about to get rid of you, but I didn’t expect you to fall into the trap. Go ahead and kill those two men.” Orochimaru said with a sinister smile.
“Don’t think that you can win by relying on the power of the First and Second Hokage. They can’t even exert one tenth of their strength in their heyday, right? Orochimaru, your tricks can’t fool anyone. They are just empty shells now, how powerful can the ninjutsu they use be?” Rock Lee retorted.
“It seems that you know me well. Why don’t you join me and become my deputy? Even Kabuto will obey you.” Orochimaru persuaded.
“I don’t know much about you, but I am well aware of the power of the two Hokage. The first Hokage was able to pacify the troubled times and distribute the tailed beasts. If he was at his peak, your mere talisman would never be able to control him.” Rock Lee firmly rejected Orochimaru’s proposal.
–
“The Second Hokage, as the creator of this secret technique, would still find it difficult to control its power even if he recovered to his peak condition. Do you dare to let them exert only 50% of their strength? If so, you will be the first to suffer destruction.” Rock Lee analyzed in a firm tone.
“You sharp-tongued brat, charge and kill them!” The First Hokage shouted angrily and ran straight towards the Third Hokage, while the Second Hokage pounced on Rock Lee.
The Second Hokage was as fast as lightning, and he punched Rock Lee directly. Rock Lee was calm, blocking with his left hand, and using his right hand to use the iron sand palm, he hit the Second Hokage’s chest hard, knocking him away in an instant, and the dust flew up.
The Second Hokage rolled over to steady himself, the wound on his chest slowly healing. He charged again, but Rock Lee was ready. He used the Shadow Dance Leaf at extreme speed, kicking the Second Hokage into the sky and following closely behind.
“Li Lianhua!” Rock Lee turned into a gust of wind in the air and attacked the Second Hokage repeatedly. Every attack made the Second Hokage’s figure more and more blurred, until it finally completely dissipated in the air.
The battle paused, Rock Lee put away the “Inner Lotus”, dust flew in the distance, and the figure of the Second Hokage slowly reunited, but it was obvious that he needed time to recover.
Then, Rock Lee launched a fierce attack on the First Hokage with the “Konoha Gourami Whirlwind”. The First Hokage, who was fighting with the Third Hokage, was kicked away. The Third Hokage seemed to be exhausted and panting, and it was obvious that the years had left their marks on him.
“Hokage-sama has been reborn through the Impure World Reincarnation and possesses an immortal body. The only way for us is to seal him. We have to find a way to break the barrier and notify the Sealing Squad to rush to the rescue. The power of the two Hokage is currently limited, so sealing them won’t be too difficult.” Rock Lee analyzed.
“The barrier set up by the four Sound Ninjas is extremely strong. Is there any good way to break it?” asked the Third Hokage with concern.
“Leave it to me.”
“Anbu, listen up! Quickly find the sealing squad and prepare to carry out the sealing mission on the two Hokages!” Rock Lee shouted orders to the Anbu members outside.
After receiving the order, the Anbu members took action immediately. One member left quickly, and it was expected that the sealing team would arrive soon.
“Breaking my barrier is no joke.” Orochimaru sneered and then rushed towards the battlefield.
Rock Lee swung his nunchakus with swift movements, completing the Golden Bell Spin move in an instant. He leaped forward and headed straight for the enemy.
The Third Hokage’s eyes were sharp as he aimed at the charging Orochimaru, his hand seals flying. “Fire Style: Fire Dragon Flame Bomb!” A raging sea of fire spread towards the First and Second Hokage and Orochimaru.
The Second Hokage had not yet fully recovered, and his body was once again eroded by the sea of fire. Orochimaru stopped in an emergency, and used “Earth Style: Earth Flow Wall!” A huge earth wall broke out of the ground, successfully blocking the fire dragon’s attack.
The first generation Hokage calmly formed a hand seal, “Wood Style: Tree World Advent!” With the sound of the ground cracking, saplings broke through the soil and grew rapidly. In the blink of an eye, towering trees rose from the ground.
Rock Lee, with unparalleled valor, shattered Touya’s barrier with a single blow, instantly disintegrating the Four Purple Flame Formation. Frightened, Touya was forced to retreat, and his carefully constructed formation dissipated. Outlying ANBU units seized the opportunity to swarm the battlefield. Seeing this, Orochimaru was enraged, his carefully crafted plan shattered. Before his troops could reach him, he hastily reversed his Impure World Reincarnation Jutsu, securing the precious remains of the First and Second Generations for future use. Leaving Rock Lee with a harsh message, he fled with the Sound Four.
With the Chunin Exams concluded, the Third Hokage survived, and Orochimaru’s hands were still unsealed, leaving Sasuke in a precarious position. Now, Orochimaru no longer needed to rush for reincarnation, patiently waiting for Sasuke to come to him, obviating the need for a three-year adaptation period. Meanwhile, Neji and his companions raced in pursuit of Gaara, with Puck leading the way and warning them of the approaching pursuit.
“Let me deal with these guys, you guys keep moving forward,” Neji said decisively. His strength was enough to easily deal with the challenge of several Sound Ninjas.
The other Chunins knew how powerful Neji was, so no one raised any objections. “Ningji, bring out the same strength you used against me and finish them off quickly,” Naruto encouraged.
“Don’t underestimate the battlefield. Do you think you are strong enough? You would have been dead there.” Neji stopped and looked behind him. Soon, the group of Sound Ninja appeared in his sight.
Neji quickly condensed two pairs of wings, determined to end the battle quickly. He knew in his heart that the battle that Gaara, as the One-Tailed Jinchuriki, would face would be extremely difficult.
With a slight flap of his wings, Neji turned into a high-speed moving shadow, shuttling among the Sound Ninjas, drawing an elegant and deadly trajectory. Blood splattered from the kunai, and the Sound Ninjas fell to the ground, covering their necks.
After ending the four-wing state, Neji hurriedly chased after Naruto and the others, and soon encountered Shino and Shikamaru who were fighting fiercely with Kankuro.
“Shadow Imitation Technique!” As soon as Shikamaru finished speaking, his shadow bound Kankuro, and Shino’s swarm tactics quickly trapped Kankuro. The terrifying screams that followed were terrifying.
Neji quickly rushed to the scene. “What’s the situation? Are there any enemies?” he asked with concern.
Naruto signaled everyone to pay attention to Kankuro who was surrounded by a swarm of insects. Neji had already used his Byakugan to see through Shino’s secret – there were countless parasitic insects in his body that could control the swarm of insects. This was a mysterious skill passed down by the Aburame clan. Their clan was aloof and low-key and seldom interacted with others.
“We must continue to track them and not let them get away.” Neji suggested calmly.
Everyone nodded in agreement.
Meanwhile, Konoha Village launched a counterattack. The Ino-Shika-Cho team had secretly returned to the village a short time ago, and now they were reunited on the battlefield, greatly increasing their strength.
Jiraiya summoned a giant toad, which fell from the sky and crushed a giant snake in one fell swoop, and then launched an attack on other giant snakes.
“Look at my toad oil fire bomb!” The giant toad spit out oil, which combined with Jiraiya’s flames to form an all-consuming sea of fire, devouring all the giant snakes.
Rock Lee continued to open the Eight Gates, demonstrating his prowess on the battlefield, annihilating one Sound Ninja and Sunagakure ninja after another. Facing the sudden appearance of Sound Ninja, Rock Lee attacked with lightning speed, striking their heads with iron sand palms. With a few thuds, the enemies fell. In a flash, he faced the Sunagakure again, this time targeting the chests instead of the heads. His blows either killed or severely injured the foes, significantly reducing their combat effectiveness.
Rock Lee repeatedly achieved remarkable feats on the battlefields of Sunagakure and Sound Ninja. His powerful Iron Sand Palm intimidated his enemies and saved countless Konoha companions from danger. His deeds of bravery spread throughout Konoha, and his fame spread rapidly. However, after continuous fierce fighting, his physical strength reached a critical point and he was forced to unseal the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu. Overwhelmed with energy, he had to sit down to rest. Even so, he remained vigilant, monitoring the battle situation while diligently cultivating the Golden Bell Guard in his mind.
As a group of Sound Ninja surrounded him, his strength was recovering at an astonishing speed. Facing the siege of Sound Ninja, he remained calm and told them in a calm tone: “Your leader Orochimaru has been defeated. If you don’t leave now, it will be too late.”
The Sound Ninja questioned his words, believing that Orochimaru, as the leader of the Sound Ninja and a former member of Konoha’s Three Ninjas, would be easily defeated. However, Rock Lee remained undaunted and firmly responded, “Orochimaru may be incredibly powerful, but he pales in comparison to the Third Hokage. His attempt to harm the Hokage is undoubtedly courting his own destruction.”
Faced with the unconvinced enemy, several Sound Ninja attacked him without hesitation, kunai in hand, rushing towards him at high speed. Under their attack, Rock Lee remained calm and firm in his position.
Twenty-first tailed beast (old version)
Facing the dragon-like fireball, Rock Lee roared, “Fire Style: Great Fireball Jutsu,” steady as a rock. With a single palm strike, he concentrated his energy and shattered the massive fireball. Before the smoke and dust had even cleared, he had already darted out, charging straight for his enemy.
The strategy of a quick victory flashed through Rock Lee’s mind. He moved swiftly, hitting the enemy on the head with a palm. Then the nunchaku followed like a shadow and smashed the Otonin’s shoulder with force, knocking him down with one blow. The following knife-hand took the opponent’s life.
After a brief respite, Rock Lee found a quiet spot, sat cross-legged, and began to regulate his breathing. From forcibly breaking through the barrier, to battling with the second-generation master, to destroying the barrier, his physical strength was at its limit. But the internal energy of the Golden Bell Cover continued to flow through his body, and the life energy nourished his exhausted body like spring rain.
At the same time, Neji and others finally caught up with Gaara, only to see that his upper body had transformed into the form of a tailed beast. Even Temari would be frightened by his appearance.
In the midst of a thrilling battle, Gaara declared murderously, “Haha, I’m going to annihilate you all, especially you, Rock Lee!” Before he’d finished speaking, countless balls of sand rained down upon them like a torrential rain. Neji decisively stepped forward, activating his “Kaiten” technique. A surge of blue chakra swirled, forming a powerful storm that deflected all the sand balls, ensuring the safety of his companions.
Then, Gaara suddenly attacked the vulnerable Sakura. Neji, quick-witted and swift-handed, stepped forward and blocked the attack with his body. Sasuke expertly formed hand seals, gathering lightning chakra in his palms. With a shrill cry, his “Chidori” skill gathered momentum. Meanwhile, Shikamaru skillfully used the “Shadow Mimicry Technique” to restrain Gaara’s movements, preventing him from raising his arms in defense.
Sasuke’s Chidori struck Gaara’s chest with unerring accuracy. With a sharp, electric thud, the sand on Gaara’s body was shattered by the shock. Though the sand arm dissipated instantly, it quickly reassembled. Finally, Gaara unleashed his Wind Style, Infinite Breakthrough, drawing air through several parts of his body like breathing. He drew in the surrounding storm, his chest instantly expanding, and a fierce gust of wind erupted, sending branches flying all around him.
Neji stretched his body, leaping to the front of the formation. His hands flew, and a whirling chakra ball, created by the “Kaiten” technique, roared out, seeming to expel the air from all around. His figure flashed like lightning, and he was at Gaara’s side. Then, he launched a series of “Bagua Zhang 128 Palms,” with the Bagua totems looming beneath his feet. Each punch pierced the air with a sound, sending the sand around Gaara scattering.
Gaara, who was severely injured, vomited blood, and the upper half of his tailed beast body was twisted and deformed, but he still struggled to stand up, his eyes bloodshot, and roared arrogantly: “I will wipe out all of you. I am Shura, and I only love myself, and no one else can survive!”
Naruto followed closely behind and performed the “Multiple Shadow Clone Technique”. Numerous clones surged towards Gaara like a tide, and the subsequent “Naruto Two Thousand Consecutive Bullets” poured down like a rainstorm, and finally a heavy kick knocked Gaara down.
Faced with such a fierce attack, Gaara’s fighting spirit remained undimmed, but rather intensified. He unleashed the power of Shukaku, the One-Tailed Beast, and the sand coalesced into a terrifying behemoth. Neji, witnessing this scene, was filled with awe, yet it also strengthened his resolve. “The power of the tailed beasts is truly true. I may face certain death in this battle, but at least I can control my own destiny,” he muttered to himself, preparing for the impending decisive battle.
“You guys retreat quickly and look for opportunities to provide support. I’ll try to hold him back.” Neji has made up his mind to protect him even at the cost of his life. This is one of the few times when he truly acts according to his own wishes.
Dense chakra gathered behind him, gradually transforming into a magnificent four-winged spectacle.
Seeing this scene, Naruto and others were shocked and realized Neji’s determination. “I will not leave any of my companions. We are part of the team.” Naruto shouted firmly.
“Prepare for battle. We will try our best to delay time. Reinforcements are expected to arrive soon.” Shikamaru commanded confidently.
“To force me to be calm, all of you just disappear. Wind Style: Air Training.” Gaara roared and released a powerful air cannon.
“Come back!” Neji rushed forward, his body turned into a whirlwind, and took the attack head-on. Although he was gradually feeling exhausted, he quickly increased his chakra output.
Immediately afterwards, the second training bullet followed. Neji roared, and the power of “Kaiten” increased dramatically, successfully rebounding the continuous attacks and protecting the safety of his companions.
The attack stopped, Neji was extremely tired and gasping for breath. His chakra was exhausted and he was still far from the power of the tailed beasts.
“I’m thrilled that you were able to withstand my practice bullets. Now, I’ll show you the true meaning of the Sand Incarnation, the art of feigning sleep!”
Shukaku finally broke free, waving its sand arms and charging at the crowd. “Free at last! How dare a few little bugs try to stop me?” Its sand hands slammed down like giant palms, covering the sky and the sun.
Naruto quickly bit his fingertip and unleashed a summoning technique. As smoke rose, Shukaku’s arm sank deep into it.
As the smoke dissipated, a huge toad appeared, holding a short knife in its hand. With a sudden swing, it cut off Shukaku’s sand arm.
“Kid, every time you call me here, it’s always bad news. How did you provoke this monster?” Wen Tai asked unhappily.
“Hey, a stinky toad dares to block the road? Get out of the way if you don’t want to die!” Shukaku mocked arrogantly.
Wen Tai was furious and was insulted as soon as he appeared. He was determined to let Shukaku experience the true strength of the Toad Clan of Myoko Mountain.
“Wind Style: Air Training Bullet!”
“Water Style: Teppōdama!”
“Attention, the goal is to wake up Gaara above Shukaku’s head. I will entangle it, and you find an opportunity to act.” Wen Tai commanded everyone.
During this battle, Sasuke’s heart was tormented. As the former top student, he watched Neji, Rock, and others surpass him, and now even Naruto was ahead. The darkness within him gradually spread. The desire for revenge, the powerlessness in the face of powerful enemies, and the surpassing of his companions gave him a single thought: to seek the power of Orochimaru.
Wen Tai gripped the short sword tightly and bravely rushed towards Shukaku, using one skill after another: “Wind Style: Air Training Bullet, Water Style: Iron Cannon Ball!” As he moved, the rain in the sky became more violent.
He swung his sword fiercely, but Shukaku swiftly crossed his arms and took the blow, then with a swift sweep of his tail, sent Buntai flying.
The sand waves surged towards everyone like a raging tide. Wen Tai was quick-witted and used his cleverness to rescue his companions one by one.
“I’ll get closer to it, and you find the right moment to attack. Naruto, use the Shadow Clone Technique to turn me into a beast with sharp claws and fangs.” As soon as he finished speaking, Wen Tai transformed into a ferocious beast and pounced on Shukaku.
Instantly, a giant phantom of a nine-tailed demon fox appeared, accompanied by Neji and his men, ready to launch a surprise attack on Gaara.
With a loud bang, Wentai and Shukaku collided violently.
“Hurry, the opportunity has come, I can’t hold on for much longer.” Wen Tai urged hurriedly.
Neji gathered all the remaining chakra in his body and unleashed the Hyuga family’s unique long-range technique: “Eight Trigrams Palm!”
“Shadow Clone Technique!” Naruto split into five clones and rushed towards Gaara. Suddenly, a wall of earth appeared, blocking Neji’s attack, and Naruto took the opportunity to jump over the wall and punched Gaara in the face.
As Gaara slowly woke up, Shukaku’s eyes gradually lost their luster, the sand gradually dispersed, and his figure collapsed to the ground. At this time, Temari and Kankuro arrived in time and guarded Gaara’s side.
Sasuke and Shikamaru were about to leave when Naruto stopped them, “Let them go.”
Gaara stared at Naruto with a dull look, and with the support of Temari, he slowly disappeared from sight.
At this moment in Konoha Village, most areas have returned to peace, with only a few stubborn enemies left, and their demise is only a matter of time.
“After this incident, I plan to resign from the position of Hokage,” the Third Hokage said with a sigh, “I’m getting old and feel I’m no longer able to do what I want. If it weren’t for Rock Lee risking his life to break the barrier, I, this old man, might have already reunited with the previous Hokage.”
“I have considered passing the position of Hokage to you. You are the best candidate in terms of qualifications, strength, and contribution to the village. Moreover, after this battle, my body is not as good as before. Now I just want to teach Konohamaru well at home.”
“Teacher, I plan to travel around and collect materials, and my personality is indeed not suitable for being Hokage. Tsunade is more suitable for this position than me.”
“Well, that’s it.”
Several days have passed since the finals of the Chunin Exams. At the second training ground, the Gai’s squad is engaged in collective training. Through this battle, Rock Lee realized his weakness—his lack of a single-hit, one-hit kill technique. Facing a truly formidable foe, even opening six gates would still be insufficient. Only by reaching seven gates could one be considered a true powerhouse, on par with the tailed beasts.
At this moment, an eagle cried in the sky, which was Konoha’s signal for help.
At a command from Teacher Gai, the four of them rushed towards the river. “Kakashi is in danger, we have to hurry!” As soon as the words fell, Gai rushed out, followed closely by Kakashi, Rock Lee, and the rest of the team. Soon, they reached their destination.
At the riverbank, Uchiha Itachi and Hoshigaki Kisame faced off, with Kisame about to attack Asuma and Kurenai. With a roar, Gai unleashed his “Konoha Gourami Whirlwind,” forcing Kisame back with two consecutive strikes. Rock Lee followed suit, sending Kisame crashing into the river’s brick wall with a powerful kick. Blood streamed from Kisame’s mouth, and he muttered unwillingly, “I never expected to encounter these two formidable fellows. If it weren’t for that rare beast last time, I would have finished him off long ago.”
“Have we ever fought before?” Teacher Kai asked. Kisame was so angry that he was speechless.
“Let’s retreat first. They are not easy opponents to deal with.” Itachi suggested calmly.
Gai and the others then accompanied Kakashi to the hospital, while Rock Lee and the others went to the Hokage’s office to learn about the new task assignments.
“Lee, I will be stepping down soon, and the duties of Hokage will be taken over by the new successor. Your tasks will be determined after the new Hokage takes office.” The current Hokage announced.
“Hokage-sama, what is the current situation in the Land of Earth? Has a large-scale invasion occurred? Do we need to go and provide support?” Rock Lee asked anxiously.
“The Sand Village has surrendered unconditionally, and the Iwagakure Village has also withdrawn. The two hundred ninjas currently stationed there will await the decision of the Fifth Hokage, Tsunade. You just need to rest well and relax appropriately in the near future.”
As for Tsunade, since Orochimaru has not taken any action yet, her hemophobia is worrying, but it is something that only the top management needs to consider.
Neji and Rock Lee once again plunged into rigorous training, pursuing the improvement of their strength. In the world of ninja, besides carrying out missions, they also trained hard. They were not satisfied with mediocrity and honed themselves with extreme intensity every day.
“Ningji, give me 128 palm strikes. I need this to train my muscles and internal organs to be able to withstand blows.” Rock Lee made a firm request to Neji.
“Rock Lee, this kind of training puts a huge strain on your internal organs. I’m worried it might hurt you.” Neji’s eyes revealed worry.
“Don’t worry, I’m not that fragile. You practice your soft fist with this, while I strengthen your body and internal organs. We will benefit each other.”
“Then I’ll start preparing.”
Rock Lee felt his progress in the Golden Bell Guard was slow, especially in the middle and late stages of cultivation. He knew that the higher levels of the Golden Bell Guard focused on strengthening the internal organs, and to stimulate their growth, the only way was through the Soft Fist.
“Baguazhang, 128 times!” Neji’s palms transformed into a phantom, and with lightning speed, they attacked Rock Lee’s vital points all over his body. Rock Lee felt a numbing pain on the surface of his skin at first, but as the attack deepened, the pain penetrated his internal organs, making him feel excruciating pain.
“It’s not enough, come again!”
With a new round of blows, intense pain returned. Rock Lee silently recited the Golden Bell Guard formula, and a small amount of life energy surged through his internal organs, attempting to repair the injured organs. However, the relief from the pain was only temporary, and even more intense pain continued to surge from the outside world, and Rock Lee could not help but spit out a mouthful of blood.
“Can you continue? Your internal organs may have reached their limit.” Neji asked with concern.
“Go on.” Despite being injured, Rock Lee’s determination remained unwavering.
Chapter 22 Crisis (Old Version)
Under the cover of night, the streets of Konoha Village were still bustling with activity. Villagers, having finished their day’s work, strolled leisurely in the night breeze. Rock Lee and his two companions finished their training and each headed home.
At that moment, a sharp shuriken pierced the quiet night sky, heading straight for Rock Lee. He reacted quickly, leaping lightly, and the shuriken narrowly grazed his shoulder. Then, a black shadow quickly disappeared into the darkness.
Rock Lee gave chase without a second thought. The rooftop felt flat beneath his feet, and he darted between the tiles at a breathtaking speed. A sharp steel knife flew toward him from the darkness. He quickly drew his nunchaku and struck it hard, the sound of metal clashing echoing in the night sky.
“This power is truly formidable,” Rock Lee exclaimed, his speed increasing instead of slowing. Facing the incoming barrage of massive blades, he stood firm, wielding his nunchaku to deflect the blows one by one. However, when Rock Lee tried to locate his opponent, he found no one around. He was filled with doubt: could this be a member of the Root, or an assassin from Akatsuki? Though he couldn’t explain why, he firmly believed that if his opponent appeared once, he would return again, and when he did, he would make sure they suffered.
A few days later, Jiraiya accompanied Tsunade back to the village, preparing her to take over as the Fifth Hokage. Tsunade, the granddaughter of Hashirama Senju, the founder of Konoha, and a disciple of Hiruzen Sarutobi, the Third Hokage, was renowned for her contributions to medical ninjutsu, and undoubtedly the greatest contributor to Konoha’s medical system.
“I am Sarutobi Hiruzen, and I hereby announce that the position of Hokage will be passed to Tsunade Senju, the fifth Hokage of Konoha.” With this announcement, the history of Konoha Village opened a new page.
Tsunade, dressed in her brand new Hokage attire, looked incredibly heroic, each step she took being firm and bold. Rock Lee followed her gaze, inwardly admiring her: she was truly a man among women.
“From now on, I will shoulder the leadership of Konoha as the Fifth Hokage.”
Tsunade’s words were brief but powerful, instantly triggering thunderous applause from the audience. People were full of confidence in the new Hokage.
Not long after, Rock Lee came to Tsunade with determination and submitted a request to join the Anbu, hoping to train there for two years.
“Hokage-sama, I wish to join the ANBU.”
“Can’t.”
“Your moves are too unique. Whether you wear a mask or not, once you use them, your identity will be exposed. You’d better stay in the regular ninja team.” Tsunade flatly refused. She was worried that Rock Lee would lack flexibility at the critical moment like his master Might Guy.
Might Guy, Rock Lee’s mentor, once shared a similar dream, yearning to join the Anbu, but was categorically rejected by the Third Hokage. He even sought help from Danzo, but Danzo believed he lacked a dark side. Danzo is now a completely different person, his mind warped. Where he once sought Konoha’s advancement, he now pursues power, even resorting to framing fellow ninja to further his ambitions.
Rock Lee had just walked out of the Hokage’s office when he ran into Naruto and his group acting suspiciously. “Naruto, what on earth are you three doing sneaking around like that?” he asked curiously.
“Shh!” The three of them signaled him to be quiet in unison, “We are trying to find a way to see Kakashi-sensei’s true appearance. We are curious if he has thick lips or big buck teeth. Xiao Li, aren’t you interested?” Naruto said in a low voice, and got nods in agreement from Sasuke and Sakura.
“I once accidentally caught a glimpse of him, and I remember he was quite handsome,” Rock Lee recalled. “However, it’s not easy to uncover the mysterious mask of Kakashi-sensei. You’d better be mentally prepared, because I can’t even remember the details.”
A few days later, Rock Lee and his companions were summoned to the Hokage’s office to accept a new mission.
“According to reliable intelligence, Orochimaru established the Otogakure, and this attack on Konoha was jointly planned by the Otogakure and the Sand Village,” Tsunade said seriously. “News has come from the Sand Village that the Fourth Kazekage died before the Chunin Exams due to a surprise attack by Orochimaru, and he has been pretending to be the Kazekage since then. Your mission is to find out whether Orochimaru is truly the leader of the Otogakure, or whether he killed the leader in an attempt to shift the blame onto the Otogakure.”
“I understand!” the three responded.
This time, we’re going straight to Orochimaru’s hideout, a mission with unimaginable danger. Remember, Orochimaru held back in the Forest of Death, but this time in Sound Village, he’ll go all out without hesitation. For this reason, the three of us are carrying a large number of hidden weapons with explosive tags, just in case. Sound Village, a place created by Orochimaru, is merely a cover for his human experiments. Most of its inhabitants were gathered by Orochimaru through illicit means, their fate determined by their qualifications. Since the invasion of Konoha, Sound Village has suffered heavy losses, leaving it vulnerable.
As the night deepened, we donned our night clothes and, during a guard change, quietly infiltrated the Otogakure. The village, in stark contrast to Konoha’s prosperity, was dilapidated and utterly desolate. We quickly approached the circular building in the village’s center, presumably the heart of Orochimaru’s experiments. Under cover of darkness, we slipped in through a second-floor window.
Within that grand, three-story circular building, layers of iron gates stood in a maze, instruments used by Orochimaru for his experiments and the secret art of reincarnation. Tenten skillfully manipulated his kunai with chakra, destroying the surrounding surveillance equipment one by one. Meanwhile, Rock Lee and Neji worked seamlessly together, unlocking the icy iron doors floor by floor, declaring to the prisoners, “Orochimaru-sama has freed you.”
In this circular building filled with surveillance cameras, the three men moved cautiously. Tenten, with precise movements, destroyed the cameras with lightning-fast kunai. Meanwhile, Rock Lee and Neji split up, unlocking the iron doors one level at a time and announcing their release to the prisoners within.
Inside the monitoring room deep within the base, the Otoninus suddenly noticed the monitors go black one after another. Realizing the gravity of the situation, they immediately realized an enemy invasion. “Quick, notify Lord Kabuto! Activate the emergency alarm!” As the shrill sirens echoed throughout the underground base, the ninjas quickly converged on the assembly point.
In Orochimaru’s laboratory, an alarm suddenly pierced the silence, and a hoarse laugh escaped him: “Oh, there are some uninvited guests. Kabuto, take your four companions to deal with them.” Yakushi’s Kabuto always hid his true feelings behind a false smile, just like his past. From Konoha’s orphanage, he was molded into a spy, constantly playing various roles, but never truly identifying with himself. That is, until Itachi’s Izanami illusion brought him to his senses.
His life is full of tragedy, and now as Orochimaru’s right-hand man, he plans and executes many conspiracies.
“Lord Kabuto, the surveillance system upstairs has been destroyed, and the guarding ninjas have lost contact. According to reports, all prisoners have escaped.” Faced with the report, Kabuto only nodded slightly, with a cold light flashing behind his glasses.
Quickly, Kabuto and the other four arrived at the first floor lobby, where a bustling crowd was already gathering. Facing the numerous gazes, Kabuto still wore that stern smile.
“Lord Kabuto, when will Orochimaru let us go? Why hasn’t he taken any action yet?” The prisoners stared at him, eager for an answer.
“Orochimaru’s order is that only one of you can regain your freedom – and that is by killing all the others.” Kabuto’s smile remained calm, as if in his eyes, the life and death of these people were as light as a feather.
In an instant, the hall fell into chaos, with all kinds of sounds intertwined together. The three men in black took the opportunity to quietly evacuate through the window.
“Who is it?!”
Kidomaru noticed it immediately, quickly went up to the second floor, and witnessed three black shadows fleeing quickly.
“Lord Kabuto, three invaders have escaped!”
“Chase!”
The Otonin Four followed closely behind, leaping out of the window in pursuit, while Kabuto calmly watched everything from below. In a flash, the battle on the first floor was over, leaving only one survivor, who trembled and asked.
“Master Kabuto, can I leave now?”
“Of course, Lord Orochimaru has promised to spare your life,” Kabuto responded with a smile before mercilessly stabbing the survivor in the chest.
“You…why…”
“I’m sorry, I never said I would let you go. Your struggle is in vain.”
At this moment, the Sound Four activated the Curse Seal 1 and sped up to catch up with Rock Lee and the others. Kidomaru’s golden arrow aimed at Rock Lee, and the situation became critical.
Rock Lee alertly sensed the movement behind him, swung his nunchaku, turned around and shot down the flying golden arrow.
“Maybe we should capture one alive,” Rock Lee suggested.
“That’s it!”
The three of them quickly took out their hidden weapons and, facing the approaching Four Sound Ninjas, fired their kunai at the same time, triggering a series of deafening explosions that shook the entire Sound Ninja Village.
The villagers stayed indoors, seeking the shelter of their homes. In this world, life is as fragile as grass, but for some people, Sound Village is an inviolable paradise.
Amidst the dust, Rock Lee and his three-man team charged forward. With a swift flying kick, Rock Lee charged towards Jirobo, while Tenten, with her rapid kunai and shuriken fire, effectively prevented any reinforcements from arriving.
Jirobo arrogantly took a defensive stance, but he didn’t expect Rock Lee’s Iron Sand Palm to be so powerful that it broke his arm in one blow. Neji followed closely behind, using a series of Bagua Palm strikes, severely injuring Jirobo and causing him to spit blood.
After quickly clearing the battlefield, Li and Ningji carried Jirobo and evacuated quickly. Tiantian set explosive traps along the way, effectively slowing down the pace of the pursuers.
After escaping from Otogakure, they had just gotten rid of the pursuit, but were surprised to find that Orochimaru had been waiting there. His appearance caught them off guard.
“How can a Konoha ninja who kidnapped my people leave so easily?” Orochimaru’s voice was as rough and terrifying as sandpaper. The three Sound Ninjas quickly followed his footsteps.
“Lord Orochimaru, we have failed in our duty and are willing to be punished.” But Orochimaru’s gaze passed through them and locked onto Rock Lee and his companions.
“Rock Lee, the world-famous Konoha taijutsu wizard, it’s so easy to meet you everywhere. Unfortunately, Konoha may lose three talented people this time.” Orochimaru’s neck extended strangely, and he pounced on Tenten fiercely.
Rock Lee swung his nunchaku and struck at Orochimaru’s head with the force of breaking the wind. He firmly believed that if this blow hit, the snake man would suffer heavy damage.
Orochimaru used the Kusanagi sword to block the nunchaku, and at the same time, his long tongue turned into a giant python and attacked Rock Lee swiftly.
Rock Lee decisively struck out with a palm, and the giant python collapsed, and Orochimaru instantly returned to his original form.
“Sixth Gate, open!”
Rock Lee instantly activated the potential in his body, and a strong energy wave surged out.
“Amazing taijutsu, you’ve tapped into your body’s potential to such an extent, Rock Lee. I can’t bear to do it.”
“It remains to be seen who will win.”
“Towards Peacock!” Rock Lee’s fists flew at such a speed that the air burned. With flickering flames, he attacked Orochimaru and his three subordinates fiercely.
Chapter 23 Takinin (Old Version)
Jirobo was severely injured, and even after activating the power of Cursed Seal 2, his recovery was still slow. The three of them, quick-witted, pulled out kunai and shurikens affixed with detonating tags and threw them in the direction of Orochimaru and Kidomaru, triggering a series of deafening explosions.
“withdraw!”
They retreated rapidly in the direction of Tayouya. Orochimaru was cunning and would have anticipated that they would take advantage of Jirobo’s serious injury to escape, so he must have taken precautions.
Rock Lee unleashed his swift agility, attacking Tayouya, while Neji followed closely behind, activating his four-wing mode. Tayouya’s flute blared, and a giant, hideous demonic creature materialized in a phantasmagoria. However, Rock Lee, blessed by the Eight Gates, was nearly immune to such illusions, his chakra surging violently.
In comparison, the situation of Neji and Tenten is not optimistic, especially Tenten, whose resistance to illusions is almost zero.
Drawing on memories from his past life, Rock Lee knew the Six-Character Mantra was the perfect way to break free from inner demons. In this world, illusions were no different from inner demons. While he couldn’t resist Itachi’s Tsukuyomi, Tayuya’s illusions were no problem. He took a deep breath and chanted “Om” loudly, instantly freeing Neji and Tenten from the illusion, restoring consciousness and clear vision.
Rock Lee’s palm strike was as strong as iron and as powerful as gravel, sending the demon flying. He considered it a mere bluff. Then, Neji, with his soft fist technique, swiftly struck Tayuya in the chest, sending her spewing blood and falling back. Lee led Tenten in a swift retreat, repeatedly throwing hidden weapons imbued with explosive tags as they fled, triggering a series of explosions.
Orochimaru waited for Rock Lee and the others to appear near Jirobo, but when they didn’t, he realized they must have broken through the encirclement from another route. A strong wind blew up, sweeping away the dust and smoke, revealing that of the Otoshina, only Yuya was injured.
Orochimaru was deeply intrigued by Rock Lee’s abilities. The strange sound he’d heard, the one that could instantly break a magic spell, impressed him deeply. This Rock Lee, having graduated only a year ago, possessed such remarkable abilities; he must be hiding a hidden secret. Orochimaru speculated, particularly surprised by how quickly Rock Lee could break Tayuya’s magic.
Rock Lee’s palm, condensing its strength like iron sand, sent the demon flying. He saw it as vulnerable. Neji then delivered a powerful and gentle punch, pounding Tayuya’s chest, causing blood to spurt out. Rock Lee and Tenten quickly retreated, repeatedly turning and throwing hidden weapons imbued with explosive tags, setting off a series of explosions.
Orochimaru waited for Rock Lee at the expected location, but he realized they had broken through from an unexpected source. Using his wind jutsu, he dispersed the smoke from the explosion and discovered that only Yuya was injured among the Oto-nin. Orochimaru became curious about Rock Lee. The strange syllables that broke the illusion made him realize that this young man, barely a year out of ninja school, must have some extraordinary qualities.
Reaching the border of the Land of Fire, Rock Lee, Tenten, and Neji finally had a moment to breathe. Rock Lee gently set Tenten down, and the three of them immediately disengaged from their respective combat modes. Tenten, still terrified, patted her chest and sighed, “This operation was incredibly dangerous. We almost didn’t make it out alive.”
Rock Lee responded with a reassuring smile: “Don’t worry, Tenten, if anyone has to sacrifice, we will be the first to do so. If you want to hurt you, you will have to step over the bodies of Neji and me first.” Neji on the side nodded silently. Although he looked cold, he cherished this friendship above all else.
Rock Lee was immersed in this sense of belonging. His love for Konoha gave him the warmth of home. To him, Mr. Kai, Neji, and Tenten were his family.
After completing their mission to report to the Fifth Hokage, Tsunade, they were given a rare day to rest and prepare for the destruction of Orochimaru’s base the next day. Tsunade ordered firmly, “Tomorrow, you will lead the team and destroy Orochimaru’s base in one fell swoop.”
In their respective quarters, the three finally rested. However, Rock Lee did not slack off in his self-cultivation. Through deep meditation, he realized the power of the Six-Syllable Mantra. He knew it would be his key defense against future Sharingan illusions, especially after the Moon Eye Project succeeded.
Rock Lee had a clearer idea after confirming that the master of the Anbu, Tenzang, was Yamato. Ever since Yamato was rescued by Kakashi and the Third Hokage, he had become part of the Anbu, tasked with protecting the Hokage. Unexpectedly, he was also involved in this mission.
Yamato’s Wood Release is not perfect, which is not unrelated to his childhood experience. As the subject of Orochimaru’s experiment, he was injected with the cells of Hashirama Senju, but the experiment ended in failure. He survived only by strong will, so his Wood Release power is not complete.
“Teacher Gai, everyone, let’s go.” With a single command, the team quickly headed towards the Sound Village. Considering Orochimaru’s alertness, Rock Lee figured that he must have already gotten away.
Upon arriving at Otogakure, they found it still in ruins, neglected and in a state of anarchy. Neji and Hinata opened their Byakugan, surveyed their surroundings, and quickly reported, “Chakra fluctuations are weak, and the village is practically deserted.”
“Orochimaru may have already escaped. Let’s go straight to his lair.” Kakashi ordered.
“Orochimaru’s escape skills are well-known. Konoha has not been able to capture him for many years. This time he might be a successful transfer again.” Asuma speculated.
They soon arrived at Orochimaru’s base, where the bodies of prisoners who had killed each other had not yet been dealt with, and the air was filled with a disgusting stench.
When Rock Lee arrived at the entrance of the base, he stopped several Anbu members who were about to enter in time.
“Be careful, there might be a trap,” he warned, “Ningji, come check it out.”
Neji responded and went to carefully observe the interior of the base. The other Anbu members looked ashamed, realizing that they had neglected basic reconnaissance work.
“There is nothing unusual in the underground base. It is safe and you can enter.” Neji reported after confirmation.
“action”
The underground base they entered was like a winding maze, littered with traces of moved items. It was obvious someone had hurriedly evacuated not long ago, leaving behind a wealth of seemingly insignificant information. Tiantian quickly sealed it up, preparing to take it back for further analysis, perhaps unearthing key information.
The scene also contained untreated corpses and bizarrely modified humans, evidence of Orochimaru’s brutal human experiments, including a half-man, half-tree monster. Rock Lee noticed that his companion, who appeared to be Yamato, trembled uncontrollably upon witnessing these experiments, seemingly recalling his own tragic past.
“Orochimaru has already escaped, we are one step too late.” Kakashi said regretfully.
They sealed all the experimental subjects. Although Konoha would never allow such human experiments, they had to understand the content of Orochimaru’s research.
Without finding any important items, the team quickly evacuated. Before leaving, Rock Lee filled the base with explosive tags to prevent anyone from tracking them.
“Xiao Li, are you sure you want to carry out the mission of blowing up this base?” Kai asked seriously.
“Yes, Orochimaru is erratic, and he might use this place again. We destroyed it, and even if he wanted to rebuild, he would face many difficulties.”
With a deafening explosion, everyone quickly evacuated the scene. The original base of Otogakure was reduced to ruins, and in the near future, it might become a lake.
Although the mission was unsuccessful, hunting down the S-rank rebel nin Orochimaru has become commonplace for everyone.
A small white snake poked its head out from the ruins, used its tongue to explore the surroundings, and then quietly dived into the ground without a trace.
In the Sound Village, beneath a seemingly ordinary house, lies a more secret and secure laboratory. The little white snake quickly arrived there and reported the situation to Orochimaru through the hissing sound of its tongue.
This seemingly ordinary dwelling actually hides a hidden world within, with a secret passage leading to a laboratory deep underground. This dual-base design further confuses Orochimaru’s whereabouts. The appearance of the little white snake further shrouds the depths of this secret base.
Orochimaru’s face was gloomy. The Konoha ninjas had mercilessly destroyed his painstakingly built laboratory, a place where he had poured countless efforts.
“Konoha, and you, Rock Lee, I will make you pay the price for what you did today!” Orochimaru’s voice was full of the flames of revenge.
In Konoha Village, the jonins were reporting their respective missions one after another. At this time, the nine jonins rarely gathered together, but Naruto and the other three were still on missions outside and had not returned yet.
“Xiao Li, I never thought that you are already able to undertake such a high-level task. As the future Hokage, I feel very ashamed.” Ya boasted and was full of confidence in the future.
Meanwhile, Neji patiently guided Hinata through her training. He had already accepted the scroll left to him by his father, having long since released the constraints of the main family. He believed that Hinata, this bud, would eventually break through the earth and spread her wings.
In Neji’s eyes, although Hinata is the daughter of the main family, she lacks talent and has a heavy burden on her shoulders. Therefore, he specially guides her to practice soft fist, hoping to relieve some of her psychological pressure.
Shikamaru was immersed in his own research, trying to innovate his shadow strangulation technique, as he felt that shadow imitation was too monotonous. Meanwhile, Choji was constantly eating in order to store up energy, hoping that one day he would transform like a butterfly and bloom into a dazzling brilliance.
Ino and Tenten were curious about Shino’s bugs and they were wondering how they could survive in the human body. They shuddered at the thought of the bugs crawling around in the body.
In the Hokage’s office, Kakashi was reporting the latest progress to his superior, Tsunade: “Hokage-sama, when we arrived, Orochimaru had already evacuated. He seemed to have anticipated that Konoha would quickly send out ninjas when Lee and the others escaped. He left in a hurry, and we successfully brought back a large amount of information and experimental materials.”
Tsunade rubbed her temples and responded calmly: “I anticipated this outcome when you set out. For many years, Konoha has never been able to capture him. You have worked hard, go and rest first.”
While Orochimaru was a thorny issue, Tsunade was more concerned about Uchiha Itachi’s Akatsuki organization. According to information from Haiyi and Jiraiya, Akatsuki was composed of S-rank rebel ninja from multiple countries, and Orochimaru was once a member, but later withdrew. Currently, the organization primarily engaged in mercenary missions and intelligence gathering. Hidan knew little about it, save for some cryptic cult beliefs.
Tsunade is deeply disturbed by the fact that Pain, leader of the Akatsuki, is said to possess the legendary Rinnegan. The Rinnegan, legendary for the Six Paths Sage, now appears before her very eyes. Since Hidan never witnessed Pain in action, Konoha knows almost nothing about the Rinnegan.
At this point, Rock Lee noticed that Naruto had completed his ramen mission and walked out of Ichiraku Ramen.
“Listen, Xiao Li, the mission we received this time is B-level. We just returned from the Tea Kingdom yesterday. You have to work harder, otherwise the progress of the three of us will surpass your team.” Naruto said, waving his arms to encourage Xiao Li.
“Okay, I’m looking forward to witnessing your progress. I have to go to training now.” Rock Lee answered briefly and turned to head to the second training ground.
On the training grounds, the three men threw themselves into their respective tasks. Rock Lee fearlessly faced Neji’s Baguazhang attacks, while Neji employed the Kaiten technique to continuously deflect Tenten’s hidden weapon attacks. Tenten, in turn, hurled hidden weapons at the unarmed Rock Lee. Through this intense training, Rock Lee’s Iron Sand Palm technique honed to the point where he could catch nearly all of the hidden weapons with his bare hands, and even when he missed, he was able to swiftly deflect them.
Suddenly, the cry of an eagle sounded above the three of them, signaling an emergency assembly. They immediately stopped training and rushed to the Hokage’s office.
“Takigakure has requested assistance. A rebellion has occurred there. Unidentified people have interfered in the affairs of the village, causing Takigakure to suffer heavy losses. You will set off early tomorrow morning to find out the specific situation of Takigakure as soon as possible. If you encounter an opponent that is too powerful, you can choose to retreat temporarily at the critical moment.” Tsunade ordered seriously.
“Yes, Hokage-sama!” the three responded in unison.
After the mission was over, Rock Lee began to wonder. This time, the mission to Takigakure felt more unfamiliar than ever before, and he couldn’t help but wonder if the world had changed in some way that he hadn’t noticed.
Chapter 24 Nanao (old version)
At the entrance to the hidden Takinin Village, three figures huddled at the edge of a massive waterfall. Neji activated his Byakugan and carefully surveyed the surrounding guards. Three guards were hiding behind rocks on the outside, while six were inside. Their chakra fluctuations were weak, all at the level of a chunin. As he spoke, he had a complete understanding of the enemy’s situation.
While this village once nurtured powerful figures like Kakuzu, and its sacred water can increase chakra tenfold, it comes at a steep price—the lifespan of the user. Currently, Takigakure lacks a significant fighting force, and the interference of external forces and the uncertain status of the Seven-Tails Jinchuriki make a direct confrontation unwise at this moment. Therefore, the three decided to resort to assassination, a method of passive resistance.
In a flash, Rock Lee had slipped unnoticed behind an enemy, clamping his palm over their mouth while simultaneously piercing their heart with his left hand. Neji, with equal precision, sliced another’s throat with a kunai. Tenten, deftly maneuvering her shuriken, pierced a third ninja from various angles. The roar of the waterfall effectively masked the sound of the assassination.
As the night deepened, the three of them silently submerged themselves in the water, creeping deeper into the waterfall. Neji’s Byakugan flickered in the darkness, constantly monitoring his surroundings to ensure their continued existence.
“It’s confirmed. There’s no one else around except the six of us.” Neji looked around and reported after confirming everything was correct.
“Hurry, don’t let any enemy escape.” Before Rock Lee finished his words, he leaped out of the water, appeared behind the two Taki ninjas like lightning, and knocked them unconscious with a swift and powerful blow.
Neji and Tenten followed suit, though their speed was far inferior to Rock Lee’s, and each could only take out one opponent. Rock Lee, however, moved like a phantom, easily subduing the remaining two ninjas.
After crossing the waterfall, they entered a cave-like cave with several pools of water. When they emerged from the pools, they saw a huge tree emitting a faint glow. Even in the darkness, it was still dazzling.
Takiguni Village is tranquil and beautiful, rarely ravaged by war. Whenever an enemy invades, warriors drink the holy water and keep the enemy at bay at the waterfall. Aside from Kakuzu’s rebellion, the area has always been peaceful and tranquil, its natural scenery breathtaking.
The three of them advanced silently deeper into the village. Long-term security had left Takinin Village’s defenses lax. Aside from a few guards at the entrance, there were no patrols within. They finally reached the chief’s office, brightly lit, clearly plotting something.
And in a dark corner of Takigakure, a man wearing a spiral mask, Uchiha Obito, was silently watching the movements of the entire village. If Rock Lee was present, he would definitely recognize this mysterious figure.
A ninja, blinded by Madara his entire life, faces a severe test from Pain, tasked with commanding the Seven-Tails Jinchuriki to overthrow the rule of Takigakure. Uchiha Obito lurks in hiding in Raingakure, his presence like an invisible ghost to the locals.
Obito noticed Rock Lee’s intrusion and whispered to himself, “Here comes Konoha, this game has become even more exciting.”
However, Rock Lee and his companions have not yet realized that their whereabouts are no longer a secret and they are secretly monitoring the internal conversations.
“What’s the situation with the Rain Ninja?” asked the traitor leader of the Taki Ninja, Shizuka.
“Chief, everything is under control. Even Shibuki has been imprisoned. They can no longer pass any news to Konoha. Under your wise leadership, Takigakure will surely prosper.” The subordinates answered flatteringly.
“What’s Fu’s attitude?”
“She expressed her unconditional support for you and her willingness to follow your lead.”
“Well, let’s see if Shibuki can come back this time. His cowardly and incompetent leadership will only lead Takigakure to destruction.”
Shisha’s stupidity was obvious. He seemed to have forgotten that there were ninja hawks in this world who could deliver messages, and that seeking help was not limited to human power.
“Let’s rescue Shibuki first and take action based on his decision.” The three quickly reached a consensus. After all, they were in a foreign land, and their first priority was to ensure Shibuki’s safety, and secondly to help him quell the rebellion.
“Ningji, now is your moment.”
Neji activated his Byakugan ability and began a detailed search in the village. His Byakugan could penetrate obstacles and see the chakra flow hidden within.
Rock Lee and another companion followed closely behind. They headed towards the east side of the village, where a conspicuous two-story building became their destination. Shibuki and his companions were being imprisoned there.
Although many people in the village still supported Shibuki, Shibuki’s rebellion came too suddenly, leaving Shibuki defenseless and imprisoned. Obito’s control of the Seven-Tails secretly prevented the ninjas of Takigakure from organizing an effective resistance, and they were quickly defeated.
The three of them sneaked into the building silently. Without the guards noticing, Rock Lee and Neji quickly attacked from the rear and cleanly eliminated the two guards from the Rain Village.
Shibuki and others who were rescued were very excited. Their chakras had been sealed by Shisha using basic sealing techniques, and their bodies were also tightly tied up. Only people who had received special training like Rock Lee could break free.
The three of them quickly untied the ropes and helped Shibuki and others break the simple seal.
“Captain Shibuki, what should we do now?” Rock Lee asked. “I heard the rebels have taken control of Nanabi. The three of us might be able to contain it, but are you confident in handling other situations?”
Rock Lee doubted Shibuki’s ability to serve as the chief of a ninja village in troubled times, believing that a good leader should possess both ruthlessness and a gentle hand. After their introductions, Shibuki expressed confusion over the Nanabi girl’s manipulation by Shizuo, while Rock Lee speculated that this was a feat only possible with the Sharingan. With Madara Uchiha no longer alive, Rock Lee speculated that Obito Uchiha or Itachi Uchiha might have been responsible. He felt a mixture of fear and excitement, eager to confront this mysterious mastermind. During the mission, Shibuki and Rock Lee split up, with Shibuki responsible for contacting the Takigakure ninjas, while Rock Lee led the other two in monitoring Shizuo and the others, ultimately freeing the imprisoned Takigakure.
Rock Lee was not very optimistic about Shibuki’s ability, thinking: How can a village chief in troubled times be only tender and lacking in ruthlessness? A qualified leader should be able to combine firmness and flexibility, so that the villagers can both respect and fear him.
“I am Rock Lee from Konoha. Chief Shibuki can call me Rock Lee.” He was the first to introduce himself.
“Xiao Li, among the enemies we are facing this time, there are several strong men from the Rain Village. What I don’t understand is why the little girl Nanao would serve Shuiyan?” Shibuki seemed very confused.
Rock Lee’s heart tightened, thinking of the Seven-Tails’ innocence. The only explanation that made sense was that she was being controlled. And the only thing in the world that could control the tailed beasts was the Sharingan.
Now that Uchiha Madara is gone, suspicion naturally falls on Uchiha Obito or Uchiha Itachi. This kind of covert manipulation makes Rock Lee feel that the situation is getting more serious.
The thought of his upcoming clash with this powerful boss filled Rock Lee with both trepidation and excitement. A chance to test his own abilities in advance against such an opponent was undoubtedly a good opportunity.
However, whether Obito will personally take action remains unknown. Rock Lee is full of doubts as he has always been good at manipulating things from behind the scenes, so why did he suddenly go to the front line this time?
During the mission, Rock Lee and his companions successfully rescued the imprisoned Takigakure. Shibuki was responsible for secretly contacting the Takigakure ninjas, while Rock Lee and his companions were responsible for monitoring the actions of the enemy, including Shisha.
“Is that Rock Lee? As Konoha’s physical prodigy, Konoha Village is indeed a place that breeds talents. This time, let me see how you deal with the tricky problem of the Seven-Tails.” The masked man whispered to himself in the dark.
As the morning light faded, the rebels in Takinin Village realized that high-ranking officials such as Shibuki had mysteriously disappeared, and the two people in charge of surveillance had been eliminated silently.
“What a bunch of good-for-nothings! They can’t even keep an eye on a few prisoners!” Shiyan was furious at his subordinates’ mistakes.
“Chief, this is probably due to external interference. The people of Takiguni Village are intimidated by your power. Without Shibuki’s leadership, they dare not act rashly. In addition, Takiguni Village and Konoha are allies, so it is very likely that Konoha’s ninjas have intervened.” A subordinate tried to analyze the situation.
“Shibuki was able to convey the news to Konoha, but even so, Konoha is powerless to stop my rule over Takigakure. Konoha has suffered heavy losses in recent conflicts with Sunagakure and Sound-nin, and they are unable to send strong forces. We still have the trump card of Nanao, so we don’t have to be afraid of them.” Shuiyan said confidently.
But soon, one of his men came hurriedly to report: “Chief, Shibuki has gathered a large number of Takigakure ninjas and is approaching us quickly.”
Shizuo was surprised by Shibuki’s quick action. “Gather all the people immediately, including the warriors of Rain Village. We must destroy Shibuki in one fell swoop and let him know that I am the true leader of Taki Village.”
Although Shisha does not have many supporters, some ninjas from the Rain Village still stand on his side.
“Shibuki, I will be merciless today, and you can’t stop me.” Kirisame, one of the Rain Ninjas, threatened.
The Rain Village did not send out top-tier fighters this time, with the main force being Kirisame, Hyosame, and Murasame. Among them, Hyosame had left the Rain Village early on, while Kirisame and Murasame were wandering between the Rain Ninja and the wandering ninjas.
Their assistance to Shinobi in her usurpation of power wasn’t Pain’s real concern. His true purpose was to test Obito’s strength. This recluse had never publicly acted, and this operation was Pain’s attempt to gauge his abilities and secretly control the Seven-Tails through him. Regardless of success or failure, the true focus lay in Obito’s true strength.
Shuiyan appeared with her men and faced Shibuki: “Shibuki, you are a weak and incompetent person. I will take your life today. In this chaotic world, your existence will destroy Takinin Village.” Shuiyan’s arrogance was clearly visible.
Rock Lee saw through Shisha’s character at a glance. This guy was not as righteous as he claimed. Perhaps he was just trying to achieve some ulterior motives.
“Shibuki, there’s no need to talk too much with the traitors. Let’s fight side by side and take care of them in one fell swoop.” The top leaders of Takinin Village suggested.
Shizuo laughed arrogantly: “Shibuki, do you think you can compete with me with just a few of you? Don’t forget, I used to be your ninjutsu instructor. Do you think you can easily defeat me just because you are a kid from Konoha?”
Rock Lee didn’t intend to waste any time. He instantly flashed in front of Shizue and kicked her in the chest with a swift kick. The speed was so fast that Shizue could only hurriedly raise her arms to defend herself, and then was kicked far away by the huge force.
“Those who look down on Konoha’s ninjas will pay a heavy price.” Before he finished speaking, Rock Lee was facing three charging Rain Ninja leaders.
With a sound of “Konoha Gouraki Whirlwind”, Rock Lee turned into a gust of wind and defeated the three Rain Ninja leaders with a series of kicks.
“With such strength, you dare to covet power? You underestimate the power of Konoha.” He said coldly.
“You’ve completely pissed me off! Bring out the Seven-Tails’ Jinchuriki!” Shisha roared angrily.
“Shuiyan, you are playing with fire! Do you want to destroy Takigakure?” Shibuki retorted anxiously. He knew very well the terrifying power of the tailed beasts. No one in Takigakure could control an out-of-control Jinchūriki.
He recalled Konoha’s former glory and the devastating blow that the Nine-Tails disaster brought to Konoha. It was the Fourth Hokage who quelled the disaster at the cost of his life, and a trace of despair surged in his heart.
“Don’t worry, the Seven-Tails isn’t that scary. It was famous for running away during the Tailed Beast War.” Rock Lee tried to calm Shibuki’s anxiety.
However, deep down in Rock Lee’s heart, facing the tailed beast that had lost its mind, he could not completely suppress the uneasiness.
In an instant, the little girl who had lost her soul was caught, and Shuiyan gave a cold order: “Go, destroy them.” Pointing to Rock Lee and others.
The Seven-Tails Jinchuriki’s eyes lost their former spirituality, replaced by a raging murderous intent. With a heart-shaking roar, a staggering surge of chakra erupted from his body, and an uncontrolled rampage was imminent. In an instant, he launched a swift and fierce attack on the Shizuo and Rain Shinobi, leaving none of the traitors unharmed.
“Open the Sixth Gate—Kagemon!” Rock Lee unleashed his inner strength without hesitation, ready to face the Seven-Tails’ challenge. Neji also entered Four-Wing Mode, ready for battle.
“Captain Shibuki, Taki ninjas, evacuate the scene immediately! To avoid being affected. Tenten, I have a mission for you. Protect them,” Rock Lee quickly ordered. Tenten immediately obeyed the order and led Shibuki and the others to retreat to a safe area.
The Seven-Tails Jinchuriki roared in fury as his chakra gathered around him, transforming into a tailed beast suit and transforming into a giant red beast with seven tails.
The seven-tailed monster gradually approached Rock Lee, then suddenly accelerated and swung its claws violently. Rock Lee retreated swiftly, and the ground cracked with a loud noise, scattering debris everywhere.
At this moment, Neji appeared behind the Seven-Tails Jinchuriki like a shadow, using the “Eight Trigrams Palm” to condense a huge chakra palm and slapped the Jinchuriki hard.
Chapter 25 Prison Break (Old Version)
Suddenly, a pair of red claws stretched out from the ground, tightly grasped Rock Lee’s ankles, and dragged him into the abyss with force. As the ground cracked, the claws swung like a hammer, slamming Rock Lee to the ground.
Accompanied by a deafening roar, Rock Lee felt dizzy and stars appeared. His body sank deep into the mud and was swallowed by the dust.
The Seven-Tails Jinchuriki launched a fierce attack on Neji again. Neji flapped his wings and flew high, hanging lightly in the air, quickly approaching the opponent. The “Bagua Zhang 128 Palms” hit the Jinchuriki with incredible speed, but the Jinchuriki roared and knocked Neji aside.
He quickly grabbed Neji’s legs, intending to knock him into the ground as well. At this moment, Rock Lee arrived in time and hit the Jinchūriki’s head with his Iron Sand Palm with tremendous force.
There was another loud bang, and the Jinchūriki was knocked into the ground by Rock Lee’s palm. Rock Lee then used the “Peacock Attack” skill, and his fists hit the ground like a rainstorm, causing a series of explosions and the ground collapsed.
The two retreated quickly, their eyes fixed on the Jinchuriki’s movements. “The power of the tailed beasts is beyond imagination. They are so difficult to deal with. No wonder all countries regard them as strategic weapons.” Neji said in a heavy tone.
“That’s right, although the Seven-Tailed Beast is not the strongest among the tailed beasts, it is equally powerful when it is enraged.” Rock Lee was secretly shocked. He originally thought that the Seven-Tailed Beast would only run away in the ancient tailed beast wars, but he didn’t expect its strength to be so unfathomable.
“How does the strength of Shukaku, which you encountered when you were fighting Gaara, compare to that of the Seven-Tailed Fox?” Rock Lee had never fought against Shukaku, the One-Tailed Fox, so it was difficult for him to judge the strength of the two.
“That time, thanks to Boss Buntai of Myobokusan summoned by Naruto, he helped us solve Gaara’s problem. We were just assisting from the side.” Neji said as he recalled.
It’s well known that the most effective way to subdue a frenzied tailed beast is to employ the First Hokage’s Wood Release technique, followed by various sealing techniques. If these methods prove ineffective, the only option left is a contest of physical exhaustion. The Seven-Tails’ Jinchūriki is but a young woman, and a prolonged, intense battle would undoubtedly exhaust her, eventually leading to her fainting, at which point the Sharingan’s control would cease.
“Bang bang” sounds were heard, and the big pit where the Jinchūriki was was covered in dust. “Be careful, she’s coming out.” Rock Lee reminded.
With a loud bang, the Seven-Tails Jinchuriki leaped out of the deep pit, roared to the sky, and quickly condensed a huge ball of energy. “It’s the Tailed Beast Ball, quickly dodge! The energy contained in that attack is extremely high, enough to flatten part of Takigakure. We must dodge carefully,” Rock Lee said nervously.
Neji had long heard of the power of the Tailed Beast Ball and knew that this move could never be used head-on. He could only dodge, otherwise his life would be in danger.
The moment the Jinchūriki lowered his head, the two of them quickly leaped to the side. A black and red Tailed Beast Ball passed by their original position and shot off into the distance.
Amidst a deafening roar, the mountain crumbled. Rock Lee appeared like a gust of wind, striking out with a palm strike that blazed with flames. Its force far surpassed the blow he had struck against the Peacock. With a thud, the Jinchūriki was struck hard, embedding himself deeply into the distant rock face.
“Ningji, act!” Rock Lee shouted, his instructions clear, “Seal its chakra and return it to its original state.”
Neji responded to the call and arrived in an instant. His palms gathered the power of chakra, transforming into azure light. He used the fatal attack of Baguazhang continuously, 128 palms hitting the vital points of Jinchūriki in a row, with a sound like thunder, and finally sealed the power of the Seven-Tails completely.
As the dust settled, the two watched as the Jinchūriki’s tailed beast cloak gradually dissipated, revealing an unconscious little girl. They smiled at each other, a huge weight lifted from their hearts. If the battle continued, they would have no choice but to retreat and seek support from Konoha.
Rock Lee gently picked up the little girl and walked to the big tree in the center of the village. He announced loudly, “Chief Shibuki, the crisis is over. Everyone is safe!”
Tenten quickly led Shibuki and his group out of the tree hole. Shibuki’s gaze immediately locked onto the unconscious Fu, observing the rise and fall of her chest, a sense of relief. He knew her importance to Takinin, like a last resort, an indispensable safeguard.
“I’m so sorry for scaring you,” Shibuki apologized to his companions. “I didn’t expect Fu to lose control. Apparently, I haven’t been caring enough for her.”
Rock Lee chose to remain silent and did not reveal the fact that Fu was controlled by the Sharingan. He believed that the fewer people knew about such things, the better, as it was directly related to the survival of Takinin.
In the secret corner of Takinin, Obito witnessed the entire battle between Rock Lee and Hyuga Neji, and decided to mark Rock Lee as an enemy that must be eliminated, but decided to leave this task to Pain.
“They showed amazing abilities back in the Land of Rain, and this time they were able to repel Kisame and Itachi. The strength of Konoha’s ninjas should not be underestimated.” The black and white vegetative Zetsu spoke next to him, his upper body covered in leaves. As a key figure in Akatsuki’s intelligence gathering and analysis, his existence played a vital role in Akatsuki’s expansion.
“Village Chief Shibuki, we have completed our mission and are now preparing to return to Konoha. We will not disturb Takigakure any further.” Rock Lee politely said goodbye to Village Chief Shibuki.
“Rock Lee, Neji, Tenten, have a safe journey.” Village chief Shibuki led the villagers to the outside of the waterfall to see them off. The brave actions of these three people can be said to have saved the entire village.
“This mission is indeed difficult and I feel quite tired.” Rock Lee sighed as he walked.
“Indeed, the power of the Seven-Tails Jinchuriki is beyond imagination. It makes people curious about how powerful the First Hokage was back then.” Neji was still in shock and felt that he still needed to work harder.
“Ordinary Jinchūriki wouldn’t have this kind of strength. I suspect there’s a mastermind behind this, and Fu is just a young girl.” Rock Lee whispered his analysis to Neji and Tenten.
After hearing this, Neji and Tenten’s eyes flashed with contemplation, and they did not respond immediately.
After arriving in Konoha, the three went directly to the Hokage’s office to report their mission. Rock Lee reported his findings to Tsunade:
“Hokage-sama, the Seven-Tails Jinchuriki of Takigakure suddenly lost control. Fortunately, none of us were injured. I think this is not an accident. There may be a bigger conspiracy behind it.”
“Who do you suspect is responsible, Rock Lee?” Tsunade asked with concern.
Rock Lee pondered for a moment and pointed to his eyes: “I think it might be that the power of the Sharingan is being used again, just like Uchiha Madara once used it to control the tailed beasts.”
“Could it be that Uchiha Madara is still alive?” Tsunade said in disbelief.
“It’s almost impossible to live that long. Even the Sage of Six Paths eventually passed away. I guess maybe an Uchiha clan member faked his death, or he went into exile for some reason.” Rock Lee analyzed calmly.
“You guys step back for now, let me consider the possibilities,” Tsunade ordered.
On a quiet day in Konoha, Rock Lee, Tenten, and Neji decided to go fishing in the suburbs to enjoy some leisure time. The gurgling stream was refreshing.
“Ningji, use your Byakugan to scout out where there are more fish. We’ll go there,” Tenten suggested excitedly.
Neji’s Byakugan came in handy at this point, even though he probably thought the request was a bit ridiculous.
“Fishing is not just about fishing, it’s more about experiencing the tranquility,” Rock Lee explained to Tenten.
The three of them randomly chose a spot and started fishing. Suddenly, Neji shouted alertly, “Someone is coming this way.”
Rock Lee and Tenten immediately became alert. Soon, several men in prison uniforms appeared before them. As fugitives from Konoha, they clearly shouldn’t be here. Rock Lee acted quickly, knocking out several of them, leaving only one conscious.
“Tell me, what happened in the Konoha prison? How did you escape? If you don’t tell the truth, my kunai will not show mercy.” Rock Lee said as he waved the kunai in his hand at the fugitive, with an obvious threat.
The escaped prisoner, with cold sweat on his face, begged for mercy in fear: “Please let me go. It was Shuimu, Fengshen and Leishen who knocked out the guards. That’s why all of us prisoners had the chance to escape.”
Rock Lee knocked him unconscious with a knife, and then he and Neji lifted several fugitives and walked towards the village.
On the way, they met Shikamaru, Ino and Choji, the new generation of Ino, Shika and Chou, who were about to leave the village.
“Shikamaru, are you guys going to catch the fugitive as well?” Tenten asked curiously.
“Yes, Wind God, Thunder God and Mizuki escaped. I was worried that Naruto and Sasuke couldn’t deal with them, so I went to support them.” Shikamaru replied.
Rock Lee and the others quickly tied the fugitive to a tree on the side of the road, then joined Shikamaru’s team and continued on their way.
At this time, Sasuke and Naruto were fighting fiercely with the two brothers, Wind God and Thunder God. The “Multiple Shadow Clone Technique” made countless clones of Naruto attack the opponent, but the effect was minimal.
The two brothers easily threw Naruto’s clones around, and in an instant, a large number of clones burst like bubbles.
Undeterred, Sasuke formed a seal and unleashed the Chidori technique. The arc of electricity gathered in his right hand emitted a piercing sound as he charged towards the Wind God. The Wind God easily countered this, picking up the Thunder God and sweeping it across, hitting Sasuke squarely in the face.
Sasuke was kicked to Naruto’s side. At this time, Rock Lee arrived in time and used the “Konoha Gokuki Whirlwind” to kick the two brothers, hitting them in the chest and kicking them away.
“Brother, are you okay?” Thunder God asked Wind God about his condition with concern.
The Wind God laughed contemptuously and said, “Haha, this kind of attack is only slightly more stimulating than scratching an itch.”
Rock Lee’s eyes showed surprise. The two opponents in front of him were extremely strong physically. After standing up, they stretched their muscles easily and seemed to be not affected much.
“Lee, we have to go support Iruka-sensei. He’s in a tense battle with Mizuki.” Naruto said anxiously.
“I understand. Sasuke and Shikamaru, you go and help too. Leave this to the three of us.” Rock Lee answered firmly.
The two brothers launched another charge, with their fists aimed straight at Rock Lee’s head. Rock Lee gathered all his strength and met the opponent’s fist with his Iron Sand Palm with thunderous force.
“Boom!” With a loud noise, both sides retreated several steps. Rock Lee was secretly shocked. It was the first time he saw someone who could take his iron sand palm head-on and remain unharmed.
“Brother, hurry up and defeat him, we still have a feast to eat!” Thor said to his brother anxiously.
“Yes, delicious food is waiting for us. After defeating him, we will go find the boss and enjoy the delicious food together!” The God of Wind also responded and shouted loudly.
Rock Lee suddenly realized that Mizuki might be using delicious food to lure them out of prison. It seemed that the key to defeating these two opponents was to find their weaknesses.
“Do you know who I am?” Rock Lee asked loudly to the two brothers.
“Stop talking nonsense, if we defeat you we will go to that food appointment!” The two brothers answered in unison, their fighting spirit undiminished.
“I’m Rock Lee, Konoha Village’s leading barbecue expert. Back in the day, I was well-known in the barbecue world. If you behave yourself, I’ll show you my special skills – golden and tempting roast beef, which is smooth and juicy when you take a bite.” Rock Lee cleverly seduced the two brothers, the God of Wind and the God of Thunder.
As long as there is delicious food in front of them, these two brothers will ignore everything else and are willing to obey others as long as they have something to eat.
“Hurry, I want to eat barbecue!” Fengshen said impatiently.
“If you want to eat barbecue, you must have beef first. You go and catch a buffalo. Without top-quality ingredients, no matter how good your cooking skills are, it will be difficult to use them. You two brothers, one goes to catch the buffalo, and the other stays here.” Rock Lee suggested.
“Okay, brother, you go catch a big one, and I’ll guard here.” Thor arranged.
The Wind God quickly disappeared from view, leaving behind the Thunder God and Rock Lee. Neji asked curiously, “Rock Lee, what are the origins of these two brothers?”
“They were imprisoned for their mistakes. They are straightforward and regard food as their life. They will listen to whoever feeds them. Moreover, these two brothers are extremely strong.” Rock Lee explained.
Soon, the wind god returned carrying a huge buffalo and said eagerly, “Hurry, I want to eat barbecue!”
Rock Lee expertly dismembered the bison, dividing it into several large pieces and then slicing it into thick slices. Neji quickly built a fire and set up a stone slab. Soon, the meat was grilled to perfection. Rock Lee simply sprinkled some salt on it, preparing for the next fishing trip.
“Come, try it.” Rock Lee invited.
Chapter 36: Pursuit (Old Version)
The sun lazily sprinkled on the second training ground, where three figures were sweating profusely. Suddenly, a hurried hawk circled above their heads, emitting a rapid cry.
“The mission is here.” One of them whispered.
“Murakami Taro, a jonin from our Konoha Intelligence Department has defected.” Tsunade delivered the order solemnly, “He was either bribed or a hidden spy. He fled to the Land of Earth with crucial intelligence. Considering that the last attack on Konoha by the Land of Earth failed, they have been looking for opportunities to obtain our secrets in preparation for the next attack. We must intercept him, as he has most likely chosen a route through the Land of Grass. We must set off immediately, without delay, as the Rock Ninja have already gathered in the Land of Grass. This operation must be cautious.”
“Yes, Lord Hokage!” the three answered in unison.
They quickly returned home, packed their ninja tools, and immediately set out on the pursuit. The Rock Ninja of the Land of Earth and Konoha have always been at odds with each other, and once they went to the Land of Grass to pick up Murakami Taro, conflict would be inevitable.
It was almost dusk when the three of them set out. As night fell, they rested for a while, ate a quick meal, and then set out on their journey again.
At the same time, Murakami Taro was about to enter the border of the Land of Grass. He was sure that once he entered the Land of Grass, he would be temporarily safe. The Rock Ninja of the Land of Grass had already deployed ninjas to support him, which would buy him precious time even if Konoha’s pursuit force arrived.
Murakami Taro’s heart surged. He had been lurking in Konoha for many years. As a ninja from Iwagakure, he had long since replaced the real Murakami Taro, who tragically died during a mission. The organization took notice of his resemblance to the original Murakami Taro, and after a slight cosmetic surgery and intensive imitation of his habits, he successfully infiltrated Konoha.
With Orochimaru’s destructive plan dealing a heavy blow to Konoha, now was the perfect opportunity for the Iwagakure to exploit the situation. Unable to withstand another war, Konoha would be forced to surrender if the Iwagakure’s army approached. Rock Lee and his companions, realizing the urgency of the situation, took a short break before deciding to act immediately. In this world of calculation, where love and hate are both driven by reason, Rock Lee’s suspicions about Murakami Taro grew.
As high-ranking ninjas of Konoha’s intelligence department, they knew betrayal often stemmed from extreme temptation or the very nature of spies. The three exchanged opinions during their hurried journey, the Land of Grass drawing near. “Ningji, use your Byakugan to scout the surroundings for ambushes,” Rock Lee instructed.
In this ninja world full of conspiracy and calculation, Neji’s Byakugan quickly captured the situation in front: six ninjas were lying in ambush on both sides of the road, and there were six more people in front who were quickly escorting someone to the Land of Earth. This scene immediately made the three of them alert.
“The situation is urgent. The target shows signs of escaping. There are six ninjas blocking us ahead, and there are reinforcements further ahead.” Neji quickly analyzed the situation.
“We must resolve the battle quickly and never let them escape to the Land of Earth, otherwise it will be extremely disadvantageous to Konoha. This time we have to show our real skills.” Rock Lee said resolutely.
Rock Lee activated the sixth gate of the Eight Gates without hesitation, instantly entering his extreme state and launching a fierce attack on the hiding place of the three Iwa ninjas on the left.
Neji opened his four wings and charged towards the three ninjas on the right together with Tenten.
With Rock Lee’s current speed, plus the bonus of the sixth gate, he is as fast as lightning. These Rock Ninja teams are well-equipped, with one Jonin leading two Chunins, which shows how much they value this mission.
Rock Lee’s figure flashed and he teleported in front of the three Iwagakure ninjas. He swiftly swung out his Iron Sand Palm, and the two Chunins fell to the ground, their brains splattered everywhere, and they died on the spot.
Doihara, the Jonin of the Iwagakure and a member of the Tsuchikage’s guards, originally expected this to be an easy mission, but he didn’t expect the Konoha ninjas to be so powerful.
Doihara wanted to intercept Rock Lee, but his men were killed instantly. He hurriedly drew out a kunai and stabbed Rock Lee. However, Rock Lee had already mastered the Golden Bell Cover at this time and his body was extremely strong. He fearlessly used his left hand to meet the stabbing kunai.
In a fierce exchange of ninjutsu, Rock Lee, leveraging the tenacity of his Golden Bell Guard and Iron Sand Palm, charged forward, striking directly at Doihara’s chest. Doihara, an elite member of the Tsuchikage’s guards, resisted the blow with a kunai, contemptuously attempting to pierce Rock Lee’s hand. However, Rock Lee’s attack was remarkably ruthless, piercing through his palm and striking Doihara’s heart, killing him instantly.
The situation on the battlefield was urgent. Rock Lee immediately relocated to aid Neji and Tenten, who were locked in a fierce battle with a formidable foe. Two chuunin had tragically perished. Neji engaged his foes in close combat, employing the Hyuga clan’s traditional soft fists and his Byakugan, while Tenten employed hidden weapons, seeking an opening to deliver a fatal blow. Rock Lee swiftly dispatched his foe with his “Konoha Goriki Cyclone,” instantly turning the tide of battle and proving the Iwagakure’s underestimation of Konoha’s strength to be a fatal mistake. He had only one thought in mind: ensuring the safe delivery of crucial intelligence to the Land of Earth.
With the fortitude of his Golden Bell and Iron Sand Palm, Rock Lee fearlessly charged at Doihara, striking him squarely in the chest. Doihara, the pride of the Tsuchikage’s guards, took Rock Lee’s attack lightly, even attempting to counterattack with a kunai, imagining he could easily pierce the opponent’s arm. However, his underestimation would ultimately cost him his life.
With a crisp sound of metal clashing, the kunai only pierced Rock Lee’s arm lightly, while Rock Lee mercilessly plunged his hand deep into Doihara’s heart, killing him with one blow.
Rock Lee then rushed to support Neji and Tenten. They were locked in a fierce battle with another Iwagakure jonin, with two chuunin already dead. Neji relied on the Hyuga clan’s soft fists and Byakugan to engage the enemy in close combat, while Tenten used her hidden weapons with precision, looking for the chance to land a decisive blow.
Rock Lee swiftly ended the fight with a single kick, “Konoha Gourami Whirlwind,” shocking the Iwagakure jonin with his swift victory. Clearly, the Iwagakure jonin’s disdain for Konoha had been a grave miscalculation. Rock Lee remained resolute, hoping the intelligence would reach the Land of Earth safely, a testament to Konoha’s resilience.
Rock Lee suddenly kicked out, knocking the enemy Iwagakure ninja away. Following closely behind, Neji performed the “Bagua Zhang 64 Palms”, quickly sealing the enemy’s vital acupoints. Tenten lurked behind him and silently stabbed the Iwagakure ninja’s back with a hidden weapon, taking his life.
With an urgent mission, the three of them rushed at full speed, with the goal of eliminating the hidden spies and preventing the Iwagakure’s conspiracy from succeeding before setting foot on the border of the Land of Earth.
The leader of the operation was Ueyama Daikusa, the second-in-command of the Iwagakure ANBU and a notorious commander known for orchestrating numerous operations against Konoha. He assumed that Doihara had successfully intercepted Konoha’s pursuers, while Rock Lee and the others raced against time to capture their target before reaching the border.
Neji’s Byakugan constantly scanned his surroundings, relentlessly searching for any trace of the enemy. As time passed, their presence gradually became clearer. Rock Lee and his companions accelerated their advance, striving to intercept the enemy within the Land of Earth and complete their mission. Ueyama Okusa’s thoughts drifted to the potential reward, imagining the Tsuchikage’s appreciation and cultivation.
During the rapid pursuit, the Iwagakure noticed the Konohagakure ninjas chasing them closely from behind. They placed many detonating tags along the way to create obstacles.
“I’ll go first!” Rock Lee’s words barely finished as he sped up. Explosions echoed everywhere he passed. But he was always one step ahead, always escaping before the shockwaves.
“This kid from Konoha is no ordinary guy,” Ueyama Dacao instructed sternly. “Dahe and Xiaohe, you two go and deal with him. Since he managed to chase us here, it means Dalang and the others’ ambush was unsuccessful. You must be careful.”
The two brothers, Ohga and Koga, are elite Jonin-level members of the Iwagakure Anbu. Their tacit cooperation has doubled their strength.
Rock Lee stared sharply at the two men standing in front of him, knowing that this would be a difficult hurdle for him and that he had to overcome it quickly. Even if it meant fighting, he had to try to stop Murakami Taro and the others.
Two shurikens shot out, but Rock Lee dodged them with ease and continued to charge forward. He quickly drew two kunai with detonating tags and threw them at the two brothers.
“Earth Escape: Earth Flow Wall!” A thick earth wall broke out of the ground and successfully blocked Rock Lee’s attack. The explosion scattered flames and raised dust.
But Rock Lee didn’t stop there. Instead, he stepped on the earthen wall and turned into a distant phantom. When the dust settled, the two brothers, Dahe and Xiaohe, could only see his fading figure.
On the rugged mountain road, four ninjas from Shangshan Dakusa, holding sharp kunai, quickly attacked Rock Lee, and the kunai flashing with cold light pointed directly at his vital points.
Facing the incoming attack, Rock Lee reacted quickly, crossed his arms, and successfully blocked two kunai, but the other two still inevitably pierced his chest and left shoulder.
Blood immediately gushed out, but Rock Lee’s thorough training meant he suffered only minor injuries. Without hesitation, he raised his right leg and launched a powerful whip kick, hitting an Iwagakure ninja in the neck and sending him flying.
He immediately pulled out the kunai from his body, and blood gushed out. However, his practice of the Golden Bell Cover prevented the injuries from being serious, and he was able to continue fighting after a little treatment.
Rock Lee’s goal was clear. He accelerated forward, determined not to let his target escape his sight. Although the long six-door run made him tired, the life energy brought by the Golden Bell gradually alleviated his fatigue.
He reached out, drew a kunai, aimed at Murakami Taro ahead, and hurled it with lightning speed. Murakami Taro, a jonin specializing in intelligence, was terrified by Rock Lee’s relentless pursuit. Although a jonin, facing Konoha’s rising star renowned for his taijutsu, he knew the consequences of being captured would be disastrous.
Murakami Taro’s steps hurried, as he kept a vigilant eye on Rock Lee, who was chasing him, while desperately trying to dodge the kunai that was flying at him. Although he twisted his body in time, the sharp weapon still left a bloody mark on his cheek.
In the tense atmosphere, Rock Lee followed like a shadow and arrived in front of Murakami Taro in an instant, while the six Iwagakusa and other six Iwagakure were still chasing him from a distance.
Rock Lee clenched his fists, gathered all his strength, and punched Murakami Taro in the chest. The impact caused Murakami Taro’s body to bounce back suddenly, blood gushed out of his mouth, and when he fell to the ground, he was lifeless.
Rock Lee searched the body and took the intelligence scroll, feeling a little relieved, but his body was also filled with fatigue.
Six Iwagakure ninjas quickly surrounded Rock Lee. Ueyama Daikusa shouted angrily, “You dare to kill Murakami Taro? Hand over the intelligence scroll, and you might even be able to spare your life!”
Rock Lee smiled slyly and pointed to the sky: “Didn’t you hear that Ohnoki is here?”
Without a second thought, the six Iwagakure ninjas looked up, only to see a cloudless blue sky and no sign of Ōnoki. In that instant, Rock Lee nimbly slipped through their midst and vanished from sight, leaving behind the words, “What a bunch of gullible fools!”
The six Iwagakure ninjas were furious that they were fooled so easily by a Konoha ninja.
“Earth escape, Yellow Spring Swamp!” They roared, trying to use ninjutsu to prevent Rock Lee from escaping.
Rock Lee felt his feet go soft and he sank into the ground.
“Fire Style, Great Fireball Technique”
A huge fireball flew towards Rock Lee. Rock Lee pulled out his nunchaku and wanted to use the Golden Bell Cover to block the fireball.
A figure quickly stood in front of Rock Lee and “Kaiten”. Neji quickly responded and helped Rock Lee block the attack of the Iwagakure.
The underground quagmire was also completely broken up by Kaiten’s chakra.
“How are you, Rock Lee? Are you okay?” Neji asked.
“It’s okay. I have killed the target of the mission and got the intelligence scroll.” Rock Lee said.
Soon, Tiantian also arrived, and the entire team was complete, so he didn’t have to face the opposing Iwagakure alone.
Chapter 27 Battle (Old Version)
“So you still have a backup plan.” The Iwa Ninja sneered.
They all threw out the shurikens in their hands, but Neji decisively stepped forward and used the “Kaiten” skill. The chakra in his body surged out like a tide, forming a powerful vortex.
All the flying hidden weapons were bounced away by the vortex, and Tiantian skillfully controlled the chakra lines, making the shurikens on the ground seem to come alive and turn around and shoot back at the Iwagakure.
“It’s actually a chakra line, Earth Style: Return of the Earth Road!” An Iwagakure reacted quickly, manipulating the ground into a shield.
But Rock Lee was faster. His “Konoha Gourami Whirlwind” instantly kicked the stone slab into dust, and continued forward, kicking a rock ninja in the chest with a fierce kick, kicking him away.
Even though some of his strength was taken away by the earth escape technique, Rock Lee, as a master of physical training, his strength should not be underestimated.
The Iwa Ninja who was kicked covered his chest and stood up with difficulty. He was the one who was severely injured by Rock Lee before.
“Xichuan, are you okay?” Shangshan Dacao asked with concern.
“It’s okay.” Xichuan replied.
At this time, Neji spread his four wings and quickly rushed towards the injured Nishikawa, while Tenten and Rock Lee stepped forward to face the challenge of the five Iwagakure ninjas.
The five Iwagakure divided into two groups. The three of them, Shangshan Dakusa, Dahe and Xiaohe, went straight to Rock Lee, while the other two attacked Tiantian.
Facing the ferocious trio, Rock Lee remained unfazed. Seeing Xiaohe, Dahe, and Ueyama Dacao’s combined attack, he quickly retreated, then unleashed a vicious whip kick, lashing out at Xiaohe. Xiaohe hastily extended her left hand to block, as Dahe and Ueyama Dacao’s legs swiftly launched themselves at Rock Lee. Unsheathing his nunchaku, Rock Lee deftly parried the attacks from both sides. Then, he delivered a powerful kick to Xiaohe, numb his arm. With a grunt of pain, Xiaohe involuntarily took a few steps back.
Rock Lee, in his “Six Gates” state, delivered each blow with immense force. The three men adjusted briefly before resuming their fierce assault. Earth escape techniques were activated, and the “Yellow Spring Swamp” transformed the ground into a slushy mess, attempting to engulf Rock Lee. Immediately afterwards, the “Earth Dragon Technique” burst forth from the earth, its maw opening wide to devour him. But Rock Lee, his fist brimming with flames, crushed the Earth Dragon with a single blow, using the momentum to leap from the mire. Though blood dripped from his palms, he did not stop.
Meanwhile, Neji was also demonstrating his prowess on the battlefield, aiding Tenten in a fierce battle against the Iwagakure. Suddenly, a hand reached out from the ground and unleashed an Earth Style Decapitation Technique, attempting to drag Rock Lee underground. However, Rock Lee had already prepared himself, pressing down with his right foot, ready to deliver a decisive counterattack.
In the dust of battle, Rock Lee quickly sheathed his nunchaku and, with lightning speed, charged at the Iwagakure. Facing the kunai thrusts from Ueyama Okusa and the others, he remained unscathed, two kunai lodging deep into his body. He knew he had to end the fight before his Eight Gates of Ninjutsu ran out. Ignoring the pain, he extended his iron claws and struck his opponent with one blow.
Shangshan Dakusa retreated quickly, but the wound on his shoulder proved Rock Lee’s attack had been effective. Another Iwagakure was not so lucky, struck by Rock Lee’s fatal blow, piercing his heart and lungs, and instantly collapsed. A shriek of grief and indignation echoed from the underground. Xiaohe, filled with vengeance, rushed towards Rock Lee, but was instantly struck by Rock Lee’s accelerated Iron Sand Palm, his life cut short.
Watching his men fall one by one, Ueyama Daikusa, left alone and helpless, turned to flee, but Rock Lee, a shadowy figure, followed him closely. With a powerful iron palm strike, he collapsed to the ground, spitting blood from his mouth. As Rock Lee prepared to deliver the finishing blow, Ueyama Daikusa struggled to turn around, pleading, “I am the ANBU captain of the Iwagakure ninja, and I hold many secrets. Can I trade this information for my life? Let’s make a deal.” He offered the conditions, hoping to save his own life.
After a fierce battle, Rock Lee sheathed the mighty power of the Eight Gates. Facing a sudden attack from Ueyama Daikusa, he calmly responded, asking, “What is your value in exchange for your life?” Suddenly, a phantom figure, Ueyama Daikusa, pounced upon him, tightly hugging him. Another Ueyama Daikusa appeared from behind, stabbing Rock Lee’s back with a kunai.
“It’s a clone jutsu! I was too careless.” Rock Lee reacted and slammed his head against the Iwagakure in front of him. The man’s body dissipated like mud, a mere earth-attributed illusionary clone. A sharp pain shot through his back as the kunai pierced deeply into his body. He whirled around and struck Ueyama Okusa in the head with an iron palm, instantly ending his life.
Rock Lee pulled out the kunai from his back, blood trickling out. His injured body, combined with the aftereffects of the Eight Gates, left him feeling dizzy. He stumbled towards Neji and his companions. They had also just finished fighting, and though they were severely wounded, their fighting spirit remained undimmed.
Rock Lee walked over to his companions and hugged them tightly. The three of them smiled at each other, feeling the joy of survival. They found a safe place to rest and recuperate. “The mission is finally completed. We can rest for a while,” Rock Lee said with relief.
Neji opened his Byakugan and observed his surroundings vigilantly. “The Iwagakure ninjas are searching for us. It seems they have noticed something unusual and want to find our defeated companions.”
“No worries, all the bodies have been properly sealed by me. This trip not only successfully recovered our intelligence, but also obtained additional information from the remains of the Iwagakure ninja. Overall, this deal is a good deal for us,” Tenten reported with a smile.
Currently, the Rock Ninja have deployed troops along the border between the Land of Grass and the Land of Earth, causing the Land of Grass to fall into panic. They are worried that once a conflict breaks out between the Rock Ninja and Konoha, the Land of Grass will inevitably become a battlefield.
Inside the Iwagakure stronghold in the Land of Earth, Ohnoki anxiously awaits news from Ueyama Okusa about Konoha Village. He can’t wait any longer, as the Sand Village and Orochimaru have teamed up to raid Konoha Village, causing significant damage. He sees this as an opportunity not to be missed.
“Why haven’t the people we sent out sent back any news yet? Based on their speed, they should have arrived.” Ohnoki asked Huangtu.
“We have arranged people to take over.” Huang Tu replied with a chubby smile on his face.
“You are old, why bother with these trivial matters? I think you might as well just retire.” Heitu joked from the side.
Although Ōnoki had a strong personality, he was helpless against his granddaughter, Kurotsuchi, and could only point at her in anger, speechless.
The three of them hid in a remote cave. After three days of hiding, the Iwagakure finally withdrew the search team, apparently realizing that they had lost intelligence. Three days of rest were enough for them to recover from their injuries, and then they quickly set off to return to Konoha Village.
“Xiao Li, we’re so glad you returned safely. Lady Tsunade has been worried for days, fearing that something bad might have happened to you. Are you all safe?” Shizune greeted them with a look of relief.
“Everything went well. We completed the mission successfully and lived up to Lady Tsunade’s expectations.” Rock Lee responded firmly.
Shizune patted her chest and breathed a sigh of relief: “That’s good.”
High above Konoha Village, Tsunade stood on a rooftop, her gaze traversing time and space, reminiscing about the past. The Third Hokage slowly approached and reassured her, “Are you reminiscing about the past again? That’s a sentiment only an old man like me could have. Xiao Li and the others have returned safely, having completed their mission brilliantly. There’s no need to be sentimental.”
Tsunade smiled and replied: “Old man, who is sighing? I just feel that time flies, and in the blink of an eye you have become gray-haired. Now you are teaching Konohamaru at home, and your life should be very satisfying.” She was full of respect and care for the founder of the village.
After completing their mission, Rock Lee and his companions strolled through the bustling streets of Konoha, enjoying their leisure time. Tenten happily savored her favorite sesame balls, while Neji leisurely ate grilled herring. Whenever Rock Lee saw herring, he would involuntarily frown, remembering its shunned reputation in his past life.
Suddenly, Ino’s voice rang out among the crowd: “Little Lee, Ningji, Tenten, you’re back after completing your mission!”
Rock Lee looked up and saw the members of Shikamaru’s team walking towards them. Choji was holding potato chips in his hand and eating them with relish. Everyone had a relaxed and happy smile on their face as they enjoyed this warm moment.
Shikamaru has been harboring resentment towards Rock Lee for a long time.
“Shikamaru, why have you become so resentful? I don’t think I’ve provoked you.” Rock Lee asked with a confused look on his face.
“You’re still pretending! During the Chunin Exams, you knew Shikamaru’s secrets thoroughly, and ended up causing him to suffer a crushing defeat in front of Tenten.” Ino revealed the feud without reservation.
“Hey, that was a long time ago, I forgot about it long ago. Besides, don’t you always say that being a Chunin is too troublesome? Those missions are too many and dangerous.” Rock Lee responded easily.
“Losing with a sincere heart and being beaten utterly, how can they be the same? Naruto is still making fun of me about this.” Shikamaru was a little annoyed, and it was obvious that he cared a lot about face.
“Hey, Shikamaru, what do you mean? Do you think you can defeat me easily?” Tenten asked dissatisfiedly. Her strength has improved by leaps and bounds recently, and she doubted Shikamaru’s so-called advantage.
Faced with the challenge of the woman, Shikamaru immediately backed off. He has never been good at arguing with women, and often becomes speechless even if he is right.
“It’s not easy for us all to get together today. I’ll treat you all. Let’s go have barbecue. Just consider it as my compensation to everyone.” Li Luoke suggested.
“Great, I want to eat pork belly and grilled steak!” As soon as he heard about the delicious food, Shikamaru immediately became excited. It seemed that for him, nothing could solve the problem better than a delicious barbecue.
Among the many barbecue restaurants in Konoha, Neji, Ino, Rock Lee and Shikamaru randomly chose a bustling shop. After sitting down, they ordered delicious food with great interest and started chatting while enjoying it.
“Xiao Li, I have to be busy lately. Hinata’s father asked me to teach her the soft fist technique,” Neji said as he pondered, “As the eldest daughter of the main family, she would be very useful if she knew some self-defense skills when she is on a mission.”
“Hinata has been working very hard, but the results are not significant. Your guidance should be of great benefit to her.” Ino nodded in agreement.
Shikamaru interjected curiously, “So, what are the typical Chunin missions like?”
“Mainly B-rank missions, and occasionally I’ll participate in A-rank or S-rank missions.” Rock Lee answered concisely, thinking that Shikamaru would definitely understand the meaning.
“That sounds like a lot of trouble,” Shikamaru complained.
“Young people should be full of passion and enthusiasm. How can they lack fighting spirit?” Rock Lee encouraged.
Shikamaru disagreed and rolled his eyes. As a wise man who mainly engaged in mental work, he was more inclined to use his brain rather than his hands, and his IQ was far beyond that of ordinary people.
“Shikamaru, I heard that your IQ is over 200. I have recently read some introductory books on ninja schools and would like to discuss this with you in depth.” Rock Lee said with a mischievous smile.
“That sly smile of yours has betrayed you. You must have some weird questions. Just tell me and I’ll help you analyze them.” Shikamaru seemed unconcerned, as if he was confident about Rock Lee’s IQ challenge.
Seeing this, Rock Lee suppressed his unhappiness, took a deep breath, and decided not to bother with Shikamaru.
“Okay, the first question is: Under what circumstances does 1+1 equal 3?” Rock Lee asked in a joking tone.
“1+1 is obviously 2, how can it be equal to 3?” Tiantian interrupted in confusion.
“Well, you’re not hinting at relationships between people, are you? For example, if two people get married and have a child, then there are three people. It’s a bit too early to bring up this topic,” Ino speculated with a blush.
“Rock Lee, I’ve long expected that you wouldn’t be able to ask truly difficult questions.” Shikamaru rolled his eyes in disdain.
“This question is actually very simple, you are just overthinking it. 1+1 will only equal 3 if the calculation is wrong. You actually associate such a simple question with human reproduction.” Rock Lee seemed a little proud.
“Then, the next question is, why don’t the dogs in the Ya family get fleas?” Rock Lee could hardly suppress his laughter.
“The Inuzuka family’s ninja dogs are meticulously cared for, so there’s no way they’d have fleas. They treat their dogs like their own family, and there’s a deep emotional bond between them,” Shikamaru answered without hesitation.
Chapter 28 Exercise (Old Version)
Naruto walked into Rock Lee’s house with heavy steps and a depressed look on his face.
Rock Lee frowned and asked with concern, “You look so dejected, unlike the always passionate Naruto I know. What happened to make you so depressed? Don’t forget, you are the man who will become Hokage in the future, you have to cheer up.”
Naruto pondered for a long moment before finally revealing his true feelings, “Today, Sasuke and I had a huge fight. Some of the things he said were really hurtful, and the conflict between us escalated into a violent fight.”
“I thought it was a big deal,” Rock Lee said with a comforting smile, “Don’t forget, Neji and I often spar with each other. This is how ninjas grow together. Only through competition can we recognize our own shortcomings.”
Naruto raised his voice, his tone full of bitterness, “But this time is different. I feel that the relationship between us has become unfamiliar. We even used our most powerful skills.”
Rock Lee nodded in understanding, “You may not be very familiar with Sasuke’s past.”
“I understand that it was his brother he wanted to kill,” Naruto continued, “The last time Jiraiya-sensei and I went to find the Fifth Hokage, we met Uchiha Itachi.”
“You probably don’t know that the Uchiha were once a prominent clan in Konoha, much like the Hyuga clan today. But all the Uchiha members, including Sasuke’s parents, were killed by Itachi alone. Every time Sasuke saw Itachi, he would be humiliated by him. The hatred for Itachi was deeply rooted in Sasuke’s heart, but he was not strong enough to seek revenge.”
The novel’s rewritten sentences retain the core content of the original sentences, while polishing the language to make the dialogue more fluent and expressive.
Naruto’s rapid progress clearly irritated his former companion, who once considered himself superior, sparking a hint of jealousy. As a member of the team, Naruto was warned to be tolerant. After all, he would become Hokage in the future, and he shouldn’t argue too much with Sasuke.
Naruto was stunned for a moment after hearing this, then burst into laughter, “How could I be on the same level as Sasuke? I am destined to become the most powerful Hokage.”
Rock Lee was speechless, stunned by the rapid change in Naruto’s mood.
“Hmm? Naruto, show me your special skills.” Rock Lee said.
He was indeed looking forward to it. After all, Chidori and Rasengan were two skills that were essential moves for the protagonists in time-travel novels, but he, a time traveler, didn’t know either of them.
He had witnessed the power of Chidori during the Chunin Exams, and although Sasuke wasn’t too strong at the time, Chidori was still quite impressive compared to his Iron Sand Palm.
As for the Rasengan, especially its advanced form, the Rasenshuriken, he had yet to see it. Even if he couldn’t see the ultimate move, it was good to have a glimpse of its basic form.
“Let’s go find an open area and I’ll show you my skills.” Naruto said excitedly, his eyes flashing with pride and satisfaction at showing his new skills to his friends.
They came to an open area and Naruto gave the order, “Begin!”
The Shadow Clone Technique was activated, and two clones instantly appeared behind him. Naruto raised his hand, and the two clones worked in his hands, quickly condensing a spiral ball of blue chakra.
As the spiral chakra ball whistled, Naruto pushed it towards a thick tree. The tree was instantly melted by the impact of the Rasengan, leaving only a messy hole, and the tree fell to the ground with a loud bang.
“Yes, this power is incredible! The ninjutsu that can be activated without hand seals really suits your personality.” Xiao Li smiled approvingly.
Naruto touched his head and smiled shyly. With Xiao Li’s listening and comfort, the depression in his heart gradually dissipated.
The next day, Xiao Li did not go to the training ground, but chose to practice chakra at home. Originally, his chakra capacity was not much, but since he started practicing the Golden Bell Cover, his body has become stronger, and the amount of chakra has also increased.
In this world, the practice of the Golden Bell Cover has evolved into the accumulation of life energy. This energy can not only effectively relieve fatigue, but also be a great aid in treating injuries.
Rock Lee was full of curiosity. He was eager to explore whether combining chakra with the Golden Bell Cover could stimulate new potential of life energy.
Life energy is difficult to control. It often only appears when body cells are damaged, but the life energy that can be accumulated through daily practice is extremely limited.
Beneath a seemingly ordinary mountain in the Land of Rivers, lies a little-known secret base. It is one of Orochimaru’s secret treasures and is extremely well hidden.
“How is Kimimaro’s condition? Is there still no improvement?” Orochimaru’s voice was as hoarse as a snake.
“Yes, Kimimaro is currently relying entirely on drugs to sustain his life. Once the drug supply is cut off, he will probably pass away soon.” Pharmacist Kabuto reported.
“Maintain the supply of medicine and don’t interrupt it. He will be of great use to me in the future.” Orochimaru ordered.
“Lord Orochimaru is so compassionate and cares so much about Kimimaro.” Kabuto Yakushi said with a hint of temptation.
“You’ve talked too much. Do you want to die, Kabuto?” Orochimaru’s eyes were as sharp as a knife, as if he would devour Kabuto at any time.
Kabuto was terrified and sweating profusely, “Lord Orochimaru, please spare my life.”
Outside the base, two figures dressed in black clothes with red clouds appeared, one riding a white divine bird, and the other controlling the puppet of Hiruko – they were Deidara and Sasori of the Akatsuki organization.
Deidara was originally a disciple of Ohnoki, the Tsuchikage of the Hidden Rock Village. After being defeated by Itachi of the Akatsuki organization, he surrendered and became a key figure in the organization. He is an expert in using clay to create various bombs, and the unique mouths on the palms of his hands give him unique creativity in the art of explosions.
Scorpion of the Red Sand, a traitor to the Sand Village and a genius in puppetry, lost his parents at the hands of Kakashi’s father, Konoha White Fang. He killed the Third Kazekage and transformed him into his own puppet, thus abandoning the Sand Village.
Scorpion harbors a deep hatred for his old comrade Orochimaru, and when Pain issues a manhunt to punish the betrayer, he sees his chance for revenge.
Although Orochimaru wasn’t known for his strength within the Akatsuki organization, few could match his ability to escape. After much effort, Sasori and Deidara finally discovered his hiding place, and Sasori took on the mission without hesitation.
“Let me go say hello to Orochimaru first,” Deidara suggested nonchalantly.
“Well, he’s probably still in the dark and doesn’t know that his old friends have come to him.” Scorpion responded.
“I want to show Orochimaru my art.”
Deidara put his hands into the clay bag, bit the clay with his small mouth in the palm of his palm, and chewed it carefully. Soon, a group of small white insects were born from it.
These insects leaped deeper into the cave.
“Art is explosion!” With Deidara’s order, deafening explosions sounded one after another in the cave.
“That’s exactly what my art is about!”
In a secret cave hidden deep in the mountains, Orochimaru was concentrating on his secret experiment when suddenly, a series of explosions echoed in the dark space. He frowned, wondering: This base is so secretive, who on earth could have found it?
A small, pure white snake appeared quietly, hissing as a warning.
Orochimaru’s mind raced. Were the Akatsuki members here to find him? He sneered. Although he was wary of Akatsuki’s power, he wasn’t frightened. He was confident that if he wanted to escape, no one here could stop him.
He put down the experiment at hand and decided to personally teach Sasori and Deidara a lesson, so that they would understand the price of rashly coming.
Orochimaru quickly arrived at the cave entrance. Facing his old rival, Scorpion of the Red Sand, and the renegade ninja Deidara from the Hidden Rock Village, he sneered hoarsely, “How disappointing! I thought it would be Itachi who would come. I’m afraid it would be difficult for the two of you to accomplish anything.”
“Don’t underestimate me!” Deidara responded loudly, commanding a group of small insects to pounce on Orochimaru like a gust of wind.
At the same time, Scorpion calmly unfolded the scroll, undid the seal, and awakened the powerful Third Generation Wind Shadow puppet.
The swarm of small insects quickly approached Orochimaru, and with Deidara’s order, they collectively exploded, and in an instant, sand and gravel flew everywhere, and smoke and dust covered the sky.
Orochimaru’s figure turned into a pile of mud in the explosion and slowly disintegrated. This was just one of his many earth clones.
Orochimaru calmly walked out from the depths of the cave with a hint of teasing on his lips: “I’m so sorry to be so presumptuous of you to show you my latest research results – ‘Immortal Reincarnation’. I believe you will be shocked by it. Scorpion, I wonder what kind of exciting battle will be when your puppet of the Third Kazekage competes with the real Third Kazekage. I am very much looking forward to it.” His voice was low and hoarse.
As Orochimaru quickly formed hand seals, three coffins slowly rose from the ground, each engraved with the names of the First, Second, and Third Generations. “This is the most powerful forbidden technique in the world. I originally intended to use it against Uchiha Itachi. Since you’re here, why not experience its power for yourself?” Orochimaru laughed arrogantly, his disdain for Sasori and Deidara evident in his words.
The lids of the three coffins dropped, revealing the First, Second, and Third Hokages. “How’s that for a great gift? You should feel incredibly honored to be fighting against the Ninja God who once ruled the chaotic world,” Orochimaru said triumphantly.
Sasori and Deidara were stunned by this sight. Even the conceited Deidara wouldn’t dare compare himself to Konoha’s First and Second Hokages. Sasori pondered silently for a moment, then coldly said, “Retreat.”
The two decided to retreat. Facing a two-on-four situation, they had no chance of success. It seemed they needed to reassess Orochimaru’s strength. Deidara and Sasori leaped onto the giant white bird, soaring into the sky as it did, disappearing from view in an instant.
Orochimaru did not cast any control spells on the people who were resurrected by the Impure World Reincarnation. He had a deep respect for the power of the Rinnegan of the Akatsuki organization and felt that the current Impure World Reincarnation technique still had flaws.
Realizing that this place was no longer a safe place, he decided to move the base. Thinking this over, he walked deeper into the base.
In Konoha Village, the morning light bathes the land, and everywhere is filled with vitality and energy. The villagers greet the arrival of a new day with smiles on their faces.
Farmers wielded their hoes, vendors busily prepared their wares, and Rock Lee ran through the village with a determined stride. His back was soaked with sweat, but his breathing remained steady. This was his daily morning exercise. He had already completed eighty laps, and still had one hundred and twenty to go.
“Xiao Li, you’ve been so hardworking today. Would you like to come in and have a rest?” Uncle Rama, who sells breakfast, greeted him warmly.
“No, Uncle Rama, I haven’t even finished half of the run yet. I’ll come back to enjoy your breakfast after I finish running.” Rock Lee replied with a smile.
“Then come quickly.”
Rock Lee’s morning jogging habit has long been known to everyone in Konoha. Unless he has to leave the village for a mission, he will do long-distance running training in the village almost every day.
Afterwards, Tiantian also joined Xiao Li’s group. Since the trip to the Land of Grass, she felt that her physical strength was not good enough, so she also started daily morning exercises with weights.
Because Ningci had to help Hinata practice soft boxing every day, he was unable to join Rock Lee’s morning exercise team.
“Youth is about running and being full of passion! My two disciples, let’s have a running competition under this morning light.” Teacher Kai, dressed in his signature green leather suit, suddenly appeared and proposed passionately.
Kakashi has been avoiding fights with Gai recently, leaving Gai unable to find an opponent and unable to release his passion. So he turned his attention to Rock Lee, hoping to inspire his fighting spirit.
“Teacher Kai, I have run 80 laps and I am a little tired, but since you have challenged me, I will accept it no matter how tired I am.” Xiao Li cleverly retreated to advance, implying that even if Teacher Kai won, it would not be a real victory.
“Very good, this is my disciple, never give up. Let’s compete again tomorrow. Youth is about running to your heart’s content.” Teacher Kai encouraged.
“OK!”
Tiantian has long been accustomed to Teacher Kai’s passionate behavior, and is even somewhat unmoved.
“The sunshine and air in Konoha are still the most beautiful, and I am about to embark on my journey again.” Jiraiya whispered to himself, preparing to leave again.
Chapter 29 Base (Old Version)
Rock Lee holds Jiraiya in deep respect, knowing full well that his seemingly wandering life is a quest for vital intelligence for Konoha Village. Jiraiya’s brave sacrifice to uncover the truth about Pain has made him a hero in Rock Lee’s heart. In the harsh world of ninja, Rock Lee knows that only by constantly strengthening himself can he survive the fierce competition. He dedicates himself to training, using the Golden Bell Guard to continuously enhance his physical strength.
Sweat soaked Rock Lee’s clothes as he continued to sprint, and his breathing became increasingly rapid. At this point, the Golden Bell Cover not only strengthened his body but also helped alleviate his fatigue. Meanwhile, Tenten, inspired by Rock Lee and Kai, was striving to catch up, learning how to maintain his stamina while carrying out his missions.
During a routine running drill, Gai suddenly stopped, his gaze fixed on Kakashi, whom he had just encountered. Thrilled, Gai declared, “Ah, my eternal rival, Kakashi! This is fate! Come, let us face our fiftieth battle in our lives!” Gai’s passionate challenge foreshadowed the start of a thrilling showdown.
Kakashi thought helplessly that he had to change his habit of going out in the morning, otherwise he would always encounter Kai who was exercising inadvertently.
“There’s something urgent. We have to go first, Kai, Lee.” Before he finished speaking, Kakashi was already walking as fast as he could.
“Kakashi, you haven’t answered whether you want to compete or not! Is this a test you give me, wanting me to catch up with you?” Kai looked at his back, muttered to himself thoughtfully, and then followed closely behind him.
In the south of Konoha, Rock Lee was enjoying the coolness of the river water, washing away the fatigue of morning training and feeling particularly comfortable.
“Hey, Xiao Li, why are you taking a bath here?” Shikamaru walked over leisurely with a fishing rod in his hand.
Rock Lee heard some dissatisfaction in his tone. It was obvious that Shikamaru still remembered the difficult problem last time.
“Come fishing? I caught a wild boar and a wild donkey in the back mountain last night. I’m considering whether to roast the wild boar or the wild donkey first. I’ll also call Choji later. What do you think?” Rock Lee asked.
“I think we should choose a wild boar. I’m sure Choji won’t refuse.” Shikamaru suggested.
“Haha, Wild Ass seems to agree with this decision.” Rock Lee responded humorously.
Shikamaru rolled his eyes helplessly. He was already accustomed to Rock Lee’s pranks. Even with his extraordinary IQ, it was difficult to completely guard against them.
It’s just a little joke, why get so nervous? I’ll treat you at noon today. Try my herbal cattle. They’re specially prepared for us energy-intensive ninjas. Rock Lee suggested with a smile.
With the support of the Third Hokage, he planted various medicinal herbs on the mountain and raised cattle to strengthen their physique and provide high-quality nutrition for ninjas like him who trained very intensely.
These cattle have been raised for some time and now is the time to taste the fruits of their labor.
“I heard you raise cattle because you feel regular food doesn’t provide enough energy?” Shikamaru asked curiously.
“That’s right. I don’t have the help of my family’s secret medicine, so I can only find ways to strengthen my body on my own,” Rock Lee replied.
Afterwards, Rock Lee went to the top of the mountain alone, prepared a cow, and planned to let everyone taste his work at noon.
Meanwhile, Naruto and Sasuke were training hard, with Sasuke working harder under Naruto’s encouragement, while Sakura stayed by their side, mainly responsible for assistance and support, although her role in the battle was not prominent.
As Naruto’s strength rapidly increased, Sasuke became more silent, and the shadow deep in his heart became heavier. In addition to hard training, the haze in his heart also became thicker and thicker.
“Naruto, Sasuke, Sakura, I’d like to invite everyone, including Kiba, Shikamaru and the others, to come and try the special beef I raised at noon today.” Xiao Li warmly invited the three people who were practicing.
“Xiao Li, why do you raise cattle? Is it really for eating?” Naruto asked curiously.
“That’s right. This cow is an energy cow that I specially bred. It can effectively replenish the energy we consume during training and mission execution.” Rock Lee explained.
“I haven’t seen Kiba for a long time. Ever since I defeated him in the Chunin Exam last time, he always said that I won dishonorably and always wanted to compete with me for the position of Hokage. This time I have to teach him a lesson.” Naruto said dissatisfiedly.
“This kind of gathering is meaningless to me. I would rather continue my training.” Sasuke refused coldly.
Sakura looked at Sasuke worriedly. She was sensitive to Sasuke’s changes and was always worried that something bad would happen.
“You should also make sure to rest in addition to training. Communicating with your peers may inspire new ideas. Maybe you can create a brand new ninjutsu, just like Neji and Tenten, and improve your own strength.” Rock Lee encouraged.
There was a glint of anticipation in Sasuke’s eyes, as if he was imagining that through the powerful ninjutsu he had created, he would be able to prepare for his path of revenge in the future.
“We always discuss innovations and improvements in our respective ninjutsu, like Neji’s Chakra Wings, which is the result of our exchanges and discussions. It’s difficult to achieve breakthroughs by practicing alone.
“Sasuke, your talent is unquestionable. I believe you will be able to create even more powerful jutsu in the future.” Rock Lee was encouraging Sasuke and telling him that communicating and learning from his companions was the key to improving his strength.
“Don’t forget to come to my house at noon. I also need to notify Shino and the others to join the party.” Rock Lee reminded.
“Okay, I’ll be there on time,” Sasuke promised.
Seeing this, Sakura showed a sincere smile on her face, and Sasuke seemed to have regained his lost confidence under the encouragement of Rock Lee.
Rock Lee knew that Sasuke’s current state of mind, shrouded in hatred, would make it difficult for him to compete with Itachi in the short term. The two had very different mindsets. Itachi’s love for Konoha and his care for Sasuke were the driving force behind his efforts to overcome all difficulties.
At noon, Konoha’s twelve outstanding ninjas gathered together. They would later become the pillars of the village. But sadly, during the Fourth Shinobi World War, Neji heroically sacrificed his life protecting Naruto and Hinata.
“Naruto, I lost to you in the last Chunin Exam. Today I want to avenge my defeat. Let’s compete again and see who is better. Let the future Hokage personally guide me.” Kiba challenged Naruto confidently.
“Come on, I will let you see my strength. The position of Hokage in the future will belong to me. I will be the strongest Hokage in history. Don’t dream about that impossible dream anymore.” Naruto declared proudly.
“Come on, come on, stop arguing as soon as you meet. Let’s first evaluate the beef that Xiao Li raised so carefully.” Sakura stopped Naruto and Kiba’s argument in time.
Shino is still an inconspicuous person in the corner, but Choji’s yearning for food has never changed.
“Xiao Li, when do we start?” Shikamaru was already a little impatient.
“Everything is ready. I have cut the beef into pieces. You can start grilling it. Please take a seat.” Rock Lee placed the beef on a plate and waited for everyone to grill it by themselves.
Coal was burning under the newly replaced slate, and soon it was steaming hot.
Pieces of beef were roasted on the stone slabs with a “crackling” sound, turning into an attractive golden color.
Rock Lee took a bite of the beef he had grilled. The rich taste and the fragrance of herbs filled his mouth. It was indeed very different from ordinary beef. It was chewier and fuller.
“Xiao Li, the beef you raise is so delicious, even better than those in barbecue restaurants.” Shikamaru praised Xiao Li’s cooking skills.
Kiba and Akamaru shared this delicious meal. While eating, Akamaru couldn’t help but drool over the beef on the stone slab.
“This beef is extraordinary. It is specially prepared for ninjas to maintain their health. It can replenish qi and activate blood circulation, and is very beneficial for repairing the hidden injuries accumulated from long-term training.” Rock Lee introduced while tasting.
Shikamaru nodded in agreement: “Indeed, eating this kind of beef regularly will nourish the body just as much as our family’s secret medicine.”
On the side, Naruto was eating with gusto, his chopsticks in his hand hardly stopped moving, and his appetite was even greater than that of Akimichi Choji.
Meanwhile, Hinata and Neji’s dining manners were quite elegant, reflecting the refinement and demeanor of their noble families. As members of the Hyuga clan, they always wore their family’s attire, upholding their family traditions.
Even Uchiha Sasuke, who suffered a family tragedy, always adhered to the family symbol and wore the iconic costume.
Shino always wears sunglasses, giving people a mysterious feeling. Xiao Li secretly feels that Shino is a bit dull but mysterious, and always says something to the point at critical moments.
At this time, Kiba challenged Naruto: “Naruto, let’s have a competition and show you my strength. If it weren’t for your unexpected ‘attack’ last time, I’m not sure who would win or lose.”
Naruto responded confidently: “That’s just what I want. My strength has greatly increased recently. Let’s fight and see who is better. If you lose, don’t compete with me for the position of Hokage in the future.”
Just as the two were about to take action, Kakashi pushed the door open and interrupted their conversation: “It seems that you are all free. Naruto, Sasuke, Sakura, Lord Hokage has a task to give you, go to the office now.” Kakashi announced.
“Kiba, next time we duel, I’m afraid you’ll be left with nothing but tusks. Let’s go and complete that mission first.” Naruto said half-jokingly to Kiba.
“Ha, we still don’t know who will win.” Ya responded unyieldingly.
After the meal, everyone got busy with their own things, some started training, and some went to carry out tasks.
After a while, only Neji and Tenten were left in Rock Lee’s place. They helped Rock Lee clean up and then went home.
The next morning, the three agreed to compete at the second training ground, but the cry of a messenger hawk disrupted their plan, meaning that a new mission was coming, so they immediately rushed to the Hokage’s office.
Tsunade was sitting there, holding Tuntun and flipping through the documents. “You three, this mission is not an easy one. Orochimaru was witnessed fighting with someone near the hills of River Country. Your mission is to investigate, and be sure to pay attention to safety. If something goes wrong, retreat immediately. Ever since his base in Otogakure was destroyed, his whereabouts have become elusive. This time, the main task is reconnaissance, and the focus is on protecting yourself.”
“He is fighting with others in River Country. Is the other party a member of Akatsuki? Do they want to eliminate him? After all, he was once a member of Akatsuki.” Rock Lee asked curiously.
“We are still investigating this question. Your mission is to confirm whether that is Orochimaru’s secret base.”
At the same time, in a mysterious place, members of Akatsuki are gathering together.
Rewritten sentences from the novel:
“Kiba, next time we fight, you might have to find your fang on the ground. Let’s go take care of some business first.” Naruto said to Kiba as he prepared to leave.
“Ha, that’s not necessarily true. It’s hard to say who will win or lose.” Ya answered confidently.
After lunch, everyone separated, some went for daily training, and some went out on missions.
Soon, only Neji and Tenten were left in Rock Lee’s residence. After helping to clean up, they left.
The next morning, the three agreed to compete at the training ground, but were interrupted by a sudden call of a hawk, meaning a new mission assignment, so they quickly headed to the Hokage’s office.
Tsunade was sitting there, reviewing documents with Tonton in her arms. “You three, this mission is quite difficult. We have news that Orochimaru is fighting someone near the hills of River Country. Your mission is to go and investigate. Safety is the first priority. If you encounter danger, retreat immediately. Orochimaru’s hiding place has been a mystery since the destruction of Otogakure. This operation is mainly to gather intelligence, and protecting yourself is the top priority.”
“Who is he fighting against in River Country? Could it be that the people from Akatsuki want to kill him? After all, he was once one of them.” Rock Lee asked curiously.
“We are not quite sure about this. The real purpose of your trip is to confirm whether it is Orochimaru’s secret hiding place.”
In another secret place, members of Akatsuki are gathering secretly, planning their next move.
“Scorpion, Deidara, how was the outcome of your mission to assassinate Orochimaru?” Pain, the leader of Akatsuki, asked coldly.
Nagato’s resentment towards Orochimaru runs deep, recalling a time when he, Yahiko, and Konan were wandering as children, and encountered Orochimaru, one of the Three Ninjas. At that time, Orochimaru had intended to kill them because they were war orphans, but fortunately, Jiraiya intervened and offered them love and guidance.
In Nagato’s heart, Jiraiya is both a mentor and a kind father, teaching him the philosophy of life and the secrets of ninjutsu. However, Yahiko’s death drives Nagato to extremes, and he transforms into Pain, vowing to achieve his goals through extreme means.
“We didn’t confront Orochimaru head-on and chose to retreat.” Scorpion answered calmly.
Pain, who knew the personalities of the organization’s members well, understood that since even the always willful Deidara agreed to retreat, this operation must have encountered major obstacles.
“I wanted to show my art to Orochimaru, but he unexpectedly summoned three helpers. The situation is not favorable for us, otherwise I would have reduced his snake lair to ashes.” Deidara said angrily.
Chapter 30 Reality (Old Version)
Itachi listened silently to the discussion, then calmly revealed a shocking fact: “‘Immortal Reincarnation’ was not created by Orochimaru. Its creator was Konoha’s Second Hokage, Senju Tobirama. As far as I know, the true power of this ninjutsu is far beyond Orochimaru’s reach. He can’t even fully control the full strength of the First Hokage. He can only unleash 10% of his power, which is just the tip of the iceberg.”
Deidara responded angrily, unhappy with Orochimaru’s deception, “I should have taught that guy a lesson with my Ultimate Art. Let him know the consequences of underestimating me.”
Hoshigaki Kisame proposed another possibility: “It seems difficult to quickly eliminate Orochimaru. Perhaps we can consider joining forces with him to jointly advance our plan.”
Pain calmly analyzed, “Right now, we should prioritize raising funds and keeping a close eye on the Jinchūriki’s whereabouts. We can take advantage of Orochimaru’s presence when the time is right. At the same time, we shouldn’t let Orochimaru get too comfortable. We can reveal his information to Konoha, allowing them to check and balance each other. This will both limit Orochimaru and divert Konoha’s attention away from us.”
However, Orochimaru’s cunning and mysterious nature made this plan full of uncertainty. Even his confidant Kabuto Yakushi often knew nothing about Orochimaru’s whereabouts. Perhaps Pain’s plan was too idealistic.
The Akatsuki members each harbored their own agenda. Itachi remained devoted to Konoha, while Hoshigaki Kisame and Obito yearned for a world of infinite Tsukuyomi. Pain and Konan were committed to achieving peace through suffering. Following the meeting, Pain issued an order to Zetsu: “You must quickly confirm the Jinchūriki’s details and prepare for our next plan.”
Gathering at the village entrance, Rock Lee and his three companions prepare to embark on their journey to the Land of Rivers. Tenten, carrying numerous Sealing Scrolls, appears unimpressed by Orochimaru’s strength, believing him to be easy prey for Konoha.
“Tenten, don’t be too careless,” Rock Lee warned, “Orochimaru is definitely not someone you can easily deal with. Many people who wanted to kill him are buried in the earth.”
Tiantian didn’t take it seriously, snorted and ignored it.
During their hurried march, Neji raised a question: “Can we really find Orochimaru? This information seems too obvious. Given his caution, he would have already escaped. Our journey may be in vain.”
Orochimaru’s mysterious base is like a spider web covering the entire Naruto world, and no one can see where it really is.
On the edge of the River Country, Neji and his companions followed the route outlined in the intelligence, exploring Orochimaru’s possible hiding place. This area, near the Wind Country, was shrouded in dust and sand, and the wind blew the sand into a whirlwind. They finally reached their destination—a flattened hill, its only sign a deep cave.
Neji focused his attention, activated his Byakugan, and scanned the surroundings, trying to detect any signs of chakra. “There’s nothing unusual around here. Let’s go in.” He frowned, a hint of caution in his tone.
The three of them entered a dark cavern strewn with rubble, evidently damaged by an explosion. Only the most powerful nations in the ninja world and the mysterious Akatsuki organization would dare to use a bomb against Orochimaru’s hideout, save for those desperately seeking their own lives.
Neji’s Byakugan glowed in the dim light, and suddenly he shouted, “Stop! There’s a trap!” He thrust his palm forward, forming a massive chakra hand with the “Eight Trigrams Palm” and slamming it into the ground. With a resounding bang, the ground trembled, and spears shot out from all directions, instantly sealing the passage. The scene terrified everyone. Even someone as agile as Rock Lee would be at the mercy of such a trap if he wasn’t careful.
“This trap is too insidious. What if our people accidentally trigger it?” Tiantian frowned worriedly.
“Do you still expect Orochimaru to care about the lives of his subordinates? If someone is unlucky enough to trigger a trap, they can only blame themselves for their bad luck. Orochimaru will not consider his subordinates. We have to be careful. There must be more traps like this ahead.” Rock Lee reminded seriously.
“Fortunately, we have Neji here. He really saved our lives.” Tenten held Neji gratefully, his face full of trust.
“Let’s move on quickly.” Neji gently pushed Tenten’s hand away. It was obvious that he was not used to such intimate behavior.
Ningci paid more attention to his surroundings after this, and the three of them walked forward slowly and cautiously. Suddenly, Ningci raised his hand to signal to stop, and then threw a kunai forward.
The ground in front of them cracked open, revealing a bottomless pit covered with sharp metal spikes. Anyone who fell into it would surely die.
Immediately afterwards, the ground above the pit also cracked, and a huge iron ball rolled down and landed precisely in the pit, forming a second deadly threat, ensuring that any ninja who fell into the pit would not survive.
At this moment, thick green poisonous smoke suddenly spewed out from the surrounding walls. The three of them quickly took out the detoxification pill made by the Fifth Hokage Tsunade from their arms and swallowed it. This detoxification pill was very effective against all kinds of toxins and was their life-saving talisman in this dangerous situation.
The three of them hurried forward, and Rock Lee carefully placed a dense patch of detonating talismans throughout this section of the cave. This was a precautionary measure to prevent the spread of the poison gas. After all, even the best antidote couldn’t guarantee long-term survival in the presence of the gas.
Rock Lee decisively ignited the detonating tag until Neji and Tenten were far away from the explosion area. With the deafening sound of “boom boom boom” the entire cave shook, and the area where the poison gas had leaked was blown away by the explosion. In an instant, a large amount of rock collapsed, tightly sealing the cave entrance.
“Xiao Li, you sealed the entrance to the cave. How are we going to get out later?” Tiantian asked anxiously.
“Don’t worry, someone like Orochimaru must have multiple escape routes. This cave cannot have only this one exit. Our goal is to find his base. Now there is such a big commotion, but no one shows up. It seems that Orochimaru has indeed evacuated.” Rock Lee analyzed calmly.
Hearing this, Tiantian’s mood improved significantly, and he looked happy: “This time we don’t have to fight and we can get a laboratory. It’s great.”
Seeing Tenten’s look, Rock Lee and Neji looked at each other in silence, as if they were helpless about Tenten’s view on money.
“Tiantian, you can’t just focus on money. It’s not good for a girl to become a money-grubber. It will affect your youthful and lovely image.” Rock Lee said half seriously and half jokingly.
“Who said I’m a money-grubber? You’re the one! Didn’t we hand in all the loot we found? I just like the feeling of collecting valuable items without spending any money. It gives me a great sense of accomplishment.” Tiantian defended himself, his face full of an expression that said, “I’m just a hardworking person who loves collecting.”
Neji suddenly raised his hand, signaling a pause in the debate. The three of them immediately grew serious. As they approached Orochimaru’s base, the surroundings gradually took on a modern feel, with metallic ornamentation standing out against the stone walls. They rounded a bend and found themselves in the base’s laboratories, a maze of corridors and chambers.
They first entered a room filled with discarded household items. Rock Lee dismissed these worthless items, dismissing them as unworthy of his attention. Tenten, on the other hand, was incredibly excited, seemingly enjoying the treasure hunt, even if the finds were insignificant.
As they entered the next laboratory, they were suddenly attacked by a massive creature. It was a three-meter-tall monster, its upper body still humanoid, its head shaped like a lion. Its muscular body and bloodshot eyes betrayed a loss of rationality, leaving only the savage animal instincts.
Under Orochimaru’s brutal experiments, animal and human nature intertwined, giving rise to a myriad of strange life forms. Considered failures, these creatures were assigned to guard abandoned laboratories or abandoned in corners, left to fend for themselves. A monster lunged at Rock Lee with swift speed, but Lee nimbly dodged and struck the creature in the chest with an iron palm. Despite the devastating blow, the monster struggled to its feet.
It turned its target to the seemingly weaker Tenten. At this time, Rock Lee bravely stepped forward and used the “Konoha Grunt Cyclone”. His kick accurately hit the monster’s abdomen and blew it away again.
These creatures had clearly been abandoned by Orochimaru, the product of his mad experiments, fusing wild genes with the human body to create all sorts of unpredictable creatures. Such creatures were probably already overrun in his various secret bases.
They were considered worthless failures, used only to guard the ruined laboratories, scare off uninvited intruders, or be discarded and left to nature’s elimination.
The monster was incredibly fast, and it pounced in front of him in an instant, slashing its claws at Rock Lee. Rock Lee reacted quickly, ducking to avoid it and counterattacking with an iron sand palm that hit the monster’s chest.
The power of this palm was enough to leave marks on the iron plate, but it did not seem to cause fatal damage to the monster.
A dull thud echoed, and though the monster was wounded and spewing blood, it managed to stagger to its feet. Apparently realizing Rock Lee was a tough opponent, it turned its attack on the seemingly weaker Tenten. Rock Lee immediately stood before Tenten and activated his “Konoha Gourami Cyclone” technique. He leaped forward and launched a kick, piercing the monster’s abdomen and sending it crashing back into the wall.
Ningji performed the “Sixty-four Palms of Baguazhang” skillfully with ease. His hands flew like flying, quickly hitting the monster’s vital points. The sound was like a drum, crisp and powerful.
The monster roared and tried to break free from Neji’s spider-web-like palm technique, but the exquisite power of Baguazhang locked it firmly and made it unable to move.
When Neji’s gentle fist completely sealed its acupuncture points, the monster’s aura gradually weakened, the madness in its eyes slowly dissipated, and some clarity was restored.
After a full set of palm techniques, the monster turned back into his original old man appearance. Aging quickly eroded his body, and in a blink of an eye, he was dying.
“Save my child…” The old man used up his last bit of strength, leaving behind these words before passing away. His words were filled with endless concern and longing, hoping that the three ninjas could save his flesh and blood.
Although these three ninjas were numb to life and death, they remained silent at this moment. They knew very well that the old man was just an ordinary person in his life, but he suffered such misfortune.
In this ninja world, this kind of tragedy seems to have become the norm. If you are not careful, disaster will sweep through the village and take away countless innocent lives.
The ninjas here often have no emotions, and even young babies cannot escape their cruel punishment.
Tenten expertly unfolded the sealing scroll and sealed the old man’s body away. Then, the three of them continued their mission and searched the next room.
Quickly entering the room, Rock Lee and his companions witnessed the scene at the heart of the laboratory: over a dozen test beds, covered in corpses of various shapes. Some retained human forms on the upper halves, while the lower halves took on the form of wild beasts; others bore strange amalgams of human faces and animal heads, their expressions frozen in fear and despair. Judging by the corpses’ attire, they were likely residents of a nearby village, once peaceful, only to be innocently preyed upon by Orochimaru and forced into the service of genetic experiments.
Rock Lee was filled with rage, shocked by Orochimaru’s inhumane behavior. He had originally thought that Orochimaru’s experiments were limited to ninjas, after all, many ninjas had already stained their hands with blood. However, Orochimaru actually extended his claws to innocent civilians, which he could not tolerate.
The three of them wordlessly sealed the corpse, the lab equipment, and the materials. It was clear that this lab was conducting sinister research into combining human and beast genes. Suddenly, Tiantian’s scream from another room in the lab broke the silence.
Chapter 31 The Weeping Man (Old Version)
Faced with the cruel truth of the ninja world, their hearts were deeply shocked.
She cried every day, perhaps because of the suffering of those innocent children, or perhaps even she herself could not explain the source of these tears.
Rock Lee stepped forward lightly, clasped his hands together, and silently chanted the ancient mantra of rebirth, which was the language inherited from his previous life to liberate the souls of the dead, hoping to lead them to a peaceful paradise.
Although he was not sure whether it would be helpful, he knew that doing so would bring some comfort to his soul.
They expressed their deepest condolences to the deceased and then sealed these experimental subjects. This is the rule of the ninja world: although you can sympathize, although you can be sad, but the mission must be completed. These sealed objects revealed the latest progress of Orochimaru’s research.
They left the laboratory and continued to explore other places, packing up some less important information and corpses with beast heads.
“Ningji, look around, there must be more than one exit.” Rock Lee suggested.
“I see,” Neji replied, then opened his Byakugan and carefully scanned his surroundings. Rock Lee and Tenten were also searching for any possible traps or clues.
“Little Lee, Tenten, this way.” Neji suddenly pointed at a metal wall and said, “There should be a passage leading to the outside world hidden behind this wall.”
Rock Lee, Tenten, and Neji stood before a solid metal wall. They groped and hammered, but could not find the mechanism to unlock it. Orochimaru had looted all the electronic equipment, forcing them to consider a forced breakout. Faced with this challenge, Rock Lee decided to take on the challenge himself.
“Stand back,” Rock Lee ordered, preparing to take action himself.
Neji warned that his soft fist was more suitable for dealing with flesh and blood, and to deal with such a steel barrier, he would have to rely on Rock Lee’s Fiery Iron Sand Palm.
Their first attempt only left a shallow palm print; it was clear that such an attack was not enough to destroy the thick metal wall. However, Neji’s words made them realize that there might be more dangerous enemies hidden behind the wall – monsters that had been tested on human beings.
“Let’s get ready, Neji, protect Tenten.” Rock Lee said in a firm tone.
With the shout of “Jingmen, open”, he opened the sixth gate, and blue energy surged out, like the legendary transformation.
Rock Lee gathered all his strength, rubbed his hands in the air at high speed, flames leaped between his palms, and with a “bang”, the metal wall turned into fragments and flew away under the powerful force of the Iron Sand Palm.
In the fierce clash, the solid metal wall slammed the genetic monsters into a corner of the tunnel, blood flowing slowly along the cracks for a long time. Rock Lee wielded his nunchaku and carefully pried open the wall, revealing the twisted corpse of the monster behind him, obviously lifeless.
“Does this kind of thing need to be sealed? It’s so disgusting.” Tiantian frowned and complained in a low voice.
“No need, this is enough to keep Konoha’s researchers busy for a while.” Neji replied calmly.
Signs all around indicated that this was once a place where genetic monsters were raised. Scratches covered the walls, and corpses of various shapes lay on the ground. Some had regained their human form but looked extremely old, while others remained in the state of wild beasts, forever frozen in the moment of death.
As the three of them continued to go deeper, the bloody smell became stronger and stronger, and the scene before them was even more horrific, with broken limbs and bitten bodies everywhere. All this revealed the tragic truth of this place: Orochimaru had imprisoned these monsters here, letting them kill each other and devour each other to survive, ultimately erasing the last bit of their humanity and reducing them to merciless monsters.
In a brutal test that tested the limits of humanity, the three men steadfastly maintained their resolve, selecting suitable corpses to seal and traversing the carnage-filled passage. Arriving at a metal wall, Neji carefully surveyed it with his Byakugan. Once the area was clear, Rock Lee shattered the wall with his powerful Iron Sand Palm, revealing a dark cavern. Lighting fixtures dotted the path, and the cave narrowed as they advanced. A gust of sandstorm signaled their imminent escape from this hellish hell, and Tenten, filled with hope, foresaw the arrival of freedom.
Perhaps it was through the brutal infighting that the rationality deep within them was activated, transforming them into monsters capable of obeying orders.
Everything they witnessed today had already crossed the boundaries of human nature. Fortunately, none of them chose to retreat. Perhaps the shock they had experienced earlier was intense enough, or perhaps it was simply that the three of them were strong-willed enough.
The three of them calmly selected some relatively intact corpses to seal, and passed through the passage full of killing. The front became quieter, and at the end of the passage was a metal wall.
This metal wall is not as thick as the previous one. It is obvious that Orochimaru does not mind these monsters escaping. As long as they do not interfere with his experiments, he will let them fend for themselves.
Neji activated his Byakugan and used it to penetrate the wall to investigate.
“There’s no sign of life behind the wall. It’s just an ordinary cave. The metal passage ends here,” Neji reported.
Rock Lee approached the metal wall and struck out with his iron sand palm. The wall flew away, revealing a dark cave. There were lighting devices at regular intervals in the cave to avoid absolute darkness.
They continued forward and found that the cave was getting narrower and narrower. After walking a little further, they could almost touch the top of the cave with their hands.
Just then, a gust of wind blew in with sand and dust.
“The exit is almost here, I can feel the wind.” Tiantian excitedly predicted.
The three of them accelerated forward. This path was safe and there were no traps. Perhaps this was just an escape route reserved by Orochimaru. Once he chose this route, it meant that he had abandoned this base.
Soon, they reached the passage’s exit, pushed aside the obstructions, and stepped out. Before them lay endless expanses of yellow sand; they had arrived in the Kingdom of Wind. The cave entrance was hidden midway up a modest hill in that land, cleverly concealed by the sand.
“This cave is quite hidden. We can take a rest here and replenish our strength.” Tiantian suggested.
She was a girl after all, and her experience at Orochimaru’s base left her with lingering fears. She urgently needed to rest and calm down.
“I have some homemade jerky here. Let’s share it. It’s definitely better than dry food.” Rock Lee took out the jerky generously.
“I didn’t expect you to bring dried meat with you on the mission. It’s such a luxury.” Tiantian said half in amazement and half in a joking manner.
Rock Lee just smiled and didn’t respond.
After a light meal, the three decided to rest here. The next morning, they set out on their journey back to Konoha.
Unnoticed in the shadows, a small white snake quietly observed the three people’s movements. From the moment they entered the base, it followed silently, carefully recording their every move.
Even if Neji’s Byakugan noticed the little snake, he would probably just think of it as a small animal living in the soil, and would not associate it with an intelligence collector raised by Orochimaru.
Konoha Village still maintains its tranquility and harmony. The Hokage Rock on the cliff is like a guardian, quietly gazing at the life in the village. The scattered houses form the most heartwarming picture in the world.
The three-person team led by Rock Lee completed their mission and handed in all the sealed scrolls without omission, marking the perfect end of their mission.
Tsunade seemed quite calm about the matter. “I had a premonition that Orochimaru would move the laboratory. After all, an exposed laboratory is fraught with danger for him. I’ve gotten to know him well enough over the years. You three have worked hard, so go down and get some rest.”
Rock Lee, however, looked worried. “Hokage-sama, Orochimaru’s evil deeds must be made public. He massacred civilians, performed brutal human experiments, and used many of the experimental materials we found on innocent civilians, even children and infants. We must expose his crimes and let the entire ninja world recognize his true face and make him a target of public condemnation.”
Tsunade thought deeply and responded, “I will consider your suggestion.”
Obviously, it is not easy to expose Orochimaru’s crimes. Konoha’s own history is not spotless, especially the roots during Danzo’s reign, which left many unspeakable past events. Konoha’s reputation must also be considered.
At Orochimaru’s secret base in the Land of Rice, a small white snake completed its surveillance mission on the River Country base, returned to Orochimaru, climbed lightly onto his shoulder, and slowly reported the intelligence through the movement of its tongue, which lasted for a long time.
After the little white snake finished its report, it quietly slipped under Orochimaru’s clothes and disappeared.
For Konoha Village, the laboratory was not truly abandoned, it was just disguised as a ruin. Although the human-animal gene fusion experiment was still in its infancy and had a low success rate, Konoha’s ninjas destroyed his experimental results and facilities twice, especially the laboratory in Sound Village, which has now sunk under the artificial lake.
Orochimaru’s patience has reached its limit. Those laboratories are not only masterpieces of his hard work, but also a manifestation of his huge assets. His abandoned places do not mean abandonment. They may all be his future secret bases.
He had a complex mix of trust and suspicion towards Kabuto Yakushi, his most capable subordinate and also his most mysterious presence. “Kabuto, come here,” Orochimaru’s voice mingled with trust and caution. Sometimes, he even suspected Kabuto might be a spy for another faction, lurking around him, secretly gathering intelligence.
Lord Orochimaru, what are your orders? Kabuto still had a smile on his face and responded to the call easily.
Orochimaru sneered, “You must contact Ōnoki immediately. He has always harbored ambitions for Konoha. If it weren’t for the alliance between Konoha and Sunagakure, he would have attacked Konoha long ago. The current tension between the two villages is a good opportunity for us to add fuel to the fire. If necessary, we can also use the Akatsuki organization’s desire for the Nine-Tails. Once Konoha collapses, the Nine-Tails will be isolated and helpless.”
He turned to Kabuto and said, “I know you’re still in contact with Sasori. Although you appear to be his spy, you’ve been giving him plenty of intelligence. Go tell Sasori that I hope to have a face-to-face conversation with him about our plans for Konoha. I want to observe Akatsuki’s reaction.”
Orochimaru pondered for a moment and asked, “So, what is Sasuke’s current situation?” Kabuto replied, “Sasuke’s strength is growing rapidly, but the Nine-Tails is growing even faster. Coupled with Itachi’s influence, his loyalty to Konoha is weakening. It’s time for us to redouble our efforts. Send our men to infiltrate Konoha and use conditions that will help him quickly increase his strength as bait. Sasuke will definitely fall into our trap.”
Orochimaru nodded with satisfaction: “I have long anticipated the darkness deep in his heart. It is only a matter of time before he leaves Konoha. Okay, Kabuto, complete the task of contacting Ōnoki and Sasori as soon as possible.” After speaking, Orochimaru closed his eyes and pondered, and his plan gradually unfolded.
Chapter 32 Curry (Old Version)
“Sakura wants to learn medical ninjutsu from Lady Tsunade. This is a great thing. Being able to become a disciple of the Hokage, her future is limitless. You should be proud of her. Did Lady Tsunade agree to her?” Rock Lee asked excitedly.
“I’m not quite sure. When the three of us came back from completing the mission, Sakura suddenly asked to become Tsunade’s disciple.” Naruto answered a little confusedly.
“You two are only concerned with improving your own strength, but have neglected Sakura’s growth. She has always been the weak link in the team. It is not fair to her to watch you fall into danger and be powerless to do anything. If she can really learn from the Hokage, she will definitely become the pillar of Konoha in the future.”
“You’re right, I was too selfish before and didn’t consider these things.” Naruto said regretfully.
“Don’t forget, Konoha’s ninjas carry out missions in teams of three, and it is common for new members to join the team. Just keep a calm mind, and Lord Hokage didn’t say that Sakura won’t fight alongside you in the future.” Rock Lee comforted.
Sakura follows Tsunade to learn medical ninjutsu. Without Kakashi’s guidance, the two might have started an internal conflict during the mission.
At this time, Sasuke was alone by the river, lost in thought. Although he had spent countless hours with Naruto and Sakura and had deep feelings for them, he was never good at expressing these feelings.
Sasuke’s heart was filled with the rage for revenge. That intense hatred became his driving force to keep moving forward, but it also made the road ahead of him unclear.
During his time in Konoha, Sasuke felt that every moment was torture. His strength improved slowly, and the road to revenge seemed endless. Every night he thought about how to defeat Uchiha Itachi.
Self-doubt and hatred intertwined, Sasuke sometimes couldn’t understand why Itachi spared his life if he could kill his parents. Those words lingered in him like a nightmare: “Wait until you have the same eyes as mine, then come to me.”
He once again set foot in the Nanga Shrine, seeking the secret of the Uchiha family on the stone tablet, with a heavy heart, because the stone tablet said that only by severing the deepest bond can the Mangekyo be awakened.
For him, the deepest bond was with Naruto and Sakura. Sasuke stopped on the way to the shrine, a wry smile appeared on his lips, and he made a firm decision in his heart.
“I will not follow your rules, my foolish brother. I will rely on my own strength to awaken the Mangekyo, kill you, and seek justice for my parents.”
At the same time, in the Hokage’s office, Tsunade was immersed in government affairs when a knock on the door interrupted her work, “Come in.”
Sakura stood in the Hokage’s office, reviewing her own shortcomings in past missions. Every time her teammates Naruto and Sasuke fought hard, she was powerless and could only watch them fight each other helplessly.
Mustering her courage, Sakura spoke, “Hokage-sama, I wish to become your disciple. I no longer want to be a burden to Team 7, and I don’t want them to get hurt during missions because of me.”
Tsunade looked at Sakura. She remembered Kakashi had mentioned that Sakura had excellent chakra control and quick thinking, but her strength needed to be improved. Now that Sakura had taken the initiative to come to him, it was obvious that she had made up her mind.
“Okay, I agree. But you have to be mentally prepared, my training will be very hard.” Tsunade said seriously.
“I see.”
“As for Naruto and Sasuke, I will consider how to arrange them. Kakashi often goes out on missions and cannot always take them with him. Even if it’s just the two of them, there’s no need to worry too much.” Sakura inquired.
“I will think deeply about this question. You go back and prepare. We will start training early tomorrow morning.” Tsunade instructed.
“If Kakashi is not in the village, I will arrange for them to cooperate with other teams, or assign a lead ninja to lead them in completing the mission.” Tsunade added.
“Grandma Tsunade, when will Master Jiraiya teach me how to train? He left without saying a word.” Naruto asked curiously.
“He is out on a secret mission. For now, you will follow the other teams on their mission. We can talk about training later.” Tsunade replied.
“I don’t just want to simply complete missions. I need to train and become stronger so that I can become Hokage soon.” Naruto expressed his determination firmly.
“Don’t be impatient. Becoming Hokage is not just a matter of strength. Your contribution to the village is equally important. Think about this carefully.” Tsunade pointed out the crux of the problem.
“Then assign us tasks quickly, Lady Tsunade! I want to start completing the tasks that will allow me to be promoted to Hokage immediately.” Naruto requested anxiously.
“There is a mission ready for you to take over. It is not difficult. I will ask Shizune to call Rock Lee over. He will lead you this time and you must strictly follow his orders.” Tsunade emphasized when assigning the task.
Sasuke was no stranger to Rock Lee; they had fought against each other in the Chunin Exams and had shared several meals together. Rock Lee’s powerful taijutsu skills, along with his unmatched speed and strength, had left a lasting impression on Sasuke.
“It’s Rock Lee, that’s great! But I think it’s also suitable for me to be the captain.” Naruto said somewhat dissatisfiedly.
“He is already a Chunin, and you are still just Genin, so you must obey his orders. Rock Lee has gone through countless dangerous missions and is very experienced. I can only feel at ease with him leading the team.” Tsunade gave clear instructions.
Sasuke and Naruto nodded, both acknowledging Rock Lee’s strength. Back then, he had penetrated deep into Orochimaru’s Otoninin, encountered an attack, and yet he had led his companions back unscathed, demonstrating the strength of their group.
Soon Rock Lee arrived at the office, “Hokage-sama, what can I do for you?”
Seeing that Sasuke and Naruto were already there, he had a rough idea of the mission.
“I’ve called you here to lead them on a mission,” Tsunade instructed. “The mission is relatively simple. The gold mines of River Country are occupied by the Black Shovel Family. They’re using the name of protecting the gold mines to disregard human life. What you need to do is eliminate the Black Shovel Family, and when you’re done, you’ll be gone.”
“Yes, Lord Hokage.” Rock Lee accepted the order.
However, Naruto and Sasuke seemed somewhat glum and didn’t seem too enthusiastic about the mission.
“Hokage, the leader of the Black Shovel Clan, could it be that rebel ninja from Kirigakure, Black Shovel Raiga?” Rock Lee asked.
“That’s right, be extra careful with him,” Tsunade warned.
“Who is Black Shovel Raiga? Is he very strong?” Naruto interrupted.
“He is one of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen of the Hidden Mist Village and the user of Raitoga. Whether he is strong or not can only be known after a fight.” Rock Lee explained.
“Is he one of the Seven People together with Zabuza and Hoshigaki Kisame?” Sasuke asked immediately.
Obviously, although the reputation of Black Shovel Thunder Fang is not as loud as his Thunder Blade, this weapon that is said to be able to summon thunder and lightning is still feared by people.
As for Hoshigaki Kisame, he’s known as the Tailed Beast without a tail, and his power is unfathomable. “I’ve fought him before, and he’s truly formidable. This is a perfect opportunity to test whether Raiga Kuroko lives up to his reputation,” Rock Lee analyzed.
He believes that only by fighting against the strong can one unleash their potential and challenge their limits. Even for an opponent like Hoshigaki Kisame, only by fighting can one know who is better.
“Everyone go back and prepare the necessary ninja tools, especially detonating tags. Combined with kunai, they will be an effective means of interference and attack against the enemy. We will gather at the village entrance in twenty minutes. Action!” As soon as he finished speaking, Rock Lee hurried away.
He told Tenten and Neji to arrange their own training while he returned home to prepare for the upcoming mission.
On time, at the entrance of Konoha village, Rock Lee, Naruto and Sasuke gathered together, while the ninja from the gold mine was still recuperating in the hospital.
“Let’s go, first to the Kingdom of Rivers, and then we’ll follow the instructions on the map to find the gold mine.” Team leader Rock Lee said.
The Fire Nation’s forests were lush and dense, and the three of them shuttled between the towering ancient trees. Sasuke suddenly asked, “Xiao Li, have you ever encountered Uchiha Itachi while on missions outside?”
Naruto looked at Lee quietly. He empathized with Sasuke’s pain – his brother Itachi not only slaughtered the entire clan, but even his parents were not spared.
Compared with Sasuke, Naruto, who has no parents, feels that he is more fortunate. Although he sometimes feels lonely, he has never experienced the love of his loved ones, so he will not feel the pain of loss.
In Naruto’s eyes, it was quite difficult for Sasuke to stand up from the trauma of his family’s destruction.
Rock Lee pondered for a moment and replied, “I have. During a mission in the Land of Rain, Mr. Gai led the three of us to hide in a cave from the rain, and we happened to meet Itachi and Hoshigaki Kisame.”
He recalled the fierce battle in a calm tone, “It was a battle of equal strength. In the end, it was Master Kai who opened the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu to the seventh gate and delivered a fatal blow, which pushed them back.”
Sasuke and Naruto fell silent after hearing this.
Sasuke spoke again: “Xiao Li, can you tell me how strong Itachi is? I want to know where the limit of Itachi is, even I can’t reach him.”
After a moment of contemplation, Rock Lee slowly spoke, “Itachi is incredibly powerful. He possesses the Uchiha clan’s Mangekyō Sharingan. One eye can unleash the black flames of Amaterasu, while the other can cast the Tsukuyomi illusion. Moreover, he has no weaknesses in illusion, ninjutsu, or taijutsu. Sasuke, if you want to defeat him, you must fully tap into the potential of the Sharingan and make breakthroughs in ninjutsu. There are rumors that the Sharingan’s evolution requires one to personally end the deepest bond, but that’s sheer nonsense. You must not believe it.”
Rock Lee smiled softly and continued, “Over the past year, I’ve read a lot of secret manuals, which also mentioned the secrets of the Uchiha family. The evolution of the Sharingan actually requires extreme stimulation, such as witnessing the death of the most important person in front of you. This kind of stimulation can trigger the evolution without having to do it yourself. Sometimes, the eyes can be deceived, and clever methods can also be used to open the Sharingan.”
Sasuke asked with a puzzled look on his face, “Lie?”
“You will understand, but if I explain it now, it won’t work.” Rock Lee blinked.
Rock Lee, familiar with the Land of Rivers, led Naruto and Sasuke to his favorite place, the Sansho Granny Curry. The place was familiar to him, having tasted its delicacies during his training with Sensei Gai. Rock Lee’s palate preferred spicy flavors, and the Sansho Granny Curry was the perfect savory treat.
“Let’s go fill our stomachs first and get some information while we’re at it,” Rock Lee suggested.
Naruto and Sasuke followed closely behind, and soon arrived at Grandma Sansho’s fragrant curry hut.
“The curry here tastes delicious. We have to eat and drink enough so that we can have the strength to deal with the Black Shovel Family. The gold mine they occupy is not far from here.” Rock Lee said while studying the map.
The two companions nodded in agreement.
When they stepped into the hut, they saw Grandma Sansho busy stirring pots of curry. “Oh, it’s Xiao Li, here again.”
“Grandma Sansho, long time no see. This time we are here to carry out a mission. The Black Shovel Family has been doing evil things, and we are going to teach them a lesson.” Rock Lee said frankly.
“Then you have to be careful. The Black Shovel family is not a good family. Unfortunately, my son joined them and hasn’t been home for a long time.” Grandma Sansho’s tone revealed sadness.
“Don’t worry, Grandma Sansho, we promise to bring your son back safely.” Naruto promised confidently.
“Thank you in advance. Xiao Li, do you still want to order the spicy curry?” asked Grandma Sansho.
The spicy curry that Rock Lee orders every time he comes is what Grandma Sansho calls “life-saving curry” and is said to have extraordinary effects.
Chapter 33 Thunder Fang (Old Version)
Rock Lee took a bite of curry, and the tip of his tongue was instantly attacked by the spicy taste, like a flame spreading along the esophagus to the depths of his stomach.
He couldn’t help but feel a surge of pleasure. The extremely spicy, numb and delicious taste was irresistible, enough to awaken the sleeping soul and ignite the passion for life.
Sasuke and Naruto saw Rock Lee’s intoxicated expression and widened their eyes. Finally, they couldn’t suppress their curiosity and bravely tasted it.
As a result, the faces of both of them immediately turned as pale as ripe apples. Sasuke’s body was shaking and he was unable to speak, while Naruto fainted due to excessive stimulation.
Rock Lee quickly poured water to help Sasuke relieve the spiciness, and Sasuke let out a breath, feeling awe for the bowl of curry.
He also gave water to the unconscious Naruto, and after some time, Naruto regained consciousness.
“Isn’t this powerful feeling great? It can make people radiant, rejuvenated, awaken the inner blood, and give people unlimited motivation.” Rock Lee shared.
Naruto glanced at him doubtfully, and Sasuke tried again, the burning sensation causing his long-frozen blood to boil again.
The feeling was so wonderful to him that Sasuke finished the curry mouthful after mouthful, as if he had been reborn.
“This curry is so delicious that it makes one’s blood boil.” Sasuke wiped the sweat from his forehead while eating. Only those who have been trapped in an extremely cold place can deeply appreciate such deliciousness.
“Mother-in-law Sansho, after we finish this meal, we will go to the gold mine to investigate the situation and try our best to rescue your son safely as soon as possible.” Rock Lee said firmly.
“Thank you, thank you very much.”
The three of them cautiously headed towards the mine. “The miner who issued the quest mentioned that the leader of the Black Shovel Family enjoys holding brutal funerals, with some people being beaten to death and others buried alive,” Rock Lee explained.
“Buried alive? What’s going on?” Naruto asked in confusion.
“It means literally, burying the living.” Sasuke replied calmly.
“We must eliminate these villains as soon as possible. They are so careless about human life that they bury living people in the ground.” Naruto said angrily.
“The world of ninjas is cruel, and you will encounter more cruel things in the future,” Rock Lee reminded.
They crouched quietly on the hilltop, overlooking the scene below. Simple houses were scattered everywhere, but only the two-story wooden building stood out, neat and prominent.
“That building should be the residence of Black Shovel Raiga. Let’s go to the mine and take a look. If the Black Shovel family doesn’t have many people and is not very strong, we can take them down in one fell swoop.” Rock Lee planned.
The three of them advanced silently deeper into the mines, where they saw several managers dressed in the uniforms of the Black Spade Clan shouting at the miners, sometimes even kicking and beating them. Rock Lee looked at these bullies with disdain, believing that most of the Black Spade Clan were just ordinary people, far from being ninjas.
“No need to look too much, these people are just a bunch of scoundrels, perhaps only Black Shovel Thunder Fang has some ability. Let’s take action and get rid of these villains in one fell swoop.” Rock Lee suggested.
With that, the three of them swooped down. Rock Lee’s Iron Sand Palm was incredibly powerful, incapacitating the enemy with a single strike. Sasuke’s kunai aimed ruthlessly at the enemy’s vital points, while Naruto bravely engaged in battle, wielding his modified Naruto Rengan (Nurse Run Maru) and Shadow Clone Technique, a technique based on Rock Lee’s Lotus Art.
Soon, all the members of the Black Shovel family were cleared out from the mine.
“It seems that these are just ordinary people recruited by the Black Shovel Family. They have no real combat power at all.” Sasuke commented.
At that moment, the sound of funeral music and silk could be heard from the house they had passed earlier. Rock Lee stopped an old man and asked, “Old man, what’s that sound?”
The old man was startled by his sudden action and replied tremblingly: “I heard that Rokusuke went to the ninja village to seek help, and now a funeral is being held for his brother Shichisuke. Alas, the Kuroko family is really a sin.”
“Let’s go and see what’s going on.” Rock Lee led Naruto and Sasuke towards the funeral procession.
The funeral procession marched in a mournful manner, seemingly solemn, but who could have imagined that this was a cover-up for the brutality of burying people alive? Without knowing the truth beforehand, it would be difficult to connect these people with such a heinous act.
Rock Lee quickly identified a handsome young man wearing the Black Shovel family’s attire. He was none other than Sansho’s son. He quickly pointed him out to Naruto and Sasuke, warning them not to accidentally hurt him.
The three quickly charged the group. Rock Lee was the first to strike, unleashing his “Konoha Gourami Whirlwind.” His legs acted like iron whips, instantly sending two civilians flying. The force was so strong that they collided with the rocks and died instantly.
Rock Lee did not stop and continued to perform a series of kicks. Each kick was very powerful. The enemies who were kicked all vomited blood and fell heavily.
Throughout the battle, Rock Lee kept an eye on the movements of Sansho’s son, but when he saw him hiding, he didn’t investigate further.
Naruto and Sasuke followed closely behind, showing no mercy to those who did evil. Although most of them were civilians, they had committed many evil deeds and deserved to be punished.
In the tense atmosphere, the three ninjas rescued Nanasuke from the coffin. “Thank you, you must be ninjas from Konoha. It seems that my brother really invited you.” Nanasuke expressed his trust in his brother while thanking him.
“Black Shovel Thunder Fang has not shown up yet. You should find a hiding place immediately, otherwise no one can keep you safe.” Rock Lee reminded seriously.
Raiga, who was hiding on the top of the mountain, witnessed all this and thought to himself: “Rokusuke is indeed going to Konoha to get reinforcements, but can these little brats withstand my attack?”
“Are you planning to hold a funeral for them?” Ranmaru asked softly from behind.
“I have no memory of them, so I just bury them directly.” Lei Ya answered calmly.
He unleashed his Water Style: Mist Hidden Jutsu, and the sky was quickly enveloped in thick fog, obscuring the mines. “Attention! This is the Mist Hidden Jutsu! Raiga is about to strike! Everyone, be careful!” Rock Lee warned his companions.
Thunder rolled in, shaking the entire area. “Get out of the way! The Thunder Blade can trigger thunder from the sky. Seek cover!” The three of them quickly ducked. A bolt of lightning struck right where they had been, instantly creating a large hole in the ground.
The three of them narrowly escaped and hid behind the bushes, their hearts still pounding. Lei Ya, perched on the mountain, stared intently at the spot where they had vanished.
“Are they dead, Ranmaru?” he asked.
“No, they dodged it.”
“These little guys are not simple. Let’s send them on their way and find out where they are hiding.” Lei Ya gave the order resolutely.
“They are hiding in the bushes on the left.” A prompting voice came from behind.
Raiya swung his two blades, crossing them in a cross, muttering, “Thunder Burial, Thunder Feast!” Instantly, a thick bolt of lightning descended from the sky, drawn to the Thunder Blade, its blade swirling with a breathtaking flash of lightning. He plunged the Thunder Blade into the ground, unleashing a powerful electrical current that barreled straight into Rock Lee and his group’s hiding place. Sasuke and Naruto fainted instantly, but Rock Lee, relying on the lightning resistance he’d cultivated in the Land of Lightning and the protective shield of his Golden Bell, withstood the onslaught.
Illuminated by the lightning, Rock Lee lay motionless on the ground, feigning death. “Ranmaru, are the three of them dead?” Raiga asked, turning back. “They’re still alive. You need to be careful,” Ranmaru replied.
Without hesitation, Raiga charged at Rock Lee, sword raised, intent on killing him. However, Rock Lee suddenly leaped forward, striking Raiga’s chest with a powerful iron palm strike. Raiga attempted to block the blow with his Thunder Blade, but was still sent flying by the immense force.
After the battle, Rock Lee walked over to the unconscious Naruto. Sasuke had regained consciousness relatively quickly due to his Chidori training. Rock Lee hugged Naruto tightly, his eyes full of determination: “Naruto, you have suffered. I swear, I will seek justice for you!”
Sasuke seemed to hear Lee’s desperate cries, on the brink of unconsciousness. The sound penetrated his consciousness, telling him an unbearable truth: Naruto was gone. His eyelids slowly lifted, and he witnessed the heartbreaking scene of Lee clinging to the motionless Naruto. Memories of the past flooded back like a tide, from the arguments at ninja school, to their constant bonding as classmates, to their mutual support on the battlefield. It all stirred a wave in Sasuke’s heart.
His heart shattered with Naruto’s passing, tears welling up in his eyes. His three-magatama Sharingan was reflected in those tears, revealing his determination and strength. Sasuke’s gaze pierced through the mist of tears and locked onto Raiga in the distance. He quickly formed hand seals, and lightning flashed from his palms, accompanied by the sharp sound of birdsong.
“Revenge for you!” Sasuke roared, turning his grief into strength, and charged towards Raiga at astonishing speed, raising a cloud of dust along the way.
Facing Sasuke’s fierce attack, Raiga didn’t flinch. He licked the blood from the corner of his mouth and felt the power surge through his body. Looking at the approaching Sasuke and the flashing lightning in his hand, he thought to himself: Konoha’s Kakashi’s followers, let’s compete to see whose lightning style is more powerful.
He responded swiftly, crossing his arms and swinging his swords, unleashing a ball of lightning. But Sasuke, using the exceptional kinetic vision of his three-magatama Sharingan, effortlessly dodged the attack. Thanks to the Sharingan’s evolution, his power had greatly increased, and the lightning ball seemed to him as slow as a snail’s pace, unable to reach him at all.
Raiga continued to control lightning, causing the sky to become violent and restless, but Sasuke seemed to be assisted by God and nimbly avoided every electric shock.
He chased after Lei Ya who was trying to escape to the mountain, and the lightning in his hand condensed into a fist, hitting the opponent’s back fiercely.
Lei Ya swung his two swords to meet the lightning falling from the sky. With the help of the power of the thunder swords, his body was covered with a layer of solid “thunder armor”.
However, Sasuke’s Chidori’s impact force remained undiminished, and he managed to knock Raiga away, causing Ranmaru on his back to slip off from his torn clothes.
At this moment, Rock Lee appeared like a shadow and caught Ranmaru steadily. Naruto then launched an attack on Raiga.
Sasuke is shocked by Naruto’s “resurrection”, but Rock Lee reveals that it was just an optical illusion to stimulate Sasuke to awaken the three magatama.
Sasuke suddenly realized that the awakening of the Sharingan could also be induced in this way.
They quickly reunited and, together with Naruto, surrounded Raiga, insisting that he return Ranmaru and warning him that if he didn’t, he would pay a heavy price.
“That little thing on your back is Ranmaru, right? Do you think you can take Ranmaru back by using it to find us? Don’t dream!” Rock Lee said coldly.
“Then, let me show you what true death is!” Lei Ya raised the thunder knife in his hand, attracting the thunder from the nine heavens. In an instant, his body turned into a dazzling ball of lightning, spinning at high speed, forming a destructive thunder tornado.
The tornado raged, its tip gradually coalescing into a terrifying dragon head, roaring and lunging towards Rock Lee, Naruto, and Sasuke. In an instant, the tornado, imbued with the immense power of lightning, struck them. Naruto and Sasuke were unable to react and were knocked unconscious. Rock Lee gritted his teeth, barely escaping the catastrophe despite his severe injuries.
“The Seven of Kirigakure are truly worthy of their reputation! But now, I’ll show you my true strength!” Rock Lee resolutely opened his sixth gate, his chakra surged. “Come, let’s face it, head-on, show me what you, the Seven of Kirigakure, are capable of!” Facing Raiga, he endured the pain of the electric shock and swung out his right hand, now ablaze with flames, striking out with the “Iron Sand Palm.”
With a resounding bang, Raiga flew out like a kite with a broken string. Rock Lee gave him no chance to breathe, following closely with a fierce kick from “Shadow Dance Leaf,” catching Raiga in the jaw and sending him flying into the sky. The blow was incredibly powerful, sending Raiga spurting blood mixed with shattered fangs. Seizing the opportunity, Rock Lee leaped up, his “Inner Lotus” skill about to unleash, showcasing his incredible combat prowess.
Chapter 34 Sasuke (Old Version)
In the fragrant curry hut of Granny Sansho, Rock Lee carefully picked up the life-saving curry she had carefully prepared and fed it to the unconscious Naruto and Sasuke respectively. In an instant, the two’s faces returned to rosy, their eyes widened, and they eagerly asked about the whereabouts of their enemy, Raiga Kuroko.
“He’s already defeated by my fist,” Rock Lee replied calmly. Ranmaru, standing nearby, trembled uncontrollably upon hearing this news, tears welling up in his eyes. “Now that Raiga is gone, there’s no reason for me to stay in this world.”
“You’re wrong to say that!” Naruto couldn’t help but retort loudly, “Everyone has their own value. You have to learn to be strong.”
Ranmaru is still immersed in the grief of losing his companion. “Raiga and I are connected by soul. Now that he is gone, I feel that everything has lost its color.”
Granny Sansho came over with a shaky gait and whispered to her, “Child, the meaning of life is to keep moving forward. Try this curry, it will bring you new strength.”
Ultimately, Ranmaru was moved by Sansho’s warmth and decided to stay and learn how to make curry. Rock Lee, Naruto, and Sasuke completed their mission, and Sasuke’s potential was unlocked, awakening his three-magatama Sharingan and greatly increasing his strength.
“It’s time to return to the village and report. We have solved the problem of the Black Shovel Family.” Rock Lee suggested.
The three of them said goodbye to Granny Sansho and set off on their journey back to Konoha. As night fell, the forest of the Land of Fire, dotted with stars, looked particularly quiet and beautiful, as if lighting the light of hope for their return.
“Let’s camp here tonight and set off for the village early tomorrow morning,” Rock Lee suggested.
The three of them gathered around the campfire, put some dry food on the table, and chatted while roasting it.
Rock Lee noticed that Sasuke’s Sharingan had evolved to three magatama. The deep-seated hatred seemed to have been released, and his strength also increased. His mentality also seemed to have calmed down a lot. It was estimated that he would not look for Orochimaru again in the short term.
“Lady Tsunade, can we use the Raitouga that we took from Kurobuta Raiga to exchange with Kirigakure?” Rock Lee asked curiously.
“Your performance is commendable and you have considered the issues comprehensively. This thunder sword is of great value and can control lightning. Let the research department analyze it first. I will also increase your mission bonus appropriately.” Tsunade praised.
She was very satisfied with the results of Rock Lee’s team. They brought back rich spoils on every mission, saving a lot of resources for Konoha Village.
Unlike other ANBU and regular ninja units who only focus on missions, Rock Lee’s team does not even despise waste materials, and their contribution to the village is obvious.
“You two did an amazing job. Go and rest first. I have something to say to Lee alone,” Tsunade instructed.
“Grandma Tsunade, is there anything you can’t say in front of us? We are also ninjas of the village.” Naruto responded unhappily.
“Remember, you are just a Genin. Some of the Chunin’s secrets are not allowed to be known by Genin. Get out of here immediately.” Tsunade shouted angrily.
“When I become Hokage, I will definitely abolish this stupid rule.” Naruto muttered in dissatisfaction.
“What were you mumbling just now?” Tsunade raised her fist, as if she would explode at any moment.
Sasuke quickly pulled Naruto away, and Tsunade, in a rage, threw the chair behind her out of the window of the Hokage’s office.
“Hokage-sama, what do you want me to do?” Rock Lee cleverly changed the subject to avoid touching Tsunade’s anger point.
“Sasuke’s mood swings have been huge lately, and I’m worried he’ll do something extreme. Orochimaru has also been coveting him, and I’m afraid Sasuke will impulsively throw himself into Orochimaru’s arms.
As Konoha’s only Uchiha heir, I plan to have Sasuke join you on more missions in the future. Please try to comfort him.” Tsunade said in a serious tone.
“Yes, Lord Hokage, Sasuke opened the triple-magatama Sharingan during this mission, almost catching up with Itachi’s level. He should not be so anxious to find power now.” Rock Lee replied.
“The three-magatama Sharingan is a very high status in the Uchiha clan. Did you encounter any difficult problems during the mission? Is Raiga Kuroko really that strong?” Tsunade asked with a hint of curiosity. She had a deep understanding of the Sharingan.
“I used Naruto’s ‘death’ as bait to let Sasuke unleash the power of the three magatama. I even imagined that maybe in the future I could induce his Mangekyō Sharingan, which would be a huge fortune for Konoha.” Rock Lee laughed self-deprecatingly.
Tsunade laughed heartily. “Only you could come up with such a strategy. From now on, Sasuke will be in your care. Naruto will also be going out with Jiraiya for training soon. Jiraiya is currently conducting an in-depth investigation into the Akatsuki organization, and it is expected that he will take Naruto with him when he returns.”
“What about the information provided by Hidan? After all, he is a core member of Akatsuki.” Rock Lee asked curiously.
“His mind is full of superstition about evil gods, and he doesn’t know much about Akatsuki’s internal affairs. He hardly pays attention to every meeting and just prays blindly. This makes it very difficult for the intelligence department.” Tsunade shook her head helplessly.
This guy Feidan has really gone crazy.
“You go back first. I plan to temporarily assign Sasuke to your team. I have already told Akagi that you should pay special attention to Sasuke’s emotional changes.” Tsunade ordered.
“clear!”
Rock Lee took a deep breath as he walked out of the Hokage’s office. He hadn’t expected Sasuke to be in the same team with him. In the original story, Team 7 had been in name only since Sasuke’s defection.
It is still the same now, and perhaps we have to wait another three years before we can truly reorganize.
Rock Lee gave the assembly signal at the second training ground, and soon Neji and Tenten arrived.
“Tenten, Neji, we have called everyone together urgently because we have something important to announce.” Rock Lee said seriously.
“Our team will be welcoming a new member, he is Uchiha Sasuke.” Everyone showed surprise, and Tiantian couldn’t help asking: “Isn’t he always with Kakashi-sensei? How come?”
“Because Team 7 needs to be temporarily disbanded. Sakura is now the direct disciple of Lord Hokage, and Naruto will soon go out for training with Lord Jiraiya.” Xiao Li explained.
“I have to tell Sasuke this news later, and I really don’t know how to start.” He sighed softly.
Thinking that Sasuke is now alone while the other two have the guidance of the Sannin, Rock Lee had an idea in his mind: perhaps, he should help Sasuke find the legendary Ryuchi Cave so that the legend of the Sannin can continue.
After bidding farewell to his teammates, Rock Lee headed to the Uchiha territory alone. Although most of the area had been sealed off, Sasuke’s independent courtyard still sat quietly within it.
Although this is not the core secret place of the Uchiha family – Nanga Shrine, it is also Sasuke’s residence.
Rock Lee easily found the unsealed courtyard. Sasuke was sitting on the roof, his eyes hazy, as if lost in thought.
Without saying anything, Rock Lee jumped lightly and sat next to Sasuke, ready to tell him everything.
“Sasuke, you will be joining our team temporarily.” Rock Lee announced the news directly.
“What about Naruto?” Sasuke asked.
“He will be going into seclusion for training with Jiraiya soon and will not be back in the short term,” Rock Lee explained.
Sasuke seemed a little lost. “It seems that I have become a burden. One is being taught by the Hokage himself, and the other is training with Jiraiya. I am left alone. Well, it’s better for them to leave.”
“Are you considering joining Orochimaru?” Rock Lee asked directly.
Sasuke was stunned. Although he didn’t say a word, his eyes told Rock Lee the answer.
This young man is really a headache. It seems I have to find a way to make him give up this idea.
“There are some things you may not know. Orochimaru once belonged to the same organization as Itachi.” Rock Lee deliberately slowed down his speech.
“What?” Sasuke’s eyes widened in shock.
“Indeed, Orochimaru once attacked Itachi because he coveted his body, but was ultimately severely damaged by Itachi’s Mangekyō Sharingan. All of his tricks were exposed by Itachi. If it weren’t for Orochimaru’s superb escape skills, he might have died long ago.
“Going to join Orochimaru is like choosing the path of a loser. Even if you learn all of Orochimaru’s skills, you will only become another version of him and will never be able to defeat Itachi,” Rock Lee said carefully.
“Do you think you can defeat Itachi by staying here?” Sasuke’s emotions gradually calmed down. After all, even Orochimaru was defeated by Itachi. He began to question the meaning of joining Orochimaru.
“Let’s objectively analyze Itachi’s strength. In terms of ninjutsu, he primarily uses the fire escape technique inherited from the Uchiha clan, which goes without saying. As for taijutsu, Gai’s iron fist is no less powerful than Itachi’s, and Itachi isn’t a ninja known for his taijutsu.
But illusion is his absolute strong point. Itachi has reached the pinnacle of illusion skills using the Sharingan, and even Orochimaru finds it difficult to resist.
However, Gai-sensei had developed a fighting strategy, when facing Itachi, to avoid looking into his eyes and instead focus on his feet and shoulders, something that took time and practice to hone.
The key to breaking Itachi’s illusions is to improve the power of your Sharingan. Once your eyes evolve into Mangekyō, you will be more resistant to Itachi’s illusions.
You are only one stage away from Itachi, and that is to evolve the three magatama into the Mangekyō. Once you complete this step, you will become the pillar of Konoha, and at that time, defeating Itachi will no longer be an unattainable dream.
“Everything Orochimaru couldn’t give you, in Konoha, with our help, your ninjutsu and taijutsu will achieve a qualitative leap. When the day comes when your Mangekyō Sharingan opens, revenge will be within reach.” Rock Lee spoke these words without stopping, then took a deep breath.
It’s really tiring to fool people. Everything Rock Lee said was specious. Sasuke couldn’t discover it now because he had too little information and was relatively simple, making him easier to fool.
“How do I open the Mangekyo?” Sasuke asked seriously.
Rock Lee is in tears. Even Uchiha himself can’t answer this question.
Rock Lee sighed inwardly, exhausted by the evasiveness of his words. Sasuke hadn’t yet grasped the underlying meaning, partly because he knew so little of the truth, and partly because he was too naive to readily accept these ambiguous answers.
“What is the method to open the Mangekyo?” Sasuke’s eyes were full of seriousness and desire.
Rock Lee smiled bitterly inwardly. This was a puzzle that even the Uchiha clan found difficult to solve…
“The key lies in the word ‘cheat,'” Rock Lee said, deliberately sounding mysterious. “As for the specifics of how it’s done, don’t ask, and I won’t reveal them. Once revealed, this kind of thing loses its magic.”
“For now, you should focus on improving your taijutsu and ninjutsu…
“Remember, our class’s new base is the second training ground. This Thunder Blade mission has brought us great rewards. Tomorrow at noon, I will invite everyone to celebrate you becoming one of us.” There was a hint of relief in Rock Lee’s words.
“See you tomorrow then.” Sasuke nodded in agreement.
Rock Lee stepped out of the Uchiha territory and took a deep breath, secretly congratulating himself on finally having persuaded the troubled teenager. However, he also knew that the road ahead was long and that troubles were likely yet to come. Thinking of this, Rock Lee couldn’t help but frown slightly.
“Sasuke, are you really planning to join Rock Lee and the others’ team? Then I will have to stay alone in Team 7, which will be so boring.” Naruto looked a little disappointed.
“Don’t worry, didn’t Lord Jiraiya take you out for training? Just be patient and wait.” Rock Lee reminded Naruto.
“That old pervert has disappeared a long time ago. It is said that he was sent by Grandma Tsunade to carry out some secret mission. He is probably going to look for his materials again. What a shame.” Naruto complained dissatisfiedly.
Rock Lee secretly felt that Jiraiya’s image was probably unchangeable. “But today we are mainly celebrating Sasuke becoming a member of the Gai team. Come on, everyone, raise a toast!”
“That’s right, Sasuke, we will be your family from now on. If you have any difficulties, just tell me and I will do my best to help you.” Tenten said with the attitude of a big sister.
“Sasuke, after dinner, let’s have a sparring match to test your strength, and then we can work out a training plan,” Rock Lee suggested.
Sasuke’s eyes gleamed, he had been confused about how to work hard and how to use his power properly, but he was willing to accept any test and hardship in order to defeat Itachi.
“Hey, you guys are too fast. At least consider my feelings.” Naruto was still dissatisfied.
“Haha, Lord Jiraiya is one of the legendary three ninjas. We certainly hope that Sasuke can surpass you after you come back, so we have to seize the time and try to beat you up in the future.” Rock Lee said jokingly.
Chapter 35: Whirlpool Country (Old Version)
Inspired by Rock Lee, Sasuke regained his fighting spirit and felt that the gap between him and Itachi was no longer insurmountable. Hope ignited in his heart. As long as he didn’t encounter Uchiha Itachi again in the next few years and didn’t make the wrong choice because of Itachi’s provocation, Rock Lee would be able to rest assured.
“bring it on!”
Sasuke rushed towards Rock Lee, shurikens flying out like lightning. Rock Lee easily dealt with them, skillfully deflecting them all with his kunai.
Sasuke’s speed now far surpassed that of his Chunin Exam days, clearly the result of his intense training. He quickly approached Rock Lee, drew his kunai, and thrust forward.
Rock Lee calmly waved his left hand, neutralizing Sasuke’s attack. Then, “Shadow Dance Leaf” was activated. Sasuke quickly raised his leg and kicked Rock Lee in the chin. If this attack hit, the subsequent combo would be too much for the opponent to withstand.
But Rock Lee quickly stretched out his right hand, firmly grabbed Sasuke’s foot, and threw him to the side.
In the air, Sasuke quickly adjusted his posture, formed seals with his hands, and released the “Fire Style, Great Fireball Technique”. A huge fireball spewed out of his mouth and went straight towards Rock Lee.
Rock Lee admired in his heart. Facing Sasuke who had already completed the adjustments in the air, he gathered his energy in his palm. When the fireball approached, he pushed it out with force. The strong wind caused the fireball to shake violently, and finally dissipated with a loud bang.
The raging fire and iron sand palms clashed fiercely, the sound was overwhelming. Sasuke landed on the ground, completing the hand seal, and the Chidori technique, accompanied by a sharp cry, went straight for Rock Lee. Sasuke’s strength had made a qualitative leap since the Chunin Exam, and each move was smooth and natural, but Rock Lee still faced the Chidori head-on without fear.
Sasuke, a determined young man, once threw himself into Orochimaru’s service without hesitation for revenge, which shows his strong character. To make him accept other people’s opinions, he must convince them through actual combat and training.
Facing the oncoming Chidori, Rock Lee gripped it tightly with his bare hands, letting the frenzied current flow through his arms. He gritted his teeth and held Sasuke firmly in check. As he let go, Sasuke felt the huge gap between him and Rock Lee. It was clear that Rock Lee hadn’t given it his all, otherwise the battle would have ended in the first encounter.
“Your potential is far from being fully tapped,” Rock Lee encouraged. “The essence of Taijutsu lies in speed and strength. You possess lightning-attribute chakra, which you can use to stimulate cells and increase your speed. As for strength, it requires daily persistence and training to continuously grow stronger over time.”
“Although I am not proficient in ninjutsu, I have done a lot of research on Chidori. Chidori relies on lightning-attribute chakra and is formed through the dual changes of form and nature. You might as well try to make Chidori surround your body in the form of electric current. This requires extremely sophisticated chakra control skills and continuous practical exploration. We can discuss it together.” Rock Lee drew on the memories of his previous life and gave Sasuke some unique suggestions.
Sasuke nodded slightly, thinking that Xiao Li’s suggestion made sense.
“Xiao Li, is there any room for improvement in my Rasengan?” Naruto, standing aside, couldn’t contain his curiosity and asked eagerly.
“You can try to inject more chakra into the Rasengan, which can significantly enhance its destructive power.” Rock Lee shared with Naruto the principle of the Big Ball Rasengan that he knew in his previous life, although the specific details were a little vague.
“Inject more chakra? If I create a new move because of this, you have to take half of the credit.” Naruto responded excitedly.
“Sasuke, starting tomorrow, join our morning jogging training. This kind of training can not only enhance physical strength, but also improve endurance. When fighting with opponents of equal strength or superior numbers, endurance often becomes the key to determining victory or defeat.” Rock Lee suggested.
Sasuke nodded thoughtfully. These were ideas he had never considered before. Perhaps staying in Konoha was indeed a good choice, he thought to himself.
“I want to train with you too. Now I’m a free agent and I can’t let Sasuke get too far ahead.” Naruto declared firmly.
“Okay, go pick out some weight-bearing equipment for yourselves. Don’t buy anything too heavy at first, take it step by step. Ordinary weights can be found at the blacksmith. Once your physical fitness improves, you can consider custom-made ones.” Rock Lee instructed.
“I’ll go with Sasuke to choose the weights.” Naruto has always been enthusiastic about training, and immediately planned to take Sasuke along.
“You guys go ahead. We need to continue training for a while. We haven’t had a proper workout in a few days,” Rock Lee said. He had been very busy recently, first heading to Orochimaru’s base, then leading Team 7 on a mining mission, and hadn’t found time to train until now.
“Come on, Neji, it’s been a while since I last experienced your gentle fist. I kind of miss that feeling.” Rock Lee said half-jokingly.
Neji pulled the corners of his mouth slightly, revealing a bitter smile.
“Xiao Li, I’m about to start, get ready to take on the challenge.”
As soon as he finished speaking, Neji appeared in front of Rock Lee, but Rock Lee still stood there calmly with his eyes slightly closed.
“Bagua Zhang, 128 palms!” The phantom of Bagua appeared in Neji’s eyes, and his hands were as fast as lightning, hitting Rock Lee’s vital points repeatedly.
Rock Lee sensed the increase in Neji’s punching power, and it was clear that Neji’s strength had improved significantly. He knew that if he relaxed even a little, he would be surpassed by Neji.
Rock Lee gritted his teeth, enduring the extraordinary pain. He concentrated on using the power of the fourth to sixth levels of the Golden Bell Guard to repair the injuries sustained. The practice of Soft Fist was an excellent way to supplement the fourth to sixth levels of the Golden Bell Guard. By striking acupuncture points throughout the body, it indirectly strengthened the internal organs.
The three layers of the Golden Bell Cover are mainly used to strengthen the internal organs, while the practice of Soft Fist can exercise the internal organs through impact, and the two complement each other.
Tenten is already accustomed to such training scenes. She has changed from her initial worry that Neci might inflict serious damage to Rock Lee to now worrying that Neci might get injured due to overexertion.
At the same time, Naruto and Sasuke went to the blacksmith shop together, “Uncle blacksmith, we need weight-bearing equipment.” Naruto asked directly.
“Of course, you can choose for yourselves. Judging from your attire, you should be ninjas. Ever since Rock Lee started buying weights from me, more and more ninjas have followed suit. Rock Lee’s training method seems to be quite popular in Konoha Village.” The blacksmith said with a smile.
Since Rock Lee’s rise to fame, many have delved into his training path. His transparent and transparent training methods have inspired many less gifted ninjas to aspire to become as powerful as he is.
As the dawn breaks, Konoha Village wakes up with the first ray of sunshine, and the villagers begin to get busy.
Rock Lee, Tenten, Neji, Naruto and Sasuke also started their morning exercise. They did an extreme run along the border of the village, a total of 200 laps.
“Xiao Li, your team is growing bigger and bigger.” A passing villager who looked like a farmer greeted with a smile.
“That’s right, Uncle Jiumu, power and responsibility are directly proportional.” Rock Lee expressed his opinion directly.
Naruto and Sasuke rolled their eyes at the same time when they heard this.
“Xiao Li, I didn’t expect you to be so shameless. You really are a hidden talent.” Naruto teased.
“Keep your breathing even and don’t get distracted.” Rock Lee reminded Naruto with a concerned tone.
The other three could only smile bitterly.
Rock Lee, Neji and Tenten were already accustomed to this kind of high-intensity running, but Naruto and Sasuke were already short of breath and exhausted after running only 20 laps.
“You two still need to improve your endurance. Pay attention to regulating your breathing and focusing your chakra on your legs. This will both strengthen your chakra and enhance your physical fitness. Follow the rhythm of one breath for every ten steps, completing a breathing cycle within twenty steps.
From this foundation, fine-tune according to your physical condition. Remember, the human body has its limits, but breaking through them opens you to a whole new realm. To become stronger, you must constantly challenge and surpass your limits.
“Ordinary training can gradually make you stronger, but it’s too slow. You surely don’t want to wait decades to reach the level of today’s village Kage-level figures, right? Then strive to surpass your limits. Each breakthrough will make you unique,” Rock Lee encouraged them.
Naruto, with his dream of becoming Hokage, naturally did not want to waste decades of time. Rock Lee’s words gave him a surge of great power.
In order to avenge Itachi, Sasuke, driven by hatred, also insisted on continuing to challenge his limits.
The goal of one hundred laps was quickly achieved. The five ninjas were all drenched in sweat, leaving a trail of wet footprints wherever they ran. “You’ve made it to a hundred laps, which is quite impressive. Take a break. This is your first time, after all, and overdoing it isn’t good,” Rock Lee reminded everyone as they ran.
He looked back at Naruto and Sasuke, who were extremely tired and looked like they would collapse at any moment, while Neji and Tenten were also gradually slowing down.
The four people’s running turned into a slow walk, but Rock Lee was the only one who kept running.
“Ningji, does Rock Lee really run 200 laps every time?” Naruto asked breathlessly, and Sasuke looked at Neji curiously.
Sasuke felt that all his strength was exhausted and his eyelids were drooping. If he hadn’t had his companions around him, he might have fallen asleep on the ground.
Yes, Rock Lee always trains with Sensei Gai, running at least 200 laps each time, sometimes even up to 300 laps. His endurance is one of the best in Konoha Village, Neji explained.
Naruto and Sasuke were shocked after hearing this. They realized that strong endurance is also a kind of strength, and that people who can fight for a long time on the battlefield are indeed rare.
After the morning exercise, it was almost ten o’clock in the morning. Naruto received an order from Tsunade to go out on a mission with Hinata’s team.
After lunch, everyone was about to head to the second training ground to continue their training when suddenly the cry of a messenger eagle pierced the sky.
“Let’s go, we have a mission, Sasuke.” Tenten called out, and the four of them headed towards the Hokage’s office.
Sasuke was filled with anticipation for the upcoming mission. Normally, they received tedious missions, with few opportunities to confront powerful foes. He had heard of Rock Lee and his companions completing many dangerous missions, and he was eager to test his mettle against the ninja from outside the village.
“Hokage-sama, what is the mission this time?” Rock Lee asked curiously.
“This time, you are being sent to the Land of Whirlpools,” Tsunade revealed. “It is rumored that when that land fell, countless precious ninjutsu scrolls were secretly hidden, and the descendants of the people who hid the scrolls accidentally revealed this secret. The Land of Whirlpools is famous for its sealing techniques, which caused widespread fear in the ninja world. It was besieged and eventually destroyed. This news has spread everywhere, and the Land of Whirlpools will surely become a focus of competition among various forces. The five major countries and many organizations will send personnel to participate. Your mission is to gather intelligence, and if you have the opportunity, you may try to seize the Uzumaki clan’s sealing techniques. You must know that although the Uzumaki clan is scattered all over the place, their royal family, such as Mito-sama and Naruto, are all descendants of Ashura. They possess unique chakra and are valuable members of our Konoha.”
“Does that mean it’s Mito-sama’s family?” Rock Lee demanded. The only members of the Uzumaki clan he remembered from Konoha were Mito Uzumaki, who married the First Hokage, the Fourth Hokage’s wife Kushina, and Naruto. Legend has it that the Uzumaki clan inherited the bloodline of Ashura, descendant of the Six Paths Sage, and were naturally endowed with powerful chakra.
“Remember, my grandmother is of the royal bloodline of the Whirlpool Country. You have a legitimate reason to fight for the scroll, but you must not take it lightly. The ninjas from the other four countries, especially the Akatsuki organization, are not easy to deal with.” Tsunade reminded seriously.
“Understood, Hokage-sama.”
After receiving the order, the four of them quickly returned to their respective residences to organize their ninja tools and agreed to meet at the gate of Konoha Village in twenty minutes.
“The Whirlpool Country is isolated overseas and has no connection with any other country. We must rush to the port of the Fire Country and take a ship directly to the Whirlpool Country.” Rock Lee indicated the route while studying the map.
“Then why not choose to pass through the Land of Hot Springs, which can also reduce the time of sea voyage.” Tiantian asked in confusion.
“This trip to the Land of Whirlpools has attracted much attention from the ninja world. Going through the Land of Hot Water is too risky. There’s a high chance of an enemy ambush. Once we leave the Land of Fire, we’ll be on the battlefield.
We must remain vigilant at all times. The ninja world is vast and there are many unique ninjutsu that are hard to guard against. Safety is paramount in this operation,” Rock Lee emphasized.
This kind of major event where many parties in the ninja world gathered together had only happened during the Fourth Shinobi World War. However, back then they were united to face the outside world, but this time they were fighting each other independently and were not under the command of each other.
A thought flashed through Rock Lee’s mind that this action might be a conspiracy aimed at weakening the overall strength of the ninja world and deepening the conflicts between the villages.
Even the legendary Whirlpool Ninjutsu may just be a cover used by some people to confuse the public.
“Let’s go!” Although they were cautious in their hearts, they still set out on the journey with determination.
Chapter 36: Fierce Battle (Old Version)
The Fire Nation’s forests were lush and verdant. Rock Lee led the other three through the dense trees. They finally reached an open area and decided to rest for a while, just in case. As soon as Rock Lee suggested a break, Neji stared ahead with a sharp, vigilant gaze.
“The situation has changed. It seems we have unexpected guests.” Neji said in a heavy tone.
Rock Lee looked in the direction of the sound and saw the four Sound Ninjas, with Kimimaro standing in their midst. It looked as if Kimimaro had been cornered and would have to fight tooth and nail.
“Hand over Uchiha Sasuke. He is the vessel designated by Lord Orochimaru.” Kimimaro’s voice was emotionless. “You must be Rock Lee. Lord Orochimaru is very concerned about you and is looking forward to your fall.”
Rock Lee was well aware of Kimimaro’s bone manipulation abilities, but he showed no fear. “It seems Orochimaru is still asleep. He sent a bunch of small fry like you to take Sasuke away? What a joke!”
Before he could finish his words, Rock Lee had already launched his first attack, shooting towards Kimimaro like an arrow. His iron sand palm was incredibly sharp, and the sound of it breaking through the air was clearly audible, demonstrating his formidable strength as a master of physical techniques.
Kimimaro reacted quickly, dodging Rock Lee’s fatal blow with a flick of his body. However, Rock Lee was relentless, attacking continuously at such a speed that it was hard to keep up and the wind was howling.
Kimimaro deftly dodged Xiao Li’s continuous attacks, leaped away in one step, and increased the distance between them. A hint of approval flashed in his eyes: “I admit, I underestimated you before. I feel extremely honored to have this final battle with you.”
His face remained sternly calm, unwavering in the face of approaching death; this was a man who cared nothing for life or death.
He calmly drew the sharp bone knife from his arm and charged towards Rock Lee without hesitation.
“Ningji, beware of the sneak attacks from the Sound Four.” Rock Lee did not forget to remind his teammates during the battle.
Their main target this time is Sasuke, and they are secondary. It seems that the two previous raids on Orochimaru’s laboratory have made Orochimaru furious.
Kimimaro attacked Rock Lee quickly under the name of “Tsubaki Dance”. The bone knife left a series of afterimages in the air. His speed was as fast as Rock Lee’s, which was amazing. Even though he was in poor physical condition, Kimimaro still maintained an amazing speed.
Rock Lee dodged nimbly, keeping an eye on the movements of the Sound Four, who were charging towards Neji and the others. He quickly clasped his hands together, deftly trapping the flying bone knife in his palms, and swung out with his left leg like a whip.
Despite the fierce wind, Kimimaro remained unmoved, his hair only swaying slightly in the strong wind. He even grew sharp bone spurs on his shoulders to face Rock Lee’s kick.
Rock Lee retreated decisively, stomping his foot hard on the ground, his figure quickly disappearing into the thick smoke of the explosion. He took the opportunity to approach Neji and the others, saying quickly, “We must take one down first. Four against five is not going to work for us.” Seeing the three nod in agreement, he added, “Target Jirobo. He’s slow, and aside from his earth escape technique, he doesn’t pose much of a threat.”
Without hesitation, Rock Lee opened the sixth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu. His form shifted like a phantom, and in an instant, he was before Jirobo. His iron sand palm, swirling with flames, struck Jirobo fiercely. Just then, Kimimaro launched a surprise attack, but Rock Lee ignored him, unleashing his full might on Jirobo. Jirobo’s defenses withered beneath the force, his bones shattered, blood gushing from his mouth. Instantly incapacitated, he collapsed to the ground, motionless.
“Swish!” Kimimaro’s bone knife suddenly stabbed towards Rock Lee’s body, but due to years of hard training, the bone knife was clamped by his strong muscles and could not move.
Rock Lee’s eyes were as sharp as torches, locking onto Kimimaro in front of him. He then swiftly unleashed the “Peacock-Attack” fist technique, and the shadow of his fist was like thunder, instantly smashing towards Kimimaro.
The fist blew violently, sparks flying in the air, and all of them poured down on Kimimaro. Kimimaro’s ribs quickly stretched out, weaving into a defensive network, but it was still no match for the fierce bombardment of the “Towards the Peacock” fist technique. He was knocked back, spitting blood, his face pale.
At the same time, Neji, Tenten, and Sasuke also rushed towards Kidomaru, Tayuya, and Sochin respectively. Neji went straight for Kidomaru, Sasuke rushed towards Tayuya, and Tenten charged towards Sochin.
Seeing Neji’s aggressive approach, Kidomaru chewed something and with a “puff” sound, a ball of white material shot out of his mouth, quickly spreading out and turning into a giant web, covering Neji’s head. His special physique allowed him to spit out a sticky web like a spider, with extremely strong viscosity.
Neji calmly gathered his chakra in his palm and unleashed a soft fist, effortlessly splitting the web in two. Kidomaru, startled, continued to spit out webs like a cannon, attempting to trap Neji.
Neji swung his soft fist, effortlessly severing the interwoven webs. Chakra surged from his back, quickly condensing into four wings. With a gentle flap, he appeared before Kidomaru like a gust of wind. A fist brimming with chakra struck Kidomaru’s weak spot. Though Kidomaru shielded his chest with six arms, Neji’s force still sent him flying.
On another battlefield, Rock Lee fearlessly charged at Kimimaro. His body was enshrouded in the Earth Seal, and sharp spikes rapidly sprouted from his arms. Using the power of the Sixth Gate of the Eight Gates, Rock Lee instantly vanished and reappeared behind Kimimaro, striking him fiercely in the back with a fierce Iron Sand Palm. However, a bone spur suddenly sprouted from Kimimaro’s back, easily deflecting Rock Lee’s fatal blow. Facing the resilient bone spur, Rock Lee realized that ordinary means were ineffective, so he resolutely drew his nunchaku and prepared to continue the fierce battle.
Rock Lee’s figure flashed, and in an instant he was in front of Kimimaro. With a shocking momentum, he smashed the nunchaku in his hand into his opponent’s head. The nunchaku made a sound of breaking wind in the air, and the force was astonishing.
Kimimaro quickly raised his arms, his bones hard enough to face the fierce blows from the nunchaku. After a loud bang, he couldn’t help but kneel on one knee, and the ground shattered under his feet.
Then, Rock Lee swung the nunchaku with his other hand, making a terrifying sound. The high-speed movement of the nunchaku produced sparks in the air.
Facing the onslaught, Kimimaro quickly crossed his arms, his bones rapidly growing, instantly forming an indestructible bone shield. However, even so, when the nunchaku hit the bone shield, he still spat out a mouthful of blood and his body teetered.
Obviously, Kimimaro, whose physical condition was already poor, had reached a critical point and the injury could have fatal consequences.
“For Lord Orochimaru, I must not fall down like this!” Kimimaro roared, and curse seals spread all over his body. In an instant, he turned into a terrifying monster with a huge tail swinging behind him and his skin turned gray.
This is the second cursed state, in which his speed and strength have achieved a qualitative leap.
In the tense confrontation, Rock Lee’s eyes were cold as he quickly shortened the distance between him and Kimimaro. The nunchaku in his hand suddenly smashed into the opponent’s forehead with a sound of breaking through the air. The speed was so fast that it was astonishing.
Kimimaro nimbly dodged by turning his head, and his long tail whipped towards Rock Lee fiercely. Although he took the blow on his shoulder, he did not retreat.
Enduring the severe pain, Kimimaro swung his tail to attack again, but Rock Lee changed his palm into a claw and grabbed the thick tail fiercely, and blood spurted out.
Holding the tail tightly, Rock Lee swung it up and then slammed it to the ground with a series of crashing sounds.
At this moment, Jirobo, who transformed into the second state, suddenly attacked, but Rock Lee did not hesitate to use Kimimaro as a weapon and smashed him into Jirobo, causing both of them to fly out of sight, and Kimimaro’s tail was torn apart under Rock Lee’s palm.
On another battlefield, Sasuke launched a fierce attack on Tayuya. After a leap in strength, Sasuke is no longer the same Sasuke he was during the Chunin Exams. The awakening of the three magatama has made him extremely powerful.
The shurikens he shot flew around Tayuya, seemingly surrounded by danger, but Sasuke skillfully used the shuriken manipulation technique, controlling the trajectory of the shuriken with invisible silk threads, making it difficult for Tayuya to cope.
Tayuya brandished two kunai, easily knocking away the incoming shurikens.
“Sasuke, we are sent by Lord Orochimaru. He hopes that you can join him. Haven’t you always longed for revenge against Itachi? If you join Lord Orochimaru, you will quickly gain powerful strength, and the day of revenge is not far away.” Tayuya said in an alluring tone.
Sasuke snorted coldly, “This kind of clumsy lie can only deceive ignorant children. Orochimaru suffered severe damage at the hands of Itachi, and he couldn’t even win, so how can he help me? Unless he defeats Itachi first, don’t even think about making me believe it.”
“Sasuke, you have no future in Konoha. Lord Orochimaru possesses many unfathomable secret techniques. The reason he was defeated is simply because he lacked the Sharingan. With your Sharingan and Orochimaru’s secret techniques, revenge is just around the corner.” Tayuya persuaded relentlessly.
At this critical moment, Rock Lee must not let Tayuya’s words shake Sasuke’s heart.
“Don’t be fooled by her words. Orochimaru is just looking for a suitable container for reincarnation. His promise to Sasuke is nothing but empty words. Once you go to find Orochimaru, only death awaits you.” Rock Lee mercilessly exposed Orochimaru’s sinister intentions.
“Don’t be fooled by that liar. The forbidden technique ‘Reincarnation’ studied by Orochimaru allows him to change his body at will and prolong his life. Sasuke, he wants your Sharingan, so how could he really teach you the secret technique?” Rock Lee warned Sasuke seriously.
Sasuke believed Lee’s words without a doubt. He thought that Orochimaru did have some plans for the Sharingan, which was almost certain. As for Orochimaru’s secret technique, Sasuke felt that even if he learned it, he might not be able to defeat Itachi.
Rock Lee’s figure flashed like lightning, appearing in front of Tayuya in an instant, and his iron sand palm blasted out with the force of thunder. For a ninja like this who relies mainly on verbal attacks, the safest approach is to defeat them directly; otherwise, Rock Lee would not be able to rest easy.
At this time, Jirobo used “Earth Escape: Earth Road Return” to erect a towering earth wall in front of Tayuya, trying to block Rock Lee’s attack.
But Rock Lee continued to move forward, striking the earthen wall with his palm, sending rocks and dirt flying and piercing the wall. Immediately afterwards, he continued to attack Jirobo’s chest with his Iron Sand Palm.
Jirobo hurriedly crossed his arms to block, but was still knocked away by Rock Lee’s palm. With a “bang”, Jirobo’s body flew backwards.
These ninjas had interfered many times at critical moments. This time, Rock Lee flashed in an instant, parallel to Jirobo’s body, and then kicked his feet hard, kicking Jirobo into the sky, demonstrating his strong fighting ability and decisive style.
Chapter 37 Night Talk (Old Version)
Tenten expertly manipulated her chakra, directing dozens of hidden weapons in a relentless barrage against Sakon, who wielded two kunai, nimbly parrying these flying weapons of death. Though Sakon excelled in close combat, Tenten’s kite-following tactics limited his ability. She cleverly used chakra threads to maintain distance, leaving him helpless.
Witnessing Jirobo’s fall, Sakon resolved to destroy Tenten first before collaborating with his companions to complete their mission. During the fierce battle, Sakon activated the Second Cursed Seal, merging with Ukon into a terrifying, two-headed, four-armed monster, determined to defeat them with all their might. Facing this incredible foe, Tenten marveled at the wonders of the world. Sakon and Ukon eventually split into two half-human, half-beast forms, preparing for a final assault on Tenten.
Tenten precisely manipulated countless hidden weapons, raining them down on Sakon like a torrential rain. Sakon, twin kunai in hand, struggled to block them, but Tenten’s ranged tactics kept him at bay. Like flying a kite, she deftly distanced herself from Sakon as he approached, her chakra threads under her control allowing the hidden weapons to follow him like a shadow.
Sakon, having witnessed Jirobo’s death, is determined not to repeat his mistakes. He knows he must first eliminate Tenten before considering teaming up with Kimimaro to defeat Rock Lee or assisting Tayuya in capturing Uchiha Sasuke to meet Orochimaru.
Sakon activated the second cursed seal, and Ukon’s head emerged from his body, surprised by the change. “What happened? Why did it transform like this?” Ukon asked in confusion. “We must quickly end this enemy. Jirobo is dead, we must go all out,” Sakon said firmly.
Tenten watched the twin-headed Otoninus, marveling at the myriad wonders of the world. She had never imagined Orochimaru could have such a unique ninja under his command. Sakon and Ukon roared in unison, their bodies splitting in two, each sprouting a half-human, half-beast form, ready to launch their deadly assault on Tenten.
Two strange forces surrounded them separately. Tenten retreated while throwing out kunai with detonating talismans attached. The explosions sounded one after another, successfully blocking the fierce attacks of Zuo Jin and U Jin.
Tiantian nervously threw kunai, wondering what terrifying moves these monsters would use when they approached.
After defeating Jirobo, Rock Lee rushed to the severely injured Kimimaro, and Tayuya wanted to abduct Sasuke, but was restrained by Sasuke and remained unmoved.
Although Kimimaro was seriously injured and vomiting blood, Rock Lee did not show any mercy and swung his nunchaku at the opponent without mercy.
Kimimaro, who was determined to die, would rather die to show his loyalty to Orochimaru than end his life on his sickbed.
His eyes were calm as he reached out and pulled out his spiked spine. The spine covered with thorns swung towards Rock Lee like a whip.
This sharp whip can easily tear the flesh, causing pain that ordinary people cannot bear.
However, facing the oncoming whip, Rock Lee showed no fear, his nunchakus undiminished in speed as he met the attack head-on. With a snap, the spiked spines lashed Rock Lee, leaving a bloody mark and tearing his skin, but Rock Lee seemed unfazed and resolutely continued to fight.
In the tense and exciting battle, Rock Lee’s chain nunchaku suddenly hit Kimimaro’s forehead, causing only superficial damage. However, the five-layer golden bell cover was very strong and would not be fatal easily.
With a loud bang, Kimimaro’s vision went dark and the world spun. Rock Lee seized the opportunity and struck Kimimaro’s head again with the nunchaku in his other hand, making a sharp sound as it broke through the wind.
Kimimaro fell to the ground with a thud, his body sinking deep into the mud. Blood gushed out like a fountain, staining the surrounding soil red.
Rock Lee was about to turn around to deal with the other Otonin when he heard Kimimaro’s dying breath, “Morning Warabi Dance.” He instantly realized the danger and shouted, “Everyone, get up the trees! The higher the better! Get off the ground!”
Upon hearing the command, Neji, Sasuke, and Tenten immediately abandoned their opponents and flew towards the treetops.
The remaining Sound Ninjas saw countless sharp bone spikes piercing the ground and fled towards the treetops in panic.
Bone spurs emerged at an alarming speed, and in a flash, the entire forest was transformed into a forest of sharp death.
When Ningci and the others saw this scene, they broke out in cold sweat and were shocked: this kind of decisive move was simply to destroy the enemy together with him!
In the context of the original novel, the following are rewritten novel sentences:
The remaining Otonin trio gathered together, faces filled with worry. Kimimaro and Jirobo were both dead. Could we complete this mission? If we stay, we’ll probably die. Kidomaru’s voice was filled with unmistakable panic. His moves seemed powerless against Neji’s gentle fist, and his fear of death grew stronger.
Tayuya sternly warned him, “Kidomaru, you are well aware of Lord Orochimaru’s punishment. We are returning in defeat. Aren’t you afraid of the most severe punishment? You vowed to bring back Rock Lee’s head, but if you return like this, your life might be in jeopardy.”
Kidomaru’s expression grew increasingly gloomy. “Then what should we do? Staying here means death, and going back also means death. There are still three of us left, and they still have four. If we continue fighting, we have no chance of winning.”
Sakon’s eyes flickered as he made a bold suggestion: “The ninja world is vast and boundless. Although Orochimaru is powerful, there are still those he dare not provoke. Why don’t we switch to the Akatsuki organization? I heard that they are recruiting talents, and Uchiha Itachi is among them.”
A hint of determination flashed in Kidomaru’s eyes: “I have participated in Orochimaru’s investigation of the Akatsuki organization and know the location of a stronghold. We will switch to the Akatsuki organization and leave now.”
When Rock Lee and the others’ attention was attracted by the bone spurs on the ground, the three of them used the escape skills they learned when following Orochimaru and quietly left the battlefield.
Orochimaru was waiting for his new body in the secret base, but it was just his wishful thinking.
Faced with the horrifying bone spurs all over the ground, Rock Lee decided to return to Konoha Village and inform the Hokage of this information.
“Ningji, you guys go to the open space in front and rest first. I have to rush back to the village to report to the Hokage and ask him to send someone to deal with these things.” Rock Lee ordered Neji.
“Where are those Sound Ninja?” Tenten asked curiously.
“They ran away as soon as they saw the situation was not going well,” Sasuke replied.
“Don’t worry, Orochimaru won’t let them go easily. The mission failed, and only three of the five people came back. Given Orochimaru’s personality, they are likely to become subjects of experiments.” Rock Lee analyzed. What was beyond his expectation was that the three people dared to betray Orochimaru and defected to the Akatsuki organization. This made people sigh at the unpredictable human heart.
After saying goodbye to Neji and others, Rock Lee hurried towards Konoha.
“Xiao Li, why did you come back so soon? Have you completed your mission in the Whirlpool Country?” Jingyin asked curiously when she saw him.
“Hokage-sama, are you free? I have urgent matters to report.” Rock Lee said to Shizune.
“Wait a moment, I’ll go call her.”
“Xiao Li, why did you come back early?” Tsunade asked with a puzzled look on her face when she saw him.
“We were attacked by Oto-nin while on our mission. Orochimaru intended to capture Sasuke as his reincarnation target, but fortunately two Oto-nin escaped.” Rock Lee reported urgently, “Requesting Hokage-sama to dispatch earth-style ninjas as soon as possible to restore the damaged terrain.”
Tsunade frowned and asked with concern: “Are all our people safe?”
“Thanks to our timely avoidance, even though the opponent used the deadly Corpse Vein skill, none of our members were injured.” Rock Lee replied.
Tsunade pondered for a moment and then ordered, “You continue with your mission. I will arrange for reinforcements as soon as possible. Orochimaru’s ambition is obvious. We must prevent Sasuke from betraying us due to Itachi’s influence. In order to resist Orochimaru’s temptation, we must help Sasuke master new and powerful ninjutsu.”
“We were ambushed by Sound Ninja on the way. Orochimaru’s target was Sasuke, intending to use him as a support for his reincarnation, but two Sound Ninja escaped.” Rock Lee urgently reported to Tsunade and requested, “Hokage, please assign earth-style ninja to repair the damaged area.”
“The terrain has been repaired, which means the enemy’s strength cannot be underestimated.” Tsunade’s tone revealed worry, “Are all our personnel safe?”
“The other party used the Corpse Vein’s special technique, and everyone survived, dodging the fatal blow in time.” Rock Lee replied.
Tsunade said with a firm look in her eyes, “Orochimaru will not give up. You continue with the mission, and I will provide support later. We must be vigilant against Sasuke’s betrayal due to Itachi’s influence. We must work hard to help him master new ninjutsu and enhance his ability to resist Orochimaru’s temptations.”
Under cover of night, Rock Lee led his companions to a resting spot in the wilderness. Tenten and Neji had successfully hunted, providing game for the impromptu barbecue. Beside the fire, Rock Lee and Sasuke busily flipped golden, fragrant roasted beef shanks and whole rabbits. The four of them skillfully carved the delicacies with kunai, savoring the aroma of the fat.
In this peaceful forest, immersed in the romantic atmosphere every day, she said with emotion: “This kind of outdoor barbecue is so rare. It’s so quiet all around, with only our campfire dancing. We can talk about our dreams or our inner thoughts. It’s really a special kind of fun.”
Rock Lee listened to Tiantian’s words. Although he had something else on his mind, he didn’t want to disturb her interest. He wanted to analyze the upcoming powerful enemy, but seeing that Tiantian had no interest, he swallowed his words.
However, Neji asked directly: “Rock Lee, what do you think of this mission? Which ninjas might the five major countries send to the Land of Whirlpools?” Sasuke and Tenten also looked at Rock Lee curiously.
Rock Lee paused for a moment before replying, “The current information isn’t conclusive enough. The five great powers won’t send a large force based on this little uncertainty. They’ll likely proceed with caution.”
Rock Lee conducted a thorough analysis, assuming a force could provide numerous sealing scrolls, it would likely lead to conflict among the five great nations in the Whirlpool region. Historically, Whirlpool had been besieged and destroyed due to its possession of numerous ninjutsu scrolls. Regardless of the authenticity of the information, the person behind it would benefit: if it were false, they could test the strength of the five great nations; if true, they could ignite a chaotic conflict within the ninja world, weakening each nation.
At this moment, Tenten gently reminded Rock Lee to continue his analysis. Rock Lee immediately came to his senses and said he would continue his argument.
“It’s estimated that each country will act similarly to Konoha, sending only one or two elite teams,” he continued. “This arrangement will not only help us understand the current situation of each country’s ninja, but also verify the authenticity of the intelligence. If a large number of Sealing Scrolls do exist, each country will undoubtedly send more troops to fight for these treasures.”
Rock Lee paused, thinking about what might happen if there really was an organization that could produce so much information on sealing techniques.
“The tragedy of Whirlpool Country is that it was besieged precisely because it possessed something coveted by others,” he continued. “If Whirlpool Country truly possesses a large number of ninjutsu scrolls, the consequences would be disastrous. Regardless of the truth of the intelligence, the conspirators stand to gain from it—either by testing the strength of the five great nations by eliminating the enemy’s elite, or by sparking a chaotic conflict that weakens the entire ninja world.”
Rock Lee shook his head slightly, trying to shake off these heavy thoughts.
“Why did you stop suddenly, Xiao Li?” Tiantian’s voice broke the silence.
“Oh, it’s okay.” Rock Lee recovered. “Let’s continue. As for the Land of Water, the long-term blood mist policy has led to the near extinction of the Kirigakure’s bloodline families, and many powerful ninjas have defected. Even if the Fifth Mizukage works hard to revitalize it, it will be difficult to restore its strength in the short term. Therefore, this time the Kirigakure can only send one squad at most, and may not even participate at all.”
While considering the relative power of the five great nations, Rock Lee detailed the current state of the Sand Village. Following the recent attack on Konoha and the assassination attempt on the Fourth Kazekage by Orochimaru, the village’s strength had been greatly reduced. This time, Gaara’s team was highly likely to be deployed for the mission. As for the Land of Earth, Ōnoki’s ambitions suggested he would deploy elite ninjas to demonstrate his strength. As for the Land of Lightning, the Eight-Tails Jinchūriki’s control was awe-inspiring. Ten was amazed by Rock Lee’s extensive knowledge. Rock Lee warned everyone to be wary of the Akatsuki, whose members were all S-rank fugitive ninja. Neji, determined to avenge his father, harbored a deep hatred for Kumogakure. Sasuke remained silent, but Rock Lee saw through Neji’s inner anger and deep hostility toward Kumogakure.
As for the Sand Village, since the Fourth Kazekage’s tragic death at the hands of Orochimaru and the heavy losses suffered in the previous attack on Konoha, its power is no longer what it once was. This time, we may face a challenge from Gaara’s team.
As for the Land of Earth and the Land of Lightning, my knowledge of them is limited, but Ohnoki’s ambition must have driven him to send out elite ninjas in an attempt to intimidate other countries.
Information about the Land of Lightning was scarce, but it was known that the Eight-Tails Jinchuriki of Kumogakure possessed exceptional control over the tailed beasts. Rock Lee’s analysis of the strength of the five great nations gave Neji and the others a clear understanding.
“Locke Lee, I didn’t expect you to have so much information.” Tiantian said with an approving look.
“These are just basic common sense. What we need to pay attention to is the Akatsuki organization, whose members are all S-rank rebel ninjas, such as Uchiha Itachi and Hoshigaki Kisame, who are all top-notch enemies.” Rock Lee reminded.
Sasuke remained silent.
Neji made up his mind, hoping to recover some old debts from the Hidden Cloud Village in this battle to comfort his father’s spirit in heaven.
Neji’s hatred for Kumogakure is as deep as the ocean, and Rock Lee knows this very well. He understands that although Neji has let go of his hatred for the main family, his hatred for Kumogakure remains the same.
Stone Tablet No. 38 (Old Version)
In the morning, the group cautiously headed towards the port of the Land of Fire. After the previous Oto-nin raid, they were all on high alert, and Neji kept scanning the surroundings with his Byakugan to prevent any possible ambush.
They arrived at the busy port near the Land of Hot Springs. The place was bustling with people, boats were coming and going, and fishermen and boatmen were coming and going. Rock Lee rented a small boat and prepared to sail to the Land of Whirlpools.
“Young man, what are you doing going to the Whirlpool Country? Recently, ninjas have frequently appeared on the island. That country has been abandoned for many years.” The old man rowing the boat asked curiously.
“Haha, legend has it that there is a treasure hidden in the Whirlpool Country that can make people rich instantly. That’s why we came here.” Rock Lee made up a story.
The old man nodded thoughtfully. “Look at the weather, it’s perfect for a sea voyage. Are you guys treasure hunting too?” he reassured.
“Yes, let’s try our luck.” Rock Lee replied with a smile.
“You in Konoha Village must have received some secret information, right? I heard that Lady Tsunade is a descendant of the royal family of the Whirlpool Country.” The old man whispered.
Rock Lee slowly stood up and walked towards the old man. “Who can be so sure about such things?” He said calmly, then suddenly attacked, kicking the old man in the stomach with all his might. The old man was caught off guard and was thrown into the river by the powerful kick.
“Xiao Li, why did you suddenly become violent towards that old man? He looks like an ordinary old man.” Tiantian asked in confusion.
“An ordinary old man? You are too naive. Show yourself, that blow is not fatal enough.” Rock Lee ordered coldly at the place where the old man disappeared from the sea.
“You are worthy of being the elite of Konoha. I thought my disguise was perfect, but you saw through it at a glance.” A young ninja rose from the water and said to Rock Lee helplessly.
“You talk too much. Haven’t you heard of the power of the Byakugan? From the moment you appeared, you have been seen through.” Rock Lee pointed at Neji and said sarcastically.
“Judging from your attire, you are wandering ninjas. You’d better not take risks in a dangerous place like Whirlpool Country. Under the watchful eyes of the five major nations, you will only serve as cannon fodder.” Rock Lee looked around and advised calmly.
The sea surface returned to calm, and then four young ninjas emerged from the water, all wearing the costumes of wandering ninjas.
“Without trying, how can you understand the bitterness of us wandering ninjas? Practicing ninjutsu is a luxury for us. We can be happy for several days if we get a D-level ninjutsu; if it is a C-level ninjutsu, we will do anything for it. You people from the big ninja villages will never understand this kind of experience.” The leading young ninja argued excitedly.
“It seems that you want to find out the whereabouts of the Whirlpool Country Ninjutsu Scroll from me, and now you plan to use force to force a confession?” Rock Lee sneered contemptuously.
“Attack, let these youngsters understand that even among wandering ninjas there are indomitable strong ones.” The leading young man rushed towards Rock Lee on the boat without hesitation.
The five young men simultaneously drew their shurikens and threw them at Rock Lee and the others. Rock Lee calmly swung his kunai and blocked the attack nonchalantly. Then he appeared on the sea like a phantom and went straight to the leader.
The young man drew out a sharp sword and slashed at Rock Lee swiftly. The speed surprised Rock Lee a little. The kunai in his hand accurately blocked the sword, followed by a whip kick.
The young man jumped back, avoiding Rock Lee’s attack, and swung his sword again.
“Your swordsmanship is pretty good, no wonder you dare to challenge the ninjas of Konoha.” Rock Lee doubled his speed, stretched out one hand to grab the sword blade, and with the other hand, he struck the young man’s chest with the force of an iron sand palm.
With a “bang”, Rock Lee’s iron sand palm hit the young man’s chest solidly, and the stabbing long sword instantly broke into two pieces in Rock Lee’s hand.
The young man spat out blood and flew backwards. “I… won’t… accept…” He only left these four words before he died.
The remaining four were completely defeated and were quickly subdued with the help of Neji and his companions.
Wandering ninjas in this ninja world are both sympathetic and infuriating. They have no inherited ninjutsu and can only plunder others. Sometimes, they have to fight for their lives just for insignificant ninjutsu.
Some, driven by greed, are even willing to sacrifice innocent civilians, wreaking havoc on the weak. Meanwhile, Rock Lee unexpectedly encountered Gaara and his crew from the Sand Village, sailing towards the Land of Whirlpools. Rock Lee, Neji, and the other three decided to join them on this journey. Gaara expressed concern at the disturbing sight of corpses floating on the sea, but Rock Lee explained that they were the work of wandering ninjas intent on uncovering Konoha’s secrets. The purpose of this operation was to verify the authenticity of the intelligence and wait for the optimal moment to act. When Kankuro inquired about their next plan, Rock Lee frankly revealed their intentions. During this moment, Rock Lee reconsidered the changed Gaara and recalled the moment when he had been persuaded by Naruto. The Sand Village ships were fast and stable, providing excellent conditions for their mission.
Those people are often cruel and ruthless for petty gains, slaughtering countless civilians and running rampant among the general public.
“Rock Lee, I didn’t expect to meet you here.” Kankuro’s voice came from a distance.
Rock Lee looked up and, as expected, Gaara’s team from Sunagakure was sailing towards the Land of Whirlpools.
“The people in the Sand Village have also received the news and are planning to go to the Whirlpool Country to find out what’s going on.” Rock Lee jumped onto Gaara and the others’ ship without any hesitation.
“Ningji, you three come on up too. Since we’re going the same way, I was worried that there wouldn’t be anyone to help row the boat.” Rock Lee called out.
Neji and the other two did not refuse and jumped onto the boat.
Gaara looked at the bodies drifting on the sea, “It seems your journey was quite difficult as well.”
“They are just wandering ninjas trying to learn Konoha’s secrets,” Rock Lee replied.
“Then let’s set off and head straight for the Land of Whirlpools. I’m afraid this operation will not be smooth sailing.” Gaara said in a deep tone.
Rock Lee looked at Gaara again, his changes were indeed astonishing, remembering the time when he was cleverly persuaded by Naruto during the Chunin Exams.
The speed of Sunagakure’s ship was much faster than their boat, and it was also more stable. “What are your plans for this operation?” Kankuro asked.
“We don’t have any special plans. The main thing is to confirm the authenticity of the intelligence. If the intelligence is reliable, we will take action when the time is right.” Rock Lee said bluntly.
“Just like our mission this time, we must first verify the accuracy of the intelligence from the five major countries.” Gaara said while thinking.
“This information is often confusing. The reason why each country sends out this kind of information is probably to let their ninjas compete with each other.” Rock Lee analyzed.
Soon, the outline of the Whirlpool Country appeared before his eyes. Although the country had been destroyed, there were still people living on the island, some of them were fleeing the war, while others were the survivors who continued their lives here.
Rock Lee unfolded an old map that Tsunade had given him before leaving. It clearly marked the location of the Whirlpool Ninja Village, Uzushio Village. This map had a long history, perhaps dating back to the time of the First Hokage.
After landing on the island, Rock Lee and his three companions acted separately from Gaara and others. In order to avoid being too conspicuous, they took off their forehead protectors and disguised themselves as civilians, which made it easier to gather information.
If they didn’t possess special abilities like the Byakugan, it would be hard to tell they were actually ninjas. Their civilian identities made it easier to gather intelligence.
The ruins of Uzushio Village attracted many ninjas, who were searching the area.
Rock Lee and his team did not rush to Whirlpool Village, but first went to the ancestral hall outside the village, which was where the residents of Whirlpool Village worshipped their ancestors.
The ancestral hall had obviously been abandoned for many years and looked dilapidated. The beams of the main hall for sacrifices had collapsed. From the outside, it seemed to be just a worthless ruin.
If it weren’t for the map given by Tsunade, Rock Lee would probably never be able to recognize the true identity of this ancient building – the ancestral hall of the ancestors of Uzushio Village, which silently guards the spirit tablets of the villagers’ ancestors.
“Ningji, use your Byakugan to check for anyone hiding around,” Rock Lee commanded cautiously. His biggest worry was that their whereabouts had been revealed, or that someone had been lying in wait, waiting for the right moment to strike.
“Byakugan, activate!” Neji followed the instructions. His Byakugan pierced through the shadows, carefully scanning every inch of space. After a moment, he shook his head slightly: “No one is around.”
“Then let’s go in and investigate.” Rock Lee led the group quickly into the shrine. A large, tattered screen greeted them. On it, a painting depicted a behemoth from antiquity, a beast that once wreaked havoc on the human world before being subdued and sealed away by a hero using the Wood Release technique. Rock Lee speculated that this hero was Ashura, son of the legendary Six Paths Sage. He possessed not only the body of a sage but also the founder of the Senju Clan. Both Uzushio Village and the Senju Clan were descended from this legendary figure.
Walking around the screen, they entered the ancestral hall, only to be met with an even more devastating scene. The tablets of the ancestors of Wochao Village, once solemnly enshrined beneath the altar, were now scattered and scattered. It was obvious that the rats had treated this place as their territory and had inadvertently caused damage.
It seems the bloodline of the Whirlpool Nation has been scattered across the land, with no one returning home for a long time. As time passes, the former tribesmen gradually pass away, and their descendants naturally have no desire to return home.
“We have to put all these tablets away. After all, Lord Hokage has the blood of the Whirlpool Country flowing in his veins. We can’t let them rot here,” Rock Lee suggested.
The other three nodded, carefully gathered up the tablets scattered around and on the altar, dusted them off, and prepared to take them away.
When Tiantian was handling the top-level tablet, he found it to be unusually solid.
“Xiao Li, there’s something wrong with this tablet. It didn’t move when I tried to pick it up,” Tiantian pointed out.
Rock Lee, Neji, and Sasuke gathered around. Rock Lee tried various methods, but the tablet seemed to grow with the altar. He then checked the name on the tablet, but the handwriting had become blurred due to age.
“The secret may be hidden here, Neji, what have you found?” Rock Lee asked.
Ningji activated his Byakugan, observed carefully and said, “There’s nothing underneath this tablet. It should be pressed down. Xiao Li, try it.”
“You guys move away a little. I’m worried there might be some trap. That would be terrible.” Rock Lee warned.
After the other three retreated to a safe distance, Rock Lee walked to the tablet, took a deep breath, and slowly pressed the tablet.
With a slight “creak” sound of a mechanism, Rock Lee nimbly jumped out of the ancestral hall and found himself outside.
After waiting for a while and confirming that there was nothing unusual, the four of them walked deeper into the ancestral hall.
The altar dedicated to the ancestors has been cracked in the middle, revealing a hole leading to a secret place. It is easy to tell whether there is a scroll hidden there.
Rock Lee took the lead and stepped down. His muscles and bones were strong, so he could survive even in danger.
They walked along the passage, lit oil lamps, and went deeper step by step. The lights illuminated the way forward.
At the end of the passage, there is an isolated stone tablet with thick dust on it, obviously no one has wiped it for a long time.
The stone tablet records the heroic deeds of the Six Paths Sage and his brother in sealing Kaguya Ōtsutsuki, as well as the legend of Ashura and Indra.
“Sasuke, you may be the descendant of the Six Paths Sage, and Neji, you may be the descendant of Otsutsuki Hamura. Why don’t we go to the moon to explore, maybe we can meet your people.” Rock Lee suggested.
Sasuke and Neji remained silent. The inscription had a profound impact on them.
During their exploration, Rock Lee and his companions unexpectedly uncovered the secrets of the Whirlpool Country’s hidden treasures. Within the secret chambers, treasures abound, valuable materials, and scrolls of secret sealing techniques. Most of these scrolls contain techniques already mastered by Konoha Village, but many are also unheard of.
“If Uchiha Madara or Obito knew all this, they would surely realize that their entire lives were nothing but an elaborate hoax.” Rock Lee said with a hint of joking in his tone, “Tenten, seal these stone tablets and take them back with us. Perhaps they will come in handy in the future.”
He couldn’t help but think of Obito’s stunned expression when he faced these stone tablets during the upcoming Fourth Shinobi World War. That would be a satire of his shattered dreams.
They walked through the corridor and turned to the secret room on the left, which was filled with rich treasures and knowledge. Rock Lee picked up a scroll and studied it, which detailed the origins and development of the sealing technique.
As the four of them were reading, they discovered that more than half of the secret techniques hidden in the Land of Whirlpools were familiar to Konoha, while the rest were little known.
“Perhaps even the survivors of the Whirlpool Country didn’t know about this secret room. After all, who would have thought that such a secret would be hidden under the ancestral tablet?” Rock Lee pondered.
For safety reasons, they decided to seal everything to prevent potential visitors from discovering this hidden treasure. “Seal everything and leave quickly,” Rock Lee ordered.
Tiantian acted quickly, sealing the scrolls and treasures one by one. Then, the group evacuated the secret room that contained a shocking secret without stopping.
Chapter 39 Uchiha Itachi (Old Version)
The central area of ​​Whirlpool Village suddenly fell into chaos. A mysterious huge secret room appeared there, and the terrifying sound of fighting continued to come out from the secret room.
The ninjas from the four major countries did not rush into the secret room to fight for the scroll, but remained cautious and waited and saw what was happening.
A wandering ninja excitedly escaped from the secret room with the scroll, but his joy was short-lived as he was immediately attacked fatally by the outer ninjas.
Just as the other wandering ninjas were trying to grab the scroll, a lightning-fast figure appeared next to the scroll, stopping them instantly.
“This scroll belongs to our Hidden Cloud Village. Does anyone have any objection?” Darui, the elite ninja of Hidden Cloud Village, appeared with Karui and Omoi, his tone revealing the unquestionable majesty of a great power.
As the leader of this operation, Darui’s aura made the wandering ninjas dare not speak out.
Omoi went forward to check the scroll and found that it only recorded the common C-level fire-style ninjutsu – the Great Fireball Technique. This ninjutsu has been popularized in almost every ninja village.
Disappointed, Omoi handed the scroll to Darui.
After examining it, Darui realized that this action might be futile, so he closed the scroll and tossed it back to the wandering ninjas.
The C-level ninjutsu of each country are mostly similar, but due to slight differences in chakra properties, some ninjutsu are not valued in specific ninja villages.
“You guys from Kumogakure are bullying the weak here, which is really a loss of the dignity of a great country.” Kankuro said with a hint of sarcasm.
“Everyone from Sunagakure is also involved in this matter. I heard that Sunagakure’s last attack on Konoha was not successful, but they still had the energy to send people here. It’s really admirable.” Darui said with a cunning look.
“The Sunagakure and Kumogakure are all gathered together, it’s so lively, are they discussing how to divide the spoils?” Kurotsuchi, along with two of his companions from Iwagakure, set foot in the ruins of Uzushio Village.
“Now that everyone is here, there’s no need for us to hide.” Chojuro stood with his hands behind his back and appeared with two of his Kirigakure companions. One of them was a middle-aged man with an eye mask. He was Ao, the only one in Kirigakure who had Byakugan.
“Have the comrades from Konoha arrived yet? You might as well show up. It’s rare to see a gathering of five nations like this.” Kurotsuchi shouted loudly.
However, after waiting for a long time, there was no sign of the Konoha ninja, and the ninjas from the other four countries couldn’t help but wonder if no one was coming to Konoha.
“Ao, use your Byakugan to look around to see if anyone from Konoha is lurking among them.” Chojuro ordered Ao.
Qing gently took off the blindfold and looked around with his white eyes.
“I didn’t expect that Kirigakure could obtain the Byakugan, which even Konoha regards as a treasure. This is really shocking. The Hyuga family is notoriously strict in guarding the Byakugan.” Surprise flashed in Darui’s eyes. He recalled the various dishonorable means that Kumogakure had taken to obtain the Byakugan, but ultimately failed to do so. Kirigakure actually has this treasure.
“There are no people from Konoha around. Could it be that they haven’t sent anyone here, or they haven’t arrived yet?” Qing frowned and said doubtfully.
“Since the Konoha Village has not yet appeared, why don’t we unite and explore the secret room together, make multiple copies of the ninjutsu scroll, and divide one equally among the villages.” Chojuro proposed a compromise plan.
“Wait a minute, let’s take a look at the contents of the scroll first. I always feel that this might be an elaborate scam. The one I just found only recorded some ordinary C-level ninjutsu.” Darui’s tone was alert.
“Don’t forget, Konoha may have already seen through the authenticity of this news. Don’t forget that the royal descendants of the Uzumaki clan are now Konoha’s allies.” Kurotsuchi analyzed coldly, as if he had a natural prejudice against Konoha.
Gaara and the other two knew that Rock Lee and his team had already landed on the island, but their whereabouts were a mystery and no one knew them.
The deep meaning behind Konoha’s absence is thought-provoking.
Kankuro almost blurted out their encounter with the Konoha ninja, but was stopped in time by Gaara. The Sand Village could no longer bear the stain of betraying its allies. If it did, its reputation in the ninja world would be ruined, and with it, there might be a sharp drop in missions, making the village’s future even more difficult.
“I agree to cooperate in exploring the secret room. This is better than us making blind guesses here. The truth will soon come to light.” Gaara finally made the decision.
“Kumogakure agrees.”
“Kirigakure has no objection either.”
“Iwagakure also has no objection.”
The four major powers reached a consensus and decided to jointly explore the secret room to avoid unnecessary losses.
“It seems that your plan is not going well. The people from Konoha did not show up, but the four major countries reached an agreement. This is not what you expected.” Bai Zetsu commented to Obito.
Obito smiled slyly, “That secret room contains the secret skills of each ninja village. Although they are now united, they will soon want to eliminate each other. This is the result of my careful planning.”
“You are really scheming. I can’t wait to see them killing each other. I will definitely record it so that I can use it to entertain myself when I am bored.” Bai Jue teased.
“Have Itachi and Kisame taken action? If they don’t fight as planned, then secretly provoke them to trigger a conflict.” Obito ordered.
“They have already landed on the island and are heading in this direction. They should arrive soon.” Bai Zetsu replied.
Rock Lee and his group walked out of the secret room and looked towards the direction of Uzushio Village. The sound of the explosion could be clearly heard even here.
“It seems that there have been new discoveries in Uzushio Village, and the battle seems to have begun.” Rock Lee said.
“Should we go and take a look? Maybe we can find something unexpected.” Tiantian suggested.
“We shouldn’t be too greedy. The current situation in Uzushio Village is like an abyss. Once we fall into it, we will be in an extremely unfavorable position. Submitting the results this time is already a remarkable achievement.” Rock Lee flatly refuted Tiantian’s proposal.
Before the mastermind behind the scenes was revealed, he decided to withdraw his troops immediately. After all, they had achieved enough results.
“We will immediately set off for the dock and take a boat back to the Land of Fire. This mission has been successfully accomplished. The dispute in Uzushio Village, no matter what the outcome, is no longer our responsibility.” Rock Lee said firmly.
The other three nodded in agreement, understanding that this was a wise move, so the four of them quickly adjusted their direction and headed towards the dock.
“Ningji, pay close attention to your surroundings. Everyone should be wary of possible ambushes. Enemies may risk their lives to intercept you along the way.” Rock Lee reminded his companions.
They sped up their pace, passing through the long-abandoned Whirlpool Country. Rock Lee only wanted to return to the Fire Country as soon as possible.
At the pier of Whirlpool Country, Itachi and Kisame had just set foot on land and were rapidly approaching Rock Lee and the others. Following Pain’s instructions, they came to assist Obito’s actions.
When Rock Lee and his three companions traveled through this ancient land, the dense woods and weeds here became an excellent hiding and ambush place. For many years, this place has never been occupied by any major force.
In the sparsely populated world of Naruto, Neji becomes alarmed by the approach of two formidable foes—Hoshigaki Kisame and Uchiha Itachi. Kisame, renowned for his powerful chakra, rivals that of a tailless beast, commands considerable formidable formidable odds. Faced with such a formidable foe, Rock Lee proposes retreating to Uzushio Village and joining forces with the other great ninja powers to defeat the formidable foe.
“Stop, there are strong enemies approaching ahead of us. One of them, Hoshigaki Kisame, has extremely strong chakra.” Neji warned, still remembering the encounter with Kisame in the Land of Rain.
Rock Lee thought to himself that Itachi, accompanying Kisame, was also not to be underestimated. The situation was not optimistic. “Let’s return to Uzushio Village and unite with the other four nations. Only by combining the strength of the five nations can we contend with them.”
However, Sasuke only had revenge in his mind. He was even willing to risk his life to face Itachi. “Go away. I must seek revenge on Itachi, even if it means death.”
Rock Lee knew that Sasuke’s determination was as firm as a rock and could not be changed by words. He decided to let Sasuke fight Itachi, hoping that such a duel would inspire Sasuke to have greater potential.
“They have discovered us and are approaching quickly.” Neji reported urgently.
“Prepare for battle. We will fight and retreat at the same time. Our target is Uzushio Village.” Rock Lee ordered.
Sasuke’s attitude was unwavering: “Xiao Li, my mind is made up. Let this battle be a catalyst for my growth.”
Rock Lee ultimately chose to respect Sasuke’s choice, hoping that this confrontation would serve as a springboard for Sasuke’s growth, even though it was fraught with risks.
“Okay, let’s start the duel now. Tenten, you take another route, go to the seaport, find a ship to return to Konoha, and hand in the scroll. Today, the few of us will compete with the legendary duo.” Rock Lee’s chest was filled with fighting spirit, and he was eager to fight with Itachi and Kisame.
He noticed the worry on Tenten’s face, “Don’t worry, Tenten, even if we can’t win, we can still escape. With Neji and I’s speed, it’s no problem to escape with Sasuke. They won’t be able to catch up.” He comforted her.
Tiantian looked at the three of them affectionately and said firmly: “You all must stay alive. I will bring people to support you as soon as possible.” After that, she turned and left in a hurry.
“Itachi, it seems that we are really destined to be with Konoha. Your brother is here too. Should we chase the escaped female ninja?” asked Kisame.
“No need. That female kunoichi is the weakest of them all and poses no threat to us,” Itachi replied calmly.
Itachi’s eyes fell on the three people standing by, and he spotted Sasuke at a glance.
“When fighting with Itachi, be careful not to look directly into his eyes. Once your eyes meet, you may fall into his illusion. Pay attention to his shoulders and footwork.” Rock Lee reminded Neji and Sasuke.
“We have indeed never trained for this type of fighting style, but the situation forces us to do so,” Neji responded.
Despite his trepidation, Rock Lee knew that if they survived this battle, they would have to practice fighting while avoiding eye contact.
Sasuke’s ears seemed to be blocked by Rock Lee’s words. His eyes were filled with deep hatred as he stared at Itachi’s always cold face and deep eyes.
Rock Lee only needed to take a glance at Sasuke’s condition to realize that strategies were useless and that he had no choice but to fight with force.
“Little guy, I didn’t expect to meet you here. It seems that today is the end of you.” Kisame pulled out the Samehada from behind, and his attitude revealed his importance to Rock Lee.
Obviously, Kisame still remembers his last confrontation with Rock Lee. Although Gai intervened, Rock Lee’s strength should not be underestimated.
“Hoshigaki Kisame, Uchiha Itachi, what an unexpected encounter. I wonder what brings you two to the Land of Whirlpools?” Rock Lee asked tentatively.
“You’re still trying to find out information before you die. You won’t cry until you see the coffin.” Kisame laughed.
Unlike his impulsiveness in the past, Sasuke now maintains amazing self-control. Although he is furious, his three-magatama Sharingan proves that he has not lost his mind.
Itachi secretly marveled at how Sasuke’s advancement had far exceeded his expectations, the awakening of the three magatama was already rapid, and the opening of the Mangekyo might be just a few years away.
“That once foolish brother has finally grown up. In that case, I can’t keep you.” Itachi’s voice was cold, as if he was not talking about a close relative, but an unrelated passerby.
“Itachi, the outcome of a life-or-death battle is still uncertain,” Sasuke responded calmly, his confidence and composure evident in his words.
Rock Lee gripped the nunchaku tightly, his fighting spirit evident in his words. He exchanged a tacit look with Neji, suggesting that they should retreat immediately if the situation turned out to be wrong.
“Jingmen, open!”
With a low shout, Rock Lee activated the sixth gate and pounced towards Hoshigaki Kisame like an arrow. His nunchaku drew a streak of fire in the air and smashed towards Kisame with the force of thunder.
The whistling sound was deafening, and the nunchaku was like a fire dragon, leaving a string of flames in the air, heading straight for Kisame’s vital points.
At the same time, Neji’s chakra surged, his four wings spread out, and he joined the battle like a stream of light.
Kisame wielded his big sword Samehada and confronted Rock Lee head-on. The sound of metal clashing was heard and Rock Lee’s chakra was impacted, but he was not afraid and continued to attack with his nunchaku.
Neji seized the opportunity and accurately struck Kisame’s arm with his soft fist, instantly blocking the flow of chakra.
Although Kisame was forced to retreat temporarily, he quickly broke Neji’s acupressure technique with a chakra attack.
Itachi, who was watching the battle from the side, couldn’t help but show surprise. He was surprised at the fighting ability of Rock Lee and Neji. He knew in his heart that Kisame was far from showing his true strength.
Chapter 40: Retreat (Old Version)
Amidst the violent explosion, the two fireballs collided violently, the temperature around them rising sharply, and the surrounding grass and trees were instantly ignited. Sasuke retreated swiftly, his Sharingan tightly locked on Itachi’s rapidly approaching figure.
He quickly formed hand seals and shouted, “Fire Style, Phoenix Fire Technique!” Sparks shot out from Sasuke’s mouth and headed straight for Itachi. However, Uchiha Itachi was as fast as the wind and dodged them easily without slowing down at all.
Sasuke retreated while attacking, continuing to harass Itachi’s attacks with Fire Style. “Your progress is encouraging, Sasuke. You’ve learned to avoid my attacks, but these methods are still useless in front of me,” Itachi said calmly.
His eyes instantly changed, showing the posture of the Mangekyō Sharingan, and his left eye pointed directly at Sasuke, releasing the illusion of Tsukuyomi. Itachi hoped that this move would once again stimulate his brother’s potential and look forward to Sasuke awakening the Mangekyō soon.
As for Sasuke’s plan to join Orochimaru, Itachi had originally considered it, but now he believes that Sasuke’s life in Konoha is equally fulfilling and his strength is improving rapidly.
At the same time, Rock Lee’s nunchaku danced out a series of afterimages and quickly attacked Kisame; Neji wandered around the periphery, constantly launching attacks with soft fists, and the three of them fell into a stalemate.
In the fierce clash, Kisame repeatedly attempted to escape Rock Lee and Neji’s pursuit, hoping to gain distance to unleash his ninjutsu and put his opponent at a disadvantage. But Rock Lee, like a thorn in his flesh, remained steadfast, his nunchakus slicing blazing trails through the air like twin bolts of flaming lightning, locking onto Kisame’s vitals and striking fiercely. Only through sustained close combat could they contend with Kisame, occasionally even gaining the upper hand.
The weapon in Rock Lee’s hands was no longer just a nunchaku; it had transformed into two beams of blazing flames, each swing accompanied by a violent friction of the air. His attacks were precise and fierce, and even though Kisame’s Samehada was sharp, it could not penetrate Rock Lee’s defense.
After a swift attack, Rock Lee quickly sheathed his nunchaku and resumed the fight with his “Peacock” fist technique. His fists were as fast as lightning, sparking countless sparks in the air. Despite Kisame’s strength, he was forced to retreat repeatedly. Meanwhile, Neji seized the opportunity and quickly retreated, his four wings behind him vibrating rapidly, disappearing in an instant.
Taking advantage of Kisame’s retreat from the “Peacock” punch, Rock Lee unleashed a kunai with a detonating tag and launched it decisively. The continuous explosions sent clouds of dust billowing, obscuring the sky and the sun, effectively blocking Kisame’s sight and securing a crucial advantage in the battle.
Deep within the abyss of Tsukuyomi’s illusion, Sasuke once again witnessed his haunting nightmare—his parents fell to Itachi’s sword. Overwhelmed by grief and rage, he eventually passed out. In the real world, Sasuke only briefly met Itachi’s gaze before losing consciousness. At that moment, Rock Lee, like a divine force descending from the sky, wielding a kunai imbued with a detonating tag, attacked Itachi. The roar of the explosion and the rising dust instantly obscured everything.
Hidden in the smoke and dust, Rock Lee fled the scene with Sasuke at astonishing speed. His speed was so great that even Itachi and Kisame struggled to catch up. This action not only protected Sasuke but also made him realize the difference in strength between him and Itachi. After this battle, Rock Lee and Neji realized that they were strong enough to fight Kisame.
When the dust cleared, there was no trace of the three men. Itachi silently gazed in the direction they had disappeared, lost in thought. Kisame, standing nearby, expressed concern over Rock Lee’s rapid progress and the potential threat it posed. “They’re escaping so quickly. It’s going to be even harder to eliminate Rock Lee. His growth has already become a real threat to us.”
In our two encounters with this opponent, we were forced to retreat the first time because of Might Guy, and the second time we let him slip away right under our noses.
“They are heading towards Uzushio Village, and it seems they intend to unite with the other four major ninja villages and gather the strength of the five villages to fight against us. It is expected that the war will break out again soon, and then we will settle this account completely.” Itachi analyzed calmly.
“Okay, let’s let them live a little longer. The Uzushio Village has been properly arranged, and the secret rooms contain secret techniques from various countries. I expect they will fight fiercely. Let’s go and watch this good show and see how strong the five major ninja villages are.” Kisame said with an expectant smile.
The masked man appeared before them in the image of Uchiha Madara. Kisame firmly believed in his identity, after all, he had seen the masked man’s true face with his own eyes.
However, Itachi had doubts about this. Considering Uchiha Madara’s actual age, he thought this might just be Madara’s substitute, secretly planning some unknown conspiracy in the ninja world.
Although Pain is their nominal leader, the actual leader is Obito who replaces Madara.
They headed towards Uzushio Village. Just as Kisame said, Uzushio Village was filled with a tense atmosphere at this moment.
Ninjas from the four major ninja villages gathered together to explore the secret room of Uzushio Village. At this time, many wandering ninjas and ninjas from small countries had poured into the secret room.
“Itachi and Kisame haven’t arrived yet, Zetsu?” Obito asked.
“They had a conflict with the returning Konoha ninjas, and even Itachi’s brother, Uchiha Sasuke was involved in the battle.” White Zetsu reported excitedly.
He seemed to enjoy the life-and-death struggle between Sasuke’s brothers.
Obito’s interest was piqued, “Did Itachi take care of Sasuke?”
“No, Hyuga Neji and Rock Lee are heading towards Uzushio Village. It is Rock Lee who is carrying Sasuke, who is unconscious due to Itachi’s Tsukuyomi,” White Zetsu reported to Obito.
“Things are becoming more and more interesting. I thought the people from Konoha would not come again, but unexpectedly they did not arrive at Uzushio Village, but evacuated quickly. What did they discover?” Obito asked Jue.
“Perhaps Konoha has obtained information unknown to the outside world. It seems that the truth hidden in Uzushio Village has fallen into the hands of Rock Lee and his men, otherwise they would not have evacuated so quickly.” Black Zetsu analyzed.
“Even I’m beginning to wonder what kind of secrets a country with a long history like the Land of Whirlpools hides.” Obito developed a strong interest in the secrets of the Land of Whirlpools.
The history of Whirlpool Country is as long as that of the Uchiha clan. If the Uchiha clan has their stone tablets, then Whirlpool Country is likely to have its own unique relics.
At this moment, Obito was full of curiosity about the secrets of the Whirlpool Country.
The secret passageway of Uzushio Village had become a battlefield of slaughter. As the combined forces of the four nations descended the steps, they witnessed this bloody massacre.
Darui led the way through the spacious passage, muttering, “Thunder Jutsu, Black Spot Difficulty.” Before he finished speaking, his body erupted in a violent burst of black lightning, and like a ferocious thunder tiger, he rushed forward. Numerous wandering ninjas and ninjas from small villages were struck down by this powerful force, many barely able to react before being struck. Onlookers were stunned, having never expected such a powerful individual within Kumogakure to possess the ability to control such black lightning. Clearly, Kumogakure’s ambitions were not to be underestimated.
Heitu admired with a hint of sarcasm: “Darui of Yunyin, the successor of Hei Lei, is truly extraordinary.” Darui turned around and glanced at her indifferently, but did not respond. He knew that arguing with a woman like this with a sharp tongue would only bring endless troubles.
The passage they were in was long and wide, with rooms on either side filled with various ninjutsu scrolls. It was obvious that this was once a refuge in the Land of Whirlpools, large enough to accommodate the entire population of Uzushio Village. The ninjas of Shikoku were puzzled as to why such a refuge would have so many ninjutsu scrolls.
When they entered the first room, they found several wandering ninjas who had defeated the other ninjas and were about to flee with the scroll when they unexpectedly encountered the Allied Ninja Team. These wandering ninjas panicked and retreated repeatedly, cold sweat on their foreheads. They had never expected to encounter ninjas from a great power at such a critical moment.
“Show us the scrolls of ninjutsu you have brought with you. We will examine them,” Gaara said, his tone unexpectedly calm. “If they are just ordinary techniques, they will be returned to their rightful owners.” He had changed significantly since the turmoil against Konoha. If he had been the same person before, these wandering ninjas would have been beheaded long ago.
Kurotsuchi looked at Gaara in surprise. This was completely different from the information she had. Could it be that the sandstorm Gaara who was known for his cruelty was just a misunderstanding?
The surrounding ninjas were also full of doubts. The legendary tyrant seemed to be completely different from the person in front of them.
The wandering ninja, his face shimmering with fear, handed over the scrolls with trepidation. Gaara picked up a scroll at random and unfolded it. What he saw terrified him—the “Secret Art of Monzaemon Puppetry,” which described the principles of the Chikamatsu Tenjinshu’s construction, as well as numerous long-lost puppet-making methods.
These skills have long been extinct in the Sand Village. Monzaemon, as the founder of Sand Village puppetry, his legacy almost forms the entire foundation of Sand Village puppetry, or serves as the source of further innovation.
Gaara was extremely shocked that such a secret had been leaked. Once it spread, the puppet masters of Sunagakure would no longer have any advantage.
Kankuro noticed the strange look on Gaara’s face, “What happened, Gaara? What kind of ninjutsu is written on that scroll?”
Kankuro and his companions gradually approached, noticing Gaara’s strange expression and forming a circle around him. Gaara gently rolled up the scroll in his hand and explained calmly, “This contains the unique secret techniques of our Sunagakure, which cannot be displayed publicly.” Kurotsuchi raised an eyebrow in suspicion and insisted on investigating.
“How can you convince people with just your one-sided statement? It would be fair if we could see it with our own eyes.” Heitu insisted.
“Kankuro, Temari, go check the remaining scrolls. If you find any of my Sunagakure secret techniques, keep them immediately.” Gaara gave the order, while being wary of the possible profiteering intentions of Kurotsuchi and others.
Kurotsuchi turned to Darui and Chojuro and taunted, “Looks like a fight is inevitable. Are you just going to sit on the sidelines and watch us fight it out so you can take advantage?”
Gaara’s eyes flashed with a sharpness, and the quicksand behind him seemed to sense its master’s will, ready to strike. Kankuro and Temari quickly flipped through the scrolls in their hands, throwing them to the ground and clarifying, “These scrolls contain only common D- and C-rank ninjutsu.”
Temari added calmly, “You still have the leisure to compete with us for these things. If you don’t hurry elsewhere, I’m afraid your own secret techniques will be taken away by others first.”
Darui and Chojuro quickly made their way to the adjacent secret chamber, while Kurotsuchi took action, using his unique Molten Release technique to unleash scorching lava in the tunnel, successfully blocking the escape route. Meanwhile, Kankuro became curious about the secret of the scroll in Gaara’s hand.
“What secret does that scroll hide that makes you so cautious?” Kankuro asked.
Gaara knew the significance of this scroll. It contained precious notes from Monzaemon, one of the founders of Sunagakure and the first puppet master, as well as the secrets of the Chikamatsu Tenninshu. If its contents were leaked, a new puppet master would likely emerge.
“That scroll contains the secret puppetry technique of Master Monzaemon. If the skills contained in it are passed on to others, it will definitely cause a new puppetry revolution.” Gaara responded in a serious tone.
Kankuro and Temari were both shocked after hearing this, as they knew the importance of this letter to Sunagakure.
“Let’s move on and explore any clues they may have found. This Whirlpool Country incident is probably a deep conspiracy involving the secret techniques of many countries.” Gaara analyzed, and he also developed a strong interest in the mastermind behind the scenes. Who on earth could have such means to gather the secret techniques of the five major countries and cause this dispute?
Chapter 41 Exploration (Old Version)
White Zetsu followed like a shadow, shuttling underground, and soon emerged from the ground, watching Rock Lee and his group and Sasuke walk away.
“Rock Lee, how is Sasuke?” Neji looked at the unconscious Sasuke with concern.
“It’s probably due to the Sharingan’s illusion. Although he’s unconscious, this experience helped him realize the gap between him and Itachi.” Rock Lee responded, his eyes fixed on Sasuke.
The two kept moving at high speed, constantly looking back to be on guard, but they still saw no trace of Itachi and Kisame. The outline of Uzushio Village gradually became clear.
In a hidden corner somewhere in Uzushio Village, Obito and Zetsu were watching everything quietly, and no one noticed their presence.
Obito has used space-time ninjutsu to steal many secret techniques from various countries over the years. This time, he and Pain have agreed to use this opportunity to break the status quo and pave the way for future plans.
“The people from Konoha have arrived. Itachi used Tsukuyomi on Sasuke, but why didn’t he kill him?” Bai Jue asked in confusion.
“Itachi is waiting for Sasuke to activate the Mangekyō Sharingan. Then he will implement the Eye-Grabbing Plan to achieve the eternal Mangekyō Sharingan. This is the fate of the Uchiha clan.” Obito explained.
Their eyes followed Rock Lee and the others as they entered Uzushio Village and headed towards the secret room where the scroll was hidden.
At this moment, there are very few people in Wochao Village. The villagers have either been killed or are hiding underground. The remaining people are lurking around, waiting for the opportunity.
“Look, the Konoha team has finally arrived, but there’s one who seems to be unconscious.” A wandering ninja whispered to the people around him.
“He must have met with an accident on the way, otherwise why would he be so late? Now that he has arrived, I’m afraid the treasure has been got away by the forces of the other four countries.” Other wandering ninjas also expressed their curiosity and speculation about the late and unconscious Konoha ninja.
Rock Lee carefully placed Sasuke on the ground. After a moment, Sasuke’s eyelids slowly lifted.
“Where am I?” Sasuke asked in a weak voice.
“We are now in Uzushio Village. You were caught in Itachi’s illusion and we brought you here.” Rock Lee explained.
“How are you feeling? We have to go meet up with ninjas from other countries.” Neji asked with concern.
Sasuke tried to stand up, but his body was slightly shaky, so Rock Lee immediately stepped forward to support him.
The three of them walked towards the underground secret room together.
“Thank you for saving my life,” Sasuke said sincerely.
“Don’t say that, Sasuke. We are companions and there is no way I would abandon you.” Neji replied.
They arrived at the secret room and saw a barrier made of black soil.
“The people from Shikoku have blocked the entrance. Should we force our way through?” Neji lightly touched the slightly warm wall.
“It seems there is no other way. If we don’t act quickly, they might have already killed each other in there,” Rock Lee responded.
“You step back, I will complete this mission.” Neji said firmly to Rock Lee and Sasuke.
Rock Lee carefully supported Sasuke as they retreated to safety. Neji followed closely behind, raising his right hand. Chakra gathered in his arm, transforming it into a deep blue. He chanted “Eight Trigrams Void Palm” softly, then swung forward, a massive hand composed of chakra slamming down on the stone wall.
“boom!”
With a loud bang, the stone wall collapsed, rubble raining down, dust rising in the air, instantly engulfing Rock Lee and the others. Darui, Gaara, and the others, who were busy in the secret room, sprang to life at the sound and quickly appeared in the corridor, their gaze piercing the smoke and dust, trying to discern what had happened.
Kurotsuchi was in a particularly low mood. She had built that wall specifically to prevent anyone from escaping or intruding, and she had intended to use it to demonstrate Iwagakure’s strength.
Soon, the smoke and dust cleared, revealing Rock Lee. He apologized to the future leaders of the villages present: “Sorry to bother you. I am Rock Lee from Konoha. We are late.”
Facing these future ninja village chiefs, Rock Lee’s words revealed his respect for this unexpected encounter. Gaara stepped forward and asked with concern, “Rock Lee, I didn’t expect to encounter you. To injure Uchiha Sasuke like this, your opponent must be very powerful.”
“It’s Kisame Hoshigaki of Kirigakure and Itachi Uchiha of Konoha,” Rock Lee replied, a note of caution in his tone. “I’m afraid this gathering is their doing. The gathering of ninja from the five great nations must be a conspiracy.”
Chojuro was astonished that Rock Lee and the other three had managed to escape the clutches of Kirigakure’s S-rank renegade ninja, Hoshigaki Kisame, whose ninja katana, Samehada, was truly formidable. Rock Lee curiously inquired about Gaara’s achievements, and Gaara replied that while they had some knowledge of various esoteric arts, they had exercised restraint, thus avoiding conflict over them.
“You also know Konoha’s secret techniques?” Rock Lee asked, pretending to be ignorant.
“Stop dreaming. How can Konoha’s secret techniques be easily passed on to outsiders?” Kurotsuchi answered sarcastically.
Although he was not familiar with Konoha’s secret techniques, Rock Lee was aware of the dangers of forbidden techniques.
Heitu snorted lightly and said no more.
Chojuro mentioned the unexplored room and Konoha’s Four Symbols Seal. Rock Lee had a vague impression of it, but his memory was vague.
“Did you really encounter Hoshigaki Kisame?” Chojuro asked.
“The Four Symbols Seal? I seem to remember that Naruto has such a seal in his body, but I don’t remember the specific details anymore.” Rock Lee replied.
“According to my observation, Hoshigaki Kisame and Uchiha Itachi are likely to belong to the same secret organization. After you go back, you might as well investigate this organization in depth. They have recruited S-class fugitive ninjas from various countries.” Rock Lee analyzed.
“Don’t forget Deidara over there. Rumor has it that he has also joined a mysterious organization. Maybe that’s the one.
“This person should not be underestimated. He was once a member of the Iwagakure Demolition Team and is proficient in the art of blasting.” Kurotsuchi added.
Rock Lee had his own plans in mind and was quite wary of Deidara’s clay bird’s high-altitude bombing ability, which was undoubtedly a new application of aerial tactics.
But he did not intend to reveal too much information to them. On the one hand, he was worried about arousing their suspicions, and on the other hand, he hoped that all countries could learn lessons from this experience.
“Now that ninjas from the five major countries have gathered in Uzushio Village, let’s continue to explore those unknown secret rooms in depth and not let this rare opportunity for cooperation go to waste.” Rock Lee suggested.
The ninjas of Uzushio Village all know that the five major countries have joined forces to explore the secrets in the secret room, and other ninjas can only pick up the ninjutsu scrolls left behind by the five major countries.
They continued to move deeper into the secret room.
“Since we have reached a cooperation agreement, can you give us the Four Symbols Sealing Scroll as a gift? It would be unwise to lose the big picture for the sake of the scroll and affect the unity of the five countries.” Rock Lee made the request with a smile.
Chojuro quickly pulled out a Konoha scroll from his bosom and handed it to Rock Lee, adding, “I was careless before. This should be yours.”
“Thanks.”
Rock Lee nodded to Chojuro.
The group went deep into a series of secret rooms, but found nothing special, only some ninjutsu from the five major countries. They gradually realized that something was wrong and stepped into the deepest secret room.
This secret room was much more spacious and ornately decorated, with intricate patterns carved into the walls.
Kankuro speculated, “This is most likely a secret room used by the Whirlpool Kingdom’s high-ranking officials. It’s far superior to the previous ones, and perhaps contains something important.”
Rock Lee’s eyes fell on the table at the back of the room, where several scrolls were scattered, and he was about to reach out to take them.
“Wait a minute,” Kurotsuchi warned, “This might contain the true sealing technique of the Whirlpool Country. Even if there are many conspiracies, there must be some real stuff.”
“Then we’d better be careful. Let’s put it on the ground and examine it carefully.” Rock Lee carefully picked up a scroll and spread it on the ground.
The sealing techniques of the five major countries are nothing special. Even the sealing of the tailed beasts is mostly evolved based on the technology used by the first Hokage when he distributed the tailed beasts.
The Uzumaki clan of the Whirlpool Country is related to the Senju clan of Konoha, and many of Konoha’s sealing techniques originated from the Whirlpool Country. If these scrolls truly contained such sealing techniques, Rock Lee knew he had to consider how to completely destroy them.
Tensions are high between the five great nations, especially between Konoha and Iwagakure, where war is imminent. Rock Lee is well aware that he has caused the deaths of many Iwagakure ninjas on the battlefield, and Kurotsuchi, in particular, holds a grudge against him and is secretly seeking revenge.
Against this backdrop, Rock Lee spread out a scroll on the ground, titled “Basic Theory and Structure of Sealing Techniques.” At first glance, the scroll didn’t seem particularly valuable, but as Rock Lee read through it and unfolded it, he saw familiar techniques and symbols.
However, his eyes suddenly stopped at a detail – the image of the Grim Reaper appeared at the end of the scroll. Rock Lee pretended to be nonchalant and gently closed the scroll, just in time to cover the image of the Grim Reaper.
The image reminded him of the legendary “Shiki Fuujin,” a powerful sealing technique created by the Fourth Hokage, Minato Namikaze. Alarm bells rang in Rock Lee’s heart: This scroll might contain the original concept and foundation of that sealing technique. If it fell into the hands of an enemy nation, it might give rise to a new sealing technique.
So, he pretended to be nonchalant and suggested, “This scroll is just the basics of the Sealing Technique. We learned it in Ninja School. Why don’t we each make a copy so we can have an explanation?”
Having said that, Rock Lee was actually on high alert, ready to take necessary action if anyone really tried to copy the scroll.
“These sealing techniques that can be learned in ninja school will probably attract the ridicule of the villagers if you take them back. However, since you discovered them, take them back to Konoha. Perhaps you can research some powerful sealing techniques from them.” Kurotsuchi said with a hint of sarcasm.
As the elite of the five major countries, they naturally disdain these basic sealing techniques.
Most of them began to look through the scrolls scattered on the table. The contents were nothing more than basic principles and symbol explanations, and there was no particularly advanced sealing technique.
But Rock Lee did not underestimate these basic knowledge. He thought that if the Fourth Hokage could create the Shiki Fuujin from the sealing techniques of the Whirlpool Country, then others might also be able to discover powerful sealing techniques from these basics.
“Kankuro, Temari, let’s go. There’s no need to stay here.” Gaara expressed his opinion.
Darui, Kurotsuchi, Chojuro, and the others also walked out in disappointment.
At this time, Rock Lee gave a wink to Neji and Sasuke. The two understood and stayed, knowing that Rock Lee must have some arrangements.
Rock Lee said nothing, simply pointing to the scroll on the table, suggesting they keep it safe. He himself pretended to stick detonating talismans on the wall to conceal his true intentions.
“Rock Lee, aren’t you Konoha people leaving yet?” Kurotsuchi took a few steps and looked back, only to find that the Konoha ninjas had not moved. Turning around, he saw Rock Lee placing detonating tags in the passage.
“I plan to raze this place to the ground to vent my anger. Sometimes, a ninja’s mind also needs to be released in order to make a breakthrough.” Rock Lee expressed his determination firmly.
The companions around looked at each other and smiled, as if they felt helpless and understood Konoha’s way of “healing the soul” at any cost.
Sasuke and Neji soon confirmed the preparations, “Lee, we have put detonating tags in every corner to ensure that everything will be reduced to nothing.” Neji reported.
“Well done, make sure nothing is missed. I don’t want to have to face a new secret hideout anytime soon,” Rock Lee ordered.
They both nodded, pretending to apply talismans while carefully searching for any precious items that might have been forgotten. Perhaps within these seemingly ordinary scrolls lay unexpected secrets.
When Rock Lee was studying a scroll of sealing techniques, he had this realization: these seemingly useless scrolls might have been thrown away without even being flipped through by the conspirators behind them.
When the three finally left, the night sky was dotted with stars, and before they knew it, the day had ended.
Rock Lee turned to Sasuke with concern: “How is your injury? You don’t look well.”
Chapter 42: Strong Enemy (Old Version)
The sudden and violent explosion in Uzushio Village not only alarmed the lurkers around, but the flames shooting into the sky also announced that Konoha Village had resolutely destroyed the secret room containing the scroll.
The wandering ninjas around witnessed the emergency gathering of the ninjas from the five major countries and had to abandon their original plans. This trip seemed to be in vain.
“Let’s find a safe place to spend the night. It’s best for us to get together and look after each other in case someone launches a reckless attack.” Rock Lee suggested.
Everyone agreed that in this unclear situation with ninjas all around, uniting together was undoubtedly the safer option.
“Ningji, use your Byakugan to find a place where there are few people, so that we can at least have a safe place to rest.” In such a situation, Neji’s special ability is particularly valuable.
With the help of his Byakugan, Neji led the ninjas from the five major countries to find a relatively quiet place. Everyone naturally divided into five groups, and the ninjas from their respective countries gathered together to communicate in low voices.
“Just rest assured. Leave the night watch to Neji and me.” Rock Lee said this to the exhausted Sasuke.
Rock Lee and Neji stayed in the night, closed their eyes and rested, trying their best to recover their strength, while the other ninjas also remained alert while sitting cross-legged. The necessary skills for survival in the wild were particularly important at this moment.
The whereabouts of Itachi and Kisame remained a mystery, raising numerous doubts in Rock Lee’s heart. He secretly wondered if this mission would just end in vain.
As the morning light broke and the morning glow illuminated the sky, Rock Lee shook off the fatigue of the night and woke up Sasuke and Neji who were sleeping.
“Gaara, we may need to use your ship to return,” Rock Lee walked towards Gaara with a hint of anticipation.
Gaara nodded slightly in agreement.
At this moment, Kurotsuchi’s voice broke the silence, “Locke Lee, now that the mission is over, shouldn’t we settle the old accounts between our two villages?” Her tone revealed a sense of confrontation.
Rock Lee stared at Kurotsuchi with a piercing gaze, showing no mercy. In his eyes, even the future Tsuchikage would be a target of no mercy.
“I have long noticed that you have murderous intentions towards me. Then come on, I have been fed up with you, the Iwagakure Village. I heard that you are Ōnoki’s granddaughter. I wonder what Ōnoki would think if you were defeated by me.” Rock Lee’s tone was calm, but revealed his determination.
Kurotsuchi tried to maintain her composure, but the bulging veins betrayed her fury. She knew Rock Lee well, knowing he excelled in physical combat, having decimated countless Iwagakure ninjas with his blows. Kurotsuchi knew that close combat was not her forte, and that she could only rely on long-range attacks for a chance of victory.
In a thrilling ninjutsu exchange, Kurotsuchi skillfully executed the “Earth Release, Light and Heavy Rock Technique,” slowly lifting his body until it hovered in mid-air, leaving Rock Lee looking perplexed. The other three opponents waited patiently, apparently waiting for both sides to tire themselves out before striking. Kurotsuchi pressed on, shifting his hand seals and unleashing the “Melting Release, Lime Condensation Technique.” A cloud of lime, like smoke and mist, swiftly descended upon Rock Lee. Rock Lee dodged, while Sasuke and Neji, pinned down by two enemy Iwagakure ninjas, were unable to escape.
Faced with this predicament, Rock Lee decisively activated the sixth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, the “Kagemon.” Chakra surged, the ground collapsed beneath him, and his figure instantly vanished, then reappeared in the sky, charging straight at Kurotsuchi. Kurotsuchi sensed the movement behind him and hurriedly used the “Weighted Rock Technique” to resist.
The black earth hand seals flew, controlling the “Earth Escape, Light and Heavy Rock Technique”, and his body lightly rose from the ground. Rock Lee followed closely with his eyes, his brows twisted into a ball.
The other ninjas watching the battle remained motionless, obviously hoping to reap the benefits.
The black soil was like an eagle soaring into the sky, and the hand seals changed continuously, releasing the “Melting Escape, Lime Solidification Technique”. A large amount of lime powder quickly covered Rock Lee like falling snow.
Rock Lee was agile and dodged repeatedly, while his companions Sasuke and Neji were in a tough battle.
Faced with a pressing situation, Rock Lee unleashed his potential and opened the “Kagemon” of the “Eight Gates of Ninjutsu”. Chakra surged like a tide, shaking the ground. His figure flashed by, and when he reappeared, he was already behind Kurotsuchi.
Heitu felt a murderous aura coming and quickly used the “Heavier Rock Technique” to prevent any accidents.
Rock Lee felt his body gradually grow heavier, the iron sand slapping his arms like a spreading petrification disease. But soon, this petrification trend was dissipated by the chakra that erupted from his body. It was the violent power of the sixth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu.
At this moment, Darui, who had been watching the situation unfold, took a step forward and launched his attack. He summoned “Lightning Release, Black Spots,” and instantly, the black lightning surrounding him converged into a ferocious lightning tiger, plunging directly into Rock Lee in mid-air. This attack had been long planned. Ever since Orochimaru’s subversive plan began, Kumogakure had been waiting for an opportunity to strike, but the swift alliance between Konoha and Sunagakure forced them to hold back once again.
But Gaara cast the “Sand Shield” in time, and sand shot out from the gourd, forming an indestructible defense in front of Rock Lee. Temari and Kankuro also quickly rushed to Gaara’s side, staring at Darui of Kumogakure with hostility.
“The alliance between Iwagakure and Kumogakure is truly unexpected. Could it be that they’re planning to join forces against Konoha?” Rock Lee asked in confusion after landing. He knew full well that the two hidden villages held a deep hatred for each other, and the grudges between the previous Raikage and Iwagakure made it impossible for the Fourth Raikage to ally with the murderer of his father.
Darui calmly answered his doubts: “I just want to test Konoha’s reaction by taking your life.”
“It seems that many forces are hostile to you. This is all because of the Fire Country’s unique geographical location. Gaara, why don’t you join hands with us Iwagakure ninjas to eliminate the three ninjas of Konoha.” Kurotsuchi appeared with his companions from Iwagakure.
“The Sand Village will not abandon its allies, and I deeply apologize for this.” Gaara responded firmly.
He walked calmly to Rock Lee’s side, and the sand around him fluttered gently.
In a secret place in Uzushio Village, Kisame and Itachi arrived and watched the conflict between the great powers together with Obito and Zetsu.
“It seems that your prediction is correct. The conflicts among the five major countries are deepening. Even if they join forces to explore the secret realm, it is only a matter of time before they become enemies.” Zetsu turned to Obito and said.
“Since the First Shinobi World War, countless new and old hatreds have accumulated between the five major countries, and it is impossible for them to unite. The current conflict is just the fuse that ignites an all-out war. After several similar disputes, the Fourth Shinobi World War is bound to break out. When the war ends and the ninjas of each country are exhausted, that will be the time for the Akatsuki organization to take action.” Obito analyzed.
Itachi narrowed his eyes slightly, while Black Zetsu seemed to be thinking about something.
“Senior Qing, which side should we support?” Chojuro asked Qing.
“We just need to wait and see what happens. What the Hidden Mist Village needs most right now is peace, not war or invasion.”
The Hidden Mist Village has just been freed from the blood mist policy and is in the recovery period. It is not appropriate to be involved in any conflict at this time.
Rock Lee looked at Gaara and the other three people beside him, and a feeling of gratitude welled up in his heart.
But he had made up his mind, and he said coldly: “If you insist on being an enemy of Konoha, don’t blame me for being cruel.” The murderous intent had taken root in his heart.
Before he finished speaking, he took a step and his figure turned into a phantom. He instantly crossed the battlefield and appeared in front of Darui of Yunyin. He slammed the flaming iron sand palm into the opponent’s chest fiercely, and set off a strong wind.
Seeing Rock Lee’s attack coming, Darui quickly retreated in fear, trying to avoid the fatal blow.
At the same time, Neji followed like a shadow, spread his four wings, and quickly approached Omoi. He swung his right hand with chakra concentrated, and the “Eight Trigrams Empty Palm” came out.
A huge handprint flew out and headed straight for Omoi.
Omoi swung his sword and jumped lightly, cleverly avoiding Neji’s empty palm. Then he changed his body shape in the air, splitting into three sword lights, slashing towards Neji from different angles.
“Cloud Flow, Lixia Slash” As Omoi moved, three bright sword beams flashed across the air.
Faced with this sudden attack, Neji was shocked but not panicked. He gently flapped his four wings, and his body spun like a whirlwind. He used “Kaiten” to protect his body and dissolved Omoi’s sword force into nothingness.
In the midst of a fierce ninjutsu duel, a figure brimming with blue chakra whirlwinded into the air, colliding fiercely with Omoi’s blade. The shockwave sent Omoi scrambling backward until his back slammed into the shattered remains of the ruins.
At the same time, Sasuke and Karui were engaged in a fierce battle, with both sides fighting fiercely and it was difficult to tell who was the winner.
Elsewhere, Gaara of Sunagakure led his men in a standoff against Kurotsuchi of Iwagakure. Gaara folded his arms, his calm gaze fixed on Kurotsuchi through the drifting sand. The sand moved around him, as if possessing its own life.
“Gaara, you’d better not get in the way,” Kurotsuchi challenged, “The Sunagakure’s strength is simply not enough to withstand the Iwagakure’s attack.”
“Sagakure and Konoha already have an alliance,” Gaara responded calmly, “If a war really breaks out, I’m afraid Iwagakure will not be able to withstand a joint counterattack from both sides.”
Kurotsuchi retorted angrily: “Don’t forget Kumogakure. Once they join the battle, they will be able to tie down Konoha, and then Sunagakure will have to fight alone.”
Gaara sneered: “It’s ridiculous for you to pin your hopes on your old enemy. The Fourth Raikage might prefer to see Sunagakure and Konoha join forces to deal a fatal blow to Iwagakure and avenge his father. Your idea that Kumogakure will restrain Konoha is just wishful thinking.” These words left Kurotsuchi speechless.
On the other side of the battlefield, Rock Lee had forced Darui into a desperate situation with the speed advantage of the sixth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu. His speed was so fast that Darui had no power to fight back.
Darui gripped his sword tightly, continuously resisting Rock Lee’s extremely powerful Iron Sand Palm. Blood was already on his knuckles, and sweat soaked his forehead.
Rock Lee flashed in front of Darui in an instant, and delivered another fierce palm strike straight to the opponent’s chest.
Today’s Darui has a clear gap between his experience and strength compared to the Fourth World War period.
Rock Lee rubbed his hands violently in the air, igniting flames. This surprised Darui deeply. He did not expect that a Chunin from Konoha could exert such powerful strength.
Darui retreated quickly and swung his sword at Rock Lee’s flaming hand.
The sword and palm collided, and the metal rang. Darui had been suppressed by Rock Lee and was retreating step by step. He knew that his defense would eventually have flaws.
Darui quickly moved back, forming seals with both hands, and activated his special move: “The Storm, Lightning, and Water Escapes: Encouragement Lock!”
This is his trump card, three escapes combined into one, with unparalleled power.
In the center of his handprint, a circle of light shone, and rays burst out from it, the light was dazzling.
Rock Lee moved nimbly, dodging the laser’s tracking. The beams changed with his movements at an astonishing speed.
Rock Lee turned suddenly, crossed his arms to form a defensive line, and the scorching laser beam hit him hard.
Although his arm felt like it was on fire and was in unbearable pain, Rock Lee still demonstrated his amazing defensive ability and withstood this powerful penetrating attack.
Rock Lee slid backward rapidly under the violent impact, his feet carving deep grooves in the ground. Despite this, the wounds on his shoulders and arms were not serious, thanks to his superb Golden Bell Cover technique. After five layers of Golden Bell Cover, his flesh had become as hard as iron, making it difficult for ordinary swords to inflict serious damage.
Nourished by the surging life force within him, Rock Lee’s wounds quickly stopped bleeding. Recklessly charging at Darui, whose chakra was nearly depleted, Rock Lee completely disregarded the potential role of Raikage he might assume. In a flash, Rock Lee was in front of Darui, clenching his fists at his belt and concentrating all his strength. He unleashed his ultimate move, “Peacock Attack,” and launched a barrage of blows. But just then, a massive octopus tentacle appeared, intercepting his flurry of attacks.
Rock Lee quickly retreated, looking past Darui to see the Eight-Tails Jinchuriki standing nearby, the octopus tentacles slowly retracting into his body. Meanwhile, Omoi, engaged in combat with Neji, forced his opponent back with a powerful sword strike. Turning, he was surprised to see Killer Bee appear before him.
“Master, why are you here?” Omoyi asked happily.
Killer Bee actually left his post secretly. He learned that his apprentice would participate in the mission of the Land of Whirlpools, and this operation brought together many forces in the ninja world. He could not suppress his inner impulse and decided to participate in it personally.
Killer Bee, driven by ambition to rise to fame in the ninja world, planned to stage a groundbreaking rap concert in the Land of Whirlpools. He cleverly escaped the Kumogakure clan, only to witness a fierce clash between the Kumogakure Sannin and Konoha. He intervened in time to avert their defeat.
“Ha, you guys are so lucky to have met a savior like me,” Kirabi jokingly said in his unique rap voice, “If it weren’t for me, you would have been wiped out long ago, haha.”
Around Rock Lee, Neji and Sasuke watched curiously.
“Xiao Li, who is that newly revealed Cloud Hidden Village master?” Sasuke asked curiously.
“That’s Killer Bee, the Eight-Tails Jinchuriki of Kumogakure. He can live in harmony with the tailed beasts and is the right-hand man of the Fourth Raikage.” Rock Lee answered in a serious tone.
Sasuke and Neji both showed interested expressions, and Gaara and Kankuro also came over after hearing this.
“Kira Beta of Kumogakure can control the tailed beasts so perfectly, there must be a trick behind it.” Kankuro speculated. He knew very well that Shukaku in Gaara’s body was often restless, and Killer Beta’s control method might bring him a glimmer of hope.
“However, with the relations between the five major countries now tense, it would be extremely difficult to obtain the secret of controlling the tailed beasts from him.” Kankuro added, knowing that this would not be easy.
Chapter 43: Kirabi (Old Version)
“I didn’t expect that Killer Bee, the Eight-Tails Jinchuriki of Kumogakure, would come in person. Our Konoha’s reinforcements are about to arrive. You’d better be careful. You may all be left here.” Rock Lee reminded in a relaxed tone.
“Stop talking nonsense, let me get rid of you first, you idiots.” Kirabi challenged in his unique rap tone.
“Then let’s have a fight. Neji, you retreat immediately.” Rock Lee ordered Neji, Gaara and the other five to retreat.
He gave Neji and Sasuke a look, suggesting that they use the people of Sand Village as cover to escape.
Kurotsuchi and others from Iwagakure were also ready to retreat. After all, facing the powerful force of the Eight-Tails Jinchuriki, they had to guard against possible fatal blows to avoid repeating the tragedy of the Third Raikage.
As Neji retreated, he said to Sasuke, “We’ll find a chance to escape later. Rock Lee’s speed and endurance are both quite impressive. The people from Kumogakure will never be able to catch up with him.”
“I know.” Sasuke replied reluctantly.
For Gaara, his support for Rock Lee and the other two was more based on cooperation between allies rather than deep feelings like he had for Naruto. In his heart, only Uzumaki Naruto could resonate with him.
Kirabi drew the rapier from his waist and announced with a smile, “Well, let me play with you, you idiots.”
Killer Bee’s body was as swift as lightning, and he rushed towards Rock Lee with unstoppable force. His sharp sword streaked through the air with lightning. Rock Lee was well aware of the sharpness of the sword and did not dare to directly take it. He skillfully used his nunchaku to flexibly defend himself. The two fought, and the sound of swords and sticks clashing was endless.
In the fierce confrontation, Killer Bee’s attacks became increasingly fierce, while Rock Lee’s defense was as strong as a solid wall. Seeing this, Darui secretly breathed a sigh of relief, thankful that Killer Bee’s timely assistance allowed Kurotsuchi and the others to evacuate safely.
During the battle, Killer Bee added another sword, and the two swords danced together, doubling their speed and offensive power, and the swords spun like a storm. Rock Lee was not to be outdone, increasing his own speed. His nunchakus were like two fire dragons, one for defense, the other for swift counterattack, directly targeting Killer Bee’s vital points.
Killer Bee sensed Rock Lee’s powerful attack and dodged it lightly, backflipping several times before deftly retreating and recalibrating his tactics. Rock Lee had already activated the sixth of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, his nunchaku blazing through the air. Killer Bee chose to outsmart Rock Lee rather than confront him with brute force, deftly avoiding the fatal blow.
Killer Bee stared sharply at the young ninja who had just graduated from the Konohagakure school a year ago, and marveled in his heart: He is so young, but his strength cannot be underestimated. It is really impressive. It’s a pity that he is not a talent of my Hidden Cloud Village.
“That’s enough warm-up. Now I’m going to get serious, kid!” Kirabi announced in a unique rhythm.
As soon as he finished speaking, Kirabi’s body shook, and several rapiers behind him flew into the sky like meteors, and then fell down one after another with his movements, cleverly integrating into his fighting posture. With seven sharp blades on his body, he seemed to have turned into a blade warrior.
This is the Seven Swords Style that Killer Bee is proud of. The seven swords complement each other, changing unpredictably and making it impossible for the opponent to predict.
Rock Lee made an emergency retreat gesture to his partner Neji, knowing that Killer Bee had already given his all and he had to face this tough battle alone.
Facing Killer Bee’s Seven Swords Style, Rock Lee was not afraid at all. He swung the nunchaku in his hands rapidly, quickly building a golden bell with a cold metallic luster.
The wind howled and howled all around him as Rock Lee swung his nunchaku so fast it seemed to rip the air apart. As his movements accelerated, the friction between the nunchaku and the air ignited a fierce flame, coating his Golden Bell Cover in a layer of blazing fire.
Rock Lee chose not to unleash a violent storm. Even if he could summon a powerful tornado, he would be no match for Killer Bee once he transformed into the eight-tailed beast. At this moment, he could only engage in a battle of endurance with Killer Bee to buy precious time for Neji and the others to evacuate safely.
In the fierce battle, Kirabi followed Rock Lee like a shadow, spinning rapidly around him, and the rapier in his hand launched swift attacks from all angles, colliding violently with Rock Lee’s nunchaku.
Killer Bee’s swordsmanship was so unpredictable that Rock Lee was overwhelmed and could only defend himself repeatedly.
Until Neji and the others evacuated safely, Rock Lee looked around and saw that they were no longer there. At this moment, he suddenly withdrew his Golden Bell Cover, swung his nunchaku, and launched a fierce attack on Killer Bee’s vital parts.
It was a decisive exchange of injury for injury. Killer Bee reacted quickly, piercing Rock Lee’s shoulder with one rapier and blocking the nunchaku that was aimed at his head with the other.
Kirabi’s heart tightened, and he felt that if he was hit on the head, even his strong body would suffer serious damage.
With a loud bang, the nunchaku struck his chest and hit the target. Rock Lee, who had opened the sixth gate, was so powerful that even Killer Bee could not withstand it. He was sent flying and fell heavily into the ruins of Uzushio Village.
Rock Lee quickly put away his nunchaku, took out several kunai with detonating tags attached, and threw them at Killer Bee.
Boom boom boom explosions rang out one after another. Just as he threw the kunai, Rock Lee fled the battlefield like the wind and disappeared from sight in an instant.
After the fierce battle, Darui and his companions had severely depleted their chakra. Facing Rock Lee’s figure, they were in awe and unable to pursue him.
Killer Bee used his octopus feet to block the attack of the detonating talisman, but was unable to completely resist the fierce blow of Rock Lee’s nunchaku. His sternum collapsed and blood gushed out.
When the dust settled, Rock Lee had vanished like a shadow.
“Master, are you injured?” Seeing this, Omoyi hurried forward and asked with concern.
“That Konoha kid is very powerful. If you meet him alone, remember to retreat immediately, you little brat.” Killer Bee warned.
“Next time, don’t hesitate. Unleash Hachi’s power directly and don’t give him any chance.”
Rock Lee successfully escaped the pursuit. After confirming his safety, he found a tree to rest and closed the secret technique of the Eight Gates.
He took a deep breath and felt all the strength in his body being drained away. The sword on his shoulder was still deeply embedded in his flesh, half of the blade had already sunk in. Fortunately, he was protected by the Golden Bell Cover and his internal organs were not injured.
Rock Lee gripped the hilt of the sword tightly, gritted his teeth and pulled it out. The severe pain almost made him faint.
He quickly adjusted his breathing, sat on the ground and practiced the Golden Bell Cover to restore his strength.
Afterwards, he took out Kirabi’s sword, threw it aside, and sat cross-legged again, concentrating on practicing the Golden Bell Cover to heal his internal injuries.
Nourished by the body’s vital energy, cells strengthened at the site of injury, increasing the resilience of muscles and bones. Rock Lee understood that such training was not without risk. He remembered that many top masters in his past lives had died prematurely in middle age due to excessive life force depletion. He had no panacea to restore his health, but fortunately, the cattle he raised were excellent blood-tonifying and qi-invigorating. Otherwise, he would have died before he could fully cultivate the Golden Bell Cover.
As cultivation deepened, the speed of the Golden Bell Cover’s improvement gradually slowed, but with each breakthrough, the strengthening effect on the physical body would increase exponentially. Thanks to the existence of magical chakra in this world, otherwise, cultivating the Golden Bell Cover would be almost impossible.
After a good rest, Rock Lee felt his energy return. The bleeding from his wounds had stopped and was slowly healing. He followed the unique signal left by Neji and the others, a secret code known only to their class, and soon discovered Neji, Gaara, and the others resting ahead.
“Rock Lee, you finally made it. We were planning to pick you up.” Kankuro expressed his concern.
“Let’s take a short break along the way and then set off now,” Rock Lee responded. “We shouldn’t stay here for long.”
The island where the Akatsuki members are hiding is still full of dangers, and perhaps some of them have already fallen into Jue’s sight.
At this moment, Itachi and Kisame have parted ways with Obito as planned. They are tasked with stirring up conflict among the five great nations and secretly blaming each other.
However, Killer Bee’s sudden appearance disrupted Akatsuki’s progress in sealing the tailed beasts. Faced with the powerful force of the Eight-Tails, they had to postpone the head-on conflict with Kumogakure.
So Akatsuki turned its attention to the three Kurotsuchi, who became the perfect pawns to spark a war between Iwagakure and Konoha. If they were killed, Ōnoki would likely be unable to resist the urge to send troops.
The power of Kirigakure is too weak to withstand the joint attack of Sand Village and Konoha. Only Iwagakure has such strength.
“Zetu, you lead Itachi and Kisame to carry out the decapitation operation and make sure that the Iwagakure ninjas are eliminated.” Obito ordered.
“Understood. My clone has received the message. Rock Lee’s strength is growing day by day, and this escape makes him even more elusive.” Zetsu responded.
Obito acquiesced, knowing full well Rock Lee’s rapid growth.
Rock Lee suggested an immediate retreat, and the other members agreed. Although Sasuke’s heart burned with the desire for revenge against Itachi, he knew that now was not the best time, so he decided to return to Konoha and train hard, hoping to defeat Itachi one day.
The six ninjas quickly crossed the dense forest of the Whirlpool Country without encountering any enemies along the way, and even the trace of the Akatsuki organization was nowhere to be found.
Rock Lee quickly deduced the true intentions of the Akatsuki organization in his mind. He secretly looked forward to their confrontation with Killer Bee, which would be an exciting battle.
After ruling out Kumogakure, if the Akatsuki organization hadn’t intercepted Sand Village and Konoha, then their targets would obviously be Kirigakure and Iwagakure. Rock Lee had no intention of interfering with this, and was even more indifferent to Kurotsuchi’s fate, even secretly hoping that she would be severely injured.
He believed that the conflict with Iwagakure was commonplace, and if Ōnoki really dared to provoke a war, then it was time to teach Iwagakure a lesson. He was a staunch supporter of the Hokage lineage and believed that only through war could the clamor of Iwagakure be quelled.
He expressed his deep gratitude to Gaara: “Gaara, thank you for the great support from Sunagakure this time. Konoha will remember this kindness and look for opportunities to repay you in the future.”
Within this close alliance, Gaara resolutely overcame numerous pressures and provided crucial support to Konoha Village, allowing Rock Lee and his companions to escape their predicament. He calmly stated, “We are allies, no need for formalities.” The three Konoha tribes cherished this profound bond and resolved to repay it in the future. After confirming the port’s safety, Neji and his companions boarded a ship prepared by the Sand Village and sailed towards the waters of the Land of Fire.
“It’s been a long time since I last saw Naruto. When I get to the Land of Fire, I’ll stop in Konoha.” Gaara agreed to Rock Lee’s invitation. When he mentioned Naruto, a genuine smile spread across his face. The two had similar backgrounds and experiences, and each held an unshakable place in the other’s heart.
The large ship of the Sand Village was well-equipped, in stark contrast to the small boat that Rock Lee and his companions had rented earlier. The helmsman and rowers on the ship demonstrated their professionalism and efficiency, foreshadowing a smooth voyage.
Chapter 44: New Techniques (Old Version)
After a delightful fishing competition, everyone relaxed their nerves and enjoyed a delicious grilled fish dinner on the boat. Holding the fragrant grilled fish, Rock Lee suggested that Sasuke try to use the Chidori technique to his full potential, achieving a state of integrated offense and defense. This technique requires profound chakra control and is not something that can be mastered overnight.
“Try to spread the Chidori all over your body and form it into one. This is not an easy task and you have to do it slowly. Now, fill your stomach first. There is no rush for ninjutsu.” Rock Lee said to Sasuke who was lost in thought.
Sasuke accepted the grilled fish and, as he ate, pondered the gap between him and Itachi. He knew that only by continuous improvement could he remain in Konoha with peace of mind. Rock Lee was confident in Sasuke’s potential. He planned to use his knowledge of these ancient ninjutsu to guide Sasuke’s innovation, confident that he would be no slower than Orochimaru. He planned to retain Sasuke with the allure of his new ninjutsu; after a year or two, Orochimaru’s allure would naturally wane.
In the early morning light, the fleet sailed towards the Fire Kingdom facing the rising sun. The new day was full of infinite possibilities and challenges.
Instead of traveling through the Land of Fire, Kurotsuchi and his companions sailed directly to the Land of Hot Water. After enjoying the hot springs and beautiful scenery of the Land of Hot Water, they set out for the Land of Earth. The journey to the Land of Hot Water was refreshing, and following the winding path, they were about to enter the territory of the Land of Earth.
Itachi and Kisame had long been lying in ambush along Kurotsuchi’s planned route, intent on killing Kurotsuchi and igniting a war between Konoha and Sunagakure. However, Obito’s plot failed to take into account Itachi’s unwavering faith in the Third Hokage’s legacy. He was determined not to let this plot succeed.
Meanwhile, the Sunagakure team had successfully reached the coast of the Land of Fire. Cautiously, they set foot on familiar ground, a sense of relief filling their hearts. Meanwhile, in a hidden Orochimaru base, he was anxiously awaiting news of the five men he had dispatched. Kimimaro and Jirobo were killed in battle, and the remaining three had defected to the Akatsuki. Orochimaru’s insider information within Akatsuki, while providing only minor information, was sufficient to provide him with a partial understanding of the situation.
The betrayal of these three people caused Orochimaru to suffer unprecedented humiliation in front of the Akatsuki organization, especially the vicious words of Scorpion, which were heard by Orochimaru without any reservation.
“Don’t think you can rest easy just by joining the Akatsuki organization. I will bring those three traitors to justice.” Orochimaru’s voice was filled with coldness and anger.
Orochimaru has always been the one to betray others, and he never thought that one day he would be betrayed. This made him realize that he had been too lenient towards his subordinates in the past, which gave them the courage to betray him.
“Lord Orochimaru, should we continue to cooperate with Akatsuki and launch a second attack on Konoha?” Kabuto Yakushi asked cautiously from the side.
“Kabuto, you seem to be pleased with my failure.” Orochimaru stared at him sharply.
Kabuto Yakushi couldn’t help sweating on his forehead. “That’s absolutely not my intention, Lord Orochimaru. I just want to confirm whether we still need to join forces with the Akatsuki organization as originally planned.”
“No need. The plan needs to be readjusted. Our ninja strength is still insufficient, especially the elite ninja. The Four Sound Ninjas were vulnerable and failed to complete the mission of kidnapping Sasuke. They even cost Kimimaro his life. I obviously underestimated the strength of Li Luo and others.
Let Sasuke stay in Konoha for now. He is destined to be mine. When the time comes, I will settle the old scores with Itachi.” Orochimaru’s tone was full of determination and hatred.
The betrayal of the Four set off alarm bells in Orochimaru’s heart. He began to doubt whether those seemingly loyal subordinates around him would also betray him one after another.
“Kabuto, have you ever thought of betraying me? If that day ever comes, I will let you choose your own way of dying. After all, you have helped me a lot.” Orochimaru stared at Kabuto with a sharp gaze.
“Absolutely impossible. My loyalty to Lord Orochimaru is evident to all heaven and earth.” Kabuto knelt on the ground, sweat dripping down his face as he responded.
“I hope so.”
On the other hand, Rock Lee and his companions were galloping through the forest of the Land of Fire, and soon they met Tenten, Teacher Gai, and the Asuma class.
“Lee, Neji, it’s great that you’ve returned safely. I’ve been terrified since you left, afraid that something bad might have happened to you.” Tenten’s eyes were full of joy.
“You should have more confidence in us. Even when facing a strong enemy, we have the ability to escape.” Rock Lee replied with a smile.
“Xiao Li, you are indeed my pride. Youth is an unremitting run that no enemy can catch up with.” Teacher Kai showed his shining smile.
“We were able to escape unscathed this time thanks to the help of Gaara and the other three,” Rock Lee explained.
“What exactly is it like?” Asma asked curiously.
“I’ll explain this in detail after we meet the Hokage,” Rock Lee replied.
Since Gaara and the others are not from Konoha Village, some things cannot be discussed openly in front of them.
Asma quickly realized this and realized that there were outsiders around.
After entering Konoha, everyone separated, and Gaara and the other two went to Naruto’s home. Throughout the story, the description of female characters maintained an appropriate distance, without describing their physical characteristics and clothing details in detail.
Rock Lee and his group walked into the Hokage’s office.
They first handed in the results of the mission, “Lady Tsunade, we found these basic scrolls in the secret room of the Whirlpool Country, and accidentally discovered the pattern of the Shikigami Fūjin. I think other scrolls may also contain unknown secrets, so I brought them all back.” Rock Lee reported in detail everything that happened in Whirlpool Village, including the thrilling process of the Eight-Tails Jinchuriki rescuing Darui and others, and the hostile attitude of Iwagakure towards Konoha.
Tsunade thought deeply and said, “It seems that Kumogakure deliberately chose this time to provoke a dispute. They may think that our Konoha is in a weak position. Facing the simultaneous threat from Kumogakure and Iwagakure, we must be vigilant. I plan to strengthen surveillance at the border of Yu Kingdom to prevent a large-scale invasion from Kumogakure.”
She turned to Shikamaru and asked, “As the village’s new generation of think tank, what are your thoughts on the current situation?”
Shikamaru analyzed calmly, “Since the last joint attack by Orochimaru and Sunagakure, Konoha’s strength has been severely damaged. Iwagakure and Kumogakure are obviously testing our remaining strength and preparing for their next move.”
Everyone present nodded in agreement.
Although Shikamaru was eliminated early in the Chunin Exam, his team has completed their missions very well recently. His high intelligence and strategic thinking have gradually become known to the public. He is indeed a piece of gold that shines wherever he goes.
“In response to the recent events in the Land of Whirlpools, I will issue a warning notice to all countries, reminding them to be vigilant against the actions of the Akatsuki organization. Xiao Li, you have worked hard too, go back and have a good rest.” Tsunade ordered seriously.
Following Tsunade’s orders, everyone left the Hokage Building, each heading in a different direction. Rock Lee headed straight for Naruto’s usual training grounds, while Gaara decided to head to the woods east of Konoha Village for a friendly duel with Naruto. There, Naruto attacked Gaara with swift speed and immense power, making Gaara’s sand defense seem effortless.
“Naruto, it’s only been a few days since we last met, and your strength has improved by leaps and bounds,” Rock Lee observed, praising him. It was clear that Naruto had put in a lot of hard work in private, in addition to his daily training.
“Xiao Li, you are here! I heard that you have fought with many ninjas in the Land of Whirlpools. Gaara told me everything. I really hope that I can have such an experience.” Naruto said with longing.
Rock Lee gave a warm smile, then turned to Gaara and said, “Gaara, since you are in Konoha, you must try my special barbecue. This is a way of thanking you for your help in Uzushio Village. I raised all the beef with great care.”
Kankuro then interrupted, “I’ve heard that the beef you raise is of exceptional quality and has miraculous effects on replenishing qi and blood. I must taste it this time.”
“Don’t worry, Naruto, I will make this party worth your coming.” Rock Lee promised Naruto and the others, “You go to my house first, I will prepare the beef.”
As the sun set and night gradually fell, Rock Lee first notified Neji and others, then went to his own ranch, selected a cow, slaughtered it, and brought the beef back home.
At this time, Naruto and his friends had already lit a bonfire at Rock Lee’s house and were having a pleasant conversation with Gaara, but Sasuke remained silent. Itachi’s deep hatred was always with him, making it difficult for him to blend into the noise and laughter.
“The beef is ready, you can start grilling it,” Kankuro announced.
“Woof!”
Suddenly, a dog barking was heard. Rock Lee turned around and saw that it was Akamaru running towards him, followed closely by Kiba.
“Sorry, Rock Lee, it’s because your beef was so tempting that Akamaru couldn’t help but run over when he saw it.” Kiba explained.
“It’s okay. Our friends from the Sand Village are here today. This is a good opportunity for us to get to know each other. Maybe we will have the opportunity to cooperate in the future.” Rock Lee responded.
Although Kiba had known Gaara and the others during the Chunin Exams, they were not familiar with each other.
The barbecue process was simple and easy. Rock Lee hardly had to do anything. Everyone cut the beef into strips and placed them one by one on the stone slab to grill.
Rock Lee sat side by side with Sasuke, surrounded by classmates who knew little about him. Despite having spent six years together at the ninja academy, Sasuke rarely interacted with other classes. Rock Lee then broke the silence, saying, “Take it easy today; it will be beneficial for your training. Starting tomorrow, I’ll help you research new ninjutsu. If you have any questions, we can consult with Sensei Kakashi. While I’m not as skilled as he is, I can still offer you some ninjutsu ideas. Sensei Kakashi is a genius, and his creation of the Chidori might inspire you.”
Sasuke nodded silently in agreement.
At that moment, Choji was drawn in by the aroma of roast beef. “Lee, are you guys roasting beef? I can smell it from way off,” Rock Lee enthusiastically replied, “Choji, haven’t you had dinner yet? Why don’t you join us?” Choji, never one to refuse a good meal, happily sat down and began to enjoy the meal.
Rock Lee casually asked, “Didn’t Shikamaru come with you?”
“Shikamaru chose to avoid the tediousness and is sleeping peacefully at home.” Choji mentioned incoherently while chewing his food.
Rock Lee nodded in agreement, thinking that this was very consistent with Shikamaru’s style.
As night fell, after dinner, everyone talked until late at night. Gaara and his three companions stayed overnight at Rock Lee’s house, and set off back to the Sand Village at dawn.
The next morning, at the entrance of Konoha Village, Lee Locket came to see them off.
“Be careful on your way back. It’s best to notify the Sand Village to send someone to pick you up in advance. Now that the Akatsuki organization is stirring up disputes everywhere, there is no guarantee that they will not attack you and cause conflicts between countries.” Rock Lee reminded.
Gaara nodded slightly, “I have already informed Maki, they should be on the way.” There was a rare emotion fluctuation on his face.
Rock Lee nodded again, “Have a safe journey.”
After watching Gaara and the other two disappear from sight, Rock Lee turned and walked back to the village. Soon he began his morning jogging training. On the way, he met Sasuke, Neji, Tenten, and Naruto one after another.
“Xiao Li, have Gaara and the others left?” Neji asked while running.
Rock Lee nodded in confirmation.
Afterwards, everyone began to adjust their breathing and gradually pick up speed. Naruto and Sasuke had become adept at controlling their breathing, maintaining the habit of taking a deep breath every twenty steps.
Chapter 45 Chidori and Thunder (Old Version)
Rock Lee and Sasuke raced past Neji and his group. Everyone gathered, and Neji curiously inquired about Sasuke’s new technique. “How confident are you, Kakashi-sensei, about this new technique?” Rock Lee suggested that after their morning practice, they go to Kakashi to discuss the situation. Sasuke tacitly agreed to the plan.
Naruto, standing by, was filled with envy and eagerly expressed to Rock Lee his desire to develop a new ninjutsu. Rock Lee patiently explained, “Developing a new ninjutsu is not easy. It depends on your chakra attributes. Go get a chakra test strip from Kakashi-sensei later to determine your attributes, and then we can work together on developing it.”
Naruto was so excited after hearing this that he began to imagine the glorious moment when he would develop a powerful ninjutsu in the future and become the Hokage. Looking at Naruto’s expression, Rock Lee couldn’t help but shake his head and smile.
After breakfast, Naruto hurried to find Kakashi, while Rock Lee and the others headed to the training ground. There, Rock Lee instructed Sasuke: “Use Chidori first, and then try to expand the Chidori’s attack range.” Sasuke obeyed and prepared to try his hand seals.
Sasuke’s palms quickly gathered chakra, and after undergoing a dual transformation of form and nature, the Chidori jutsu took shape. This seemingly simple move, however, required a month of painstaking practice under Kakashi’s careful guidance to master it, due to its difficulty as an A-rank ninjutsu. This demonstrates the power of ninjutsu.
Lightning surged across Sasuke’s left arm, a sound like birdsong, thrilling. Rock Lee instructed, “Sasuke, try to expand the Chidori’s range. Let the lightning follow your will, directing it to my hand. Try to feel it, to control it, to change the Chidori’s form.”
He further inspired: “Imagine your chakra as flowing water, freely and effortlessly. The key to Chidori is the word ‘flow’. Only by mastering the flow can you achieve breakthroughs in the development of subsequent ninjutsu.”
Sasuke tried his best to follow Rock Lee’s advice, but changing the Chidori’s form was no easy feat. Even Kakashi, after more than a decade, had only managed to evolve it into Raikiri, a subtle change. Sasuke struggled to control the lightning in his hand, attempting to change its shape, but soon his efforts ended with the Chidori extinguishing itself.
“Take a rest, Sasuke. Your physical strength still needs to be improved. After all, according to teacher Kakashi, you can only safely use Chidori twice a day at most. You may be injured the third time. Twice a day is enough for the experiment of new ninjutsu. In the remaining time, join our training and strengthen your body, so that the burden brought by Chidori will be reduced.” Rock Lee persuaded.
Sasuke nodded silently. He knew in his heart that rushing for success would only backfire, and it was unrealistic to catch up with Itachi in a short period of time.
Meanwhile, Kakashi pondered Rock Lee’s words, attempting to circulate the Chidori around him, covering his entire body. He performed the Shadow Clone Technique, simultaneously forming hand seals with both clones, and Chidori emerged from his hands. Kakashi experimented with changing the Chidori’s form, and in that instant, the two separated Chidori unleashed chains of lightning, colliding with each other.
A glint flashed in Kakashi’s eyes, and he moved his shadow clone a few steps away from the main body. The two tried to change Chidori’s form again. This time, due to the increased distance, the lightning chains did not connect. Perhaps this would create a new ninjutsu, Kakashi hoped.
On the other hand, Rock Lee tried to merge the chakra with the life energy in the Golden Bell Cover, but found that the two were like two parallel lines, which could never intersect and maintained their respective boundaries in the body.
In the original world structure, Tantric practitioners had already explored the secrets of Chakra. As a true Shaolin disciple and a Zen disciple, Rock Lee had frequent exchanges with Tantric Buddhism.
Tantric practice, the fastest way to achieve this, is to practice the Trinity—the Secret of Body, the Secret of Speech, and the Secret of Mind. Perhaps, combining this method with the Shaolin Golden Bell Guard could create a unique chakra, and the vitality of the two might complement each other.
In this world, the Golden Bell Cover has mutated. Rock Lee secretly thinks that the Tantric Trinity practice may also usher in new changes.
“Sasuke, when you do the experiment later, don’t rush to use Chidori. Try to change its form and let the lightning gather into a Senbon. Let’s start with the most basic.” Rock Lee instructed.
The Senbon Jutsu is much simpler than the Chidori Ryu, especially when only a single Senbon is condensed, and only the form of the Chidori needs to be adjusted.
Sasuke understood the point and began to practice.
As he formed the seals, lightning-attribute chakra slowly flowed out from his palms, gradually gathering into the shape of a Thousand Bones.
“Well done. Now try to control its shape so that it is closer to the real Senbon. Then, throw it out, aiming at the target on the tree.” Rock Lee instructed.
Being able to successfully condense Senbon was already a big step forward. Chidori training had improved Sasuke’s chakra control, allowing him to form Senbon with only a small amount of chakra, which also reduced the burden on his body.
Sasuke swung his arm and threw it at the target in the forest. With a “whoosh”, the thousand lightning bolts hit the center of the target accurately. However, these thousand lightning bolts were still in a fluctuating state, continuously releasing electricity, and soon gradually dissipated into the air.
Sasuke persevered, refining his skills, and his Senbon became increasingly standardized. By dusk, his lightning Senbon had demonstrated remarkable stability. While it still produced sporadic sparks, his progress was evident.
“Well done, Sasuke,” Rock Lee praised. “Lightning-attribute chakra is very malleable. The fact that you can now condense it into a single senbon is a qualitative leap. Next, try increasing the number of senbon. Once you become proficient, we will move on to the next stage of training.”
Sasuke nodded excitedly, unable to hide the joy on his face. Even if he had only completed the basic Senbon, it was a moment of self-realization for him.
Although Rock Lee did not feel the same sense of accomplishment as Sasuke, he understood that even without his guidance, Sasuke would eventually master this skill, and his intervention only accelerated the process.
As the morning wore on, the sky grew slightly overcast, and Rock Lee and his companions began their morning exercises. Sasuke seemed particularly energetic after his achievement of a thousand lightning chakras yesterday.
“Xiao Li, I took a chakra attribute test yesterday, and the results showed that I am wind attribute. What kind of ninjutsu do you think we can create together?” Naruto asked expectantly.
“Right now, I don’t have any particularly good suggestions. You should focus on training the changes in chakra form and nature. This is the foundation for mastering any ninjutsu,” Rock Lee said seriously. “Your age and ability are a bit limited for advanced techniques like Wind Style and Rasenshuriken. Attempting them too early will only cause harm. You need more time to hone your chakra control skills.”
Rock Lee has a long-term goal: to give Naruto a solid foundation, preparing him for the future mastery of advanced ninjutsu. He himself is immersed in the “Trinity” training method of his previous life’s esoteric Buddhism, believed to be a way to rapidly unlock the body’s potential. In the world of Naruto, such training may lead to unexpected breakthroughs.
Meanwhile, Sasuke sought Rock Lee’s advice on developing his Lightning Release jutsu, preparing to name his own move based on Kakashi’s Chidori. “Lee, how should I improve upon the Thunder Senbon I’m developing? Also, what do you think would be a suitable name for this move?” Sasuke asked.
“Since it was inspired by Kakashi-sensei’s Chidori, the name ‘Chidori Senbon’ seems very appropriate,” Rock Lee suggested.
Sasuke agreed. To him, the name wasn’t important; what was important was the joy of his own continuous progress.
The sounds of morning exercise gradually died down as everyone focused on regulating their breathing, striving to avoid showing any flaws in their endurance training. Rock Lee felt a surge of pride as he witnessed Sasuke and Naruto’s perseverance.
After breakfast, they arrived at the second training ground, ready to continue their training.
“Teacher Kakashi, you are waiting here so early. Have you had a breakthrough in the conception of the new technique?” Rock Lee was surprised that Kakashi was waiting here so early. After all, he was famous for being late in Konoha.
“Well, I conducted some experiments last night and got some inspiration. I came here today to discuss with you.” Kakashi revealed his new progress, which aroused Sasuke’s interest. He was well aware of Kakashi’s innovative ability.
“Teacher, please show us. We are also studying the art of lightning escape. We hope to take this opportunity to exchange experiences and make progress together.” Rock Lee asked expectantly.
Kakashi secretly marveled at their efficiency and nodded in agreement.
“This technique is still a work in progress, but I’m willing to share it with you.” Kakashi said, performing the “Shadow Clone Technique”. The two Kakashis stood facing each other, palms facing each other, ready to show his research results.
Lightning intertwined like threads in the palms of the two Kakashis’ hands. As they controlled the lightning, it gradually condensed, forming two tentacle-like chains of lightning. As their steps synchronized forward, the chains intertwined and extended, eventually converging to form a formidable lightning web.
Their target was a massive tree that required several men to embrace. As the lightning chain stabilized, losing its initial ripples, the tree appeared vulnerable to the powerful ninjutsu. The lightning chain effortlessly pierced the trunk, bisecting it. The smooth cut demonstrated the ninjutsu’s precision and power.
Witnessing this scene, Rock Lee felt a ripple of memory, reminding him of Kakashi’s ultimate move in the original story, which was powerful enough to sever the tailed beast. Sasuke and Naruto, standing by, were also deeply captivated by this shocking scene. The speed of lightning was so fast that it even surpassed that of a sharp blade.
“Teacher Kakashi, I want to learn this ninjutsu too!” Naruto shouted eagerly, his eyes flashing with desire and determination.
Rock Lee could only smile helplessly, understanding Naruto’s eagerness. Kakashi responded with an awkward smile, saying he felt his decision during the Chunin Exams was lacking, and he intended to make amends.
“Naruto, your chakra attribute is wind, which is not suitable for using lightning-attribute ninjutsu. But don’t worry, we can develop new ninjutsu based on your characteristics. As for this lightning ninjutsu, it still needs to be improved. As long as you master the principles and train hard, Sasuke, you have a great chance of learning it.” Kakashi’s eyes flashed with wisdom, and he shared his knowledge without reservation.
Naruto’s expectant expression immediately dimmed after hearing Kakashi’s words.
“Sasuke, show me the ninjutsu you discussed yesterday,” Kakashi instructed.
“Um.”
Sasuke responded by extending his palm and gathering lightning chakra at his fingertips. The violent lightning quickly condensed into a sharp senbon. He swung his hand and threw it, and the senbon flew through like lightning, piercing the bull’s eye with unerring precision.
“A lightning-attribute Senbon? He mastered such a level of chakra concentration in just one day. Sasuke’s talent is truly outstanding.” Kakashi secretly admired in his heart.
“Teacher Kakashi, the idea behind this ninjutsu is to quickly form numerous Senbon and fire them collectively. Not only are the lightning Senbons much faster than metal darts, but once they hit the target, they can also cause paralysis, making them very suitable for sneak attacks and assassinations,” Rock Lee explained in detail.
As an experienced member of the Anbu, Kakashi naturally knew the practical value of this ninjutsu.
“I still have tasks for the village to deal with today. We can have an in-depth discussion on ninjutsu in a few days,” Kakashi arranged.
As one of Konoha’s top jonin, Kakashi’s busyness is well known, and everyone expressed their understanding.
Watching from the sidelines, Naruto felt a mixture of envy and anxiety. Seeing Sasuke not only complete his ninjutsu development but also receive personal instruction from Kakashi, effectively mastering two new skills in a row, while Naruto himself hadn’t mastered either, he couldn’t help but worry about whether he would ever surpass that proud Sasuke.
Chapter 46: Discussion (Old Version)
Rock Lee and four other ninjas arrived at the Hokage’s office at Tsunade’s invitation, only to see Tsunade buried in documents.
“Grandma Tsunade, do you have any difficult task for us?” Naruto asked curiously as he stepped into the door.
Tsunade glanced over and Naruto immediately shrank back, Tsunade’s lesson still fresh in his mind, and he couldn’t help but feel a little scared.
Tsunade handed a note to Rock Lee, “Look, the three-man Kurotsuchi team from Iwagakure was attacked by Akatsuki in the Land of Hot Springs, and only Kurotsuchi escaped.”
Rock Lee was thinking, guessing that Itachi might have intentionally let Kurotsuchi go to avoid Ōnoki’s revenge on Konoha.
“Lady Tsunade, is this information credible?” Rock Lee asked.
“This was obtained through our secret intelligence network and should be credible,” Tsunade replied.
Everyone nodded after hearing this and stopped asking questions. After all, these secret methods should not be discussed publicly.
“Fortunately, Akatsuki’s conspiracy failed. Otherwise, once Ohnoki sent troops to the Land of Earth and the Land of Lightning joined the battle, Konoha and the Sand Village would be in an extremely passive situation, and years of peace might be destroyed.” Rock Lee analyzed.
Tsunade nodded in agreement with Rock Lee.
“If we have no other business, we will take our leave. Our team is trying to develop a new lightning technique based on Kakashi’s Chidori,” Rock Lee reported.
“There is a new task here. Go and inform the Asuma class and the Yuhi Kurenai class that all members will go to the Konoha Ninja School tomorrow. Each person will be responsible for leading three students to let them experience the daily life of a ninja in advance.” Tsunade gave the order.
Rock Lee and the others nodded in agreement. Naruto was about to speak when he was stopped by Tsunade’s stern look.
They returned to the second training ground once again, Sasuke continued to focus on practicing Chidori Senbon while Neji and Tenten started sparring.
During the sparring, Tenten continuously launched various hidden weapons at Neji, of varying weights, while Neji worked hard to improve the efficiency and durability of Kaiten, trying to reduce chakra waste while maintaining its strong defensive power.
Tiantian realized in actual combat that hidden weapons should not only be light, but also heavy weapons are needed to counter the blows of wind-style ninjas.
Meanwhile, Rock Lee was in a quiet corner, practicing the mysterious hand seals. He silently chanted mantras, visualized the Buddha in his mind, and practiced the three secrets of body, speech, and mind.
“Rock Lee, your movements are really strange. What’s the secret behind it?” Naruto walked towards Rock Lee with curiosity.
“This comes from the Buddhist practice method. It is rumored to be able to cultivate the mind and enlighten the heart. I want to verify it myself.” Rock Lee answered while adjusting his posture.
“Rock Lee, let’s have a friendly match. I feel like I’ve made significant improvements recently.” Naruto suggested excitedly.
“That’s exactly what I want. Let me see your results, but don’t cry if you lose.” Rock Lee chuckled.
“It’s still unknown who will win or lose!” Naruto responded confidently.
Although Naruto had only been doing morning exercises with the team for a few days, as his breathing became more regular, he was no longer as tired as before. Although his strength had not increased substantially, he believed that he had made significant progress.
The two stood face to face, Naruto took the lead in attacking, waving his hands and performing the “Shadow Clone Technique”.
In an instant, five Naruto clones surrounded Rock Lee and attacked him together.
Rock Lee responded calmly, quiet as a virgin, swift as a rabbit. The first clone attacked him in the face, but Rock Lee easily dispatched it with a sweep of his left leg. Then, with a spinning right leg, he knocked down the second clone.
With a swift strike of his fists, he destroyed two more clones. Finally, only one remained, and Rock Lee defeated it with a long kick of his leg. He then began to search for the hidden real body, demonstrating his extraordinary agility and strength.
“Watch me, Rock Lee!” Naruto’s voice echoed in the air, and his Rasengan shone in the sunlight, rushing straight towards Rock Lee on the ground.
“Don’t jump to conclusions,” Rock Lee responded, quickly extending his right hand and accurately catching Naruto’s attack. “The outcome is still unknown.”
Naruto’s vision blurred as Rock Lee threw him aside, colliding with a thick tree trunk. With a bang, the shadow clone vanished in a puff of smoke.
At this moment, the stone on the ground suddenly deformed, disguised as Naruto, and launched a surprise attack on Rock Lee.
“Ha, let’s see how you can dodge this time!” Naruto’s laughter was full of pride.
But Rock Lee was no pushover, deftly dodging the blow and counterattacking with a headbutt. His iron head technique was so strong that Naruto was no match for him.
Bang! There was another crash, and Naruto staggered and fell, with stars flashing before his eyes.
“Oops, that was too heavy.” Rock Lee thought to himself. He was worried that Naruto might have suffered a concussion. If it were an ordinary person, this blow would probably be more serious.
He quickly squatted down, patted Naruto’s cheek, and called out anxiously: “Naruto, wake up, are you okay?” Rock Lee’s voice was full of concern.
Soon, Naruto slowly woke up, rubbing his head and complaining in pain. A large, noticeable bump quickly appeared on his forehead.
Looking at Naruto running around, Rock Lee secretly breathed a sigh of relief. He was really worried that this guy would accidentally hurt himself.
“Naruto, your speed and strength have improved significantly. I was almost surpassed by you. Fortunately, I am tough enough.” Rock Lee said appreciatively.
After giving praise, always remember to give encouragement.
When Naruto heard Lee’s praise, he had already forgotten his headache and proudly acknowledged the other party’s affirmation.
“Let’s hurry up and complete the mission given to us by the Hokage.” Rock Lee urged.
Naruto scratched his head and asked in confusion, “What mission?”
“You have to notify the Asuma class and the Yuhi Kurenai class to gather at the Ninja School tomorrow so that the students can experience real ninja life. This is the latest instruction from the Hokage.” Rock Lee said helplessly.
“Oh, I actually remembered it, but I didn’t think of it in time. Let’s go and inform them quickly. I still have to continue training when we come back.” Naruto answered anxiously.
Rock Lee shook his head secretly, thinking that if he hadn’t reminded him, Naruto might have really forgotten about it completely.
“Then let’s go.”
They first arrived at the training grounds of Kiba and the other two, and soon discovered them practicing their reconnaissance skills. Teacher Hong was coaching Hinata’s Byakugan, Kiba’s sense of smell, and Shino’s bug skills.
Rock Lee and Naruto quickly conveyed the mission to the two classes and asked them to gather at the Konoha Ninja School on time tomorrow.
“Xiao Li, I have to go to school to accompany those little brats tomorrow. It’s so boring. I might as well go exercise.” Naruto said while complaining.
“Don’t think like that. This is actually an exercise in leadership for us ninjas. Commanding a team, completing tasks, and protecting companions are the indispensable cornerstones on the road to becoming Hokage.” Rock Lee patiently enlightened him.
When Naruto heard this, his eyes immediately sparkled, “Ah, so that’s how it is. Then I love going on missions with the kids the most!”
Rock Lee secretly shook his head, thinking that the change was too fast, almost seamless.
The next day, Rock Lee learned that he would be one of the leaders of this mission, responsible for evaluating the teams and conducting combat drills simulating enemy ninjas.
When they arrived at the Ninja School, most of the children were already there, and they were all very excited. After all, this was their first time to carry out a mission with real ninjas.
Rock Lee noticed Konohamaru and three others among these children. It was obvious that they were students of this class.
“Brother Li, are you also the ninja leading the team? We will act together with Brother Naruto.” Konohamaru asked excitedly.
“No, I’m one of the instructors this time, responsible for testing your abilities. You three must work hard.” Rock Lee said seriously.
The three children nodded firmly.
Soon, the gathering time arrived, and Shikamaru was selected to be the assistant instructor for this mission, assisting the instructors to successfully complete the test.
The commander of this operation, Mr. Iruka, issued the trial guidelines to each team and distributed a map to each team, officially starting the mission.
“Xiao Li, you are responsible for testing the cooperation between the captains and members in actual combat, but remember, don’t win in the end. We must use this opportunity to enhance the children’s confidence and let them understand that as long as they work together, there is nothing they can’t overcome.” Teacher Iruka warned seriously.
“I understand, teacher.” Xiao Li said to himself, hoping that his performance would be realistic enough so that the children would not see through it.
In the dense forest, Xiao Li observed the children, under the guidance of the ninja, step by step to unlock various mechanisms and learn about various herbs.
He set his first target on Shikamaru, who was teaching the children the skills of identifying herbs. Xiao Li took out a piece of black cloth, gently covered his face with it, and transformed himself into a thief.
“Hehe, it looks like you are a group of little brats from Konoha. Hand over your belongings quickly, otherwise don’t blame me for being ruthless.” Xiao Li jumped out in an exaggerated posture and challenged Choji’s team.
Shikamaru saw through Lee’s disguise at a glance and thought it was too perfunctory as he didn’t even change his clothes.
The three children immediately hid behind Shikamaru, looking a little scared.
“Don’t worry, leave this to me! As the captain, I will protect your safety. Thieves, come and see my power!” Choji declared loudly, then transformed into a “human bomb chariot” and rolled towards Rock Lee at a rapid speed.
Rock Lee took the attack lightly, and then pretended to be defeated, allowing Choji to seemingly easily overcome his defense.
“Today’s competition allowed me to witness the strength of the Konoha ninjas, Choji. After I have trained hard for decades, I will definitely come back to avenge my previous defeat.” As soon as he finished speaking, Rock Lee quickly disappeared into the woods.
“Brother Choji, you are so awesome! When I become a ninja in the future, I want to be as strong as you.” A child said with longing.
There was a surge of joy in Choji’s heart. In the past, only Shikamaru thought he was an outstanding ninja, but now, this recognition came from the innocent praise of a child.
“When you become ninjas in the future, you will definitely become elites like me.” Shikamaru encouraged proudly.
“We will definitely work hard, Captain!” the children responded in unison.
Afterwards, Rock Lee fought against several teams, deliberately losing each time without revealing any flaws.
Night fell quickly, accompanied by lightning, thunder, and heavy rain. Iruka-sensei hurriedly ordered all teams to camp at the foot of the mountain and wait out the bad weather.
“Teacher, Naruto and his team are missing. We only found this backpack, which contains some food supplies.” Shikamaru reported.
“We must go find them immediately. In this weather, any mistake could lead to serious consequences.” Teacher Iruka said firmly.
The group quickly headed towards the mountainous area near where the package was found, and soon spotted Naruto and his companions trying to climb to the top.
Suddenly, a huge rock rolled down from the top of the mountain.
“Look at my ‘Konoha Gourami Cyclone’!”
Rock Lee quickly rushed towards the rock and shattered it into pieces with a powerful kick.
“Lee, thank you for saving us.” Naruto expressed his gratitude.
“Don’t mention it, this is my job. But you have to think about how to face Lady Tsunade’s anger.” Rock Lee reminded with a smile, then walked away, leaving Naruto trembling with fear as he imagined Tsunade’s anger.
In this esoteric world, people deified powerful ninjas and created gods and Buddhas to believe in, but these gods and Buddhas lacked practical reference value, and the deification system was not perfect.
Instead of believing in those fictional gods and Buddhas, it is better to look inward and reflect on yourself, regard yourself as the Buddha, and combine the vitality of the Golden Bell Cover with the power of Chakra, and you may reap unexpected results.
At the same time, in the Land of Lightning, Killer Bee led Darui and two disciples back to the Hidden Cloud Village.
As soon as the guard saw Kirabi, he hurried forward to report:
“Hi-sama, during the time you were missing, Raikage-sama was very angry and has sent many teams to search for you.”
“I took those two foolish apprentices to the Whirlpool Country. If I hadn’t gone with them, they would have been wiped out long ago,” Kirabi replied in his unique rap rhythm.
Chapter 47 Getting Started (Old Version)
In Konoha Village, within Rock Lee’s residence, he sat in silence, his hands expertly forming the Ten Directions Buddha Seal. He softly chanted a mysterious mantra, his mind lost in contemplation, merging himself with the universe, becoming one with the Buddhas of the heavens.
Rock Lee quickly cast aside all his worries, feeling a surge of energy, like holy light, bathing his body, gradually strengthening it. This was the mysterious Trinity training method, designed to tap into the human body’s potential, explore its inner mysteries, and allow one to skip the long stages of training and advance directly to the realm of physical Buddhahood.
Rock Lee was not sure whether he could truly become a Buddha, but he knew that strengthening his body was the most important task at the moment.
As the hand seals changed subtly, the spells he chanted also changed. He had already informed Neji and his companions that he needed a few days of solitude to deeply summarize his tactics and experience, so he was able to avoid being disturbed.
Masculine energy surged through Rock Lee’s body, like a rising sun in his dantian, warm and brilliant, healing the hidden injuries accumulated from long training and missions. His breathing became deeper and more rhythmic, and his internal organs seemed to become clearer.
In the blink of an eye, three days passed. Rock Lee remained motionless, like a statue, his hand seals silently shifting. His mind seemed to have entered a world of radiant light, where he became the core of the world, a Buddha incarnate, controlling all existence.
In Rock Lee’s training ground, the shadow of a Buddha with a face similar to his was looming. The majestic face indicated the entry into the trinity of Tantric practice.
Rock Lee, who had experienced many hardships and failed to gain a glimpse of the secrets in his previous life, achieved a breakthrough in this mysterious world in just a few days.
His consciousness extended outward like tentacles, and he began to sense the surrounding aura and natural energy. This ubiquitous energy, however, concealed murderous intent.
Rock Lee, who is well aware of the dangers of natural energy, does not absorb it hastily. He has lofty ideals and longs to go to the three legendary holy places to practice the supreme Sage Mode.
Although the Summoning Realm is connected to the Naruto world, the path to the holy land is fraught with uncertainty. As the Toad Sage said, it would take over a month to reach Konoha from Myoboku Mountain. Without the guidance of the mountains, it would be difficult to reach.
However, as his Trinity skills continued to improve, Rock Lee became convinced that he would be able to accurately grasp the natural energy distribution of this world and find the spiritual world.
At the end of the practice, his eyes shone with golden light. As the practice ended, the leaked energy gradually calmed down until it disappeared without a trace.
Rock Lee slowly rose from three days of meditation. His body showed no sign of stiffness, but instead, with a bang, it seemed even more agile. When he arrived at the second training ground, night had quietly fallen. The ground was empty; Neji and his companions had already left.
He stomped his foot down, and the ground gave way, leaving a deep crater. A fleeting shadow stopped before the tree. Rock Lee lashed out with his right leg like a whip, unleashing a gust of wind. With a thud, the stout tree snapped at his leg’s impact. He felt a surge of strength and speed, his body’s potential further unleashed.
Knowing that in the upcoming Fourth Shinobi World War, he would be a mere spectator unless he cultivated to the Eighth Gate. Facing the powerful enemy Kaguya Ōtsutsuki, the power of the Eighth Gate alone was far from enough, and the slightest mistake could lead to his exile to another dimension.
After a period of arduous training, Rock Lee unleashed every move taught by his teacher, Kai, at the second training ground, leaving the field in ruins. Feeling his control over his power had reached perfection, he returned to the village. Konoha Village was ablaze with lights, and the nightlife was in full swing. Having fasted for three days, Rock Lee headed straight for the barbecue restaurant, seeking to replenish his depleted body with much-needed energy.
Rock Lee thought that since he had missed the opportunity to go up the mountain, he would have to stay in Konoha Village for dinner.
When he walked into the barbecue restaurant, he unexpectedly found Asuma, Shikamaru and his friends enjoying barbecue there. Choji was eating with relish, his cheeks puffed up.
“Teacher Asuma, what a coincidence to meet you here.” Rock Lee greeted.
“Xiao Li, you haven’t eaten yet? Let’s eat together.” Asma invited warmly.
Rock Lee knew that Asuma was financially strapped, and if he joined, he feared it would only add to their burden. “Thank you, Sensei. Today, I want to focus on researching various barbecue seasonings and refining my secret recipe. I’ll have the opportunity to invite everyone to taste my exclusive barbecue sometime in the future,” Rock Lee politely declined.
When Dingci heard this, his eyes sparkled. “That’s great, Xiao Li. Be sure to call me when your research succeeds. I’m really looking forward to it!”
“Of course I will. Once I develop a new recipe, I will invite everyone to try it.” Rock Lee promised.
He then sat down at the empty seat next to Asma and the others and loudly ordered to the boss: “Boss, I want 10 portions of beef tenderloin, 10 portions of marbled beef, 10 portions of beef tendon, and 10 portions of beef shank. I need to study them carefully.”
Asuma was secretly thankful that Rock Lee hadn’t joined the dinner, otherwise his wallet would have taken a heavy hit. Shikamaru, Ino, and Choji were stunned, shocked by Rock Lee’s feat of ordering forty plates of barbecue at once.
“Rock Lee, can you really finish all the barbecue you ordered?” Ino asked curiously.
“This is a necessary process for researching secret barbecue recipes,” Rock Lee explained seriously, “Only by trying all kinds of barbecue can you accurately grasp the seasoning and marinating methods.” In fact, he had not eaten for three days, and filling his stomach was his real purpose.
While the four members of Team Asuma found this quite plausible, they couldn’t help but smack their lips in amazement at the forty plates of grilled meat piled high on the table. Rock Lee quickly grilled the thinly sliced beef and devoured the entire plate in one gulp. His satisfied expression and the delicious taste made Choji salivate, and his already somewhat full stomach instantly felt hungry again.
Asuma secretly wiped the cold sweat from his forehead, quietly opened his wallet to check, and secretly felt lucky that Rock Lee did not join the dinner, otherwise today’s expenses would probably bankrupt him.
Shikamaru, Ino and Choji also stared at Rock Lee in disbelief. Ordering forty plates of barbecue at a time made people wonder how long it had been since he had eaten.
Rock Lee replied in a pretentious manner: “This is the only way to study the secret recipe of barbecue. Only by tasting barbecue of various flavors can you gain a deep understanding of its seasoning combinations.” However, his real thought was just to fill his empty stomach.
Although the four of them felt that Rock Lee’s words made some sense, they were still shocked by the forty plates of grilled meat on the table. Rock Lee grilled the thinly sliced beef with ease and devoured the entire plate in one gulp. The taste made Choji’s mouth water, and his already somewhat full stomach was now filled with hunger again.
“Teacher Asuma, can I order another serving of pork belly and two bowls of rice?” Choji asked Asuma for his consent.
Asuma wiped the sweat from his forehead and nodded in agreement, “We must enjoy our meal today.”
“Great! Boss, give me another serving of pork belly and two bowls of rice!” Shikamaru shouted happily.
At the same time, Rock Lee devoured more than twenty plates of barbecue in a row like a whirlwind, and only slowed down gradually when his stomach began to feel bloated.
Shikamaru, Ino and others were stunned. Rock Lee didn’t look like he was here to taste the barbecue seasoning. He looked like he had been hungry for several days.
“Rock Lee, we’re leaving first. Enjoy your meal.” Shikamaru said hello to Rock Lee who was still enjoying his meal, and left the barbecue restaurant with the other three.
“Today is really an eye-opener, Choji. No matter how big your appetite is, you can’t compare to Lee.” Ino said half-jokingly and half-seriously.
After hearing this, Dingci’s blood boiled, “I want to follow Xiao Li’s example and improve my appetite. I must not be left behind by him.”
Asuma and the other two looked at each other with bitter smiles, not knowing what to say for a moment.
“Chouji, remember to exercise hard. Your appetite is developed through training. If you go to eat barbecue with Lee in the future, and you are full first while he is still eating, you will be at a big loss.” Asuma finally reminded.
“Asuma-sensei, please be strict with me from now on,” Choji vowed passionately, “I’m determined to be a better eater than Lee.”
Shikamaru and Ino looked helpless, obviously unable to understand Choji’s attitude of taking pride in eating. For them, seeing someone who could eat more than Choji was an insurmountable obstacle.
In a ramen competition with Naruto, Choji encountered an opponent whose strength should not be underestimated. This aroused the fighting spirit deep in his heart, and the flame of passion in his chest burned more and more vigorously.
Shikamaru observed calmly from the side, knowing that it would be difficult for Choji to persevere due to his personality. Unless he could continue to use Rock Lee as motivation, Choji’s enthusiasm for training would probably fade soon.
At the same time, Rock Lee was enjoying the beef he raised with great care and studying various seasonings for barbecue, but he never thought of running a barbecue restaurant. It was all just out of his interest in health care and cooking.
In the night of Konoha, the villagers ended their busy day and came out to enjoy the tranquility of the night. When Rock Lee walked out of the barbecue restaurant, the moon was already high in the sky.
In the secret base of Akatsuki, Uchiha Itachi and Hoshigaki Kisame are reporting their latest developments to Obito.
“The failure of this operation, due to your two overestimating the enemy, has forced us to end our alliance with Ōnoki. From now on, Akatsuki must go underground and operate more covertly.
Our exposure has put us on the opposite side of the Ninja World. The seal of the tailed beasts is not yet fully prepared, and every step from now on must be cautious.” Obito announced solemnly.
Itachi and Kisame nodded silently, accepting Obito’s judgment.
After three days of hard training, Rock Lee finally mastered the basics of the Trinity and planned to replace sleep with nighttime training.
The trinity training can restore energy and eliminate fatigue. In preparation for the upcoming Fourth Shinobi World War, he must race against time to improve himself.
After the war, there would be time to rest, but for now, strengthening one’s own strength was the key, no matter what challenges the future held for the Naruto world.
In the morning light, Rock Lee resumed his routine morning exercise, while Naruto, as a reserve member of Konoha Village, went out on missions with different teams.
Tsunade arranged for Naruto to participate in these operations, nominally to train his abilities, but in fact to prepare him to become the next Hokage. As long as the mission was not too dangerous, Naruto would be assigned to various teams.
Following Tsunade’s habit of assigning tasks at random, Naruto expected that he would have little free time before leaving the village with Jiraiya, which made Rock Lee secretly sympathize with his hard work.
“Xiao Li, you finally showed up.” Tiantian greeted excitedly.
“Well, I’ve planned my training over the past few days and have a clearer understanding of my abilities.” Rock Lee responded with a smile.
Neji and Sasuke also greeted them, especially Sasuke. Judging from his expression, it seemed that his Chidori Senbon skills had improved significantly.
“Sasuke, how’s your Chidori Senbon training going?” Rock Lee asked curiously.
Sasuke stretched out his left hand, lightning flashed at his fingertips, and soon stabilized and took shape, turning into a thousand bones.
“I’ve made great progress. Now the main task is to shorten the time it takes to complete Chidori Senbon. I’ve already mastered the key and expect to be able to apply it in actual combat soon.” Sasuke replied.
“It seems that you have made great progress during the time I was away.” Rock Lee praised.
Sasuke is both talented and diligent in his training, so he makes rapid progress.
“Little Lee, it’s only been three days since we last met, and I feel like you’ve become even stronger,” Neji commented.
Neji’s intuition is very sharp. He can detect Rock Lee’s progress just by his breath, which shows that he is usually very observant.
“You may not have guessed that I’ve been immersed in Buddhism recently. I feel a lot calmer inside, and even my strength has improved slightly.” Rock Lee said frankly.
“Buddhism?” Neji was surprised. This was far from the Rock Lee he knew.
“You don’t want to become a monk, do you? There’s no future in that, and you’d have to be a vegetarian,” Tiantian said half-jokingly.
“Don’t get me wrong, I just read some scriptures as a hobby to help purify my soul and return to purity,” Rock Lee explained.
Although the three had heard that Buddhism could help people to be pure-hearted and free from desires, they had not expected Rock Lee to do this, which was completely different from the image they had in mind.
“Isn’t it incredible? Only by learning various knowledge can we comprehensively enhance ourselves. The world may seem calm on the surface, but in fact, there are constant undercurrents. We must be prepared to deal with them at all times.” Rock Lee said seriously.
“This is the good disciple I taught.” Teacher Kai suddenly appeared and said admiringly.
“Teacher, you have been busy rebuilding the village. How come you have time to do morning exercises today?” Tiantian asked curiously.
Ever since the Konoha disaster caused by Orochimaru, Teacher Kai has been too busy with the reconstruction of the village and he hasn’t trained with them for a long time.
“Tsunade-sama has granted me permission to rest today, but I’m worried, so I came to check on your progress.” Teacher Gai’s eyes gleamed with anticipation, his lips curled up, revealing his teeth that gleamed in the sun. “Seeing you train so passionately is a great relief. Come on, let’s challenge ourselves to another 300 laps and give our youth a boost!”
“Teacher, our morning run is almost over and we have other arrangements afterwards.” Tiantian reminded.
“Teacher, I can continue and finish the race with you.” Rock Lee said firmly.
“That’s right, youth is about running non-stop!” Teacher Kai gave a thumbs up, and his shining teeth made Rock Lee squint his eyes.
“Little Lee, let’s have a competition to see who can complete this battle of youthful speed and endurance first,” challenged Sensei Gai. He’d probably chosen Rock Lee as his opponent because he couldn’t find Kakashi and was itching to do so. After all, Kakashi was busy researching new ninjutsu, and as a prominent ninja in Konoha Village, he naturally had plenty of work to do.
“Don’t underestimate me, Mr. Gai, I might surprise you.” Rock Lee responded.
“Then let me see the true strength of my disciple.” Teacher Kai encouraged.
On the track in Konoha Village, Gai and his apprentice, Rock Lee, were engaged in a fierce speed contest. Like beasts on the wind, they sped past, raising clouds of dust. Like two dancing sand dragons, they raced along the edge of the village. As they sped, their sand dragon-like dust trails grew longer and longer, until they completed a lap, their speed now neck and neck.
“Xiao Li, I didn’t expect you could keep up with my speed,” Kai said with approval.
“I know that Mr. Kai hasn’t given his all yet, otherwise I would never be able to keep up with you,” Rock Lee responded.
As Kai’s disciple, Xiao Li was well aware of his master’s strength and knew his current speed was far from reaching Kai’s limits, not to mention his astonishing burst of power. However, with his Golden Bell Cover and the gradually mastered Trinity Mutation, Xiao Li’s physical fitness was steadily improving, and surpassing Kai was only a matter of time. This ability granted by the mutation was like his own exclusive cheat, constantly strengthening his body.
For Kai, who has reached the limit of human beings, the improvement of his physical fitness has become extremely slow, and it is not easy to break through this limit.
They picked up speed again, charging into the dust they had left behind. Their speed was so great that the dust from the previous lap hadn’t yet cleared. Onlookers like Neji were speechless, stunned by their fighting spirit.
Chapter 57: Able-bodied Men (Old Version)
“Shizune, why is there so much dust around the village?” Tsunade stood by the window of the Hokage’s office, looking into the distance, and asked curiously.
“Hokage-sama, that’s because Might Guy and Rock Lee were having a running contest, and their speed was so fast that it stirred up layers of dust.” Shizune replied.
“Oh? Isn’t Kai always racing with Kakashi? It seems that Locke has made significant growth. Since they both have quite a bit of free time, call them here. I have a task to arrange.” Tsunade gave the order.
Shizune hurried off to summon Kai and Little Rock.
After running more than fifty laps, Rock Lee and Might Guy were still evenly matched, even though Rock Lee was drenched in sweat, while Might Guy only had beads of sweat on his forehead.
Shizune suddenly appeared in front of them, interrupting their competition.
“Teacher Kai, it seems that today’s competition cannot continue.” Rock Lee said breathlessly.
“Shizune’s arrival means that Hokage-sama may have a new mission,” Teacher Gai speculated.
“Tsunade-sama has requested that you two come to the Hokage’s office, saying that she has something important to discuss.” Shizune delivered the message.
Kai and Rock Lee gradually slowed down their pace and turned to walk towards the office.
“Lady Tsunade, I, Might Guy, and my disciple Rock Lee have come here upon your summons.” Teacher Guy pushed the door open and entered with a loud voice.
“Since you have nothing to do at the moment, I happen to have a task that I need you two to carry out.” Tsunade announced.
“Please tell me, Lady Tsunade,” Rock Lee responded respectfully.
“Pirates have been rampant in the Tea Country Strait lately, robbing merchant ships. You two will go and solve this problem.” Tsunade gave the order.
“Xiao Li, let’s go teach those pirates a lesson and make them reform. Lady Tsunade, please rest assured, we will complete the mission beautifully.” Teacher Kai responded passionately.
“Set off immediately.” Tsunade ordered.
“Yes, sir!”
“Xiao Li, we have to rush to the Tea Kingdom as soon as possible.” Teacher Akai urged.
The two left the Hokage’s office and quickly broke into a run, determined to reach their destination at full speed and teach the pirates a lesson.
Not long after, they met Xiao Tiantian who was enjoying meatballs.
“Tiantian, Teacher Kai and I have a mission out of the village.” Rock Lee greeted briefly.
Watching their quickly receding backs, Tiantian couldn’t help but sweat on his forehead, and secretly sighed in his heart: It’s really admirable that they can run so fast to carry out the mission.
Rock Lee, after taking a break on his way to the Hokage’s office, readjusted his state and ran with all his strength, no longer feeling tired.
He didn’t care about the strange looks from people around him at all. The most important thing in his mind was to improve his strength.
Rock Lee’s admiration for Mr. Kai is evident in his words. He admires his teacher’s unwavering conviction and courageous actions, his perseverance even in the face of ridicule. This spirit is precisely what Mr. Kai upholds.
On their way to the Land of Tea, they quickly passed through Konoha Village, nodded to the guarding ninjas and villagers, and then quickly disappeared on the path leading to the forest. The forests of the Land of Fire were lush and green, and the climate was comfortable. Even in the middle of summer, the forests were still cool and pleasant.
They moved through the woods, skillfully using the trees’ power to make running much easier. Rock Lee used his Golden Bell Guard, feeling the life energy nourishing his body and restoring his strength.
As night fell, the two reached the border of the Tea Kingdom. Rock Lee looked up at the sky and suggested, “Teacher Gai, it’s getting late. Why don’t we camp here and continue our journey tomorrow to wipe out the pirates once and for all?”
Teacher Kai nodded in agreement: “Indeed, after a night’s rest, you will have more energy.” Rock Lee then took out some dried meat from his ninja tool bag and gave a portion to Teacher Kai. The two of them shared the simple food on this quiet night to reserve energy for the next day’s mission.
Rock Lee’s cattle, raised on his own, are meticulously processed into delicious jerky. Not only does it taste fantastic, it also replenishes stamina, a significant benefit for ninjas.
Teacher Akai tasted a piece and nodded in praise: “This beef jerky tastes great. I feel full of energy after eating it. I have to do 2,000 push-ups tonight to burn it off.” He said enthusiastically.
“This dried meat has a particularly enhanced effect in replenishing qi and blood.” Rock Lee explained.
“As my disciple, you actually prepared such a good thing for me. If I don’t do 5,000 push-ups today, I will really let you down.” Teacher Akai said excitedly.
Rock Lee groaned inwardly; this was not the response he expected.
“Come on, disciple. After eating such nourishing beef jerky, how can you not exercise? Accompany me to complete this challenge.” Teacher Akai suggested.
“Yes, Master Kai.” Rock Lee agreed reluctantly.
They quickly finished their jerky and immediately began the push-up challenge. Even for Rock Lee, 5,000 was no easy feat, especially since they had just finished a long day of running and were only taking a short break.
While beef jerky helped replenish Qi and blood, it couldn’t eliminate accumulated fatigue. Rock Lee gritted his teeth and began this physical test with Teacher Kai. He could easily complete the first few hundred push-ups, but as the challenge progressed, his pace slowed noticeably.
“Teacher Kai, I have a lot of beef jerky at home. I will send it to you as soon as our mission is over. You can eat some during the mission or after training. It will be very helpful for restoring your physical strength.” Rock Lee said as he looked at Teacher Kai who was concentrating on doing push-ups.
But Akai seemed not to hear it at all. He was concentrating on challenging his limits.
Rock Lee thought to himself, forget it, I’ll just give it to the teacher when the time comes.
As the number of push-ups gradually approached 5,000, both of them were sweating profusely and their breathing became heavy. Rock Lee tried to regulate his breathing, but found it extremely difficult.
Although his body was extremely exhausted, Rock Lee still persisted, and the golden bell shield in his body was trying hard to maintain its power.
He looked at Teacher Akai. Although he was also exhausted, the teacher’s eyes were still firm.
Rock Lee thought to himself that Teacher Kai was truly amazing. Even if he was tired, he would persist in completing his goals.
Since coming to the Naruto world, Rock Lee has always maintained hard training, and all these hardships are within his tolerance.
After finally completing five thousand push-ups, Rock Lee took a deep breath, stood up, and stretched his muscles.
“Go to bed early, you still have tasks to complete tomorrow.” As soon as Teacher Akai finished speaking, he started snoring.
Li Luoke secretly admired his teacher’s broad-mindedness. He sat cross-legged and began to practice the Ten Directions Buddha Seal, concentrating on practicing the Trinity technique.
Teacher Kai is very powerful and will be alerted immediately if there is any hint of murderous intent around him.
Despite the loud snoring of Teacher Kai, Rock Lee remained focused, chanting the mantra and merging himself with the gods and Buddhas.
In this world, the concept of gods and Buddhas is incomplete, and almost all legends are related to the Six Paths Sage.
In the process of practicing the Trinity in depth, Rock Lee can clearly perceive the distribution of natural energy in this world, which may help him in his future search for the three holy places.
Thinking of the three holy places, Rock Lee couldn’t help but think that he didn’t have a summoning beast yet, and it was still unknown whether he could even use summoning techniques smoothly.
He put aside all distractions and focused entirely on the practice of the Trinity. A tiny Buddha figure somewhat similar to him gradually emerged behind him, with the figure also forming hand seals and reciting scriptures.
The night gradually faded and the sky began to turn white. Rock Lee opened his eyes, a golden light flashed in his eyes, and he stood up and stretched his limbs.
Teacher Kai was awakened by Rock Lee’s actions.
“Teacher, it’s time to set off. If we quickly deal with these pirates, we may be able to reach Konoha tonight.” Rock Lee said.
“Well, speed is of the essence. Let’s go.”
The Tea Country is adjacent to Konoha and does not have its own ninja village. Many tasks rely on the power of Konoha to complete.
Rock Lee and Kai rushed to the Straits, their mission to assist the fishermen and merchants of the Tea Kingdom, who had recently been plagued by pirate attacks. The Tea Kingdom relied on fishing for its livelihood, and the pirates’ predatory activities had caused heavy losses to the fishermen and merchant ships.
The local residents were suffering under the ravages of pirates. The two men passed through a small town on the strait. Although the life here was simple, the residents could still maintain a basic life by relying on fishing and trade. In this turbulent world, such days were rare.
Before they even entered the town, they encountered a young man. “I presume you two are ninjas from Konoha, right? I’m Little John, the initiator of this mission, Old John’s son. My father anticipated your imminent arrival and sent me here to greet you,” Little John said as he led them into the town and toward a relatively elegant two-story building.
A middle-aged man with a slightly plump figure came forward and said, “Welcome, ninjas of Konoha. I am Old John, the client of this mission. I would like to express my sincere gratitude for your quick arrival.”
“Uncle John, please explain the situation of these pirates in detail,” Rock Lee requested.
Old John revealed to Mr. Kai and Rock Lee, “For the past month, a group of ferocious pirates have been wreaking havoc in the Tea Country Strait, hijacking ships and fishermen’s catches. They are brutal, ready to kill anyone who resists. Currently, their ships are lurking in the center of the strait, awaiting passing vessels.”
“Let me, the blue beast of Konoha, put an end to the actions of these villains. Xiao Li, let’s go and wipe them out in one fell swoop!” Teacher Kai said excitedly.
The two left Old John’s house and headed straight for the Tea Country Strait. Standing on the shore, they witnessed a pirate ship flying a skull and crossbones flag sailing across the sea.
“These pirates are so lawless that they dare to rob in broad daylight.” Teacher Kai said angrily.
“Teacher, I’ll go ahead.” Rock Lee said as he rushed towards the pirate ship. The pirates were so engrossed in their plunder that they were completely unaware of their approach.
Rock Lee led the way, followed closely by Teacher Gai, and the two of them used the power of chakra to speed across the water. The magic of chakra is that as long as it is properly controlled, it can move freely even on the rough sea.
The sea was calm, and two figures were moving quickly in the gentle sea breeze. Soon, the pirate ship in front seemed to notice them.
On the largest pirate ship, the pirate leader and his gang are planning to plunder the small town of Tea Kingdom.
The pirates were so overconfident that they even discussed landing directly to plunder.
“Boss, two ninjas are running towards us quickly. They might be mercenaries from the Tea Kingdom.” The lookout reported loudly from a high place.
The pirate leader immediately stood up, took out a telescope and observed. Sure enough, two ninjas were approaching rapidly.
“All ships, listen up, aim at those two ninjas and open fire! Destroy them first, then we will head to the Land of Tea,” he ordered.
“yes!”
Many of these pirates were once wandering ninjas who harbored a deep hatred for organized ninjas.
Rock Lee and Teacher Gai quickly closed the distance with the pirate ship. At this time, a series of cannon shots rang out, accompanied by flying black dots, which quickly turned into threatening cannonballs.
The master and disciple increased their speed. Although the shells caused huge waves on the water, as ninjas, their agility was enough to make the firearms lose their accuracy. In the world of Naruto, such hot weapons posed little threat to ninjas.
Chapter 58: Orochimaru Again (Old Version)
Rock Lee bravely leaped up and with one kick, two pirates fell in agony. The following enemies showed no fear and continued to attack him like a tide. Sensei Gai quickly joined the battle, and the two fought side by side, but were soon surrounded by the swarming pirates.
Although the enemy’s attacks came like a torrential rain, Rock Lee, with the deep defense of the fifth layer of the Golden Bell, turned these attacks into nothing. Although his body was slightly injured, his bones were not broken.
The “Konoha Great Tornado” was activated, and the master and disciple cooperated tacitly, and the pirates around them were kicked away like scarecrows.
Rock Lee transformed his palms into claws and moved quickly among the enemy lines. Every time he swung his Iron Sand Palm, the pirates’ skin was torn and flesh was ripped apart. Although he did not take their lives, his fierce fighting skills were fully demonstrated.
The sea surface was dyed red by the cruelty of the battle, mostly with the blood of the pirates.
In the intervals of the battle, Rock Lee silently recited the Golden Bell Cover, and the power in his body flowed, slowly healing the wounds on his body.
Although Teacher Gai is not as ruthless as Rock Lee, each of his attacks is full of power. The pirates hit by Teacher Gai basically lose the ability to continue fighting.
The pirate leader, seeing his men suffering heavy casualties, knew he would be doomed if he didn’t act. “Follow me! Kill these two ninjas, or we’ll all be in trouble!” he commanded at the top of his lungs.
“Boss Moriki, facing taijutsu masters like Konoha’s Might Guy and Rock Lee, we just need to keep our distance and we won’t be in too much danger.”
“That’s right. Once we get rid of these two Konoha ninjas, I will recommend your achievements to Lord Orochimaru. Your promotion will then be a sure thing.”
The subordinates beside him were so excited when they heard this, “Thank you, Boss Senmu, for your support.”
“After the mission is completed, the funds obtained will be handed over to Lord Dou. We will retreat temporarily and wait for the opportunity to make a comeback.” The pirate leader Senmu made a plan.
A group of elite soldiers came down from the boat to the shore. These people were recruited by Moriki based on Orochimaru’s reputation. They surrendered without hesitation as soon as they heard Orochimaru’s name.
Orochimaru, as one of the three ninjas, is very famous in the ninja world. His courage to challenge Konoha head-on is regarded as a symbol of strength by many ninjas.
Many homeless ninjas were eager to join his army and seek refuge. Orochimaru never refused anyone who was willing to join him.
“It would be great if I could stay by Lord Orochimaru’s side like Lord Kabuto does. Those ninjas who can receive personal guidance from Lord Orochimaru are really enviable.” One of the subordinates said with longing.
“As long as we make great military achievements, Lord Orochimaru will definitely take notice of us.” Moriki encouraged his accomplices.
“Water ghost, you will sneak underwater later and take down Rock Lee first. Even if you only get rid of him, it will be a great achievement. I heard that Orochimaru hates Rock Lee to the core, but I didn’t expect that he would dare to fall into his trap.” There was a hint of cunning in Moriki’s laughter.
He suddenly remembered that Rock Lee was the man Orochimaru wanted for his reward. If he could kill him, perhaps Orochimaru would summon him personally. Moriki’s heart was filled with uncontrollable excitement.
The pirates were terrified by the bravery of Akai and Rock Lee. Although they were familiar with the water, they could only lament their bad luck in front of these two beasts of the sea.
Corpses lay scattered on the sea, and the air was filled with the stench of blood, attracting sharks from far away to come and feed on the floating corpses as delicacies.
As the death toll mounted, the remaining pirates became mentally broken and fled in all directions.
“They are simply demons!”
“Don’t kill me, I was captured by them!”
“Run away! Don’t die in vain!”
The fleeing pirates scattered like birds and beasts, each cursing that they were born with too few legs.
“These cowards have been completely defeated. They are really a bunch of rabble.” Senmu cursed angrily.
“Boss, those two rookies from Konoha are letting their guard down now, so it’s a good time for us to take action. I’m going to deal with Rock Lee first and let him know who is the real king in the water.” The water ghost smiled triumphantly, and with a flash of his figure, he sank under the water.
Rock Lee and Kai took a short break to catch their breath.
“Teacher Akai, it seems that the opponent has finally lost his patience and is ready to take action himself.”
Teacher Kai stretched his limbs and warmed up. Then he followed Rock Lee’s gaze and, as expected, saw several ninjas approaching them quickly.
“As long as we get rid of these pirate leaders, we can quickly return to Konoha and I can compete with my eternal rival Kakashi. I can’t wait!” Teacher Kai said loudly and excitedly.
He gave a strong kick and rushed towards Moriki and the others. Although Rock Lee felt that Mr. Kai was too impatient, he also understood that it was still unknown whether Mr. Kakashi was in the village. Even if he returned immediately, it would be a problem whether he could immediately compete.
Rock Lee hurried to catch up, but just as he took a step, his other foot was grabbed tightly by a hand that suddenly stretched out from underwater.
Rock Lee’s eyes sank as he saw the underwater ghost’s face, distorted and hideous, as if it had been drowned for a long time. Before he could react, he was suddenly pulled into the water.
While diving rapidly, Rock Lee realized that the villain intended to take his life by burial in water.
However, Rock Lee possesses a physique far superior to that of ordinary people. Although he cannot breathe underwater, he has never met an opponent when it comes to holding his breath.
The water ghost was secretly delighted, he never expected that this target that Orochimaru hated so much would die at his hands.
He was already fantasizing that he would gain the favor of Orochimaru because of this achievement and would rise to prominence from then on.
However, just as the water ghost was intoxicated in the dream of victory, Rock Lee launched a surprise attack from behind.
A sharp pain came from the back, and the water ghost was startled to feel a chill on his chest in a trance. Rock Lee’s hand had pierced through his chest.
As blood splattered in the water, the intense pain made the water ghost lose consciousness. Rock Lee took this opportunity to break free and swim upwards.
At the same time, Teacher Kai noticed that Rock Lee was not following him, so he turned back to look for him, but he was nowhere to be found.
Although he had doubts in his heart, Teacher Kai was confident in Rock Lee’s ability and was not overly worried.
“Pirates, let the pride of Konoha, the blue beast, teach you how to mend your ways!” Teacher Kai shouted with high morale.
At the pirate leader’s command, his men quickly dispersed, forming a circle and trapping Teacher Kai in the center.
Rock Lee suddenly rushed out from under the water and ran quickly towards the trapped Teacher Kai. The two of them cooperated tacitly and successfully broke the opponent’s encirclement.
The pirate leader quickly formed seals, “Water escape technique, Water Dragon Bullet!”
A huge water dragon rose into the air from the sea and rushed towards Teacher Kai, but Teacher Kai dodged quickly and avoided the water dragon’s attack.
Four pirate ninjas performed ninjutsu at the same time:
“Fire Style, Great Fireball!”
“Water Style, Great Whirlpool!”
“Wind Style, Wind Blade!”
Various ninjutsu were used simultaneously, and the sea surface suddenly rose into a violent wave, trying to interfere with Teacher Kai’s movements.
Rock Lee shouted, “Eight Gates of Ninjutsu, open the Gate of Life!” His speed increased suddenly, as if he had teleported, and rushed straight towards the ninjas who had their backs to him.
“Dumen, open!”
At an extremely fast speed, Rock Lee disappeared from one place, and the next moment he was behind the pirate minion. He struck out with his iron sand palm, and the powerful force made a whistling sound in the air.
With a palm strike, the pirate was sent flying like a kite with a broken string, blood gushing out in the air, and it was obvious that he had suffered a fatal blow.
The ninjutsu, which had lost its controller, gradually dissipated, and the whirlpool on the sea surface gradually subsided.
Teacher Kai praised: “Rock Lee, well done! This vortex has indeed caused us quite a bit of trouble.”
“Teacher, these pirates are extraordinary. They possess remarkable ninjutsu,” Rock Lee analyzed. He had fought many wandering ninjas and bandits since graduation, but these pirates were clearly far superior to ordinary ninjas.
“Rock Lee, you managed to escape from the water ghosts. Lord Orochimaru hates you to the core. Today, I will end your life here and take credit for it from Lord Orochimaru.” The pirate leader Moriki threatened with a ferocious look on his face.
Rock Lee and Kai were shocked. They didn’t expect that these ordinary pirates were actually related to Orochimaru. It seemed that his influence in the ninja world should not be underestimated.
“There are so many people who want to take my life, who do you think you are? If they want to kill me, Orochimaru would have to do it himself. It seems that his laboratory is short of funds, and he has to rely on pirates like you to rob to keep it going.” Rock Lee sneered.
“You’re only good at talking! Let’s see how long you can hold your own!” Moriki shouted, then activated the curse seal, rapidly transforming into a monstrous creature. He was originally an ordinary ninja under Orochimaru’s command, but later became a test subject and was imprisoned at Orochimaru’s northern base, where he was injected with the curse seal like the others.
However, the reason why Moriki was able to regain his freedom was because he was able to control the curse seal better. Although he was not as strong as the Four Sound Ninjas, his strength should not be ignored.
“You three, go and fight Might Guy. I will personally deal with Rock Lee.” Moriki gave orders to his three subordinates.
“Yes, Boss Moriki, this kid who is disrespectful to Lord Orochimaru must not be let off easily!” said a pirate henchman angrily.
“Yes, if we kill him, we can get the reward from Lord Orochimaru!” another minion also responded.
Although they had never seen Orochimaru’s true appearance, Orochimaru’s reputation and generous rewards attracted many ninjas to flock to him and compete to serve him.
“You are seeking your own death, and I will grant your wish!”
Rock Lee felt that his speed had made a qualitative leap, and the trinity of his body movements allowed his power to be perfectly integrated.
He lightly tapped his footsteps on the sea surface, and his figure immediately disappeared. Senmu reacted quickly, quickly forming seals with his hands.
“Water escape technique, water wall formation!”
A magnificent wall of water rose from the ground and stretched across the sea, trying to block Rock Lee’s way.
But Rock Lee just stepped on the water surface, then turned flexibly, bypassed the water wall, and continued to attack Moriki.
Senmu formed hand seals again and shouted, “Water escape technique, great whirlpool!”
A huge whirlpool then formed on the sea surface, and the sea water was swallowed by the whirlpool, slowing down Rock Lee’s attack.
Facing this move, Rock Lee just smiled contemptuously, “This little trick——”
Before he finished speaking, he had already opened the Jingmen, ready to meet the challenge.
Rock Lee suddenly let out a loud roar, and the chakra in his body surged like a raging tide. With the power of his Eight Gates, even the sea water under his feet could not help but retreat, and Moriki’s whirlpool technique was destroyed in an instant.
But Rock Lee pointed his toes and instantly teleported in front of Moriki. His powerful hands grasped the blazing flames and struck the monster’s head mercilessly.
There was an expression of disbelief and fear in Moriki’s eyes. At this moment, he finally understood why Orochimaru hated Rock Lee so much, but the God of Fate did not give him the chance to regret.
An iron sand palm hit Sen Mu’s head solidly, and the light of his life was extinguished. The disgusting curse also dissipated, and he returned to his human appearance.
At the same time, Mr. Akai was fighting with the remaining three pirate minions. He had good intentions and hoped to subdue them and guide them to abandon evil and do good.
“Teacher Kai, if you don’t take ruthless action, I won’t hold back anymore.” Rock Lee reminded.
“Our leader was killed by that guy, let’s retreat quickly!” a pirate shouted anxiously.
“You’ve committed so many evil deeds, and you still want to escape? Should those innocent people who died tragically at your hands sacrifice their lives in vain?” Rock Lee rebuked harshly.
Before he could finish his words, Rock Lee had already appeared in front of a pirate and pierced his chest with a palm. The pirate’s resistance was in vain, and his life ended under Rock Lee’s iron sand palm.
Chapter 59: Will of Fire (Old Version)
While Gai sealed the pirate leader’s body, Rock Lee carried a surviving pirate towards town. Little John had been waiting by the sea for a long time.
“Thank you for destroying the pirates and bringing peace to the people of the Tea Kingdom.” Little John said gratefully.
“This is our duty. As the guardians of Konoha, we should protect your safety. The property taken away by pirates should be returned to the villagers.” Rock Lee responded.
Little John bowed deeply to express his gratitude. Rock Lee and Teacher Gai did not stay long and immediately set out on their journey back to Konoha, hoping to arrive before nightfall.
The captured pirate regained consciousness shortly afterwards and attempted to break free and escape.
“Don’t act rashly, or you will bear the consequences. A character like you actually dares to call yourself Orochimaru’s subordinate, which is really laughable.” Rock Lee sneered.
“You have been targeted by Lord Orochimaru, and you should be worried about yourself.” The pirate henchman knew that he could not escape and began to speak arrogantly.
Rock Lee just sneered at this.
“Konoha’s interrogation department has plenty of ways to make you talk, so don’t be scared to pee your pants when the time comes,” he warned.
The pirate’s face instantly lost its color. In this world, it was normal for prisoners to be tortured by the ninja village, and no one cared.
Rock Lee and his companions quickly crossed back to Konoha. Along the way, the pirates were dragged and branches scratched their faces, leaving bloody marks. By the time they arrived in Konoha, they were overwhelmed and vomited continuously.
They went directly to the Hokage’s office and presented their mission report.
“Lady Tsunade, these pirates are Orochimaru’s subordinates. Perhaps we can use this clue to find his secret base.” Rock Lee reported seriously.
Tsunade remained silent and responded calmly: “Okay, I’ll let the intelligence and interrogation department analyze it.” She didn’t hold much hope for such a small character. Even if they found the base, it would most likely have been abandoned.
“Hokage-sama, we’ll take our leave now.” Rock Lee said respectfully.
They walked out of the Hokage Building.
“Teacher Kai, can you give me a summoning scroll? I want to test whether I have the ability to sign a summoning contract.” Rock Lee made a hopeful request to Teacher Kai.
After a series of rigorous training and body transformation, Rock Lee felt that his physique had undergone a complete transformation, and perhaps now he had the opportunity to form a contract with a summoning beast.
“Youth means constant attempts. What was once impossible may become possible today.” Teacher Kai encouraged him and handed him a sealing scroll.
After returning home, Rock Lee relaxed his tired body and picked up the sealing scroll.
As a ninja who specializes in physical skills, Rock Lee is well aware of his shortcomings, and some of these defects may only be compensated by the power of summoned beasts.
In the world of ninjutsu, even seemingly useless summoning beasts, such as Kai’s Ninja Turtle, can become a helper at crucial moments, exerting their unique auxiliary functions. And those powerful ninja beast families are even more unique and have extraordinary abilities.
Rock Lee tried various hand seals, hoping to summon his own summoning beast from the scroll, but no matter how hard he tried, the scroll remained as still as water, unresponsive. He persevered, concentrating his chakra once more and tapping the scroll, but the result remained the same.
He began to reflect, slowly feeling the flow of chakra within him. While attempting to form the hand seals for the clone jutsu, Rock Lee discovered that the chakra flow wasn’t changing as he’d expected. He tried to control the chakra flow according to the clone jutsu’s path, but found his control was far from sufficient, and the coordination between the hand seals and the chakra was simply out of reach.
Failure after failure made Rock Lee realize that his talent in ninjutsu might not be enough. Even if he could barely master the Three Body Technique after a long period of hard training, its practicality was questionable and the speed was too slow.
He turned his attention to practicing summoning techniques; while it wasn’t fast, it might be a viable option. Feeling lost, Rock Lee gathered up his scroll, left his house, and strolled through the night streets of Konoha. As the night deepened and the lights began to light up, he stumbled upon Ichiraku Ramen and realized that Naruto might not have completed his mission yet, otherwise he would have been feasting there.
Longing for his companions, Rock Lee entered the ramen shop. Uncle Ichiraku greeted him warmly. In this scene full of life, Rock Lee’s inner loss and perseverance intertwined as he continued to explore his own ninja path.
“Xiao Li, what kind of ramen do you plan to try today?”
“I want two big bowls of tonkotsu ramen, Uncle Ichiraku.” Rock Lee answered decisively.
“Okay, wait a moment, I’ll prepare it for you right away.”
Soon, a bowl of steaming ramen was placed in front of Rock Lee. Just as he was about to start eating, Teacher Kakashi pushed the door open and walked in.
“Teacher Kakashi, you are also in the village? Teacher Kai is eager to compete with you and has been waiting for several days.” Rock Lee reminded with a smile.
“Oh, I just came back from a mission.” Teacher Kakashi’s tone was a little helpless.
“How is Sasuke adjusting to the team? Has he shown any extreme emotions?”
Kakashi is quite worried about Sasuke’s condition. After all, unlike Naruto, who has a sunny heart, Sasuke’s heart is full of the shadow of revenge.
“I’m trying to divert his attention by teaching him new techniques and training hard, while helping him steadily improve his strength to alleviate the hatred in his heart. I hope my efforts can touch him.” Rock Lee’s tone was firm with a hint of expectation.
Rock Lee thought that when Sasuke faced the truth about his brother Itachi, he might still choose to leave. Does this mean that he was inadvertently cultivating a future opponent?
“It seems that assigning Sasuke to your group was indeed a wise decision.”
“Teacher Kakashi, how is the progress of the lightning technique you developed? Can it be used in actual combat?” Rock Lee asked curiously.
“I’ve gained some experience in mastering the Lightning Transmission technique, but the connection between the shadow clone and the main body isn’t yet stable enough. The subtlety of this move lies in the word ‘transmission’. My ideal state is to form a stable and cutting lightning column, but its power hasn’t yet reached my expectations.”
“Teacher Kakashi, if you don’t use shadow clones when performing Raiden, but instead concentrate the lightning attribute chakra into a chakra spear, wouldn’t it be able to both cut and strike accurately?” Rock Lee suggested.
Kakashi pondered for a moment, picturing the battle scene with the lightning spear in his mind.
“Teacher Kai has indeed trained an outstanding disciple. Thank you for your advice, Xiao Li. With you around, I feel more at ease about Sasuke.” Teacher Kakashi said approvingly.
“Kakashi, my eternal rival, I finally caught him. Let’s have a showdown!” Teacher Kai suddenly appeared and shouted excitedly.
“Akai, why are you here at this time?”
“I asked Lady Tsunade about your whereabouts. She said you might come back this afternoon, and sure enough. Let’s start a new round of duel, Kakashi!” Teacher Kai suggested excitedly.
“Let’s wait until tomorrow. It’s getting late, and it’s not appropriate to compete now. Why don’t we choose a good venue during the day and have a fair fight.”
“You are indeed my eternal rival. You can even see through my thoughts.” Teacher Kai agreed excitedly.
Rock Lee chuckled in his heart, guessing that Kakashi might disappear tomorrow, making the game plan that Teacher Gai was looking forward to come to nothing.
“Xiao Li, tomorrow I will compete with Kakashi. I hope you can be the referee and witness my true strength.” Teacher Kai made an enthusiastic invitation.
“Of course, Sensei, I will judge this match impartially and impartially,” Rock Lee replied with a confident smile.
You are the disciple in my heart, and I have full confidence in you.”
After dinner, they strolled through the streets of Konoha, fresh from the aroma of Ichiraku Ramen. Along the way, the villagers laughed and talked, and heartwarming scenes of family reunions were everywhere.
For ninjas, such peaceful days are also a precious bond that they are willing to defend with their lives.
Konoha has always adhered to the Will of Fire passed down by the first Hokage. Although there are occasional ninjas who deviate from the right path, the whole group still respects the teachings of the Will of Fire.
In the world of ninjas, the Hidden Mist Village suffered frequent rebellions due to the blood mist policy of the Fourth Mizukage. The ninjas had no feelings for the village and were only filled with hatred. The situation did not improve slightly until the Fifth Mizukage took office.
Such peaceful days are truly something to yearn for. Rock Lee couldn’t help but sigh.
“That’s right, and that’s what we should protect. The better life is, the more powerful it needs to be to defend it, otherwise all that is good will be lost.” Kakashi agreed.
“Having experienced countless battles and life-or-death trials, we now appreciate the value of a peaceful life,” Rock Lee said with deep emotion.
In the year since graduating from Ninja Academy, Rock Lee has witnessed countless family tragedies and deeply felt the fragility of beautiful things in the world. He began to understand why so many people are extremely disappointed with the world and long for a fresh start.
After Kakashi and Kai went their separate ways, Rock Lee was wandering the streets alone when Choji’s voice broke the silence: “Little Lee, what a coincidence to meet you here.”
Rock Lee looked up and saw the members of Asuma’s team coming out of the barbecue restaurant. He thought to himself that Asuma was probably the most generous of all the jonin in charge, often treating Shikamaru and his team to barbecue. Choji had made the right choice by following him.
“Mr. Asuma, you are enjoying the barbecue dinner again.” Rock Lee greeted.
“Oh, Rock Lee, how’s your barbecue research going?” Asuma asked curiously. He was deeply impressed by Rock Lee, especially the time he ate forty plates of barbecue, which even Choji felt inferior to.
“I’ve made a breakthrough. I’ll invite you to try my new barbecue in a few days.” Rock Lee answered confidently.
Choji excitedly interrupted, “Xiao Li, I’ve taken you as my role model and have been working hard to improve my appetite. I ate one more plate today, and I’m one step closer to your record!”
Teacher Asuma, observing the astonishing appetites of Choji and Rock Lee, broke out in a cold sweat, fearing his wallet would soon take another hit. He recalled how Choji, under the guise of analyzing barbecue seasoning, had devoured forty plates in one sitting, claiming he was only half full. Rock Lee, however, had even boasted he could eat eighty plates, shocking everyone present. Inspired by this, Choji resolved to challenge himself, vowing to match Rock Lee’s appetite, even setting the ambitious goal of a hundred plates. To encourage his students, Teacher Asuma generously promised to treat them to two barbecues per week, at his own expense.
Teacher Asuma wiped the cold sweat from his forehead. Choji and Rock Lee had undoubtedly put his financial situation in jeopardy again.
“That time I ate forty plates just to delve into the seasoning of barbecue,” Rock Lee explained.
“Chouji, you don’t have to compete with Rock Lee. That was a special case.” Teacher Asuma hurriedly comforted him, obviously thinking about his own wallet.
“Actually, I only felt half full after eating forty plates. According to my strength, eighty plates is just right.” Rock Lee said shamelessly.
Teacher Asuma’s face was pale and he was crying inside. Shikamaru and Ino were also shocked. They didn’t expect Rock Lee to have such a big appetite. No wonder he was so powerful.
“Xiao Li, you are my role model. I will work hard to catch up with you and strive to finish eighty plates as well.” Shikamaru said excitedly.
“Then let’s work together and move towards the 100-plate challenge. But you have to eat more and exercise more,” Rock Lee encouraged.
After careful consideration, Dingci decided to accept the challenge. “Starting tomorrow, I will do morning exercises with you guys and strive to achieve the goal of 100 games as soon as possible.”
“Since you are so determined, I, your teacher, cannot be stingy. From now on, I will treat everyone to barbecue twice a week as an encouragement.” Teacher Asuma said generously.
“Shikamaru, Ino, you see that Choji has decided to devote himself to training. Shouldn’t you two join him?” Teacher Asuma said to the students seriously.
“Teacher Asuma is awesome!” Choji exclaimed excitedly. He was already motivated by the teacher’s promise of barbecue twice a week.
“It’s too much trouble to get up in the morning, teacher. I think it’s better for me to rest at home.” Shikamaru answered with his usual lazy attitude.
In the original work, Shikamaru only began to realize his own shortcomings after the death of his teacher Asuma, and realized that in this world, people like Hidan had been captured by Rock Lee and were currently being studied in Konoha’s intelligence department.
“Teacher, I’m so young and beautiful, I don’t want to become a muscular woman.” Ino said coquettishly.
Teacher Asuma knew his three disciples very well and could only smile bitterly, but he still felt a little relieved when he saw that Shikamaru could do morning exercises with Rock Lee.
After saying goodbye to Asumaban, Rock Lee set out on his journey home. He decided to temporarily put aside the practice of sealing and summoning techniques, as he felt that they were not very efficient in actual combat, and perhaps he would consider it again in a few years. As for the Three Body Technique, even if he could barely perform it, it might not be practical.
He believed that the time he spent using ninjutsu was enough to knock down the enemy multiple times in battle. If he encountered a strong enemy, he might have been defeated by the time he could use ninjutsu, so it would not be worth it.
Rock Lee sat cross-legged on the bed, formed seals with his hands, and began to practice the Three Body Technique, devoting himself to the practice of the Trinity.
Chapter 60: Hardworking Shikamaru (Old Version)
In the early morning light, Rock Lee arrived at the agreed location on time. Shortly afterwards, Choji arrived, groggy and stumbling, clearly not used to this early-morning lifestyle.
“Brother Li, do we have to get up so early every day to exercise?” Shikamaru asked as he walked over, rubbing his sleepy eyes.
“Yes, morning exercise has become a habit for me for many years. Perhaps when the world is truly at peace, I can stop and have a good rest.” Rock Lee replied.
“When will I be able to have the strength to rival yours?” Shikamaru said longingly.
“Hard work determines success. When you can transform into a butterfly freely without relying on secret medicine, you will become powerful. But this road is full of hardships and requires an indomitable will.” Rock Lee encouraged him.
“You also know my family’s secret technique of transforming into a butterfly?” asked Shikamaru in surprise.
“I’ve only heard a little bit about the Ino, Deer, and Chou families being very famous in Konoha Village. I’ve only heard of the Akimichi family’s secret technique but never seen it in person. I hope to witness your achievements in this skill. I have full confidence in you, Choji.” Rock Lee said expectantly.
Under Rock Lee’s guidance, Choji began his first morning exercise. Lee meticulously coached him on running technique and breathing rhythm. Despite Choji’s limited stamina, his resolve was unwavering. Even after completing twenty laps, he was still panting, persevering, his every step bearing the mark of sweat and effort.
Rock Lee slowed down his pace and used provocation to motivate Choji, “Choji, imagine there are a hundred delicious barbecues waiting for you. Would you like to watch me devour them while you get full early at the next dinner party? That would be such a shame.”
A trace of determination flashed in Choji’s eyes as he sped forward, “I will never allow that to happen. I will definitely become the one who eats the most, Rock Lee. I will definitely surpass you.”
These words seemed to re-energize Choji, and he broke into a run. Every member of Konoha’s new generation possessed immense potential, especially Choji. During the Fourth Shinobi World War, he single-handedly mastered the secret technique of butterfly transformation, greatly increasing his combat power. Rock Lee’s goal now was to unleash this potential in Choji before it was too late.
Even if it’s just one year earlier, if Choji can master the secret technique of transforming into a butterfly, Konoha’s combat effectiveness will increase, and future battles will be much easier.
Rock Lee accompanied Choji through fifty laps of training. Despite constant encouragement, Choji was exhausted, his legs feeling like lead. Rock Lee knew that Choji had reached his limit.
“Choji, you can walk around the village slowly twice and then go back to rest. I have to continue my accelerated training, as there are still many tasks to be completed.” Rock Lee said.
“Rock Lee, you keep running. I plan to walk two laps and then go home. I’ll try to run two more laps tomorrow.” Shikamaru said with a hint of reluctance, but more of persistence.
Rock Lee, energized, completed 50 laps of morning training. Despite being exhausted, he persevered and headed to the second training ground, determined to maintain his advantage through intense physical training. He didn’t want to be left behind by his peers, as he knew this age was a crucial period for rapid improvement in strength.
After breakfast, Rock Lee plunged into training. Soon, Kaga, eager to find him, revealed a crucial match with Kakashi that day and requested Rock Lee be a witness. Upon arriving at the second training ground, Rock Lee found Kakashi next to Kaga, a nervous Kaga, who appeared somewhat helpless.
Obviously, Mr. Kai had high hopes for this game, so much so that he hardly slept last night and went to wait at Kakashi’s house before dawn just to make sure the game could start immediately.
Rock Lee asked curiously, “Teacher, what is today’s game? It won’t be just another simple rock-paper-scissors game, will it? If the game is too easy, I don’t think my role as a witness will be very useful.”
“It’s a rare opportunity for us to hold such a formal competition. It would be too hasty to decide the winner with rock-paper-scissors. I suggest that we start from here and compete all the way to the Valley of the End. The first one to arrive wins, and the loser has to run back upside down.” Teacher Kai proposed his plan enthusiastically, his face filled with pride in his idea.
“That’s a bad idea,” Kakashi retorted. “The Valley of the End is too far away. What if the Hokage needs to find us? I think we should find a competition in Konoha Village. Lee, do you have any suggestions?”
“Teachers can consider challenging the minefield and see who can cross it first and cause the least explosions and have the fewest scars on their bodies. The winner can be determined by combining these factors.” Rock Lee suggested.
The minefield is a special training area filled with bombs under Konoha Village. Although it is extremely dangerous for ordinary people, it is not a threat to masters like Kakashi and Might Guy.
“It’s settled, Kakashi. We’ll compete in the minefield, and the loser will have to run handstands around the village a hundred times.” Teacher Kai agreed excitedly.
“That’s all.” Teacher Kakashi seemed to be looking forward to the upcoming challenge. As a former member of the Anbu, he was extremely familiar with the minefield.
The three of them then headed towards the minefield surrounded by iron nets. To many people, it was as dangerous as the Death Forest, but to them, it was a great opportunity to prove their strength.
Chapter 61 Kakashi and Teacher Gai (Old Version)
Kakashi and Gai engaged in a fierce running duel, with Rock Lee watching the entire process with amusement. Gai’s unyielding spirit was a role model for many ninjas in Konoha Village. They quickly approached a mine-pocked area and both leaped into the dangerous barbed wire.
As a former ANBU member, Kakashi knew the minefields intimately. While he couldn’t completely evade all the bombs, he deftly dodged most of the explosions. He weaved through the minefield, advancing continuously. In contrast, Gai took a completely different approach. He charged directly into the minefield, recklessly advancing at full speed. The constant roar of explosions failed to slow him down.
The two were equally matched in speed, but Gai’s straight-line running quickly outpaced Kakashi’s curved movements. Kakashi then changed his tactics, no longer focusing on dodging mines. Instead, he ran in a straight line and began using the obstacles around him to hinder Gai. He constantly threw small objects, such as stones and wasp nests, to slow his opponent.
Rock Lee couldn’t help laughing at these little actions, and Teacher Gai gradually realized that Kakashi was deliberately delaying time in order to gain an advantage in the race.
Sensei Gai adjusted his strategy, no longer just rushing blindly, but now skillfully moving in front of Kakashi, gathering power with each step, kicking up clouds of dust and challenging his opponent.
Kakashi felt the pressure. Their speeds were almost the same in a straight line, and it was obvious that it would be difficult to overtake Kai in such a situation. He decided to use some clever tricks.
So Kakashi changed his running route and stopped following passively. He took out a kunai and threw it accurately, piercing the bomb in front of Akai and causing an explosion.
Faced with this sudden attack, Mr. Kai had to stop and take a defensive stance to avoid being affected by the explosion. These bombs all used detonating tags, and their power should not be underestimated.
He took advantage of the explosion behind him and his speed to leap across the danger zone before it reached him. If he had entered the explosion range from the front, he would have been injured.
Kakashi seized the opportunity when Teacher Kai paused, quickly closing the distance and moving forward side by side with Kai again.
They soon arrived at the location of the flag, each raised a flag, and quickly turned back.
On the way back, they set obstacles for each other in an attempt to slow each other down, but neither succeeded.
As the two ran at high speed, they displayed various skills and strategies alternately, leaving Rock Lee, who was watching, overwhelmed and stunned.
In a fierce competition, Gai and Kakashi raced towards the finish line. The loser faced the humiliation of running handstands 100 times around Konoha Village. For Gai, this punishment was a piece of cake; his daily training included running handstands around the village. Kakashi, however, was reluctant to embarrass himself in public. In previous competitions, he had never failed to execute a handstand penalty, and if he wasn’t absolutely sure, he would always try to modify the punishment. They reached the finish line almost neck and neck, making it difficult to determine the winner.
“Xiao Li, what is the result?” Teacher Kai asked anxiously.
“Both teachers crossed the finish line at the same time. We need to consider other conditions to determine the winner.” Rock Lee replied.
He examined the condition of the two teachers. Although the bomb was extremely powerful, it was not easy to cause substantial damage to them. The two teachers were only covered with a little dust.
“Please state the number of bombs you detonated.”
“Counting bombs? I completely forgot about this and was just running away.” Teacher Kai said in confusion.
Rock Lee laughed in silence. It was obvious that Teacher Kai was only thinking about the competition and had forgotten all other details.
“Akagi, you detonated 126 of them, and I detonated 62, which is about half of yours. It looks like this victory belongs to me again.” Teacher Kakashi announced the result with a smile.
“There is no doubt that you defeated me this time, but remember, I will take back the victory next time. I will go and complete my punishment first – running around Konoha. Kakashi, Rock Lee, see you later.” As soon as Teacher Kai finished speaking, he turned head down, used his hands and feet, and quickly disappeared from sight.
Rock Lee stared at the gradually disappearing figure, his mouth moved slightly, but no sound came out.
“Rock Lee, if you have something to say to me, there’s no one else here.” Kakashi noticed Rock Lee’s hesitation and asked curiously.
“Teacher Kakashi, I’m thinking that if we score based on the number of mines detonated and the severity of the wounds on the body, then Teacher Gai should actually win.” Rock Lee said somewhat embarrassedly.
Kakashi was stunned. This was the first time he had heard of such a grading method. If he followed Rock Lee’s words, then Teacher Gai was indeed better.
“Let’s discuss this issue another day. I suddenly remembered that I have an urgent task to deal with. I’ll leave first, Xiao Li.” Kakashi seemed a little flustered and left in a hurry.
Rock Lee returned alone, and as soon as he walked out of the minefield, he was stopped by an Anbu member.
“Rock Lee, the Hokage wants to see you.”
“Come with me.”
Rock Lee was filled with doubts. What on earth was Tsunade looking for him for? Could it be related to Naruto and the others’ mission? In the Hokage’s office, Tsunade stared at Rock Lee sternly.
“Xiao Li, I need you to tell me, did you really detonate those bombs in the minefield?” Tsunade asked directly.
“Sensei Kai and Sensei Kakashi accidentally triggered a landmine during their competition in the minefield. I am deeply sorry for this. I would like to express my most sincere apology to you on their behalf.” Rock Lee stated sincerely.
“There’s no need to apologize. This minefield was set up to train the Anbu’s anti-blasting team, but it’s been damaged by your competition. I hope to see you restore it to its original condition.” Tsunade responded seriously.
Faced with such a request, Rock Lee felt helpless. Kai was busy running in circles, while Kakashi, feeling guilty, was nowhere to be found. He sighed inwardly, feeling that he was merely a referee, yet in the end, he had to clean up the mess of the two teachers’ actions.
After Rock Lee left, Tsunade couldn’t help but smile knowingly.
“Thank you for your understanding, Lady Tsunade.” At this time, Kakashi jumped in from the window and expressed his gratitude to Tsunade.
“In your match with Kai, why did you let Rock Lee take the responsibility of repairing the minefield? If you can’t give me a satisfactory explanation, then you will go with him to repair those mines.” Tsunade demanded.
Kakashi then explained the rules of their game: in reality, regardless of the number of mines detonated, Kai would be the winner, while Lee would announce the winner based on the specific circumstances.
“In other words, no matter whether I trigger more or fewer landmines, Xiao Li will judge the other side as the winner. In this competition, because Akai was too fast, he directly entered the state of handstand running.” Kakashi added.
Chapter 62: Sky-high Reward (Old Version)
At the Akatsuki’s secret base in the River Country, Kidomaru and the other three, having deserted Orochimaru, were recruited by Konan to serve as the organization’s outer guard. They were delighted by the surrender of the Otoninus, who had once served under Orochimaru, with Scorpion, who held a deep grudge against Orochimaru, being the most excited.
Recalling Orochimaru’s betrayal of the Akatsuki organization, although the organization hunted him down many times, Orochimaru always managed to escape with his cunning. Now, a traitor has appeared among Orochimaru’s subordinates, which is undoubtedly great news for Scorpion, because he had the opportunity to kill him when he recruited Orochimaru, but was prevented by Pein.
Life within the Akatsuki organization was much more comfortable for Kidomaru and the other two than it was with Orochimaru, who constantly faced the danger of becoming experimental subjects. However, when Akatsuki demanded they reveal Orochimaru’s whereabouts, the three were filled with conflict and fear. Leaking this information would likely make them targets of Orochimaru.
“Tayuya, Akatsuki wants us to reveal Orochimaru’s base. Do we really want to do this?” Faced with such a choice, although the three have already joined Akatsuki, the shadow of Orochimaru still lingers.
“We have no way out and can only trust Akatsuki. Tell them all the information about Orochimaru and let them deal with Orochimaru. That way, he won’t have time to take care of us.” In the end, they decided to entrust everything to Akatsuki, hoping to get rid of the threat of Orochimaru.
Sakon was filled with fear of Orochimaru deep down in his heart, and now that he had betrayed him, he only hoped that Orochimaru would disappear soon.
“It looks like you three betrayers are going to be disappointed.”
The memorable voice suddenly sounded outside the door, making the three of them shudder.
They looked towards the door nervously, cold sweat on their foreheads. The owner of the voice was Orochimaru.
“Who’s there? Stop playing these tricks and show yourself.”
Sakon asked loudly, trembling.
“It’s only been a few days since we last met, and you can’t recognize my voice anymore?”
Orochimaru walked in slowly, a sneer on his lips, and his cold eyes seemed to be staring at three dying people.
“Lord Orochimaru, you are finally here. I was kidnapped by Kidomaru and Tayuya. This was all their idea.”
Sakon pointed at Kidomaru and Tayuya and hurriedly defended himself.
“Three traitors, you’re blaming each other so quickly. As the first of my men to betray me, how should I punish you? Killing you outright seems too easy for you.”
Orochimaru’s hoarse voice made the three of them tremble involuntarily and sweat profusely.
“Orochimaru, don’t forget that this is the base of Akatsuki. The three of us are not easy to deal with. Once we get support, it will be difficult for you to escape unscathed.” Kidomaru tried to warn.
Orochimaru laughed out loud.
“You’ve followed me for years, thinking you know my secrets. Could it be that I’m completely defenseless? I’ve already tampered with your bodies. Trying to stall for time is sheer wishful thinking.”
Orochimaru skillfully formed hand seals, and in an instant, the three men felt their bodies firmly bound by an invisible force, losing the ability to move.
The curse cast by Orochimaru was extraordinary. Not only did it incorporate Orochimaru’s own will, but the three victims had already undergone multiple physical transformations by him, and their life and death were all controlled by his fingertips.
“Your lives are still useful at the moment, so I’ll let you live for now.”
Orochimaru changed his hand seals again, and a giant python broke out of the ground, swallowed the three people, and then disappeared underground with them. Orochimaru himself sank into the ground with a sneer.
After dealing with these three traitors, he began to plan how to solve the thorny problem of Rock Lee.
Rock Lee is famous for his escape skills using the Eight Gates, which gives Orochimaru a headache. Unless someone can exceed his speed, or Rock Lee opens at least the sixth gate himself, it will be difficult to stop him.
Orochimaru felt that he seemed to be a little behind the times. A new ninja from Konoha actually made him, one of the legendary three ninjas, helpless.
After returning to the secret base, Orochimaru summoned Kabuto Yakushi.
“Kabuto, go to the black market and post a mission. I’m offering a 30 million bounty for the life of Rock Lee of Konoha.”
Orochimaru plans to use the power of the black market to eliminate Rock Lee quietly. After all, if he does it himself, it will easily attract the attention of Konoha, and Konoha’s intelligence agency is not easy to deal with.
Kakuzu reveled in hunting down bounty-bearing ninja, his obsession being to turn their bodies into gold. Orochimaru cleverly set a high bounty to lure Kakuzu into a trap and provoke conflict between the Akatsuki and Konoha. Even if Kakuzu failed to kill Rock Lee, the bounty would still ignite a deep conflict between the two, a lucrative proposition for Orochimaru. If Kakuzu were to die at Konoha’s hands, the Akatsuki would be weakened, a fact that would only further satisfy Orochimaru.
“Lord Orochimaru, it’s amazing that you dealt with these traitors so quickly.” Kabuto Yakushi said with a barely perceptible smile, watching Orochimaru from the side.
“These three foolish traitors thought they could be safe by joining the Akatsuki organization. That was simply wishful thinking. I brought them back to serve as experimental material, so that their deaths would be valuable.” Orochimaru explained coldly, “For this fusion experiment, they have been strengthened by curse seals, and their bodies have strong resistance, making them very suitable as experimental subjects.”
“I understand, Lord Orochimaru.” Kabuto Yakushi responded. Feeling Orochimaru’s gaze, he couldn’t help but feel a lot of pressure, as if he might become Orochimaru’s next experimental subject at any time.
Back in Konoha Village, night had fallen, and Rock Lee had finally completed his minefield repair mission. He awaited the return of Neji and Naruto, learning that their mission was complete and they were expected to return to Konoha the following day. Otherwise, Rock Lee might have volunteered to support them.
Without the assistance of Neji’s Byakugan, Rock Lee felt his movements were restricted and realized the importance of the Byakugan.
“Hokage-sama, the minefield has been completely repaired. Please send someone to inspect it.”
After completing the repair task, Rock Lee immediately went to the Hokage’s office to report to Tsunade.
“Okay, the results of the pirate investigation you brought back are out. Shizune, explain it to Lee.” Tsunade turned to Shizune and instructed her.
“Orochimaru has a secret base in the north where he holds test subjects with cursed seals implanted into them, but the pirates’ memories don’t contain the exact location of the base.”
Shizune handed Rock Lee a piece of paper with information on it. Rock Lee glanced at it and thought that this was probably where Jūgo was imprisoned. He was surprised that there was no specific location, otherwise Orochimaru’s base would have been wiped out long ago.
“The northern stronghold is too vast, and it is difficult to determine its specific location.” Li Luoke analyzed.
“Then let the intelligence department strengthen the collection of intelligence in the north. At the same time, please note that Orochimaru must have his own methods to be able to run rampant in the ninja world for so long.” Tsunade reminded.
After the report, Rock Lee returned home and after a short rest, he began his training. Currently, he was mainly practicing the Trinity of Tantric Buddhism, while his progress in the Golden Bell Cover was relatively slow.
Rock Lee devoted himself to practicing the Trinity Technique, laying a solid foundation for his future mastery of the Golden Bell Cover. This technique stimulates potential, strengthens the physique, and paves the way for further advancement in the Golden Bell Cover.
He skillfully formed the seals of the Ten Buddhas with his hands, sat in meditation, and devoted himself to cultivation.
With each practice, Rock Lee can clearly feel the natural energy of the world around him. His perception gradually broadens, and each progress is extremely significant.
He realized that the Trinity Technique was particularly suitable for this world. Thinking back to his previous life, many Tantric practitioners were unable to enter the door throughout their entire lives, but he could sense the natural energy in the air. The difference in the laws did lead to a huge difference in the results of practice.
In the early morning, Rock Lee slowly opened his eyes, stretched his muscles, and ended a night of hard training.
At the same time, Kakuzu was in a difficult situation because his companion Hidan was arrested. The newly assigned companions were killed by him because they did not meet his requirements, and he was ridiculed by some people in the organization.
A familiar face in the underground black market of River Country, Kakuzu was a household name. As soon as he entered the black market, his men immediately rushed forward to report the latest intelligence, especially regarding changes to the bounty list.
These men are Kakuzu’s eyes and ears, specializing in collecting black market intelligence for him.
“Boss, there’s a huge bounty on the black market recently, and the target is Rock Lee from Konoha.”
“What’s the exact number?”
“The reward has been raised to 30 million, and the new order was issued last night.”
A greedy smile appeared on Kakuzu’s lips. He had heard of Rock Lee’s name long ago and knew that this was a tough nut to crack. But no matter how tough it was, for the sake of the huge bounty, he had to kill Rock Lee.
He left the gloomy black market with a malicious smile on his face and headed for the nearest hiding place. He planned to use his extensive intelligence network to strike a fatal blow the moment Rock Lee left the village.
Through the mysterious ring, Kakuzu conveyed his plan to Pain.
“Call a meeting immediately.”
Pain quickly conveyed the order to convene a meeting to all members of Akatsuki through the ring’s communication system.
In a short while, all the members arrived.
Payne briefly introduced Rock Lee’s situation.
“Kakuzu, you’re obviously eyeing that 30 million bounty, but don’t underestimate Rock Lee. If he uses the Eight Gates to escape, we’ll be helpless.”
Kisame has personal experience of this, having let Rock Lee slip away from him in the Land of Whirlpools.
“Kakuzu is now isolated and helpless. Does he have to fight alone this time?” Deidara said with sarcasm.
Everyone was used to Kakuzu’s habit of trading his companions’ bodies for bounties. After all, anyone who joined the Akatsuki organization carried a high bounty, and Kakuzu’s lust for money was obsessive. After all, Hidan’s capture by Konoha was his own fault.
Chapter 63 Leave Request (Old Version)
“It is not wise to attack Rock Lee now.” Itachi Uchiha’s voice rang out in the conference room.
As a veteran of the Akatsuki organization, Itachi was renowned not only for his strength but also for his wisdom, earning the respect of his peers. Even within the egotistical Akatsuki, no one dared to underestimate Itachi’s strength and wisdom.
“Explain your point to us, Itachi.”
Pain was also curious to know Itachi’s opinion, although he knew that Itachi was recommended to join by Madara.
“To be willing to offer a bounty on Rock Lee at all costs must be due to a deep hatred. Rock Lee’s mortal enemies in the ninja world are none other than Orochimaru and the people of the Iwagakure Village.
It’s worth noting that both of them have ties to the Akatsuki organization. I suspect Orochimaru is the mastermind behind all this. He knows Kakuzu’s background well and intends to provoke a direct conflict between us and Konoha.
Itachi analyzed calmly.
“It seems that Orochimaru can’t do anything to Rock Lee himself, so he wants to use money to lure us into action. This sinister man is destined to be our prey.”
Scorpion’s hatred for Orochimaru was beyond words, especially since Orochimaru actually used the Impure World Reincarnation method to control the Third Kazekage, which should have been Scorpion’s unique achievement.
“Jue, continue to follow Rock Lee and eliminate him once the opportunity arises. We will inevitably clash with him in the future, so we need to deal with him in advance to avoid any future trouble. Let’s adjourn.
In Konoha Village, in the Hokage’s office.
“Tsunade-sama, I would like to request a month’s leave.”
With the determination to break through the Golden Bell Cover, Rock Lee asked Tsunade for a leave of absence.
The Shaolin martial arts are unfathomable, with no shortcuts to their attainment. In the past, countless warriors spent their entire lives to reach the fifth level of the Golden Bell Cover.
Rock Lee has reached such a height when he was only fourteen years old. His achievement is not only the result of exploring his own potential to the extreme, but also the result of the unique environment of this Naruto world.
In the last days of the Dharma Ending Age, the gods on Earth hid themselves and the power of many martial arts techniques was greatly reduced. Even if one spent one’s entire life on studying the Taoist secrets, it was still difficult to get started. At best, they could only achieve the effect of clearing the mind and concentrating the spirit.
The bottlenecks in practicing the Golden Bell Cover often stagnate for years, decades, or even a lifetime. However, with Rock Lee’s aptitude, in the Naruto world, he only needs two years of practice to easily break through.
However, the reality did not allow him to wait leisurely, so he decided to take the extreme method of “putting himself in a desperate situation and then surviving” in order to achieve success through destruction.
Tsunade was surprised by Rock Lee’s request for leave. He was always diligent and rarely absent. “What happened?”
“I want to delve deeper into my taijutsu, identify any blind spots, and conduct a comprehensive improvement and integration. I feel like my progress has been too slow recently.”
“At your age, you possess considerable strength, so there’s no need to be too hard on yourself. Konoha is currently in the midst of reconstruction, and with so many tasks to accomplish, a month is indeed too long. But I will do my best for you, and unless it’s an emergency, I won’t bother you. Go and achieve your goal.”
This rewrite retains the core content of the original novel while polishing the language to make it more fluent and in line with the narrative style of the novel.
Rock Lee, a rising star in Konoha Village, is highly regarded by Tsunade, who hopes he will become a strong pillar supporting the village’s future and lead Konoha back to its former glory. Tsunade knows that the rise of every powerful individual is the solid foundation of the village.
On the outskirts of Konoha, Rock Lee ran a cattle farm, where the cattle were meticulously cared for, resulting in delicious meat and strong physiques. He also planted various medicinal herbs in the mountains, all of which were used to nourish Qi and blood, providing support for his training.
He would occasionally purchase new herb seeds and send the Genin on missions to help them grow, though Naruto, in particular, complained about this, believing it interfered with his training. However, Rock Lee knew that these experiences were crucial to their growth.
As he prepared for his breakthrough a month from now, Rock Lee selected a robust ox to serve as his food for the next few days. He knew only by accumulating sufficient foundation could he survive the ultimate challenge. His memories of the Land of Lightning had taught him the hardships of harnessing the power of lightning, and he was eagerly anticipating his training in the Electric House—a training ground capable of steadily outputting up to 100,000 volts, like a thunderbolt of divine retribution, helping him tap into his potential and become even stronger.
Determined to reach greater heights, Rock Lee increased the voltage to a staggering one million volts, pushing the limits of his Golden Bell. He honed his Trinity Technique, feeling his body’s potential rapidly increase, subtle muscle adjustments and a steady increase in strength. He mentally imagined his own Buddhahood and chanted a mysterious mantra. Though he failed to absorb the surrounding natural energy, he was pleasantly surprised to perceive the shadowy figure of the Buddha behind him, forming hand seals and chanting mantras in sync. He knew that only when body, speech, and mind were perfectly unified could he tap into his inner potential and reach the edge of Buddhist mystical power. Though his goal remained far from being achieved, Rock Lee remained steadfast in his resolve and continued to strive, anticipating the awakening of his own mystical power.
After this qualitative leap, he planned to increase the voltage to one million volts, because 100,000 volts was no longer enough to support his future breakthroughs.
Rock Lee practiced the hand seals of the Ten Buddhas and specialized in the Trinity Technique. This secret technique was the key to his confidence in being able to break through the Golden Bell Cover.
As his physical potential increases, his ability to withstand high voltage electricity also increases accordingly, thereby increasing the possibility of a breakthrough.
Constructing a grand scene of himself becoming a Buddha in his mind, Rock Lee kept chanting the Trinity mantra.
Although he did not start to absorb the natural energy around him, he could clearly feel that his body was gradually strengthening and his muscles were autonomously optimizing and adjusting.
Although he had never seen the real Buddha in person, he relied on his past reading and imagination to shape the image in his mind.
Behind his shadow, a tiny Buddha figure quietly emerged, forming seals and chanting mantras in sync with it.
The perfect combination of body, speech and mind is the key to unlocking the body’s potential and even the door to supernatural powers.
Many Buddhist supernatural powers, such as clairvoyance and clairaudience, are the awakening of one’s potential after deep exploration.
Although Rock Lee is still some distance away from achieving supernatural powers, he firmly believes that as long as he practices persistently, he will eventually unleash his supernatural potential.
Chapter 64: Deliberate (Old Version)
Following the tempting aroma of barbecue, Shikamaru came to Lee’s residence.
“Xiao Li, is your newly developed seasoning any good? I could smell the fragrance from far away and couldn’t help but be drawn in.”
As soon as Choji entered the room, he said to Rock Lee who was eating heartily.
“Come, try this! My secret dipping sauce is definitely not inferior to the ones in professional barbecue restaurants.”
Rock Lee handed Choji a portion of grilled meat and dipping sauce.
“Why haven’t you had morning exercises these past couple of days? Neji has always been the one leading the team.”
“I’ve recently been researching and improving my taijutsu, deeply exploring the power points of various techniques. This takes time. Improving strength requires reflection and innovation. Only by identifying your own shortcomings can you make real progress.”
Rock Lee said as he ate.
“Reflection and innovation, can you be more specific? I feel like I’ve been making very slow progress lately. How can I improve?”
Choji was deeply attracted by Rock Lee’s words. He always felt that he was the weakest among these companions.
Although Shikamaru often comforted him by saying that his attack power was very strong, he still felt that the Meat Bomb Tank’s attack methods were simple and his multiplication technique was not proficient enough.
“I don’t quite understand the Qiu Dao family’s secret techniques, but any secret technique that relies on the body is based on physical fitness. As long as you eat more and practice more, your strength will definitely improve.”
Rock Lee picked up another piece of meat. After hearing this, Choji silently said to himself, “Eat more and exercise more.”
“Then I won’t be polite. I’ll go to training after eating.”
Choji started to eat with relish, and Rock Lee kept adding more meat for him. Choji devoured the barbecue in no time.
“It’s delicious. This barbecue has a herbal aroma and is not greasy at all. In comparison, I always feel sick of barbecue outside after eating too much.”
Choji touched his stomach and said to Rock Lee who was still eating voraciously.
“You still have to keep exercising. I haven’t even finished half of my meal yet. Eating more will make you stronger,” said Rock Lee.
As Choji watched Rock Lee eating, he felt a little hungry again, but he couldn’t eat anymore after just two bites.
“Don’t push yourself, or you’ll end up in the hospital again.”
Last time, Choji was hospitalized because he ate too much, and Rock Lee was worried that he would repeat the same mistake this time.
“Then I’ll be leaving. I’m going to train with Shikamaru. My goal is to eat more and become stronger.”
Today, Shikamaru finally experienced the feeling of watching others eat while he is already full. He decided to train harder and try to catch up with Rock Lee as soon as possible.
Rock Lee continued his training after Choji’s departure. While both his Trinity and Golden Bell cultivations were related to cellular vitality and density, the ultimate realms they achieved were completely different. Trinity pursued the unity of man and nature, while Golden Bell merely strengthened the physical body, with virtually no understanding of the Way of Heaven and Earth.
After half a month of closed-door training, Rock Lee felt that his strength had reached a new level and he was more confident in breaking through the sixth level of the Golden Bell Cover.
Meanwhile, Neji was coaching Sasuke and Tenten in their training at the second training ground.
“Sasuke, Tenten, you use hidden weapons to attack me, and I will defend myself with Kaiten. Today we will focus on practicing our attack speed.”
Neji wanted to see the results of Sasuke’s Chidori Senbon technique. After a long period of development, this technique was ready for actual combat. Since returning from his last mission supporting Naruto, Sasuke had become more taciturn and trained even harder.
After two weeks of training, Sasuke mastered the Chidori Senbon technique. He unleashed it before Neji, sending the Senbon flying towards him like lightning. Neji attempted to defend himself with a Kaiten, but Sasuke deliberately caused the Chidori Senbon to explode upon impact, generating an electrical current that posed an additional threat to Neji.
Neji paused his training to ask Sasuke.
“Sasuke, why did you make the Chidori Senbon explode?”
“I did it on purpose. Steady lightning is nice, but if it can’t hit the enemy, stability is useless. I adjusted the technique so that it explodes on impact, so that even if it doesn’t hit directly, it can still cause damage through the electricity.”
“Your innovation is very effective. My hands became numb when I used Kaiten just now. If I get hit repeatedly, I might just have no choice but to dodge.” Neji said, looking at his slightly numb hands.
Following the tempting aroma of barbecue, Choji stepped into Rock Lee’s residence.
“Rock Lee, is your newly prepared sauce ready? I smelled the tempting aroma of barbecue from afar and couldn’t help but follow.”
“Come, try this. My secret sauce is definitely not inferior to any barbecue restaurant.”
Rock Lee handed Choji a small bowl of barbecue sauce he had made.
“Why haven’t you been doing morning exercises lately? It’s always Neji who leads everyone in running.”
“I’ve recently been immersed in exploring new power-generating techniques in taijutsu. This requires an in-depth study of the essence of each movement, and it’s a time-consuming endeavor. You know, improvement in strength must be accompanied by reflection and improvement. Only by recognizing one’s own shortcomings can one achieve substantial progress.”
Rock Lee explained while eating barbecue.
“Reflection and improvement, can you be more specific? I feel like my improvement has almost stagnated. How can I improve?”
Choji became very interested in Rock Lee’s words. He always felt that he was the weakest among these companions.
Although Shikamaru often comforted him, saying that he was very talented in attack, he always felt that his Meat Bomb Chariot’s attack methods were simple and his mastery of the multiplication technique was not yet proficient enough.
“I’m not very familiar with the Qiu Dao family’s secret techniques, but all techniques that rely on the body are based on one premise – that is, you must have a solid foundation of physical fitness. As long as you persist in eating more and practicing more, your strength will naturally improve.”
Rock Lee said as he put a mouthful of barbecue into his mouth.
Shikamaru nodded slightly, understanding the simple four words – “eat more and exercise more.”
“Xiao Li, I won’t be polite then. After finishing this meal, I will immediately start training.”
As soon as he finished speaking, Choji started to eat voraciously, while Rock Lee kept adding more slices of meat to his plate. The aroma of grilled meat, accompanied by the unique flavor of herbs, quickly disappeared between Choji’s hands and mouth.
“I’m really full. Your barbecue skills are first-rate. The herbal aroma is so delicious that I never get tired of it. It’s completely different from the barbecue restaurants out there.”
While rubbing his round belly, Choji said to Rock Lee who was still eating heartily.
“It seems you need to exercise more. I’ve only eaten half of it. You need to eat more so you can grow stronger.” Rock Lee said while eating.
As Choji watched Rock Lee continuously putting beef into his mouth, his stomach seemed to be sending out hunger signals again, but after trying two bites, he found that he was no longer able to do so.
“Don’t push yourself, or you’ll have to go to the hospital again.”
Recalling his recent experience of seeking medical treatment for overeating, Rock Lee was also worried that Choji would fall into the same predicament again.
“Okay, Xiao Li, I won’t bother you here anymore. I’m going to go find Shikamaru to train. My goal is to eat more and become stronger.”
Today, Choji deeply felt the satisfaction of eating his fill, yet also the frustration of watching others eat. He resolved to train diligently, hoping to one day rival Rock Lee.
After watching Shikamaru leave, Rock Lee stretched out his arms for a moment and then continued to devote himself to his training.
Ever since their last mission with Naruto, Sasuke had seemed different. That time, if it weren’t for Naruto’s incredible outburst and the speed with which he activated his four-wing mode, the mission would have nearly failed. Since then, Sasuke had become even more silent, and his training had become even more rigorous.
Neji had some understanding of Sasuke’s feelings. After all, the power Naruto exploded with was so shocking that it caused quite a stir on Sasuke.
After two weeks of hard training, Sasuke finally mastered the Chidori Senbonjutsu and was able to use it in battle.
Sasuke quickly formed hand seals, gathered dense lightning in his palms, transformed it into a sharp Senbon, and suddenly threw it towards Neji.
The Senbon swept past like a gust of wind and arrived in front of Neji in an instant, carrying a strong paralyzing force, trying to pin Neji to the spot.
Neji released a light layer of chakra and his body spun like a whirlwind.
“This is Huitian!”
Now Neji has mastered this technique to perfection, and the chakra consumption has been greatly reduced compared to before.
Neji deflected all of Sasuke’s Chidori Senbon while spinning rapidly, and just as he stopped, Tenten’s hidden weapons came at him like raindrops.
Neji had no choice but to activate Kaiten again to bounce back Tenten’s attack.
Sasuke and Tenten took turns firing hidden weapons continuously, leaving Neji no time to rest and forcing him to use the Kaiten technique continuously.
Although Neji didn’t have much chakra, he was very good at saving it. He had used Kaiten five times in a row before he felt a little tired. After all, it was easy for a person to get tired if he kept spinning in circles.
The two of them used hidden weapons alternately to attack Neji’s Kaiten. As they trained, Sasuke discovered that the Senbon was too stable, and it wasn’t very good if it couldn’t hit the enemy.
Sasuke adjusted the stability of Chidori Senbon and shot it towards Neji’s Kaiten again.
“Bang” “Ci La”
As soon as Chidori Senbon and Kaiten collided, they immediately exploded and turned into electric current, wreaking havoc on Kaiten.
Neji stopped Kaiten, indicating a pause.
“Sasuke, why did the Chidori Senbon explode?”
Neji looked at Sasuke and it didn’t look like he had run out of chakra.
“I did it on purpose. I feel that lightning being too stable is not a good thing sometimes. If it can’t pierce the enemy, no matter how stable it is, it’s useless. It’s better to just turn into electric current when it collides, and still cause damage to the enemy.”
“Your idea is good. When I used Kaiten just now, my hand felt a little numb. If it happens a few more times, I will have no choice but to dodge.” Ningji said, looking at his hand
Chapter 65 Chidori (Old Version)
A hint of surprise flashed in Neji and Tenten’s eyes at the same time. After only a few days of training, Sasuke was able to skillfully adjust the Chidori Senbon according to the battle situation. He truly lived up to the name of Uchiha.
“Take a short break, and we’ll continue practicing. Sasuke, you need to practice switching between stable and changing Senbon, and flexibly adjust according to actual combat needs.” Neji arranged, “Once Rock Lee returns, we’ll plan a new training plan and develop new techniques. I don’t have a deep understanding of Chidori, so I won’t comment casually.”
Sasuke pondered his next move. He knew that the Chidori Senbon’s unpredictability was its true power. He considered how to allow the electricity to flow freely within his body, achieving a state of both offense and defense.
He recalled Rock Lee’s advice: if electricity could flow throughout the body, every part of the body could become an extension of the Chidori. Now, Sasuke had mastered the stability of the Senbon, and his next step was to master a controllable lightning spear. Although the path was fraught with difficulty, he already felt the possibility of success.
On the other side, Rock Lee is trying to grill meat with a new seasoning. This attempt takes him out of his comfort zone and brings a brand new flavor experience.
Rock Lee meticulously heated the slate to the perfect temperature. Slices of beef were placed atop it, their skin instantly embodying an alluring golden brown. Seasonings wafted from his hands, and the aroma that followed spread throughout the room.
After a while, Inuzuka Kiba was attracted by the irresistible fragrance and pushed open the door of Rock Lee’s house, followed by his beloved dog Akamaru.
“Brother Li, the smell of this barbecue is so tempting that Akamaru dragged me here.” Ya explained with a little embarrassment, trying to blame the temptation on Akamaru.
Akamaru made a few dissatisfied noises, as if trying to defend his innocence. If he could speak, he would definitely expose Ya’s little thoughts.
Rock Lee laughed heartily and warmly invited them, “Don’t just stand there, come and enjoy it together. Akamaru, I haven’t seen you in a long time, so today I’ll let you eat your fill!”
Kiba accepted it happily and found a place to sit down with Akamaru in his arms.
Akamaru’s eyes were fixed on the barbecue, his mouth watering.
Ya first satisfied Akamaru’s craving by picking up a few pieces of barbecue for him before digging in himself, a testament to his deep affection for him. After tasting the food, he couldn’t help but exclaim, “Brother Li, this barbecue is getting more and more delicious.”
Akamaru barked softly a few times, as if in agreement.
“Hearing Akamaru’s cry, it seems that you also feel better than before! We are indeed partners who understand each other well.” Ya kissed Akamaru happily and stroked its head gently.
“Xiao Li, thank you for your hospitality. It’s been a long time since I last had this delicious meal. We’ll take our leave now.”
Rock Lee sent Kiba and Akamaru away and then began to tidy up his family yard. The beef stock was running low, and the cow had almost been consumed.
He didn’t rush into training, knowing full well that impatience wouldn’t get him anywhere, and that seclusion wasn’t the only path. So, he set out for the second training ground.
He hadn’t seen Neji and the others for half a month, and he wanted to go see how their training was progressing and whether they had made any breakthroughs.
Rock Lee waved to his fellow trainees from a distance.
“Hello everyone, how’s your training going?”
“Xiao Li, why are you here? There’s still some time before your vacation ends. Did you miss us?”
Tenten excitedly ran around Rock Lee, looking at him curiously, as if trying to find something different.
“What changes can happen in half a month? I’m still the same me.” Rock Lee responded with a smile.
“How have you been doing in the past half month? Have you encountered any difficulties?” he asked with concern.
“Everything went smoothly and the missions were completed easily. Moreover, Sasuke has made new breakthroughs in the development of ninjutsu.” Neji replied.
Rock Lee looked at Sasuke and saw him showing the new results of Chidori Senbon. When the ninjutsu touched the big tree in the distance, it instantly turned into a torrent, and the electric current ran wildly on the tree.
Rock Lee secretly marveled inwardly, “Dare to reduce stability in the Chidori Senbon Ninjutsu and pursue destructive power. This kind of innovative spirit is rare. Sasuke, you can explore such a method. It seems that you have put a lot of effort into the Chidori Senbon Ninjutsu.”
“During my battle with Neji, I realized that the unpredictability of lightning can actually be transformed into powerful force.” Sasuke explained his views.
“I have an idea for the Lightning Spear,” Rock Lee suggested. “You could try concentrating your strength to condense Senbon and increase your chakra output to change its form.”
He continued to encourage Sasuke to practice on his own and to seek guidance from Kakashi when necessary. “You still have half a month to improve yourself. Kakashi-sensei’s Raiden techniques are unique, you might want to learn from him. In fact, your Lightning Lance has many similarities with the Raiden. Perhaps by removing the Shadow Clone part, you can form your own Lightning Lance.”
Sasuke was stunned for a moment, then recalled Kakashi’s Raiden technique. A glint of understanding flashed in his eyes. He said excitedly, “I understand. It’s a more advanced form change based on Chidori.”
Looking at Sasuke’s joyful expression, Rock Lee thought to himself: Although Sasuke sometimes appears cold, he is still a child with sincere emotions after all.
Yes, the principle of this technique is easy to understand, but it still takes some time to practice successfully. If you don’t understand, you can ask Teacher Kakashi. ” Rock Lee said
Rock Lee looked at the sky. The sunset glow had already appeared on the horizon and it was almost dark. “Let’s all go to my house for dinner tonight. We haven’t seen each other for a long time. After we part today, it will take another half a month before we meet again.”
“Xiao Li, I love the barbecue you make the most, especially the cows you raise.” Tiantian said happily.
“Girls tend to gain weight easily if they eat too much meat. You can’t grow up to be a fat man, otherwise you will lose your mobility and it will be dangerous if you hold a hidden weapon.” Rock Lee said jokingly.
“You’re the one who’s going to gain weight. You eat so much, you’re going to become a fat guy in the end.” Tiantian said.
“Let’s go to my ranch together. You haven’t been there yet.” Li Luoke said
“Our class has done missions before and planted herbs for your ranch,” Sasuke said.
Rock Lee looked at Neji and Tenten. He remembered that he had not taken them there.
“I heard that you asked the Third Hokage for a hill to raise cattle. Not long after you started raising cattle, Tenten and I went to see it.” Ningji said.
Chapter 66: Buddha’s Shadow (Old Version)
Under the cover of night, Rock Lee finished slaughtering two cows on the farm, cleaned them, and carried them steadily back home. Sasuke had already built a roaring bonfire, the slabs of stone scorching hot, the oil glistening in the flames. Rock Lee presented his carefully blended seasoning like a treasure, distributing it to everyone and humbly soliciting their opinions. “This is a new seasoning I developed. It should taste pretty good. Everyone try it later and tell me if there’s anything I can improve.”
Tenten expertly sliced the beef into thin strips with a kunai, then grilled it on a stone slab. The high heat quickly matured the beef, releasing an alluring aroma. Rock Lee said, half complaining, half proudly, “I’ve been eating this almost every day lately to boost my stamina, and I’m almost sick of it. If it weren’t for the need for it to strengthen my body, I’d seriously consider eating only vegetables for a month straight.”
Tenten took a bite, paired with Rock Lee’s homemade seasoning, and an expression of ecstasy spread across her face, as if she had tasted something truly divine. “This tastes amazing! Much better than those barbecue restaurants,” she said, unable to conceal her inner joy.
Seeing this, Rock Lee was delighted but remained humble. “You’re exaggerating! The beef and seasoning here are only slightly better than what you’d find at a barbecue restaurant.”
“No, it’s not just the taste,” Tiantian said seriously, “I feel like my body desperately needs this beef. It makes me feel satisfied and happy.”
“You have been training too hard recently and neglected to take care of your body. Girls should also pursue beauty in moderation. Given your family’s conditions, it is not easy to get any food you want. I guess you may be picky about food, which has led to your physical weakness.” Li Luoke reminded with concern.
Neji and Sasuke also joined in the meal. If Tenten’s physical condition was already worrying, then Sasuke’s situation was probably even more serious.
“Sasuke, you and Tenten should eat more. Tenten’s health is already depleted, and your condition must be even more serious. Once your body collapses, your strength will stagnate and you may even die suddenly.” Rock Lee continued.
In the original novel, Sasuke has already surrendered to Orochimaru, and with Orochimaru’s abilities, recuperation should be no problem. However, as the only survivor of the Uchiha clan in Konoha Village, no one else can truly care about his health.
Rock Lee stood up and walked into the house, took out three bags of special beef jerky and handed them to them.
“I made this beef jerky specially. It has the same benefits as beef in replenishing Qi and blood. Eat some after a mission or training. It’s not as effective as the secret medicines of the great families, but it’s very beneficial to your health as a snack or with a meal. If you run out, let me know. I have plenty more in stock.”
“Thank you, Xiao Li.” Sasuke took the beef jerky and said gratefully. He also knew that among this group of people, he was the one who needed to pay the most attention to his health. After all, he was alone and had to be more careful.
“You are all my brothers. Naturally, I must share the benefits I gain with you,” Rock Lee stated firmly. After seeing his teammates off, he tidied up the courtyard and immediately began a new round of diligent training. His three-in-one training yielded significant results, giving him confidence in his upcoming breakthrough to the Golden Bell Defense.
In a secret laboratory in Tian Kingdom.
“Kabuto, has Kakuzu taken any action regarding Rock Lee?” Orochimaru asked, discarding his experimental tools. Before him, Kidomaru lay on the test bench, his form completely mutated, no longer a normal human.
Although he still had signs of life, Kidomaru’s body had become abnormal. His lower body had transformed into a giant spider with eight twisted legs.
Orochimaru’s experiment of fusing human and beast genes is nearly complete, but he’s still searching for a way to meet the various conditions.
He is currently working on combining human and insect organs or limbs to create entirely new species of organisms.
Unfortunately, Tayuya died due to the strong body rejection reaction, and only Kidomaru, Sakon and Ukon survived.
Sakon and Ukon were transformed into half-human, half-insect monsters by Orochimaru and are currently imprisoned, awaiting the next round of experiments.
“Lord Orochimaru, according to the monitor’s report, Rock Lee has never left Konoha. As for the Akatsuki organization, there has been no movement recently.”
Kabuto was beside Orochimaru, reporting the situation humbly.
“He’s lucky enough to live a few more days. Once Kidomaru’s transformation plan is complete, we can use his experimental subjects to test the results.
“As for the Iwagakure Village, the Akatsuki organization has already caused them to lose two ninjas, and even Kurotsuchi has suffered heavy losses. Given Ohnoki’s temper, he will definitely take action.” Orochimaru asked curiously.
“The Iwagakure Village has ended its brief peace with the Akatsuki organization and is doing its best to track them down, but the Akatsuki organization is hiding very deeply and there has not yet been a large-scale conflict between the two sides.” Kabuto replied.
“Once the Iwagakure Village and the Akatsuki organization have a complete falling out, if Ōnoki wants to expand outward, he will definitely do it himself. At that time, the actions of the Land of Earth will disrupt the peace of the ninja world.
Kabuto, keep a close eye on the movements of the Iwagakure Village. If they’re about to send troops, notify me immediately. Compared to civilians, ninja bodies are more suitable for my experiments. When the Iwagakure Village takes action, I want to secretly take away some of the Iwagakure ninjas without anyone noticing.
Many of Orochimaru’s experiments require the bodies of ninjas, and he plans to act without anyone noticing.
“Lord Orochimaru, have we chosen a new pirate leader? The laboratory’s expenses are currently huge, and with the 30 million taels of silver bounty just offered, our financial situation is a bit tight.”
“That idiot Morimu only knew how to plunder the Tea Country. He deserved to be annihilated by Konoha. Go to the northern base and select a few people who are proficient in controlling the curse seal and have them form a pirate group.
Remember, don’t always rob in one place. Although the Ninja World is large, it is related to the Five Great Nations. If you always rob in one place, you will force the Five Great Nations to send troops. You idiots, do you still need me to remind you of this kind of thing? “
When Orochimaru thought of Moriki, he couldn’t help but feel angry. This guy was so stupid. The Land of Tea and the Land of Fire were adjacent to each other. Starting from Konoha, it would take less than a day to get there if they were fast.
“Yes, Lord Orochimaru.”
Time flies, and in the blink of an eye, half a month has passed. Rock Lee is practicing Trinity at home. The shadow of the Buddha behind him has become more solid, unlike a month ago, when it was very illusory.
The Buddha’s shadow’s golden eyes flashed, and he became more indifferent. The shadow’s hands were in the same seal as Rock Lee’s, and slowly changed with Rock Lee’s changes.
Rock Lee, who was practicing with his eyes closed, slowly opened his eyes, and the shadow of the Buddha behind him disappeared.
Chapter 67 Breakthrough (Old Version)
In a corner of Konohagakure, Rock Lee concluded a month-long retreat. Through the Trinity training, his foundation had deepened, and his stamina had dramatically improved. He rose from his meditation, stepped into the courtyard, and began practicing his steel fists, feeling a speed and fluidity he had never experienced before.
While the sixth level of the Golden Bell Cover presented a significant challenge, it wasn’t insurmountable for him. The real challenge lay in moving from the sixth to the seventh level. He had steadily entered the middle stages of the Golden Bell Cover from the fourth to sixth levels, but to break through this minor bottleneck, Rock Lee chose an extreme training method.
As night fell, and the villagers gathered around their tables to enjoy dinner, Rock Lee entered a small shop alone, preparing for a dangerous breakthrough. He cranked the voltage to its limit, a whopping 100,000 volts, rivaling the village’s high-voltage power lines. Sitting in the center, Rock Lee stood before the switch that controlled the current.
He took a deep breath and flipped the switch. Instantly, the lights in the village restaurant dimmed, then brightened again. Inside the small electric shack, dazzling sparks erupted from the ground, accompanied by a “crackling” sound. Rock Lee’s journey to breakthrough began.
Rock Lee instantly felt a strong numbness spread throughout his body, followed by heart-wrenching pain, and even dangerous arcs of electricity flashed under his skin.
Amidst the spasms of his body, he struggled to raise his trembling hand and pressed the button of the small electric room, cutting off the shock of the electric current.
With heavy breathing, Rock Lee concentrated his mind and began to practice the Golden Bell Cover technique. In just a few seconds, most of his cells were destroyed by the electric shock.
However, life energy surged in his body, nourishing the damaged cells, strengthening his internal organs, and driving the steady improvement of his cultivation in the fifth level of the Golden Bell Cover.
His muscles were further compressed, his bones became harder, and his blood became thicker.
Every part of his body was getting stronger, even his hair was becoming tougher.
As time went by, the life energy in his body was gradually consumed. Rock Lee realized that the time limit for training had expired and he had to stop.
His hand touched the switch of the small electric room again, and he counted the time silently in his mind.
“One second.”
“Two seconds.”
Rock Lee endured the numbness and pain that penetrated his bones, and counted to the tenth second before turning off the electric shock device with trembling hands.
As the switch turned off, Rock Lee fell to the ground powerlessly, his consciousness blurred, his skin covered with cracks caused by the electric shock, and his body was stained red with blood.
During his relentless training, Rock Lee felt the life energy surge through his body like a tide, its abundance far exceeding that of the initial electric shock. This energy was propelling his physique to a higher level of evolution. The fifth barrier of the Golden Bell was within reach, and his skin became not only more delicate but also more resilient.
The internal transformation was equally astonishing, especially his internal organs, which had undergone profound strengthening, especially his stomach, which saw its digestive function achieve a qualitative leap. With the comprehensive strengthening of his body, Rock Lee’s Eight Gates of Dunjia skills also naturally gained significant enhancements, and his body’s protective capabilities also increased dramatically.
Sensing the limit of his Golden Bell Guard cultivation reaching its fifth level, Rock Lee calmed himself. After an hour of breathing exercises, he slowly extended his finger and touched the start switch of the small electric room again, mentally counting as he prepared for the challenge. A violent current raced through the room, like a miniature thunderstorm within the room, with piercing “crackling” sounds echoing incessantly. Amidst this lightning flash, Rock Lee remained as calm as a virgin. Though his body occasionally twitched from the current, this proved his tenacious vitality and unyielding will.
“one…”
“two…”
He gritted his teeth and endured the intense pain brought by the electric current. He persisted until the tenth second, then tried his best to press the off button.
As the switch turned off, Rock Lee fell to the ground almost immediately, his consciousness blurred, his skin covered with cracks from the electric shock, and blood stained his body red.
On the edge of consciousness, he clung to the last bit of clarity, calling out for the Golden Bell Cover in his heart. The life energy in his body gushed out like a spring, more surging than before, pushing his physique to evolve to a stronger level.
The fifth layer of the Golden Bell Cover is about to break through, his skin becomes more delicate and flexible, and the strengthening of his whole body is obvious.
The internal transformation was equally astonishing, especially his internal organs. His internal organs were deeply strengthened, and the digestive ability of his stomach achieved a qualitative leap.
This all-round strengthening has significantly enhanced Rock Lee’s Eight Gates and physical defense.
After a period of breathing exercises, Rock Lee stopped practicing the Golden Bell Cover. His life energy gradually subsided. He had reached the peak of the fifth level and was ready to face greater challenges.
Taking a deep breath, he sat quietly for an hour, adjusting the various discomforts in his body. Then he stretched out his firm hand again, pressed the switch, and began counting silently in his mind again, preparing for the next self-transcendence.
Inside the electric room, the raging currents whirled about like a wild horse, interweaving into breathtaking scenes that seemed to transform the small room into a den of lightning. The piercing sound of electricity rose and fell as Rock Lee sat quietly, his body twitching from the shock, proving that he was still clinging to life.
Finally, when the timer reached 20 seconds, Rock Lee exerted all his strength, raised his hand and pressed the switch, ending the electric punishment. The moment the current disappeared, blood gushed from his mouth, his body was severely charred, and the smell of burning filled the air.
He lay on the ground like a corpse, his breathing weak, only his heart still beating strongly, conveying the hope of life. After a long period of silence, Rock Lee slowly regained consciousness, silently reciting the Golden Bell Cover technique in his mind. Life energy began to surge in his body, and the itchy tingling sensation of cell repair and division spread throughout his body.
Nourished by this power, he endured the discomfort, and the bottleneck of the fifth level of the Golden Bell Shield shattered, successfully breaking through to the sixth level, his physical strength experiencing a qualitative leap. At this point, Rock Lee’s body was covered with a layer of dead cellular impurities, a clear testament to the hardships he had endured, and also the starting point for his journey to greater strength.
By the time the training ended, the sky was already turning pale, and a night had already passed. Rock Lee suppressed his fatigue, took a shower, and finally fell asleep in bed.
He was so exhausted, and his body’s potential had been almost exhausted. It was basically impossible for him to make a breakthrough in a short period of time. If he wanted to make another breakthrough, he could only work hard on the Eight Gates.
When Rock Lee opened his eyes, it was already noon. He felt very hungry and ate two bags of beef jerky in succession before he felt much better.
The beef jerky he had just eaten was quickly digested by his stomach, and the energy generated instantly spread throughout his body. Rock Lee’s stomach had completed its transformation and was much stronger than before.
The one-month vacation is over, and Rock Lee is going to report to the Hokage’s office to shut some people up.
In the past two days, the two advisors of the Hokage have expressed strong opinions about Rock Lee’s disappearance for a month.
Even Danzo, who usually disappeared, popped out at this time, but was suppressed by Tsunade and the Third Hokage.
Rock Lee stood in the Hokage’s office, looking at Tsunade who was reviewing documents, “Tsunade-sama, I am reporting to you as the Chunin of Konoha, Rock Lee. Tsunade-sama, I am here to cancel my leave.”
“You showed up just in time, Xiao Li. If you were a few days later, someone would be restless.” Tsunade said
Chapter 68 Spider Web (Old Version)
“During your vacation, the ninja world was not at peace. Recently, there have been many incidents of monsters attacking humans, and even affected several villages in the Land of Fire.” Tsunade reported seriously.
“Really? Could those monsters be the products of Orochimaru’s experiments? He is always obsessed with those weird creations, turning people into all kinds of horrible monsters.” Rock Lee speculated with a frown.
“There is no direct evidence pointing to Orochimaru’s actions, but the village is doing its utmost to track him down. Even if he is not directly involved, these incidents are definitely related to him.
“You will now go to the border between the Land of Fire and the Land of Rice. Almost all the ninjas in the village have been dispatched to ensure the safety of the Land of Fire. Neji and the other two are also conducting reconnaissance work at the border,” Tsunade ordered.
“Understood, Hokage-sama. I will leave immediately.”
Rock Lee hadn’t anticipated the unexpected changes that had occurred in a month’s absence. Thinking back to the monsters he’d seen at Orochimaru’s base, he wondered if this was related to Orochimaru’s secret research.
He hurriedly packed a few bags of beef jerky from home and set off quickly. Considering that it was getting late, he had to reach the designated meeting point before dark.
On the way, Rock Lee ate beef jerky in big mouthfuls while walking. His body was in urgent need of nutrition because the breakthrough of the Golden Bell Cover had consumed a lot of his physical energy.
Rock Lee darted through the woods, leaping lightly, feeling a noticeable increase in his stamina. His breathing was deep and steady, and even at breakneck speed, he felt no discomfort. Thanks to the combined practice of the Golden Bell and Trinity, his physical fitness had dramatically improved. His control of his strength improved with each swift run. In just one month, his strength and speed had increased significantly, and his sense of control over his body had greatly increased.
While being alert to his surroundings, Rock Lee noticed that he met many groups of Konoha ninjas along the way. This was obviously a chain reaction caused by the Fire Country village annihilation incident, which made the Fire Country Daimyo and Konoha Village nervous. They sent a large number of ninjas to strengthen vigilance to prevent the tragedy from happening again.
Rock Lee sped along, following the cryptic markings left by his team. Suddenly, a massive net descended from the sky, attempting to capture him. However, his quick reaction allowed him to easily avoid it with a single backward leap. Then, an eerie noise echoed from the woods. Rock Lee’s gaze shifted to reveal a creature with the upper body of a man and the lower body of a spider. It was none other than Orochimaru’s henchman, Kidomaru. Faced with this familiar enemy, Rock Lee immediately became alert.
“Kidomaru, how could your changes in form escape my eyes? You seem to have forgotten the lessons of the past.”
Rock Lee looked at the half-human, half-beast Kidomaru in front of him with sharp eyes and a frown.
Kidomaru’s roar shook the mountains and forests. It had become a mad beast that had lost its mind, with only the urge to kill remaining.
It’s clear that Orochimaru has wiped out his soul, leaving only his bestial nature. The tragedy in the Land of Fire is undoubtedly a continuation of his brutality. This is an opportunity to validate my diligent training over the past month.
Rock Lee instantly activated the extreme speed mode, and chakra gathered in his legs like a tide, causing his speed to soar.
Although he was unable to perform high-level ninjutsu, he was still adept at using these basic skills.
Facing the spider webs sprayed continuously by Kidomaru, Rock Lee was agile and dodged them easily.
Kidomaru’s spider body also moved swiftly. Its cracked abdomen quickly gave birth to countless small spiders, which swarmed towards Rock Lee.
Rock Lee chuckled. This was a commonplace trick. Kidomaru had once used it to challenge Neji, only to have his Gentle Fist completely neutralize it. Now he was using the same trick again, only replacing the summoned beast with himself. There was nothing new about it.
He pulled out his nunchaku and swung it, creating a shadowy effect. “Kidomaru, if this is all you can do, then today, I will put an end to you.”
Rock Lee swung his nunchaku like a gust of wind, smashing the spiders that pounced on him to pieces, scattering debris and sap everywhere. Facing the tidal wave of spiders, his attacks not only failed to cause damage, but even the drain on his stamina was futile. Rock Lee’s stamina was second to none in Konoha Village. He could continuously swing his nunchaku at an astonishing speed, his stamina seemingly recovering faster than it was depleted.
The spiderlings changed their strategy and began to form a circle around Rock Lee. Kidomaru, not to be outdone, began to continuously spray spider webs, trying to trap Rock Lee. Just as Rock Lee was about to leap, the spiderlings around him synchronized their movements, spraying silk threads in mid-air, weaving a giant web that descended upon him.
Facing a monstrous opponent like Kidomaru, Rock Lee no longer dared to underestimate him given his improved tactical skills. Although he didn’t know how to use the soft fist of chakra release, he increased the speed of his nunchaku swings, and the overall quality of his body was improved, making the use of the Golden Bell Cover more effortless.
While spinning at high speed, Rock Lee used his Golden Bell to resist the spider web’s coverage. Most of the web threads were bounced off by him, and only a few stuck to his nunchaku, causing some inconvenience to his defense.
There were more and more spider webs, and Rock Lee’s speed slowed down. Soon the shadow of the Golden Bell Cover disappeared, and Rock Lee was tied up by the dense spider webs.
Rock Lee stood there motionless. He tried to struggle. The spider web was indeed very tough, but it was not yet his limit.
Kidomaru waited for a long time, and seeing Rock Lee motionless, Kidomaru suddenly raised his spider butt, and a spider web flew out of his butt and stuck to Rock Lee. He turned around and gradually disappeared into the woods.
Rock Lee did not move. He wanted to follow Kidomaru and see where his lair was. It was too tiring to stay in one place like Neji and the others. It would be better to just destroy his lair directly.
Kidomaru’s speed is neither fast nor slow. The small spiders around him are his spies, which can help him expand his vision, transmit signals, and play a role in reconnaissance. Although he does not have the vision sharing of the Rinnegan, it is still very powerful.
Rock Lee couldn’t see outside now and could only rely on his feelings. Kidomaru led Rock Lee on the journey, occasionally stopping to capture one or two wild animals and bring them back as food.
Sixty-Nine in Monster (Old Version)
Rock Lee held his breath and concentrated in the spider web, even breathing as lightly as possible for fear of alerting Kidomaru.
He clearly felt that Kidomaru was leading him through the forest and sneaking deep into the underground.
After a long time, Kidomaru finally stopped. Rock Lee judged that they should have arrived at Kidomaru’s lair.
Just as Rock Lee was about to break free from the spider web, a voice suddenly rang out: “This ninja you brought with you, when you have performed a great deed, I will plead with Lord Orochimaru to remove your restraints and restore your freedom.”
At this time, Kidomaru was under the control of Orochimaru and behaved like a beast, but he still retained a trace of consciousness and understood what Kabuto said. He then let out a roar to show his submission.
“Your previous operation failed, and you dared to betray Lord Orochimaru. He has shown great mercy by forgiving you. Now you should be grateful and capture as many living ninjas as possible to present to Lord Orochimaru. He is in great need of you, and he will repay you one day.”
Kidomaru roared again, stepped aside and began to eat.
The cave returned to silence, with only the sound of Kidomaru eating echoing. Rock Lee waited patiently in the spider web. After a long time, another monster entered the cave.
“Sakon, Ukon, your performance is indeed top-notch among the Insect Squad. You can rest today. As elites hand-picked by Lord Orochimaru, you must use your actions to change his opinion of you. I will be back in two days to receive new ninjas.”
Kabuto’s words seemed to announce his temporary withdrawal. Rock Lee tensed his body and struggled violently, tearing the spider web that bound him into pieces.
Looking around, the cave seemed dark and mysterious, a few oil lamps emitting a faint glow. Nearby were some imprisoned ninjas, their chests rising and falling, a sign of life. For Orochimaru, whether he was forging a mixed human-insect army or practicing Impure World Reincarnation, living ninjas were what he needed.
Kidomaru was devouring a wild deer with mouthfuls of blood, while Sakon and Ukon, half human, half insect, stood beside Kabuto, their giant pincers held high. Kabuto’s glasses reflected the light, masking his inner turmoil.
“I never thought that this monster incident was caused by Orochimaru, who used his companions for human experiments. Kabuto, I advise you to turn back now and confess your sins to Konoha Village. Otherwise, you will be on the same path of destruction as these monsters.”
“These traitors were subjected to Orochimaru’s physical transformation because they joined the Akatsuki organization. As for me, my loyalty to Orochimaru is supreme, so he will naturally not use his sword on me.
You, on the other hand, are so fearless. Today is your end. The three of you, destroy Rock Lee. Once Orochimaru is in a good mood, he may restore you to human form again.
As soon as Kabuto finished speaking, Zuo Jinyou Jin suddenly pounced on Rock Lee, brandishing his sharp giant pincers, which were enough to easily cut an ordinary person in two.
Rock Lee used the ground to push himself forward and headed straight for Kabuto. He knew that although these three monsters were difficult to deal with, his primary goal was to subdue Kabuto.
As Orochimaru’s right-hand man, Kabuto knows too many secrets. Once he is captured, Orochimaru will definitely suffer heavy damage.
“Locke Lee, you underestimated my intelligence. Do you really think I would come to you personally? In this Konoha territory, these three monsters are just a pawn of Orochimaru. Their mission has been accomplished.”
Kabuto laughed out loud, and facing Rock Lee who was rushing towards him, he suddenly tore open his coat, revealing the detonating tags all over his body.
“Fifty meters below here, there’s an elaborate trap, designed specifically for Konoha’s ninjas. Once it’s detonated, you’ll be dead. Being able to lure you here means this trap has certainly served its purpose, haha!”
Rock Lee’s heart was shocked and he ran towards the exit at a rapid speed. Kidomaru quickly shot layers of spider webs at him, trying to prevent him from escaping, but they were all torn apart by Rock Lee’s powerful hands.
“It’s useless. I’ve set up detonating talismans throughout this passage. It’s not in vain that you and these three monsters will die here together.”
As soon as he finished speaking, Dou ignited the explosive talisman on his body. In an instant, the cave was filled with deafening explosions, and the passages involved were also detonated in a chain reaction.
Countless rocks poured down from the top of the cave like a rainstorm. Kidomaru and the other three monsters tried to escape while roaring, but they soon disappeared in the sea of rocks.
“The sixth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu – Jingmen, open!”
Rock Lee roared, and the chakra in his body surged like a tide, and his energy surged.
He clenched his fists and swung them into the air.
The fist shadows were heavy and quickly passed through the air, stirring up a series of sparks and heading towards the falling boulders.
At this time, Rock Lee was much stronger than when he first opened the Jingmen. Both his strength and speed increased greatly, and the sparks expanded rapidly as soon as they left his fist.
The rocks above his head turned into powder in front of him, and the gravel flew everywhere.
Suddenly, dense cracks appeared on the top of the cave, which meant that the cave was about to collapse. Even with Rock Lee’s strength, if he was buried fifty meters underground, his survival would depend on whether God would give him face.
Rock Lee stopped hitting Peacock at the top of the cave, quickly walked to the wall of the cave, raised his fist, and smashed it against the wall of the cave.
Rock Lee mobilized all the strength in his body and smashed forward madly, with flames flying and chaos everywhere.
He had to carve out a place to live. The bigger the hole, the more air there was inside, and the greater his chances of survival.
There were more and more cracks above his head. Rock Lee increased his speed again. The hole became bigger and bigger, and soon a huge cave was formed.
Rock Lee looked back to look for the Konoha ninjas. One had been buried under rocks, and only the other was still alive. Rock Lee quickly picked up the living ninja and threw him into the cave, then he quickly rushed into the cave.
The Eight Gates of Dunjia was released
Boom!
With a loud bang, the entire underground cave collapsed. Rock Lee held his breath in the cave he dug. It took a long time for the cave outside to return to silence, and the flying dust gradually settled down.
Chapter 70 Chiba Shinichi (Old Version)
Rock Lee adjusted his breathing frequency. The passages around him had been blocked, but the cave dug towards Peacock was still spacious enough to support the temporary breathing needs of the two.
He placed the flashlight on the ground, and a beam of light shone out, revealing the scene inside the cave at a glance.
Rock Lee stopped beside the unconscious female ninja. She looked to be in her thirties. Her face was familiar, but he couldn’t remember her name for a moment. She should be a member of Konoha Village.
He assumed she was just an ordinary ninja, but secretly hoped she had the ability to escape into the earth, which would greatly increase her chances of survival. He gently nudged her, but she showed no reaction, likely due to the effects of the drug.
Rock Lee turned to the top of the cave and punched hard, sending bursts of loud noises echoing through the cave.
Every impact loosened the soil and rocks, causing dust to fly, and the entire cave was filled with dust.
Although the target was a depth of fifty meters, with his strength, it was not impossible to get through to the ground.
His palms were trained to be iron sand palms, which were as hard as steel. Every strike could sink his palms deep into the earth and rocks. Even hard rocks could be shattered by his iron palms.
The collapse of the cave, located in the forest on the border of Konoha, caused a commotion that quickly attracted the attention of Konoha ninjas, and several teams quickly gathered at the scene.
At the gathering place of Konoha Village, almost all of the Twelve Young Warriors have gathered, except for Naruto who was training with Jiraiya, and Rock Lee who was unfortunately trapped underground.
Shikamaru frowned in confusion and asked Neji, “Can you see clearly what’s going on down there? How could such a landslide occur?”
Neji stared at the collapsed area, feeling an ominous feeling in his heart. He then activated his Byakugan and tried to see through the situation underground.
Although the Byakugan can see through objects, its ability is ultimately limited. It is almost impossible for Neji to see Rock Lee through a layer of soil that is fifty meters thick.
“I can’t see anything. Maybe the depth of the landslide is beyond the reach of my Byakugan.” Neji shook his head helplessly.
Ya suggested, “Let’s continue to strengthen our defenses. We hope to get rid of the monster that’s disturbing the village as soon as possible so that we can return to the village soon. Life in the wild is really hard.”
Everyone nodded in agreement. The occasional field training was fun, but now taking turns to be on guard against monsters appearing every night was really tiring.
For the sake of their missing companions, they are eager to eliminate this uninvited guest and return to their peaceful life.
When the teams returned to their respective defense areas, Neji suddenly remembered: “Lee’s vacation should be over today. According to Tsunade’s style, she will most likely send Lee to join us.”
“Tenten, quickly use the Message Eagle to contact the village and ask if Rock Lee’s vacation is over. Have him quickly find Tsunade to receive the mission. As long as Rock Lee arrives, our team will be even more solid. Even if other teams are caught in a war, we can quickly rush to support them. Although my four wings are fast, they are still slightly inferior to Rock Lee’s.” Neji praised Rock Lee’s speed. Even the explosive power of the sixth gate of the Eight Gates of Ninjutsu was inferior to him.
“That’s right, today is the last day of Xiao Li’s vacation. We are working hard on the mission here, but he is leisurely practicing at home and enjoying barbecue. We must drag him out this time.” Tiantian complained playfully, and at the same time summoned a communication eagle to prepare to send the news back to Konoha Village, hoping that Xiao Li could come to support as soon as possible.
“Ningji, do you think Rock Lee can achieve a breakthrough? His current strength is already quite strong, but he is still pursuing deeper challenges to himself.” Tenten asked curiously.
Neji pondered for a moment before slowly answering, “Perhaps he has some immature ideas in his mind that he wants to try out in practice. After all, this world is ultimately determined by strength, and everything else is secondary.” These words touched Sasuke a lot. He believed that if he was strong enough, he might be able to avoid the tragedy of the Uchiha clan, and he would not have been repeatedly humiliated by Itachi. It was all because of his lack of strength at the beginning.
At dusk, the carrier eagle finally returned. Tiantian took the note it carried and read it carefully.
“According to Lady Tsunade, Lee had already set off at noon. If all goes well, he may have reached his destination.” Tenten announced happily.
Neji looked up at the horizon, seeing that night was gradually falling. “In that case, we can just wait patiently. With Rock Lee’s abilities, he shouldn’t run into any trouble. Even if he encounters a strong enemy, he should be able to protect himself.”
Sasuke nodded in agreement. He had witnessed Rock Lee’s skills when he opened the Sixth Gate. Even Uchiha Itachi would find it difficult to catch up unless the other party was also proficient in the Eight Gates.
In Konoha, there are only a few people who can master the Eight Gates, such as Kai, Kakashi, Rock Lee, etc. As for whether anyone else has mastered it, Sasuke is not sure.
In a cave fifty meters underground, Rock Lee was enjoying beef jerky. At this moment, an unconscious Konoha ninja slowly woke up. He touched his head, sat up, and rubbed his blurry eyes gently.
A voice suddenly echoed in the cave: “Are you awake? Do you need something to eat?”
The ninja was startled and immediately stepped aside, drew his kunai, and assumed a fighting stance, his eyes fixed on Rock Lee.
Slowly, the ninja’s body relaxed.
“I’m Shinichi Chiba. I remember you are Rock Lee, right? What exactly is this place?” Shinichi Chiba asked curiously.
Rock Lee pointed to a pair of rubble at the entrance of the cave, “That’s the monsters’ lair. I pretended to be captured so I could destroy their lair, but I didn’t expect them to blow up the entire underground cave.”
I dug this cave, and it’s relatively safe now. The situation was urgent, and I only had time to save you. We are now fifty meters underground.”
Chiba Shinichi was relatively calm. “Thank you for saving me. There were three Chunins on our garrison at the time, and two monsters suddenly rushed out and killed our captain. I don’t know why I fainted afterwards.”
“Shinichi, what kind of ninja are you? We must save ourselves now, otherwise it won’t be long before the air here becomes exhausted and we will both suffocate to death.”
“I’m water-attributed, look at what I can do.”
Shinichi had also heard of Rock Lee’s name, Might Guy’s favorite disciple and Konoha’s physical skills genius. Shinichi didn’t want to die here for no reason.
Fighting monsters and being killed is an honor. Your name will be engraved on the memorial tablet and admired by future generations. Being buried underground and suffocated to death is probably the most frustrating way to die in the ninja world, Chiba Shinichi thought.